Home

CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide (Version 3.2)

1. 5 5 6 67 vectorscope 100 eeeeeeeeeees 5 5 vectorscope 75 svetticects tencesities 5 5 WAV GTOUM oc cscssaiiatasceceeeccestevseet 5 7 YUV parade cicne 5 7 video track ccc 3 7 6 3 6 4 DUTON siveszesceccadessdeeaceze 3 10 6 34 change display ccce 6 8 EDI acronis 8 11 8 31 IDG E TT 6 6 01e E A T 6 33 MUTE aeniei anoeie 6 33 MANIC eee a E a 6 25 NUMDED 2 0 cece cece eee eeea eee eeeeeeeeeees 6 7 SIZ Ce T E A 6 7 size manual setting 08 6 7 view buttons bin 666 4 4 4 5 view of EDLs 8 29 8 43 8 44 view of timeline cccceeeeeeeeeeee 6 26 Timeline as EDL 8 25 8 31 virtual source timecode 2 17 6 11 8 58 exporting EDL ccadsasaniicicateet ons 9 10 VOIUIME scsvechccstecacactevetvestadeacadesivents 1 1 control line ossee 6 73 control point sssnnnnniineeeeeeee 6 73 VTR dracs isai 5 16 8 35 8 54 A 6 VTR timeline o oo A 6 VIR TL wo cccceceeeeeeeeeeees 8 18 8 37 8 51 W warning MESSage cxsaejeveuntatvcusiereiass 4 13 waveform video scope eesse 5 7 waveform display 5 19 6 75 WED service 2 ccc ecceccece eee eeeeeeeeaeees 9 26 Windows file manager o c 3 4 4 7 Shortcuts o o 3 2 A 7 WIDE ae e 3 14 7 7 Crossfade ccecce 7 7 VEVETS azisccscesateucsecearden satacetedeer 7 9 Shapes sivecicestesageniesosmiedeseexcandeen 7 8 SOFTNESS wo eececcceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 7 9 workflow proxy usage eee 2 12 Y Y
2. Disconnect Disconnects and severs the attachments of all at timeline tached timeline elements in the timeline in one step After that the attached clip s will be severed and disconnected In case the timeline does not contain other attachments the button for the in sert mode will be available and ready for a selection again 6 4 13 Time Stretching or Time Compression of Clips Video and audio clips added to the timeline can be time stretched or time compressed in real time with common interpolations frame field repetition or skipping of frames fields Time stretching or time com pression allows you to speed up or slow down the play out of a clip for instance for slow fast motion purposes or to match your project s pace For this the respective timeline element can be automatically resized in the timeline left in its original size set via the clip s in and outpoint or adjusted to the desired length manually in the timeline e When changing the timing of audio clips no pitch control is Li provided Thus it should be used for slight timing changes only S For frequency changes of the timeline e g when playing out or finalizing with a different video raster an automatic retiming of audio can be configured see figure in section How to Con figure the Video Output on page 6 12 and section Config uring Audio on page 6 83 You can configure the time stretching or time compression via the menu option
3. If the audio clip in the timeline is in mono it does not matter whether the audio track is set to stereo or mono The output on all selected channels will be the same i e the mono audio clip as it is available in the timeline Audio Clip Audio Track Output Mono Mono Mono of clip Mono Stereo Mono of clip If the audio clip is in mono the settings for the track s audio li mode and the channel s button provide of course no function regardless of their setting If the audio clip in the timeline is in stereo and the audio track is configured to mono the clip will be downmixed by the Edit Tool On all selected channels you will receive the same signal Output Audio Clip Audio Track Channel A Channel B Stereo Mono Mono of stereo Mono of stereo clip clip If the audio clip in the timeline is in stereo and the audio track is configured to stereo the output will depend on the state of the button i e whether the channels are configured as stereo or mono channels When the channels are set to mono a mono signal The Timeline of the downmixed stereo clip will be provided If the channels are set to stereo a standard stereo signal will be output Output Audio Clip Audio Track Button Channel A Channel B Stereo Stereo Mono Mono of Mono of button stereo clip stereo clip deactivated Stereo Ster
4. 6 90 SIAVE aretirati 5 16 5 33 source timecode 0 cceeeeee 2 17 SNAPPING 2esteecreedece 3 8 3 11 6 36 timecode frames finalizing 6 81 source edit 2 7 3 6 5 15 5 18 timeline oasis 6 9 trim 2 7 3 14 5 15 5 28 6 44 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide ONNE see here eee 8 59 Online NRT enen 8 33 8 52 Online RT cccceeeeee eee eee 8 33 8 54 online conforming s s 8 8 A 4 open DIP sastera 9 18 PrOjeCE ccateseeigenncesncetanbedies 9 4 9 5 open platform s ssissseeiieeeeeeeeeee 9 23 OpenFX plug in interface 2 5 7 10 Operator ccecce 4 25 7 1 A 4 embedded sccccccnence A 3 making settings ccc 7 12 prerendering n 2 14 6 42 temporary data prerender 2 13 6 43 transitions sccecteedesccesaitetaaseesads 6 41 optional features 4 25 6 18 7 1 Original cazasscanehess sists ieeceedeeaas eee 8 33 OUTDOING ccce 3 8 6 3 6 5 A 4 change exces Aue ect eee 5 30 6 44 delete 5 23 6 29 6 30 6 31 details n eener 5 29 handler 6 5 24 5 30 6 45 handler trimming cecce 6 47 information 5 29 6 57 6 71 marker asssssessssssreserrrererrrerrrr 5 30 setting for timeline 6 29 6 30 setting in source edit mode 3 8 5 22 setting in timeline 3 12 6 45 setting in trim mode 5 28 5 31 6 44 slave mode control neee 5 33 U MMINg ccc 5 30 outpoint entry field 5 23 6 29 output alpha channel asic 6
5. 8 16 8 37 file TY DE sisciisaricicincisavarssasaadaawannas 6 80 file frame numbering finalizing 6 77 6 87 files per folder finalizing 6 80 6 85 film raster deceh nc caccuseddvaceticdadeerbibiesy 6 14 film lo0k Sesesctesaeedecsasascentcehentedectess 6 18 filter diser eeso eraa roarai ii 7 18 finalizing 0 2 12 6 76 SDLT erriarena eii euiar 6 81 audio output orien sscsinideaeriecsserts 6 83 autoscale ccce 6 82 DUNIN srseiirorinssporoisrerosieiave 6 81 channels ccenn 6 87 clipwise rendering 6 79 color space range ecce 6 81 create bin clip tsineiissectesteccancs 6 78 display settings burn in 6 81 drop frame timecode 6 81 file format ccc 6 80 6 83 file types scce 6 80 file frame numbering 6 77 6 87 files per folder 6 80 6 85 gap rendering 2a vistencasteaeveerteces 6 78 hardware support ee 6 80 name options Acisseteceiietet teas 6 87 pulldown eee er ene ee eee er 6 82 resizing of material 6 82 resolution ccce 6 82 reSUlE pastec cxacacadehoterensteluesacasaay 6 85 source timecode iec 6 78 BU eases d aaiae neces 6 85 Start INK reisas 6 90 storage of audio files 6 87 storage of files 0 01 6 77 storage of video files 6 85 video Output nsnsi 6 79 PVs Index fine tuning mode n a 3 8 6 36 gauge sate ected 8 8 flip rressarsssssiss snesirstnrnin tinni 7 10 7 30 generic source timecode 2 16
6. CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Disk Online gt Vaisection3 1iproject_30 SpycerNet Disk Online VTR VTR TL None Figure 8 16 Example entry fields The above figure shows two examples of entry fields and their addition al items The entry field to the left provides a combo box where you can select settings from a drop down list In the entry field to the right you can either enter a value in this case a directory file or use the button to the right E to select one The button to the far right allows you to transfer the changed entry from this field to other table entries rows It provides a menu where you can select between different copy transfer methods Setto clip Set to all clips of the reel Setto all clips Figure 8 17 Transferring settings With this changes in the tables of the work area can be made easily When in or outpoint values are changed they will be will be displayed in orange to make them immediately discernible 8 5 4 The Tab EDLs On the tab EDLs you can see all EDLs that are currently available in the project It provides general information about them such as their name frame rate and timeline status 8 30 The Conforming Tool EDL Clips Frame rate ps EDL Reels Original EDL EDL name proj TL Status Video tracks Audio tracks On TL Vd A1 Not on TL n On TL v4 AA Noton TL s Not on TL Figure 8 18 The tab EDLs The other tabs of the work
7. Figure 9 10 Archiving a project In this window enter the target directory volume of the files to be cop ied in the field Destination You may also use the button to the right of this entry field to select an already existing directory volume or create a new one via the provided buttons of the opening dialog win dow If the entered path does not exist it will be created CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs The content frames to be copied is determined by the in and out points of the clips on the timeline With the Heads Tails entry field you can set the number of frames that should be copied in addition to these for later heads or tails adjustments When everything is set you can initiate the copying process with a click on the button OK Then the DVS high speed copying process will copy the files to the selected destination G To archive the whole project you have to save the project file as well This feature can only be used with still image file formats and not with container file formats Further information about the DVS high speed copying pro cess can be found in the Spycer user guide 9 2 14 Exit The menu option Exit ends the current Edit Tool session There is no way to end the Edit Tool alone When you exit the Edit Tool the whole DVS software will shut down Therefore it is recommended to finish all tasks such as a record or a play out operation beforehand Otherwise the respective
8. VVFILM4K sholhwoodsholly OV2408 11 40 51 display 10 02 holhwwood 00001 ViV FILM4K hollywood holh Figure 4 24 Drop table of performance monitor The entries provide information for example about the date and time when the drop occurred or if detected as well about the file that was the cause for this drop Drops are reported by the real time core of the DVS software In some cases it may not be able to provide information about the file name and or path You can retrieve further information about the location where the drop occurred by double clicking an entry in the drop table Then the time line cursor will jump to the approximate location where the drop hap pened and a timeline marker will be placed at this position in the timeline 4 42 PVs The Tool Area timeline marker Figure 4 25 Timeline marker in timeline Additional information about timeline markers can be found in i section Marking Positions in the Timeline on page 6 49 and section The Marker Table on page 4 34 Furthermore with the controls below the table you can for example save the results shown in the drop table to a file see section The Table Controls on page 4 43 4 6 5 The Table Controls With the table controls below the drop table you can for example save the results written in the drop table to a file or set markers in the time line of the Edit Tool where drops occurred Additional infor
9. ofthe bin e g the root folder Vice versa standard clips from the storage cannot be added to an EDL folder In addition to the above said you have the following possibilities at hand to import and add EDLs e Use either one of the following Call up the context menu on a folder in the folder area of the bin and select the type of EDL that you want to add from the menu options Add ALE Add Cutlist Add EDL or Add FCP XML Use one of the above mentioned menu options on the menu Project of the menu bar see section The Project Menu on page 9 3 An EDL can also be added to the bin with the button fi LOAD of the conforming mode see section Conforming Mode The Conforming Controls on page 8 41 These possibilities open the standard dialog window of the operating system for the selection of a file The Conforming Tool e In this dialog window select the EDL file from the list box or enter its name in the entry field File name File extensions ale Avid Log Exchange file Ctl Cut list file edl EDL file xml Final Cut Pro XML file e Confirm your selection with the button OPEN After confirmation a configuration window similar to the following will be displayed on the screen Setup General settings Name project_30 Current frame rate 30 Hz TC drop frame Auto Further options Convert to frame rate 30 Hz TC drop frame Auto Keep the cl
10. 3 6 4 21 6 73 8 63 properties of multi clip 4 12 4 21 6 51 6 57 6 72 thumbnail osses 4 11 VOIUME 0 ccc eccececceeceeeeeeeeeeeaees 6 73 volume control line 0 6 73 volume control point 6 73 waveform display 5 19 6 75 audio Options sacccesctseencscsssacstercen 6 17 Audio Scrubbing ccecce 6 18 audio track 3 8 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 70 DUTTON 0 cece ceceeee eee eee eee 3 10 6 34 PDI a 8 12 8 31 Nide sraon a 6 6 oTe EPEE E EEEE 6 33 MUTE eessidestasetuseieiieadeteeatedeades 6 33 NAME aaide iinei 6 25 H MDEr erinin 6 7 Properties sidicsticeteieseieion 6 14 POUNG acceca 6 14 SIZE E E E E 6 7 size manual setting c e 6 7 autoconforming 6 65 8 14 8 24 8 50 A 1 result oesccadiuaetecetedateeete hodecdse 8 20 AULOSAVE ccecce 2 4 9 4 9 24 autoscaling a an 3 10 6 13 6 83 Avid Log Exchange 8 6 8 7 9 6 clipwise rendering 6 79 EXPONE icies ranan a 9 7 naming convention e 8 6 l 2 B background ODS cscccccccce 4 33 ack p sadsceenestataietsnteeeebosaopacteense 9 4 backup file cisariaduauinenmuanenmasianrsnaniayse 9 6 base video directory 4 14 9 20 BiN erinnern n 3 3 4 3 A 2 add ALE niiin 8 6 9 6 add clip ccce 3 4 4 6 9 6 add cut list aiiai 8 6 9 6 add EDL nossas 8 6 8 41 9 6 add FCP XML nasaian 8 6 9 6 change layout secere 4 4 check for inconsistencies 9 4 9 18 9 19 cleat seteaeicicdadestehdincdeeele
11. Figure 6 31 Timeline length indicator Setting an In Outpoint To set an in outpoint perform the following e Move the timeline cursor via its controls or manually see section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 26 to the position where the in outpoint should be set e Press the in or outpoint button ij EI An in outpoint can only be defined once If you set it anew i the previous one will be replaced To set an in or outpoint you may also use the entry fields to the right of the buttons The in outpoint will be set at this position The still selected part of the timeline will be displayed as usual whereas the deselected part is shown in a dimmed fashion in the video and audio tracks Furthermore in the timeline scale the selected part of the timeline will be marked with a blue line PVs The Timeline UE a ooa aa aa raaa 12 00 01 26 Sa ee oL Woon HOLLYWOO p OLivwon Figure 6 32 Timeline with set in and outpoint With a set in and outpoint a play out of the timeline will then be per formed between in and outpoint only if set accordingly via the Con figuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Deleting an In Outpoint To delete an in outpoint perform the following e Press the button DELETE to activate the deletion mode for the in and outpoint e Click the in outpoint button E EI or the duration button EE to delete both simultaneously Th
12. Figure 6 45 Two selected outpoint handlers The following two trimming techniques are called slip and slide trim ming These are two sophisticated trimming techniques which can be used for a frame accurate moving of in and outpoints of clips while maintaining the length and duration of the timeline Slide trimming When you select one out and one inpoint handler thereby enclosing another clip you can change the out and inpoint of the two clips while the enclosed clip is fully maintained in its length as well as in its contents This way you can alter the position of the enclosed clip while the timeline length remains constant Figure 6 46 Enclosing a clip by selecting in outpoint handlers of neighboring clips Slip trimming When you select the in and outpoint handlers of a single clip you can change its in and outpoint simultaneously This will change the contents of the clip only The length of the clip its position and the length of the timeline is preserved PVs The Timeline Figure 6 47 Changing the contents of a clip 6 4 11 Marking Positions in the Timeline To mark certain positions in the timeline e g to remind you to cut the clip at this position or other reasons you can place timeline markers in the timeline of the Edit Tool timeline marker Figure 6 48 Timeline marker in timeline Once one or more markers are placed in the timeline you can easily jump to them with the
13. Information about how to add a clip to the timeline can be i found in section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 S You can call up the properties of a timeline element with a dou ble click of the mouse on the respective element in the time line or by selecting the menu option Show properties on the element s context menu Further information about this can be found in section Accessing the Timeline Element Properties on page 7 2 Once at least one video clip is available in the timeline it can receive an effect from the effects pane of the tool area This is in detail described in section Adding Effects on page 7 11 4 3 2 Creating Preset Effects 4 26 To apply the same effect settings of one clip to another the adjusted ef fect s settings in the timeline element properties can be created as an independent effect easily For this perform the following in advance e If not already available in the timeline element properties apply the respective effect to a clip in the timeline as described in section Adding Effects on page 7 11 e Adjust the settings of this effect according to your needs in the set tings pane of the timeline element properties All changes to the effects operator are immediately applied to the se lected clip in the timeline Further information about the settings items and possibilities of each effects operator can be found in chapter Timeline Element Properties on page 7
14. Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Further information about the items to perform a color correction can be found in section The Color Correction and Balance Area on page 7 48 7 11 2 The Color Vector List From the color vector list to the left of the settings pane you have to choose a vector for the color correction Once the procedure to perform a secondary color correction is completed it will hold your data of the selected color or color range as well as the changes applied to color cor rect it The DVS software provides overall seven predefined color vectors One that has all colors selected and six others that provide each a different color 7 41 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Color Vector ColorO1 Color 02 Color 03 Color 04 Color 05 Color 06 Color O7 Figure 7 37 Color vector list of the secondary color correction Simply select one of the predefined color vectors from the list Its set tings are immediately displayed in the settings pane to the right of the list Then they can be altered according to your liking and the changes are directly applied to the clip in the timeline Each vector available in the list may hold a different color as well as a unique color correction i e you can define up to seven different color corrections with a single secondary color correction operator applied to a clip With the check boxes in front of the color vectors in the list you can en
15. Some sample displays are already preset in the software Via the menu option Head up display Burn in they can be activated or deactivated for the video overlay and or outputs of the DVS system Figure 5 12 Video overlay with head up display 5 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs If not locked the individual displays can be selected directly in the video overlay with a click of the mouse Then they can be positioned or re sized to your liking REC 00 00 00 00 SRC 01 05 43 21 lt _P Figure 5 13 Positioning and resizing the burn in information Via the context menu of a marked display you can configure the dis plays select all displays in a single step or delete the selected one s The menu option Display settings on the context menu of the vid eo overlay or a marked display allows you to add delete and configure the displays Display settings Displays Appearance Source clip information HD Oo Dynamic Static text x REC SR e H e gt Color mode gt x Add element labels Add elements Save settings Load settings Figure 5 14 Configuring the displays Currently configured displays can be found to the left A new display can be added with the button while a button deletes a display Via the check boxes the displays can be activated or deactivated for the vid eo overlay outputs By double clicking the name of a display or by se lecting the menu option
16. There will be one report written per session However it will inform you about drops that occurred during this session only when the performance monitor is enabled Then the report contains information about for example the date and time when the drop occurred or about the file that was the 4 37 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs cause for this drop If the performance monitor is disabled the log file will be written but provide no information about drops that occurred iJ Drops are reported by the real time core of the DVS software In some cases it may not be able to provide information about the file name and or path Only the last ten reports will be stored Individual frames missing in an image sequence clip i e im age files that are not present on the storage at all are not reg istered as drops You can check the consistency of your material added to the bin with the menu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 9 19 and sec tion Consistencies of Clips on page 6 59 You can retrieve the location of files where drops occurred also by setting timeline markers with the help of the drop table or its controls see section The Drop Table on page 4 42 and section The Table Controls on page 4 43 This section explains the basic usage and the items of the performance monitor 4 6 1 The Chart The chart of the performance monitor provides a graphical representa
17. To run the defragmentation process manually perform the following Before starting the defragmentation process manually make IN sure that the DVS software is no longer running on your sys tem A manually started process forces a defragmentation at all times meaning regardless of the state of the DVS system e g real time operation a defragmentation will be per formed This may result in a limited real time performance e Open a command line for example via All Programs DVS Maintenance cmd e Type in the command avusdefrag lt drive gt i The default value for lt drive gt is V e After this press Enter This will start the defragmentation of the storage During the defragmentation process the command line window will display the various checkings and phases of the defragmentation Once finished with all phases it will start again after a certain interval Whether a defragmentation has to be performed is indicated by a spe cial assessment that evaluates the fragmentation degree of the clips on the storage Once a defragmentation is indicated it will start by defrag menting the worst fragmented files first and align them on the storage so that they are optimized for real time tasks such as a play out or a record In its next cycle it will take other not so worse fragmented files and so on until all data is defragmented sufficiently Afterwards in each cycle only the checking is performed until a fragment
18. help messages Config Figure 2 4 Status and help messages of the DVS software As well this part of the task bar will provide you with help information about the various menu options available via the menu bar of the DVS software The help information will be displayed when you place the mouse cursor over one of the menu options 2 4 Working in Real Time With the DVS system you can perform most operations in real time When playing out or recording the workstation is capable of handling two data streams of 2K material for transitions in real time Using CLIPSTER you can even play out one stream of 4K material in real time as long as the resolution of the clip should not exceed 4096 x 3112 pixels 10 bit With this a real time play out of 4K mate rial is possible without transitions The usage of a 3D LUT cropping zoomings and pannings and primary color corrections can be per formed in real time as well However other effects e g secondary color correction or clips of an even higher resolution cannot be processed in real time In such a case the DVS system offers you two different approaches to maintain a real time workflow as long as possible You can work with proxies or you can prerender the material and or operators prior to a play out 7n When working with proxies or prerendered files additional i data image files will be created on your main storage It is rec ommended to store these project s
19. view or in the EDL directly Further information about this can be found in section The Conforming Mode in General on page 8 26 and the sections fol lowing it Successful Conforming In case there are no messages displayed after a conforming process the conforming was successful Then you can immediately work with the clips of the EDL in the timeline in any manner you like Once finished with your work you can for instance combine different EDLs export the changes of a single EDL or the complete timeline as an EDL or finalize the project i e all possibilities of the Edit Tool are at your disposal Multiple Search Results Multiple search results after a conforming process are not uncommon especially when conforming audio clips due to their lack of adequate header data When several clips have been found that match an element in the EDL you will be informed about them after the conforming The Conforming Tool Multiple search results Ik i There are multiple search results for following elips Shot list project _30 CSi_ 0 4 CSi_ 0 1 _001 Figure 8 8 Notification about multiple found clips If several clips were found for a video clip entry in the EDL its represen tation in the Edit Tool will be substituted by the software with a special image Figure 8 9 Substitute image for multiple found clips This will be displayed instead of the original clip s images for example in the bin as
20. Details the source search type that was selected during an autoconforming see section Con forming on page 8 14 It is the same setting as the Source type setting of the autocon forming dialog By changing this entry you can change the conforming linking method manu ally for the respective event It will be applied when the button LINK DATA is used see sec tion Link data on page 8 50 In addition to the settings already described in section Configuring the Autoconforming on page 8 16 you can select here the following VTR Records the event via RS 422 from an externally connected player see section Capture data on page 8 54 None This event is ignored during a conforming When an autoconforming is performed iJ for this event a manually adjusted set ting will be overwritten with the one of the autoconforming 8 35 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 36 Column Description Search criteria Details the search criteria that was selected dur ing an autoconforming see section Conform ing on page 8 14 Itis the same setting as the respective Video or Audio source TC setting of the autoconforming dialog By changing this entry you can change what should be searched for Depending on the selected Source type this field either cannot be edited at all or pro vides different settings possibilities In addition to the settings alrea
21. EDL PVs Index a 8 2 8 6 9 6 9 7 A 2 load secin A see also cut list load updated EDL assccececsctenas 8 47 accept changes eessen 8 50 NAME ciscsirieceirsrennenana 8 7 8 31 add to bin 8 6 8 41 9 6 naming convention s 8 6 add to timeline 8 10 8 56 NOME oci25ididcchlaetierisdediccinvedes 8 35 A MOE 0 ceccecceceeeceeeeeeeeeaeees 8 13 Offline clip 8 24 8 32 8 33 8 48 audio track ccc 8 12 8 31 offline edited clip 5 21 8 64 8 66 autoconforming 8 14 8 24 8 50 0 Sc sirciisiii resini 8 37 8 39 batch capture acct ceticectenseseenctiy 8 54 play acces bat ees ceca eee ct an 8 63 black Clips 250 see xcadteesitinatinctees 8 58 position in timeline 0 8 12 building up a timeline 8 10 8 56 position of event eee 8 35 capture data nn 8 24 8 54 PANE co wesazigaresenrienaticrerttedentes 8 42 changing events ccecce 8 29 reECONFOrM nassssssssiiiiirrerereeeseeee 8 47 check for inconsistencies 8 59 reel name 8 8 8 34 8 38 9 11 clip NaMe spaniectithesecuenadencans 8 8 8 33 VECIS aoran i eeeeace 8 31 clip properties nccc 8 63 remove from Edit Tool 8 41 CPS eee arene ener creer rere 8 31 remove from timeline 8 48 COSE eaae 8 41 resolve multiple found 8 24 8 67 TOG caaticctntacnnnesst dectdantaryicce 8 13 reverse play a sicrnsdecactetemercernass 8 63 combine EDLs n se 8 45 Sample count n e 8 17 comments naaie 8 8 8
22. Timeline Element Properties Set Marker Position Reset Zoom X Timecode Display _ Frames Display x Enable Tooltips Figure 7 18 Context menu of the graph On the graph s context menu select the menu option Reset Zoom to reset the view of the timeline Furthermore the context menu provides the possibility to switch the notation of the graph s scale For this select from the context menu ei ther the Timecode Display or Frames Display menu option This will change the notation of the graph as well as of all position and length indicators in the software module 7 8 3 Moving within the Graph The graph provides a cursor same as the timeline cursor of the Edit Tool They are connected to each other meaning when one of them is moved the other one will move accordingly This way you can move in the graph directly and see the effect of a keyframing in the overlay im mediately timeline cursor Figure 7 19 The timeline cursor in the graph To position keyframes or review their effect you may want to move the timeline cursor in the graph There are several ways to do this You can click anywhere with the mouse in the graph and the time line cursor will be positioned there immediately The timeline cursor of the graph can be scrubbed the same way as you can scrub a scrub bar timeline of the DVS software 7 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 26 You can use the controls
23. When running the defragmentation process reorganizes the files present on the storage during stand still times of the DVS system This Appendix means a defragmentation will not be performed under the following conditions When the system performs real time tasks such as a play out or record when the software is running in slave mode or when the software is running with the VTR task mode of the I O Tool activated If one of the above said is the case no defragmentation will take place After starting the DVS software the defragmentation process is running in the background of the system It operates in loops at certain inter vals Each time it is started it will go through various checkings and phases of defragmentation Whether a defragmentation has to be per formed is indicated by a special assessment that evaluates the fragmen tation degree of the clips on the storage Once a defragmentation is indicated it will start by defragmenting the worst fragmented files and align them on the storage so that they are optimized for real time tasks such as a play out or a record In its next cycle it will take other not so worse fragmented files and so on until all data is defragmented suffi ciently Afterwards in each cycle only the checking is performed until a fragmentation is detected once more 7n When operating at regular intervals with sufficient stand still i times and a moderate acquisition of data the
24. Workstation Software CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Introduction Basics Getting Started The Tool Area The Control Area The Timeline Timeline Element Properties The Conforming Tool The Menus Appendix Index User Guide Version 3 2 for the CLIPSTER Edit Tool Version 3 2 Copyright 2008 2010 by DVS Digital Video Systems AG Hanover All rights reserved The manuals as well as the soft and or hardware described here and all their constituent parts are protected by copyright Without the express permission of DVS Digital Video Systems AG any form of use which goes beyond the narrow bounds prescribed by copyright legislation is prohibited and liable to prosecution This particularly applies to duplication copying translation processing evaluation publishing and storing and or processing in an electronic system Specifications and data may change without notice We offer no guarantee that this documentation is correct and or complete In no event shall DVS Digital Video Systems AG be liable for any dam ages whatsoever including without limitation any special indirect or consequential damages and damages resulting from loss of use data or profits or business interruption arising out of the use of or inability to use the hardware software and or manual materials Those parts of this documentation that describe optional software or hardware features usually contain
25. able Once your project is finished you can finalize it and save the ed ited clips in any video and file format you like Further important features of the Edit Tool are Projects can be finalized to a clip render function 1 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 1 2 automatic and adaptable scaling of video material in the timeline effects operators for example for color corrections 1D and 3D LUT support hardware accelerated JPEG2000 compression and real time play out of JPEG2000 encoded material multi device operation mode that enables a synchronous play out record of multiple DVS systems projects can be built up via import or loading of a data list e g ALE EDL or cut list advanced conforming tool conforming mode in the control area easy to use digital cinema delivery tool archive function for projects an automatic defragmentation of the main storage for an optimized real time performance PVs Introduction 1 1 Overview This user guide informs you about the general handling of the Edit Tool as well as of its complete controllable interface The chapters in this user guide contain the following information Chapter 1 Begins with a short introduction to CLIPSTER and the Edit Tool followed by a note regarding the audience this manual is written for and an explanation of the conventions used in this manual Additionally it provides important notes that you should read
26. ample the period for the automatic save function of the project file autosave as well as more software specific settings such as the bin properties Tools and Services Also part of the DVS software are various tools that can be used for a more basic configuration of the DVS system or may be of help during service and maintenance tasks e g monitoring and error diagnostics of the hard and software Forinstance among them you can find the defragmentation tool which is a process automatically started with the DVS software and running in the background of the system During stand still times of the system the defragmentation tool will reorganize the files present on the storage for an optimized performance of real time tasks such as a play out or record Among the tools it is the only process that runs in the system s background Most other tools delivered with the DVS software are used during the initial configuration and setup of the system only In your daily work with the DVS system they are of no use the CLIPSTER Tools and Services user guide accessible via the PDF files of the software s online help For additional infor mation about the defragmentation process in particular please refer to section The Automatic Defragmentation Process on page A 22 iJ Further information about the tools in general can be found in Basics Plug Ins Operators The Edit Tool of the DVS software supports the OpenF
27. eeeeereeee 2 18 3 Getting Started ica rereceetdes cet cteteineeecerteie ceaentererettaeeceles 3 1 3 1 Starting the Program sep csccceeicciceeecxeinccapecretticeseaoecewcateiatckeen cane 3 2 3 2 First SUEDS in th Edit TOOlirisirsiriiiinircsiniisernirksita 3 3 3 21 Preparing the Bin sissies irecevic avia 3 3 3 2 2 Adding Clips to the Timeline evccesccocssseordertereeciiaseened 3 6 3 2 3 Changing the View of the Timeline 3 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 3 2 4 Moving Clips in the Timeline iccctenseszescstcscerntnecotioteces cess 3 10 3 2 5 Manipulating In and Outpoints in the Timeline 3 11 3 2 6 Adding a Transition to the Timeline eee 3 13 3 2 7 Applying Effects to Clips in the Timeline 0 3 15 3 3 Exiting the Program seca teatcceeesteccreencn sta eecseteaat ection 3 18 Th Tool AVG isaac ccs aa a eia 4 1 4 1 Changing the Size of the Tool Area 4 2 aml 625 a eer ener eetereer arrere rer tire orien ern er ter ornare Peter r rrr serener nner 4 3 4 2 1 Configuring the Bin n ereere 4 4 4 2 2 Adding Clips to the Bin seesssssssssnnnnnrrrrrresreeessrrrernn 4 6 4 2 3 Details about Clips soiorirvoimars saeni onsas 4 10 4 2 4 Working with Folders in the Bin nescrise 4 14 4 2 5 Working with Clips in the Bin ssiciescsecuccsissordsancnereedieuens 4 16 4 2 6 Using Proxies secs ccc coe secnteds coda vde As ces enesa eased vaaceeneeees 4 22 43 ENEC ioe ahead a e toured ten eed
28. on page 2 18 File number The clips show positions according to the numbers of their respective image files e g the image Hollywood00231 dpx as the starting point of a clip will be shown with 231 This setting also activates the frame notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 2 6 Configuring the Video and Audio Output 6 12 To output video and audio and to view your project s timeline with a monitor connected to the DVS system you have to configure the out put format of the timeline accordingly Both the video and audio out put can be configured freely How to Configure the Video Output With the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the EEES timeline area you can determine the output format video raster of the project Additionally you can find here various oth er settings concerned with the timeline or its output In the Edit Tool you can set different video format settings either for the SDI or the DVI and analog outputs Once set the respective format s will be automatically applied to the output ports of the DVS system By default the DVI analog output settings are linked to the video output format of the SDI and if not configured otherwise will be set to the same raster and it may have an effect on the images displayed there e g they may get cropped You can use the video overlay
29. scribed in the following Right after one of them is performed you have to configure and afterwards start the autoconforming which will also be explained in this section The Conforming Tool Conforming an EDL Manually As soon as an EDL is available in the Edit Tool the conforming process can be started at any time with the conforming mode of the control ar ea This way to start an autoconforming can always be used i meaning it can be used for conformed unconformed EDLs or EDLs already built up in the timeline The following can also be performed via the menu option Au toconform on the context menu of an EDL in the timeline see section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 e To start the conforming process activate the conforming m mode with its respective button of the control area s controls see section Controls on page 5 15 e If not already selected select the EDL either in the bin or on the tab EDLs of the work area of the conforming mode see section Con forming Mode The Work Area on page 8 28 e Then press from the controls of the conforming mode the button AUTOCONFORM see section Autoconform on page 8 50 After this the window to configure the autoconforming will be dis played on the screen Then you can continue the conforming as de scribed in section Configuring the Autoconforming on page 8 16 Conforming an EDL Automatically after its Build
30. you can assign a static look up table LUT to the currently selected clip to perform a color and or gamma correction With this operator only one dimensional look up tables i 1D LUT can be applied 3D LUTs can be loaded and applied to the timeline via the video format settings optional feature see section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 Static LUT Figure 7 28 The area for to set a static LUT In the area Static LUT you can find at its top a list box that will contain the LUT files in the order they were selected If the list box contains 7 31 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs more than one LUT the effects of the LUT files are combined to color correct the images of the clip Below the list box three buttons are available With the button you can load a LUT For this select in the opening dialog window the direc tory path and file name of the look up table After this confirm your se lection with the button OPEN This will load the selected LUT file and its name and path will be entered in the list box above File extension lut Look up table ob The selected file will then be valid for the currently selected clip and a color and or gamma correction will be performed accordingly By re peating this action you can select and load more than one LUT file and their effects will be combined x With the button you can delete an already applied LUT from the list box Simply se
31. 8 63 D data list 0 2 3 8 1 8 2 A 2 DCI Mastering scence heidi 1 6 deactivating proxies 4 23 9 22 default configuration ee 9 24 Loyce E 9 25 SAVE aieri ane OEA 9 25 default video raster eeee 6 14 defragmentation tool 1 7 2 4 A 22 deinterlace ccceeeeeee eee 7 10 7 58 delete clip from bin setencsicrsiecssasaeaeashe 4 21 clip from timeline 3 10 6 57 6 71 EDI ee eee er eee 8 41 effect from clip properties 3 16 7 14 7 15 elements range in timeline 6 39 folder bin n se 4 16 from in to out sassen 6 39 inconsistent CPS 2cs28 snaavesiacees 9 20 inpoint of bin clip eseese 5 23 inpoint of timeline 6 29 6 30 6 31 outpoint of bin clip s es 5 23 outpoint of timeline 6 29 6 30 6 31 preset effect jiisjsiwthnirnseareracis 4 30 temporary data prerender 4 33 6 44 6 58 A 24 temporary data proxy 4 24 9 21 A 24 timeline marker ossessi 6 51 transition oeeie 3 14 6 42 volume control point 6 71 destructive export 5 25 5 26 6 62 digital cinema cecce 1 6 disabling SDLT seeren tesa AE 6 21 audio scrubbing cecce 6 18 l 6 COlOr VECtOTS 2c ieee 7 42 CrOpp Ng accede caret eee tosccoece 6 24 effects soisissa 7 13 gap rendering ccecce 6 78 TOOMNOS siscccoccssalacesteticcxscaiea 6 10 disconnect attached clips 6 52 element eacacesgeaceteeedeeecieecscuenie 6 53 SOUD cecesstccesdasaseide
32. Chapter 2 Contains basic information about the Edit Tool Here you can find information about the soft ware structure as well as a first overview of the user interface of the Edit Tool Furthermore this chapter provides some general notes for example about how to manage projects with the DVS software Chapter 3 In addition to the information how to start and exit the program you can find a beginner s tu torial which explains shortly how to work with the Edit Tool and how to start your first project in this chapter Chapter 4 Explains the tool area of the Edit Tool Chapter 5 This chapter describes the control area and the video overlay of the Edit Tool Chapter 6 In this chapter the timeline of the Edit Tool and timeline related tasks are described Chapter 7 This chapter explains and describes the timeline element properties of video clips and transi tions Individual effects that a video clip may provide are explained as well Chapter 8 Describes the conforming tool with all its fea tures and details how to conform data lists EDLs cut lists etc with the Edit Tool Chapter 9 Provides information about the individual menu options of the menu bar of the Edit Tool 1 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Appendix Gives additional information about the soft ware Among others you can find here a glos sary of terms used in this user guide and the file formats that are supp
33. Inc 300 East Magnolia Boulevard Suite 102 Burbank CA 91502 USA Phone 1 818 846 3600 Fax 1 818 846 3648 E mail info dvsus com Internet http www dvsus com Support E mail support dvsus com l I Contents I l 1 Introduction ooo ceccecceccsecessssesseesesssesseesesneestseeseeseteeteseeeeeee 1 1 TI PQ 5 ta ee a E E 1 3 2 larget COU sosiaa epi aapa aa 1 4 1 3 Conventions Used in this User Guide cceeeeeeeeeeee 1 5 1 4 Important NOteSiiiisiiiiriritciocsno aariin aaen 1 7 1 5 New in the Edit Tool s tcccevecanstunatcendiviascesresmeievenseeyeeerieoianes 1 8 2 BASICS AAEN EESE AEEA A EEEN 4 2 1 Overview of the Software Structure ceceesceetteeeeeeees 2 2 2 2 Overview of the User Interface ixccic seccsesiseccesedesayeeiiectenadascies 2 6 2 3 The co a gt arene Meera Renn nia aa ene rer eRe ener 2 9 2 4 Working in Real Time siiacsccesecsesctcencseceescceeseesnescivessecnecteeests 2 11 2 4 1 Working with Proxies esscsescicesrieere 2 11 2 4 2 Working with Prerendered Data cccesseeeeeee eee 2 12 2 5 Notes on Project Management wisssisiseceseiaaconssosservarzascannsnores 2 14 2 6 Working with Raw Content errereen 2 15 2 7 Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode seereeereeee 2 16 2 7 1 About Source Timecode 20 5 ccccesenccecectnacencseeecdeeecceuisceces 2 16 2 7 2 About Keycode 2 0 02ce Racist ie 2 17 2 8 About Timecode Frame Number Fields
34. Name Hollywood Resolution1920 x 1080 pixel Start 20 00 End 39 29 Length 20 00 Figure 6 10 Tooltip of video clip Then you can see for example the file name of the clip or its in and outpoint on the timeline The information displayed via the tooltips can be adjusted freely to your individual needs with the Configuration Tool of the DVS software see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information Additionally you can turn on or off the tooltips of the clips in the time line For this call up the context menu on either a video or audio clip and select the menu option Enable tooltip see also section The Con text Menu of Video Clips on page 6 57 or section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 71 for further information The tooltips can also be enabled or disabled via the Configura i tion Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information 6 2 5 Changing the Display Type 6 10 To the right of the thumbnails combo box you can find the display type combo box where you can set the way position information are dis played by clips in the Edit Tool The position information of clips are shown for example in their text information after they were added to the timeline top left and top right see section The Clip s Information on page 6 56 or in the en try fields of a bin clip in the source edit mode of the control area see section The Source Edit Mode
35. PVs Getting Started Figure 3 7 Clip A and clip B in timeline Now we want to change the sequence of the remaining two clips e Select clip B second clip in the timeline with the mouse and drag it along the timeline to the beginning of the timeline Figure 3 8 Changing the position of the clip When the dragged clip reaches certain elements on the timeline it will automatically align itself to these elements snapping mode see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 3 6 e Once the dragged clip reaches the beginning of the timeline release and drop it With the Edit Tool in the insert mode the rest of the video material will move backwards in the timeline as soon as the clip is dropped After changing the sequence of the clips this tutorial goes on with a de scription how to change in and outpoints of clips in the timeline 3 2 5 Manipulating In and Outpoints in the Timeline Clip A now the second clip in the timeline was cut during the adding of clip B to the timeline Thus it already provides a trimmed outpoint However clip B now the first clip in the timeline was added with its full length If a transition should be set between these two clips at least 3 11 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs one of their in and outpoint has to be trimmed either the outpoint of clip B or the inpoint of clip A To demonstrate how to add a transition between the two clips we now want to change the ou
36. Therefore it is recommended to finish all tasks such as a record or a play out operation beforehand Otherwise the respective task may get interrupted This closes the DVS software After that you can for example shut down the system 9 2 PVs The Menus 9 2 The Project Menu The menu Project contains the following menu options Project New Ctri N Open Ctri 0O Recent files Insert Proje Add Cutlist Add EDL Add FCP XML Cti S Ctrl ShittS Update CineReel Export as Ctri E Finalize Ctri F Prerender all Extract files Exit Figure 9 3 The Project menu They are in detail described in the following sections 9 2 1 New The menu option New on the Project menu opens a new project file in the Edit Tool Once the new project file is loaded you can begin your new project for instance by adding clips to the bin In the Edit Tool only one project file can be processed at a time i If you open an already saved project or activate the menu op tion New again the currently active project file will be closed However if you have already performed changes to the project you will be asked by the program if you want to save the current project 9 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs When you start a new project file the autosave function is A disabled because of a missing file name for the project The b autosave function automatically saves yo
37. Time stretching mode Video and audio clips added to the timeline can be time stretched or time compressed to speed up or slow down the play out of a clip for example for slow or fast motion purposes Further information about these menu options can be found in section Time Stretching or Time Compression of Clips on page 6 53 Prerender If a timeline element needs to be prerendered you can start the prerendering process with this menu option Further information about this can be found in section Prerendering of Timeline Ele ments on page 6 42 Delete When a timeline element is already prerendered prerendering you can delete its prerendered files with this menu option see also section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Add scene These menu options allow you to add and edit marker scene markers after an automatic scene detection Delete Seana Further information about them can be found in marker section Scene Detection on page 6 65 Split at scene markers Conforming This menu option will be available for clips of an EDL after the EDL has been created in the time line It is explained in section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 Export to When a clip is present in a video track of the time Application line area you can process its source material with a third party application of your choice either by using the original data directly destructi
38. able or disable color vectors If the check box in front of a vector entry is activated it is enabled and will be used on the clip if deactivated it is disabled Thus you can easily create different versions of a color cor rection and evaluate their outcome by comparing them with the origi nal image or other color vectors corrections This can also be used to build up a library of color corrections that you can easily choose from Simply set these color corrections as a preset effect in the effects pane as described in section Creating Preset Effects on page 4 26 7 11 3 The Color Mask Area 7 42 Once a color vector has been selected its settings are displayed in the settings pane to the right For this make sure that the tab Color Mask is activated With the tab Picture Mask you can determine picture masks i for the secondary color correction Further information about this can be found in section Picture Masks on page 7 51 For each color vector a different color mask is available With the color mask you have to set the alpha mask channel for your clip i e you have to determine the color vector that should undergo a color correc tion Timeline Element Properties Picture Nhask Hue Sat Lum Min 104 80 11 26 7 96 Pipette Lock Invert Reset Sof 50 00 a Figure 7 38 Color mask controls In detail the color mask area provides the following control elements and possibilities Color W
39. bin clip In detail you can find the following elements The entry fields are connected to the selected display type of i the Edit Tool s timeline For example if source timecode is se lected as the display type and such a timecode is provided by the clip the bin clip s entry fields will provide the source time code instead of a relative timeline timecode see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 10 Audio clips provide the same trim possibilities as video clips However with the timecode notation for the entry fields acti vated the audio values will be shown as seconds with a deci mal number i e with milliseconds when the frame notation is activated the values will be displayed in milliseconds only and when the file number viewing is activated the values indicate individual samples The Control Area Items Description The DELETE button is a toggle button If it is ac tivated IMME you can delete the in or out point by clicking the in or outpoint button Regardless of the position of the scrub bar cursor the in outpoint will be deleted If the DELETE button is deactivated a click on the in or outpoint button will set the in or out point respectively at the current position of the scrub bar cursor k 04 00 4a 16 00 For a frame accurate positioning you may use the in and outpoint entry fields Simply type in in the entry field to the right of the in or out point bu
40. for example as semble a master project from smaller projects which contain individual scenes In general the menu option Insert Project works like the menu op tion Open section Open on page 9 4 but instead of opening a project it will be inserted into the currently active project at the posi tion of the timeline cursor The clips in the bin of the inserted project will be added to the bin of the current project in a further subfolder car rying the name inserted project 7n You can adjust the inserting of projects to your liking with the i Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more details There you can for instance adjust the name of the bin subfolder where the bin clips will be added 9 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 9 2 5 Add clips The menu option Add clips performs the same operation as the Add Clip menu option on the context menu of the bin s contents area See section Adding Clips to the Bin Using the Add Clip Menu Options on page 4 9 for further information about this 9 2 6 Add ALE Add Cutlist Add EDL Add FCP XML With the menu options Add ALE Add Cutlist Add EDL and Add FCP XML you can add data lists in different formats to your project This is described in detail in section Importing and Adding EDLs on page 8 6 9 2 7 Save 9 6 With the menu option Save you can save the current project
41. on page 5 18 When you select the arrow to the right of the combo box a drop down list will be available where you can set the display type The Timeline Internal frames Internal timecode Source timecode File number Figure 6 11 List of the display types From this list select the display type that should be used in the software Selection Meaning Internal frames The clips show positions according to an in ternal frame count This setting also acti vates the frame notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 Internal time The clips show positions according to an in code ternal timecode count This setting also acti vates the timecode notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 Source TC The clips show positions according to the timecodes provided by their file headers and set either via the Configuration Tool or the clip s properties If the clips do not provide a source timecode of their own no timecodes will be displayed by the clips However they can be configured to show a virtual source timecode via their properties in the bin Fur ther information about source timecode can be found in section Notes on Source Time code and Keycode on page 2 16 This set ting also activates the timecode notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields
42. on page 6 31 When a track is locked see section Mut ing and Locking Tracks on page 6 33 its timeline elements are not deleted 6 4 6 Performing a Cut 6 40 Once at least one clip is present in the video or audio tracks of the time line you can cut the clip at a desired position For this perform the fol lowing e Move the timeline cursor to the desired position in the timeline as described in section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 26 When zoomed far into the timeline the timeline cursor pro vides a frame end marker that indicates where the selected frame ends in the timeline see also section Moving via the Timeline Scale on page 6 26 This may help you during the positioning of the timeline cursor e Then press the button EDIT This will cut the clip and set a cutting edit point at the selected position Then you can for example delete one of these clips select the clip and press the Del key on your keyboard move it to another position see section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 or alter its PVs The Timeline properties differently see chapter Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 When a track is locked see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 33 its timeline element is not cut e The length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be i adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section Gen
43. real time operation which in turn may report new drops in the table This button will be available as soon as drops are displayed in the drop table and the real time operation is finished 4 6 6 Using the Performance Monitor 4 44 The performance monitor monitors the hard disk accesses of the DVS software to the video data With it you can verify for example the sta tus of the hard disks of the storage array as well as of certain files on the array Individual frames missing in an image sequence clip i e im i age files that are not present on the storage at all are not reg istered as drops You can check the consistency of your material added to the bin with the menu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 9 19 and sec tion Consistencies of Clips on page 6 59 This section will explain shortly how to use the performance monitor First it will be described how to prepare the monitor and the DVS soft ware for the measuring of the system s workload After that follows a description of how to perform the actual test with a play out operation Although the following describes how to use the performance i monitor during a play out of video data it can also be used during a record operation Then it will measure the workload when writing files to the storage instead of reading them A record can be performed with the I O Tool for further infor mation see the CLIPSTER I O
44. table controls t e vs Mark All Clear Figure 4 20 The performance monitor The performance monitor provides you with detailed information about dropped frames frames that the DVS system could not load or write in time during a real time operation Via the table below you can get in formation about the location where the drop took place For this the performance monitor provides the following items chart The chart offers you a graphical interpretation of the measured workload of the system During a play out or record operation the processing workload will be shown via bars in the chart It is in detail ex plained in section The Chart on page 4 38 The Tool Area chart controls With the chart controls you can control the appear ance of the results in the chart or create a proprietary DVS information file They are explained in section Chart Controls on page 4 40 status bar Right below the chart controls you can find a status bar which will provide you with status messages about the operation of the performance monitor It is described in section The Status Bar on page 4 41 drop table As soon as drops occur during a real time operation entries will appear in the drop table one for each drop that could be detected The entries provide in formation for example about the date and time when the drop occurred or about the file that was the cause for this drop You can find a description of the drop
45. task may get interrupted This closes the DVS software After that you can for example shut down the system PVs The Menus 9 3 The Edit Menu The menu Edit provides functions to aid you in your editing process In detail it contains the menu options shown below Ctl Z Ctri Figure 9 11 The Edit menu They are described in the following sections 9 3 1 Undo The menu option Undo allows to undo your latest timeline related ac tion When this option is selected the timeline will be restored to the state before your last timeline operation 9 3 2 Redo The Redo menu option will reverse the action performed via the Undo menu option see section Undo on page 9 17 To redo an action se lect this menu option CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 9 4 The Bin Menu The menu Bin provides several functions to facilitate your work with the bin In detail it contains the menu options shown below Bin Import Bin Ctrl Shift l Export Bin Ctrl ShifttE Clear Bin Check Bin Ctrl Shitt K Generate proxies Deactivate all proxies Figure 9 12 The Bin menu They will be described in detail in the following sections 9 4 1 Import Bin With the menu option Import Bin you can import the bin of another project into your currently active project The selection of this menu op tion opens a standard dialog window for a file selection To import a bin you can select
46. they will be will be displayed on the tab EDL Clips in orange work area directly while destination values can be changed by G Source in and outpoints can be altered for example in the trimming the clips of a built up EDL in the timeline amp Additionally you can review the result of your work on the time line EDL easily in the preview area of the conforming mode It can be switched between a view of the timeline or the selected EDL see sec tion Conforming Mode The Preview Area on page 8 60 The following sections describe the areas and items provided by the conforming mode section Conforming Mode The Work Area on page 8 28 section Conforming Mode The Conforming Controls on page 8 41 section Conforming Mode The Preview Area on page 8 60 8 27 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 5 Conforming Mode The Work Area Once at least one EDL is available in the bin see section Importing and Adding EDLs on page 8 6 it can be displayed in the work area tabs EDL Clips Not on TL gt Figure 8 15 The work area with the tab EDLs activated Besides status information at the top right i e the name of the current ly selected EDL and its frame rate the work area provides several tabs that offer different views on the imported EDL s for further processing EDLs Displays all EDLs imported in the current project See section The Tab EDLs o
47. 1 Then to create preset effects three ways are available 1 They can be created with a drag and drop procedure using the mouse 2 They can be created via the keyboard and assigned to function keys 3 They can be created with the help of the timeline element proper ties area The first two ways will be described in the following A description how to operate with preset effects in the timeline element properties area can be found in section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 and section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 The Tool Area Creating Preset Effects with the Mouse To create a preset effect with the mouse via drag and drop perform the following e If necessary activate the tab Effects in the tool area of the Edit Tool e Take the adjusted effect from the effects list of the timeline element properties and drag and drop it back to the effects pane in the tool area The effect can be dropped anywhere you like in the effects pane Figure 4 16 Drag and drop to create a preset effect This will create a subeffect under the respective effects operator in the effects pane By performing the above said repeatedly you can create as many preset effects as you need Once dragged to the effects pane the preset effect can be named to your liking easily see section Administration of Preset Effects on page 4 29 and or used immediately for other
48. 1 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Basics The Edit Tool is one of the software modules of the DVS software and thus part of the software package for CLIPSTER This chapter provides first some background information about the structure of the DVS soft ware which includes a short overview of its different modules After that an overview of the user interface of the Edit Tool is provided to fa miliarize you with its appearance This will be followed by a description of the task bar of the software The chapter will be concluded with some general notes for example about how to manage projects with the DVS software 2 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 1 Overview of the Software Structure 2 2 The software package for the DVS system consists of various individual programs and modules that combined provide the system s unique ca pabilities to process digital video and audio in real time The following diagram shows the communication processes between individual soft ware parts and some hardware components in detail DVS System l usrdware E _ Hardware _ 7 Software Hard Disk Array Integrated Spycer Configuration Tool a User Interface OpenFX Plug Ins PCI Video Board Driver L Software Figure 2 1 Structure of software Video Board and Driver The central core of the whole system is the DVS PCI video board and its driver because they prov
49. 13 Conforming mode overview If a conformed EDL is already available in the timeline its clips will be especially color coded 6 g 30 02 ntown_LA_ E E 07 25 00 000 04 571 L project_30 Tapets 04 574 Figure 8 14 Conformed EDL in timeline conforming mode With this you can grasp the status of a conforming immediately standard clip The clip does not belong to an EDL Itis a normal clip color available in one of the standard folders of the bin blue The clip is already conformed and linked to data on a storage 8 26 The Conforming Tool grey The clip is unconformed either because a conforming has not been made yet no matching clips could be found or there are multiple search results available A clip that was conformed with material from a non real time capable storage will be marked in the timeline for a prerendering see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 However such a status should be resolved by copying the material of these clips to the local storage see section Transfer data on page 8 52 In the conforming mode you can work on the timeline as usual During editing the clips of the EDL in the timeline will stay linked to the EDL visible in the bin and work area of the conforming mode All changes to the timeline will be reflected either in the Timeline as EDL view or in the EDL directly When in or outpoint values are changed
50. 18 9 4 3 Clear Bin The Clear Bin menu option on the menu Bin deletes all folders and clips from the bin of your current project The selection of this menu option calls up a warning message After the confirmation that you really want to delete the contents of the bin the bin will be cleared If your currently active bin was altered and not saved you will i be asked by the program whether you want to save its con 5 tents to a bin file When you answer this query with YEs the same procedure as to export a bin will be initiated see section Export Bin on page 9 19 9 4 4 Check Bin During the loading of a project file and the import of a bin the DVS software performs a limited test regarding the availability of the clips present in the bin It is tested whether the first and the last frame of each video clip is available on the storage Via the Check Bin menu op tion you can check your bin and thus your timeline more thoroughly for errors and inconsistencies If the first and or last frame of a clip is missing you will be in li formed about this the same way as described in this section After the selection of the menu option Check Bin the DVS software verifies that each frame of each clip and each audio file is present on the storage If inconsistencies are found i e missing files you will get the following error message CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 9 20 t Bin consistency check
51. 25 Modify before Modify after Modify all Reset Figure 7 2 General items of the properties area If available and not dimmed they can be used together with this time line element In detail they perform the following With the Dur field you can change the length of the selected timeline element frame accurately Simply type in the desired length duration of the timeline element and confirm your entry with the Enter key After this the outpoint of the selected element in the timeline will be altered and it will take on the adjusted length Whether the material succeeding the timeline element in the timeline will be preserved and moved accordingly depends on the state of the insert overwrite mode of the Edit Tool see section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 31 Further information about timecode frame number entry fields can be found in section About Timecode Frame Num ber Fields on page 2 18 This button applies the settings of the currently se lected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator to all elements of the same type that precede it in this track of the timeline 7 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 4 iJ Modify after Modify all The button MODIFY AFTER applies the settings of the currently selected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator to
52. 3D LUTs often expect logarithmic material in the timeline color values for each image are stored logarithmically With this but ton it is possible to virtually convert linear mate rial in the timeline to a logarithmic color space before the 3D LUT is applied In the entry field Custom Name you can state the name of a 3D LUT profile Either enter a new name or select an already created profile in the list box and change its name In this entry field you have to enter the directory path and file name of the 3D LUT file You may also click on the button to the right of the entry field E to select the file directly via the opening dialog window When a profile is selected from the list box its 3D LUT file will be displayed in the preview area to the right in a color cube Then you can view it in more detail by performing one of the fol lowing on the color cube The Timeline By pressing the left mouse button and mov ing the mouse you can rotate the color cube By clicking with the scroll wheel or the right mouse button you can switch the output colors to the input colors and vice versa The one currently displayed will be indicated at the top of the preview area By turning the scroll wheel of the mouse you can morph the colors in the cube from output to input and vice versa The degree of the morphing will be indicated at the top of the preview area Once at least one profile is available in the list box
53. 5 3 Processing the Source Material of a Video Clip 5 25 5 6 The Trim Mode perenne ernst er ek treet rr eaen weer ererareer rer econ 5 28 5 6 1 The Trim Controls eee 5 29 5 6 2 Setting In and Outpoints of Clips s s s 5 31 5 7 The Slave Mode Control WindOw sesser 5 33 The Timeline ccccececeeceececseceseeeseseseeeeeeceseeceeseeeeeeceeecenaeaeas 6 1 6 1 Adding Clips to the Timeline 1 6 2 6 1 1 Taking a Clip Directly from the Bin 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 2 6 1 2 Taking a Clip from the Control Area seeen 6 4 6 2 Configuring the Timeline vexsscetcatsiescecsuectacatecesteessctekededsdoates 6 6 6 2 1 Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area 04 6 6 6 2 2 Changing the Appearance of Video Clips 000 6 8 62 3 Configuring the Timeline Scale sccciccccncctes eesceciseceediasal 6 9 6 2 4 Configuring the Tooltips Of Clips s es 6 10 6 2 5 Changing the Display Type nccrne 6 10 6 2 6 Configuring the Video and Audio Output 6 12 6 2 7 Further Audio Configurations cccic2 ssiciessenetevessteceesetens 6 17 6 2 8 Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File eee 6 18 6 2 9 Cropping the Timeline ccnn 6 21 6 2 10 Naming Tracks aisisiiiienoaru a 6 25 6 3 Controlling the Timeline w2c cccneeieceaneieuewunns 6 26 6 3 1 Moving within the Timeline cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 26 6 3 2 Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline 6 29 6 3 3 Insert O
54. 59 3 fAudiofSingSingSing 0 1 03 504 Audic Figure 6 61 Representation of audio clip The following information are provided top left Exact inpoint of clip on the timeline with the time line set to the timecode notation the seconds and frames will be shown as seconds in a decimal num ber i e with milliseconds when the frame notation is activated the inpoint will be displayed in milli seconds only 6 70 Dvs The Timeline top right Exact outpoint of the clip on the timeline minus one sample with the timeline set to the timecode notation the seconds and frames will be shown as seconds in a decimal number i e with milliseconds when the frame notation is activated the outpoint will be displayed in milliseconds only bottom left Name of the clip as it is available in the bin together with its folder path in curly brackets the audio channels streams of the clip indicating its audio mode e g 0 1 meaning a stereo stream of channel O and 1 or 0 0 meaning a mono stream of channel O bottom right Length duration of the clip bin For this the clip must not be present in the timeline of the i The audio mode of the clip can be changed in its clip properties Edit Tool With the display type set to File number the in and out point information of the clips will provide the in and outpoint with regard to the single audio file only in milliseconds i e untrimmed each audio clip in the tim
55. 59 6 68 analog video ccce 6 12 ETa o eee E EE 6 14 CRO ea N 6 21 default video raster oe 6 14 DV nce cea vavecvessecvecete cise teviaeeeeet 6 12 format information lt iccssisencseanecs 2 10 SD video n se 6 14 SDI E E E AT 6 12 VIGEO oo ccc eccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 2 6 12 overlay see video overlay overview Ol chapters aijissinrniecredanapacpeures 1 3 software structure 00cceee 2 2 user interface c0cccecceeeeeees 2 6 overwrite mode 3 8 6 32 6 36 attaching clips css ferenduceasraident cent 6 52 P panning ccce 6 59 7 10 7 16 ILEINS actien e eiere ani 7 17 paste aiic 4 18 6 38 6 59 6 7 PCI video board ccceccecceeeeeeeeees 2 2 PDF documentation 0 a 9 27 perforation wcrnsienneseeaeceen cans 8 8 performance monitor 5 45sececedsenincss 4 36 CHAN oerein 4 36 4 38 chart controls a an 4 37 4 40 chart resolution c0cceeees 4 41 disabled ccce000es 4 37 4 45 OVOP s2iiistarnetieniaeaen 4 39 4 40 drop location tcsceasd cideecesees 4 42 drop table ecavscsenevciatet 4 37 4 42 DVS information file 3 18 4 37 4 41 missing frame ee 4 38 4 39 reset COUNTED miric 4 41 resolving dropS izcocsateincntazcnicnds 4 47 result file nccrne 4 43 e a E E E 4 46 status messages 4 37 4 41 table controls 4 37 4 43 timeline marker 4 42 4 43 6 49 SASS iriri sie aena 4 44 Phantom Cine RaW nsere 2 15 picture mask 2oc2
56. 6 4 12 Attaching Audio Clips to Video Clips Sometimes during your editing work you may want to group audio and video clips for instance if they are already perfectly aligned and in syn chronization For this the timeline provides the possibility to attach an audio to a video clip tach one video clip to several audio clips only It is not possible to attach several video clips to one or more audio clips Further more it is not possible to attach clips of one type only e g au dio clips only GJ When attaching more than two timeline elements you can at How to Attach Clips To attach audio clips to a video clip perform the following e Select a video clip and one or more audio clips in the timeline area with the mouse while holding down the Ctrl key e Afterwards release the Ctrl key and call up on one of the selected clips or on an empty part of the timeline the context menu e On the context menu select the menu option Attach 6 51 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 52 p T Remove control point VGE hatch frame _Night Delete 10 125 10 125 05 610 CSi 0 1 Figure 6 50 Attaching audio and video clips Once this is done the audio clip s will be attached to the selected vid eo clip Now if either one of these clips is selected in the timeline the other attached clip s will be selected as well and they can then for ex ample be moved easily together while their
57. 6 78 TOP sucadesesadcenutorrtecestecscateets 7 10 7 30 global settings folder ae rn 3 3 4 3 4 14 IOAG eremia eaaa aeia 9 25 copying clipS seeseeeesreesnnn 4 20 SAVE ierisinde ENNS 9 26 create eccere 4 8 4 15 glossary ceeeeeeseseerererrreeeeeeee A 1 delete seerne 4 16 GY Gi irirna enara aeii 8 2 9 7 FEN AME ciiairt 4 15 FOOK oncccstastonteneruectenchsetieccetits 4 16 H SOPUN 2 asics rre rna 4 15 sorting clips assesses BND Head aisisiesiisinseinseennnns 6 25 6 81 folder area bin 3 3 4 3 4 14 head 3 14 6 32 6 33 6 41 6 47 context Menu ve2esi2 occas scestateases 4 14 8 34 8 53 8 55 8 57 8 62 format sceri eiat 3 7 6 2 head vs full scsceisceiesccavozexicenscteonins A 3 forward backward play mode 5 34 head vs tail ceccseeesessereeeseeee A 3 fragmentation assessment A 23 A 24 headroom scecieieeee 5 4 5 6 5 7 frame backward c ccssscceeeeeeeee 5 20 head up display ene eee 5 8 frame forward casscecerecccsacecacenacats 5 20 display settings ccccccceee 5 10 frame matching 1 6 57 6 60 help cee 9 27 frame missing 4 38 4 39 6 60 8 22 for menu options n 2 10 9 19 high nooiens 7 33 7 37 7 55 frame number ccecce 2 19 HSL color SPACE n 7 34 7 36 7 43 see also File number hue Sosieices catesa carta ae 7 34 7 46 finalizing o ae 6 77 6 87 ONISEL ceretcest onus tereedecrdioentenctee 6 90 i frame number timecode field 2 19 5 17
58. Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 9 19 This menu option will provide you with a list of the clips where frames are missing After that either the whole clip or the missing frames should be replaced or re corded anew 6 5 4 Matching an Individual Video Frame 6 60 The matching of an individual video frame is especially useful in case you want to know the exact position of this frame in the source material of the clip or if you want to transfer this image or the connected image sequence to another application for further processing Once the time line cursor is placed on a specific image of a video clip in the timeline you can select the menu option Match frame from the context menu of the timeline scale e The Match frame menu option can also be found on the con J text menu of a video clip The Timeline j Prerender 14 05 20 Add maker Remove maker fHolhawood itd Remove all markers Set makers automatically Match frame k Delete from in to out _ Scene Detection from in to out Figure 6 54 Matching an individual video frame After this the control area of the Edit Tool switches to its source edit mode and the particular frame together with its clip will be made avail able in the video overlay to the left of this mode Delete w 00 00 Figure 6 55 The matched frame Then you can easily recognize the exact frame position in its source ma terial via the position field to
59. CHOPPING ccxtuincoicstecdevadsaersiancads 6 24 GIGS cecaccnensedtedeacneseancraeiceen 7 13 WOODS casi Seat seetencaeccoetieveravened 6 10 ending point transition 8 7 9 enlarging control area overlay 5 2 entering timecode 2 22 csccececscenenes 2 19 entry field for duration 00 6 30 entry field for in outpoint 5 23 6 29 error diagnostic a e 2 4 4 47 exiting the program 3 18 9 2 9 16 export ol geen epee ee or eae ry meee 9 19 data list eeeeeeee eee 8 42 9 7 default configuration save 9 25 destructive 5 25 5 26 6 62 CINGCIS eisten ae 4 31 global settings ccc 9 26 sequence processing 5 26 6 61 6 63 to application 5 25 6 58 6 62 extension of files 4 31 4 32 7 32 8 7 9 4 9 6 9 18 9 19 9 25 9 26 extracting files cn seccccetce sates seesanteces 9 15 F fast motion oac 6 53 6 58 6 72 FCP XML ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 8 6 9 6 naming convention sse 8 6 l 8 timeline build up sc ccecccccceess 8 10 fields vs frames display 5 16 5 34 file extension 4 31 4 32 7 32 8 7 9 4 9 6 9 18 9 19 9 25 9 26 file format asasen A 10 for conforming tool source TC 8 3 ADIN cubicecstaseteqnietecdectienels A 10 file manager ccecce 3 4 4 7 File names nccc 6 9 File number c ccccccece cece eee eee eee 6 11 see also frame number with audio clips asc cectivetcotorteceas 6 71 File number as TC
60. Cropping 3D LUT Video 3D LUT i Audio Scrubbing x audio e configuration Monitoring Figure 6 15 Items for a further configuration of audio 6 17 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs In detail this area provides the following items Audio Scrubbing MONITORING If this check box is activated the contents of the audio tracks will be given out during a scrubbing of the Edit Tool s timeline for example when making a fast shuttle operation with the mouse Then the audio signal resembles and imitates a fast shuttle operation of a VTR The button MONITORING configures the analog audio outputs of the DVS system A click on this button opens the following window t Audio monitoring A Analog audio Output A Channel 1 2 Output B Channel 3 4 OK Figure 6 16 Analog audio configuration The settings Output A and Output B configure the first and second analog monitoring output of the DVS system respectively Select from the com bo boxes the audio channels that should be given out at the respective analog output Once everything is set as desired the audio configuration is complete and you can monitor the audio output as configured via the analog and digital audio outputs of the DVS system 6 2 8 Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File With a three dimensional look up table 3D LUT file you can for ex ample simulate the typical look of a projected motion picture film on a
61. E 6 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 2 Configuring the Timeline Because the timeline is the most important part of the Edit Tool it can be configured freely and thus adapted to your individual needs For a more comfortable working you can change the layout of the timeline area in various ways You can also adjust the timeline scale to the needs of your project e g by defining a special offset Furthermore you have to define the necessary output format of the timeline for example to view your project on a monitor connected to the DVS system or to play out the timeline All this will be described in the following sections Most configurations and settings will be stored together with your project in a project file 6 2 1 Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area 6 6 Because in the timeline area most of the editing work is performed you can change its layout freely to adapt it to your personal needs for a more comfortable working The layout of the timeline area can be changed in several ways for example by adjusting the size of the video and audio tracks Changing the Area Size Manually You can change the size of the timeline area manually For this move the upper edge of the timeline area up or down with the mouse to en large or reduce the timeline area The size of the tool and control area together with its video overlay will adjust itself automatically Delete Figure 6 4 Adjusting the size of t
62. EDL Once an item is selected see sec tion Selecting Contents for Viewing on page 8 60 its contents is displayed there The context menu of the video overlay provides for the most part the same menu options as the video overlay in the edit mode of the control area see section The Video Scopes on page 5 3 In addition the fol lowing one is provided Split Screen When the preview area shows the contents of the timeline see section Selecting Contents for View ing on page 8 60 this menu option activates the split screen operation of the video overlay see sec tion Working with Split Screen on page 8 64 8 61 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Dvs 8 7 3 The Scrub Bar Beneath the video overlay you can find a scrub bar offering you a time line of the currently displayed contents With its cursor ES you can move within and view the contents of the selected item While working with the scrub bar or the preview controls the video overlay always ad justs to your moves and displays the image at the selected position The scrub bar of the preview area is similar to the other scrub bars of the Edit Tool For further information about them see chapter The Control Area on page 5 1 The following features are provided by the scrub bar Items of Scrub Bar Description in dark grey Parts of the scrub bar displayed in dark grey in dicate either parts of the timeline that are not visible i
63. EDL will be added to the bin and the tab EDLs from where it can be used just as any other EDL The Conforming Tool Reconform When an EDL is already conformed and built up in the timeline and you receive an update for this EDL you can use this button to compare the used EDL with the changed one Then instead of conforming the up dated EDL again the reconforming feature will save you time by linking the clips it recognizes from the older EDL automatically to the clips of the new EDL Any effects that have been already added to the clips of the older EDL can be retained as well To use this function make sure that the EDL to be updated is selected and visible in the work area of the conforming mode A click on the button RECONFORM opens the following window 6 Reconform Updated EDL Q Load updated EDL Select updated EDL Timeline as EDL Reconform options Tolerance settings for recognition Tolerance Frames Recontform Figure 8 30 Reconforming an EDL Use the items at the top of the window to select the updated EDL by choosing one of the options provided by the radio buttons to the left Load updated With this option you can load an EDL and im EDL port it into the Edit Tool Use the button to the right E to select the EDL via the opening di alog window After this you have to set up the EDL to be imported as usual see section Im porting and Adding EDLs on page 8 6 Select up
64. Effects Jobs Markers Perform Available Operators rcorrection E restoration effects pane e Figure 4 15 Available effects in the tool area The effects pane offers you the available effects operators in a tree structure Either by double clicking an entry with the mouse or by click ing on the plus or minus sign in front you can expand or collapse the contents sorted under this entry As soon as the individual effects operators are visible you can start using them on clips in the timeline The individual effects operators provide you with additional editing fea tures for your video processing tasks Depending on the configuration of the DVS system and the optional features installed there may be nu merous operators available that enhance the editing functionality This section explains how to administer the effects available in the ef fects pane i e how to create and apply preset effects Further information about effects in general as well as individ i ual effects operators and their controls can be found in chapter a Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 4 3 1 Adding Effects to the Timeline The effects operators available in the effects pane can be applied to clips in the timeline easily You simply have to add them to the effects 4 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs list of the respective clip which is a part of its timeline element proper ties e
65. I O Tool user guide 4 2 3 Details about Clips 4 10 During the adding of clips to the bin the clips are checked for their type length resolution bit depth etc If set accordingly the text infor mation of the clips in the bin will show you these information about the clips see also section Changing the View of Clips on page 4 5 This section provides some details about clips in the DVS software PVs The Tool Area The Clip Types You can add video audio and so called multi clips to the contents area of the bin video clip audio clip invalid clip multi clips Video clips are seen in the contents area of the bin usually with their thumbnail previews When a clip is se lected a scrub bar below the thumbnail will be available that can be used to preview the clip in still images and se lect an inpoint of the clip roughly if en abled via the Configuration Tool To use audio in the Edit Tool you have to make the files available the same way as with video files You have to add them to the bin as described in sec tion Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 6 The DVS software supports audio clips that contain more than one mono or stereo channel multiple channels in the audio file These clips will be avail able as one clip in the bin but when added to the timeline the additional channels will be added to the other au dio tracks below the selected one This icon indicates a
66. If the ed ited project file was a new one a dialog window opens where you have to specify the storage path and file name for the project Project files are by default stored with the file extensions cp or cp au tosave if it is saved via the autosave function see CLIPSTER Config urations user guide for more details Furthermore during the saving procedure the old project file is saved as an additional backup file with the file extension backup cp File extensions cp Project file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file If a file name is already assigned to the currently opened project this menu option will immediately save the project under the assigned name In the project file the bin and the clips of the timeline including all op erators will be saved Additionally a lot of settings will be saved within the project file as well for example the viewing settings of the software modules the timeline and the control area the output settings as well as the project related configuration settings made in the Configuration Tool of the DVS software The VTR task mode of the I O Tool uses project files different i from the ones usually saved via the DVS software Further in formation about this can be found in the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide PVs The Menus 9 2 8 Save As The standard dialog window to save a file will ope
67. Markers see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide When selecting an entry from the list with a double click of the mouse the timeline cursor will jump to the respective timeline marker on the timeline The entries in the table can be sorted in descending or ascending order For this simply click on the respective column heading with the mouse that you want to sort the list by most columns offer this feature but some e g Thumbnail cannot be used for a sorting This switches be tween an ascending and descending order of the entries in the respec tive column The type of order will be indicated by a triangle to the right of the column heading 4 35 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 6 The Performance Monitor 4 36 With the performance monitor of the DVS software you can monitor the workload of the DVS system during a real time operation Thus you can verify for example the status of the hard disks of the storage as well as of certain files After starting the DVS software and thus the Edit Tool the bin is by de fault activated in the tool area As soon as you select the tab Perform in the tool area the area will look similar to the following figure Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform chart __ e Update lS 7 chart controls e De Sinfo Reset status bar e ZAA EEA EREA melt Date Time Type Timeline TC Frame File drop table e
68. No source material found for the followin 9g Clips nN lt list of clips gt Delete these clips Ignore Search material Figure 9 13 Error message of inconsistencies in the bin The error message provides a detailed list of all clips that could not be verified With the button DELETE THESE CLIPS you can then delete the faulty clips from your bin or you can proceed to the inconsistent bin with the button IGNORE DVS software by a standard image see section Consistencies i Missing frames will be substituted during a play out with the of Clips on page 6 59 If you are opening a project created on another system you can also search for the missing material by altering the default paths of the DVS software e g the System base video directory see CLIPSTER Con figurations user guide A click on the button SEARCH MATERIAL opens the following window Changing theses paths will alter the DVS software s default settings not only for this project but for the DVS software in general If not set back to the original default paths following your work on this project it will have implications on previ ously created as well as future projects For more details about the individual paths and their meaning see the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Set directories m base video directory Figure 9 14 Setting system wide directories Either type in the appropriate paths or use the buttons to the r
69. Reels Choose items to show in the table X Event N Path x Clip name 0 __ Consolidated clips nation IN _ Bin clip x Reel name X Destination OUT x Comment x Duration ype Start frame Size of thumbnails Width Keep proportions Figure 8 26 The view settings With the buttons at the top of the window you can switch between the different views tabs of the work area see section Conforming Mode The Work Area on page 8 28 The items that are available for each view will then be displayed below the buttons By activating or deactivating the check boxes you can display or hide columns in the ta bles of the tabs Furthermore in some views of the work area you can also display thumbnails of the EDL clips see section Text Image on page 8 44 Then the settings items Size of thumbnails will be available at the bottom of the window With them you can adjust the width and height of the thumbnails in pixels When the check box below the settings items is activated you have to adjust one value only The remaining value will adapt itself according to the entered one so that the relation of width to height of the last confirmed size remains unaltered 8 43 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 44 Text Image This combo box switches the view of the table displayed in the work area between the normal text only view and a view together with thumbnails When Text is selected the table is disp
70. Show in the corre sponding EDL If not already visible this menu option switches to the conforming mode of the control area se lects the appropriate EDL and displays it on the tab EDL Clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 The entries of the clips that were selected when this menu option was called will be highlighted in the table It can be used on clips of the same EDL only Show in Timeline as EDL If not already visible this menu option switches to the conforming mode of the control area se lects the Timeline as EDL view and displays it on the tab EDL Clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 The entries of the clips that were selected when this menu option was Called will be highlighted in the table 8 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 4 The Conforming Mode in General All tasks that have been described so far in this chapter can also be per formed directly with the conforming mode of the Edit Tool With it you can for instance import EDLs build them up in the timeline or auto conform them Furthermore already conformed EDLs can be evaluated and processed further The conforming mode can be activated with its respective m button from the controls in the control area of the Edit Tool see section Controls on page 5 15 The control area will then switch to the conforming mode work area conforming controls preview area Figure 8
71. Time stretching on the context menu of a clip see section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 57 and section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 71 It will open the follow ing window 6 53 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 54 Time stretching x Timestretch factor Manual Preset custom X Resize Timeline Element Cancel Figure 6 51 Time stretching or time compression configuration To configure the time stretching or time compression use the items of fered under Manual When adjusting the slider the factor value in the entry field to the right changes accordingly Alternatively you can enter a factor directly in the entry field to the right of the slider Slider Factor Movement Meaning Values less than one 1 mean that the clip lt 1 left gets time stretched i e its play out will be slower slow motion Values greater than one 1 indicate a time gt 1 right compression of the video clip i e its speed will be increased fast motion The combo box Preset allows you to select common timing changes from its drop down list Once one of the predetermined settings is se lected the Manual items will be adjusted accordingly The Resize Timeline Element check box resizes the clip automatically in the timeline accordingly once the settings for stretching compression are confirmed When time stretched the clip will be lengthened in the timeline out
72. Tool user guide Preparing the Software and the Performance Monitor This section explains how to prepare the DVS software as well as the performance monitor for the measuring of the system s workload dur ing a play out operation PVs The Tool Area After starting the software and thus the Edit Tool the bin is by default activated in the tool area Then perform the following e Add at least one clip to the bin of the Edit Tool e Afterwards take this clip and add it to a video track of the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 For our example described here you may also set transitions i and or apply effects to the clip s in the timeline as long as they are not a subject to a prerendering see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 e Then select the tab Perform in the tool area of the DVS software The tool area switches to the performance tool of the DVS software If the controls of the performance monitor appear dimmed the i performance monitor is disabled To use it you have to enable it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform Update ma 4q DYVSIntfo Reset Switched view to Show overall file IO WORKLOAD Date Time Type Timeline TC Frame File Mark All Clear Figure 4 26 The performance monitor After this the performance monit
73. a preren dering see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 The sequence of all added effects to a clip that are listed in the effects list is important as well They are applied top to bottom i e the effect at the top of the list will be applied first to the clip followed successively by the rest of the added effects This may be especially important when applying the same effect type several times because for instance in case of a color correction the bottom color correction will be applied to the colors corrected by the top color correction s You can change the sequence of the effects in the effects list easily via drag and drop Sim ply select one effect and drag it to the desired position within the list An effect can be deleted from the effects list of a clip the same way you delete a clip from the timeline Just select the effect from the effects list in the timeline element properties and press the key Del on your key board or select from its context menu the menu option Delete To apply the same effect settings to other clips in the timeline you can either use the general items to the left of the timeline element proper ties area see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 or use preset effects as described in section Effects on page 4 25 and section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 rn When transferring settings to other clips in
74. a video clip The operators offered by DVS will be described in detail in the sections following this one 7 6 1 Adding Effects As soon as a video clip is selected in the timeline its properties are dis played in the timeline element properties area right below the timeline area Then the clip is ready to receive an effects operator If the properties area is not visible in the Edit Tool you have to i display it first see section Accessing the Timeline Element Properties on page 7 2 To the left of the timeline element properties area you can find the Ef fects list of the selected clip It contains a list of all effects operators that are currently applied to the clip Effects Zoom Pan 1st Color C Flip Flop 2nd Color Zoom Pan Delnterlace Figure 7 5 Effects list of a video clip The effects operator Zoom Pan is by default available for all video clips in the timeline and thus is already available in the effects list of the timeline element properties However the same effect with different settings as well as additional effects can be applied to the clip To add an effect to a clip in the timeline perform the following e If appropriate activate the tab Effects in the tool area of the Edit Tool see section Effects on page 4 25 for further information about this tab e Select from one of the folders the respective effects operator that you want to apply and drag and drop it to th
75. alignment and relative po sition to each other is maintained However because attached clips can only be used in the overwrite mode of the Edit Tool once clips are attached in the timeline the soft ware switches on the overwrite mode automatically When working with attached clips in the timeline you cannot switch to the insert mode anymore The button to switch be tween the two different modes appears dimmed and is no longer available Further information about the insert and overwrite mode can be found in section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 31 To activate the insert mode all timeline elements have to be dis connected How to Disconnect Attached Clips To sever an attachment of clips or to switch back to the insert mode of the Edit Tool you have to disconnect the attached clips e Select the attached clips or a specific clip of the attachment and call up its context menu PVs The Timeline e Then use either one of the following menu options Disconnect Disconnects and severs only the selected clip from element the attachment If the attachment comprises sev eral clips i e one video clip and several audio clips the rest of the attachment will be main tained Disconnect Disconnects and severs the attachment of all ele group ments in the group where the context menu was invoked Regardless of the number of timeline el ements in the attachment all will be disconnected
76. all elements of the same type that succeed it in this track of the timeline The button MODIFY ALL applies the settings of the currently selected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator to all elements of the same type in this track of the timeline With the RESET button you can restore the default settings of the currently selected timeline element or with video clips of the currently selected and displayed effects operator with a single click Effect settings for video clips can also be applied to individual clips by using preset effects see section Creating Preset Ef fects on page 4 26 and section Using Preset Effects on page 4 28 DVS Timeline Element Properties 7 3 Changing Values of Sliders and Entry Fields Almost all operators provide sliders as well as entry fields to adjust their effects You can adjust their values and settings in several ways 1 Select a slider with the mouse and move it to the left or right up or down to the desired settings Use the Up Arrow Down Arrow keys after the selection of one of the settings by clicking in its entry field to step the value up or down Use the scroll wheel of your mouse after positioning the mouse cursor over a slider to step up or down the value Enter in an entry field the desired setting and then press Enter on your keyboard Place the mouse cursor over an entry field and use the scr
77. altered according to your liking and the changes are directly ap plied to the clip in the timeline The individual settings possibilities of the effects operators de i veloped by DVS are explained in the later sections of this chap ter For a description of operators developed by third parties please refer to their respective documentation To view changes to the effects immediately with the overlay of the control area make sure that the timeline cursor is positioned on the clip currently selected in the timeline With the check boxes in front of the effects operators available in the effects list you can enable or disable effects If a check box in front of an effect is activated it is enabled if it is deactivated it is disabled Thus you can easily evaluate the outcome of an individual effect by compar ing it with the original image or other applied effects Effects Zoom Pan enabled effect SEED ae Flip Fle 2nd Color Zoom Pan disabled effect Delnterlace Figure 7 8 Enabling or disabling effects of a video clip 7 13 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs If you need an operator to be applied to a limited range of frames of a clip only you have to edit the clip with hard cuts beforehand because the applied effects are valid for a whole timeline clip always A Some operators may not be real time capable Clips modified i with such an operator will automatically be subject to
78. an RSX file could be found for this clip If none is automatically assigned to the clip you can load it manually at any time via the RSX file items at the bottom of each tab The settings on the tab Customized can be changed to achieve your own look for the clip It provides general matrix as well as curve set tings By activating deactivating the Matrix and or Curve check boxes the respective settings can be turned on or off Via the menu option Modify this setting for all clips on the context menu of each setting you can transfer its value to other REDCODE clips in the timeline The customized settings can also be saved as a preset effect i see section Creating Preset Effects on page 4 26 or trans ferred to other REDCODE clips via the items of the properties area see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 The buttons available for each setting enable you to ETR switch between the metadata M default D and RSX Timeline Element Properties file R values for a particular setting With the row of buttons at the top of each settings group you can alter the values of a group in a single step As soon as a value is customized the buttons of this setting are deactivated thereby indicating the changed state of the setting Then when activating one of the buttons again the respective setting will be restored to either the metadata default or RSX value With the Curve settings you can c
79. audio storage formats Proprietary streaming video technology developed by Microsoft Only compressed variants are supported 1 Not real time capable A finalizing can only be performed compressed Cannot be cap tured 2 Available for loading only 3 Available for a finalizing only Furthermore the DVS software supports different variants of MXF e g MXF OP Atom MXF OP 1a and P2 extension mxf as well as DV DIF extension dv files Both are container formats for audio and or video material They are implemented with the following com pression codecs Video Bit Audio Bit Depth Codec Video Raster PS Format Rates and Channels XDCAM IMX 525i 29 97 30 40 or 16 bit 0 2 4 6 8 MXF OP 1a 625i 25 50 24 bit O 2 4 XDCAM HD 1440 x 1080i 23 98 18 25 35 24 bit O 2 4 8 MXF OP 1a 25 29 97 4 2 0 720p 50 59 94 50 1080i p 23 98 25 29 97 XDCAM DVCAM 525i 29 97 4 1 1 25 16 bit O 4 MXF OP 1a 625i 25 4 2 0 DV25 525i 29 97 4 1 1 25 16 bit O 2 DV DIF 625i 25 4 2 0 DVCPRO 25 525i 29 97 25 16 bit O 2 4 MXF MXF P2 625i 25 0 2 DV DV DIF all in 4 1 1 DVCPRO 50 525i 29 97 50 16 bit 0 2 4 MXF MXF P2 625i 25 0 4 DV DV DIF DVCPRO HD 960 x 720p 50 100 16 bit 0 2 4 MXF MXF P2 59 94 0 8 DV DV DIF 1440 x 1080i 25 29 97 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Cod
80. be sorted by reel names and source in and outpoints for example See also A mode A clip can either be an audio or video clip See audio clip and video clip respectively The referencing of events of data lists to video and audio material File format that contains audio as well as video data in a single file only i e the video and audio files are not stored as single image or audio files but together in one file e g QuickTime or MXF A list generated by another application which describes a timeline with clips via timecode key code data A cut list may also contain informa tion about the type of cut hard cut or transition Cut lists exist in various different not standardized formats See also data list A cut between clips New cuts can be created with the button EDIT of the timeline area The general term for ALEs EDLs or cut lists However in the software as well as this manual they may also be referred to as EDLs i e im plying not the standard but the term edit deci sion list in general Either frames image files or audio data that the DVS system could not load from or write to the storage in time for the performed real time op eration Edit decision list A list that describes a timeline with clips together with a series of operators ef fects EDLs can be created offline and passed to the online workstation to perform the final con forming See also data list See operator Append
81. beaadaededeeuiaiolo 4 25 4 3 1 Adding Effects to the Timeline 2 cccccseccnecsteeseeenes 4 25 4 3 2 Creating Preset Effects c ccscccceseeeeeesecesccceeuseeas 4 26 A238 Using Preset Effects icrirriisniornran edegui eninin 4 28 4 3 4 Administration of Preset Effects cc cec0cceccceeseeees 4 29 4A JODS eiiiai niania at aai aiiai 4 33 4 5 The Marker Table eeens 4 34 4 6 The Performance Monitor sesser 4 36 461 Th Charisreremisenenci aaao e 4 38 4 6 2 Chart gare ee ee ere ee eer ere a tery 4 40 46 3 The Status Barosuna 4 41 4 64 The Drop Table iriiviicieiesiiereeinnniieiikarerivongts 4 42 4 6 5 The Table Controls 22 2ccS cece ote vest ccctcetecedeeceecaeeee ieee 4 43 4 6 6 Using the Performance Monitor cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 44 The Control Area ccsccssicecoerctececctmtasescet natives teaeemoitaeehattanan 5 1 5 1 Maximizing the Control Area erren 5 2 5 2 Th Video Overlay isisisi koeken 5 2 5 2 1 Configuring the Video Overlay ceesre 5 2 52 2 The VIGGO SCOPES sisirin nesens e e iiaae i 5 3 5 2 3 Head up Display Burn In unssuesssesssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreeeee 5 8 Contents 5 3 The Scrub Bar of the Control Area woo eee eee 5 13 5 4 CONTOS ccc ease eee eae es 5 15 5 5 The Source Edit Mode caste sanders rer san ateeec russes 5 18 5 5 7 Controlling the Clip from the Bin wcecseesccesseecccsceecetecazesss 5 20 5 5 2 Setting In and Outpoint for the Clip from the Bin 5 22 5
82. button VOLUME A waveform is a graphical representation of an audio signal and the WAVE button displays or hides the wave forms of the audio clips Volume Figure 6 65 Audio waveforms For each channel available in the respective audio clip one waveform will be displayed i e a mono clip provides one waveform only whereas a stereo clip shows two waveforms one for each channel The appearance of the waveforms can be configured to your liking with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide 6 75 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 6 7 Finalizing the Timeline 6 76 Once a project is finished you can generate from a project s timeline a new clip in a configurable format and raster without affecting the orig inal material original data and project file are preserved This process is called finalizing and it can be made with the menu option Final ize on the Project menu see section Finalize on page 9 14 Via this option you can select the video and or audio format freely Ad ditionally you may limit the rendering of the timeline with a defined in and outpoint of the timeline or render video and audio separately After the selection of the menu option Finalize the window Final izing will be displayed on the screen t Finalizing File name result _finalized we Name options Bin InfOut Disable gap rendering Timeline output TC wise rendering Options
83. by clicking the inpoint outpoint or du ration button Regardless of the position of the timeline cursor the in outpoint will be deleted If the DELETE button is deactivated a click on the in outpoint duration button will set the inpoint or outpoint respectively To position the in and outpoint frame accurately you may use the in and outpoint entry fields Simply type in in the entry fields the position of the in outpoint that should be set Then press Enter to confirm it The in or outpoint will be set accordingly Further information about time code and frame number entry fields can be found in section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 6 29 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 30 Eg The inpoint button sets or deletes the inpoint of the timeline depending on the state of the DE LETE button When setting the inpoint will be set at the position of the timeline cursor a Same as the inpoint button but sets or deletes the outpoint Sessa When an inpoint is set you can use this entry field to specify the duration for the timeline The outpoint will be set accordingly raat This button will be available when the DELETE button is activated Then it will delete both the in and outpoint simultaneously The length of the currently selected range will be indicated in the field directly below the timeline scale ee Se eee eT timeline length 42 4 16 09 42 16 iia 3 jAmerican_Beat
84. cation and name for the data list to be exported 9 13 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Export as cts data_lists ed_data_list Figure 9 9 Path amp name settings In the entry field Path enter the drive directory where the data list should be saved You may also click on the button to the right of this field to select an already existing directory In the entry field Name you have to state the file name of the EDL to be created Creating the EDL Once the settings to export a data list are complete you can start its creation with the buttons at the bottom of the window OK Use this button to start the creation of the data list When successful this window will be closed CANCEL This button closes the window without creating a data list observed during the creation of the data list see section Time i Time stretching or time compression information will not be Stretching or Time Compression of Clips on page 6 53 9 2 11 Finalize 9 14 With the menu option Finalize you can generate a new clip from a project s timeline in a freely configurable format and raster without af fecting the original material This is in detail described in section Final izing the Timeline on page 6 76 PVs The Menus 9 2 12 Prerender all With the Prerender all menu option you can prerender all parts of the timeline that need to be processed before a play out togethe
85. clip will be created in the as signed audio track Only neighboring streams can be configured to stereo A deactivated button will create mono clips The configured stereo mono streams have to be assigned to different audio tracks of the timeline Hence with the entry fields to the right only unassigned tracks can be selected Whatis created in the timeline must be i seen in relation to the EDL An audio stream that is not specified in the EDL will not be created in the timeline Position Specifies the position where to add the clips of the EDL to the timeline For example they can be placed at the current position of the timeline cursor at the end of the timeline at their source positions determined by the source in and out points of the EDL or at their destination posi tions The Conforming Tool Item Description Creation mode Configures the way the EDL will be created in the timeline It can be created either in A mode or in C mode In A mode the clips of the EDL will be created in the timeline in the sequence of their destina tion positions as detailed in the file In C mode the clips of the EDL will be created in the timeline in ascending order sorted by reel names and source inpoints This may be useful for example when you want to record the clips of the EDL with a linear device such as a VTR e g for archiving or color correct the clips more efficiently
86. clips by activating their check boxes 8 51 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 52 Subfolder scan Normally a search will be performed recursively in all sub directories available at the specified locations By activating the check box of this setting you can define the number of subdirec tory levels that should be searched through With this you can for example limit a search to the main branch of a volume directory and dis card others that are available beneath it When everything is set you can start the linking of data with the but ton LINK DATA Then the conforming methods detailed for the selected events are used to search for the content at the specified locations and one or more progress bars will provide you with information about the statuses of the search Afterwards you will be informed about them same as after an autoconforming see section Evaluation and Further Processing of the Conforming on page 8 20 Transfer data When conforming with the SpycerNet you will most likely search for content on foreign systems If clips were found on such systems they will get the status Online NRT see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 To make them real time capable they can be transferred copied to the main storage of your system via the transfer data fea ture It can be applied to a selection of clips or all displayed on the tab EDL Clips and it wi
87. corresponding Avid Log Exchange ALE file will be created which can be configured further with the OPTIONS button to the right of the check box ii The DVS software supports source timecode in several file for S 6 7 2 Configuring Video With the settings items in the middle of the finalizing window you can specify the video format for the rendering of the new clip To make these available the check box Video output has to be activated With the finalizing function of the Edit Tool you are able to generate video and audio files together or separately via the check boxes When calling the finalizing window for the first time the items for video and audio are disabled Via the check box Video output at the top of this area you can enable the items for video and thus decide that you want to generate a video clip The same can be done with the check box Au dio output see section Configuring Audio on page 6 83 By turn ing on either one of these only the activated output will be created dows Media you cannot generate audio and video sepa i If a container format is selected as the file format e g Win rately Both will automatically be included in the created file S 6 79 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 6 80 x Video output x Hardware finalize support Video 3D LUT 3D LUT File format Bitmap Options Burn in Display settings 8 bit BGR Q Limi Untimite SD HD Film O
88. cvetaccetiat ncotecavigens 7 51 eo Oe a T 7 54 Vert irarria rann 7 52 polygon ccecce 7 53 preview Window ee 7 53 VESET sscccessiniasdtecscecaasssedcasdesees 7 52 reset alll cineca 7 52 select shape 252cg sdonatechcenvoserccsts 7 51 setting shape oo ee 7 52 SOFTNESS o ceeeeccceceeeceeceeeeeaeeeaues 7 54 SPINE 2st cc cieccckeeis sansctintcintecethida 7 53 MoPOSWION sdacesveesicecteeincesteant 7 54 M SIZOe acer cseec cs cussn sje avunevacctava amas 7 54 Y POSITION atscoceavesewsevicereteeiesess 7 54 YSZ ane 7 54 PVs Index pillarboxing sxcsccsdettetccewesieisensectes 6 21 Saturation ecirar cen niaii 7 34 pipette asi carinas 7 39 7 47 setting of static LUT 000000 7 31 placeholder for missing frame 4 39 static LUT tecesuetesleciveeccacisadeeees 7 10 6 60 8 22 priority vertical editing 6 64 placeholder for multiple found 8 21 program exit 3 18 9 2 9 16 play out 2 12 5 16 5 21 5 34 6 28 program ICON Menu icccstecrceecesieseex 9 2 8 63 program start caccssusisisdstesiteiesesarannis 3 2 connecting the driver 9 23 progress of job secs cents Secteescetcceicets 4 33 IN reverse c 5 16 5 20 8 63 project performance s 4 44 4 46 APCRIVE secescreri ieaiaia reeni 9 15 position of play out 006 5 34 configuration oee 9 23 resolving drops ccecce 4 47 create data list weet set ceoveces 8 42 9 7 plug in interface OpenFX 2 5 7 10 extr
89. define the alpha mask for your clip i e the color vector that should undergo a col or correction For this you have to position the timeline cursor on an ap propriate image in your video clip that you want to color correct The image should clearly show the color that you want to change or correct The preview window and the pipette of the secondary color correction are the easiest way to select a color vector They can be activated with the button PIPETTE The window will show you the frame currently marked by the timeline cursor and with its pipette you will be able to select the desired color s pipette Figure 7 34 Preview window To facilitate the selection of a color vector the view of this window can be switched between a display of the source image with applied color correction if already set a display of the alpha channel only and a view of the alpha channel plus the source image 7 39 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 40 Source Image Figure 7 35 Alpha channel view of the selected color vector In the alpha channel view of the preview window the black parts of the image will not be affected while all areas and pixels displayed in white will be color corrected The set color vector will be graphically shown in the color wheel to the left of the color mask area Although the preview window and the pipette are the easiest way to determine a color vector it c
90. deselected easily in the contents area of the bin For this perform one of the following procedures or their combination Although the table below describes how to select clips only J most procedures can be used to deselect clips as well Individual clips Individual clips can be selected with a click of the mouse on the respective clip Several clips Several clips can be selected disjointedly when click ing them while holding down the Ctrl key at the same time Range of clips A range of adjoining clips can be selected by clicking one clip the starting clip and afterwards holding down the Shift key while clicking the clip that marks the end of the range All clips All clips displayed in the contents area can be select ed in one step either with the menu option Select all of the context menu or the keyboard shortcut Ctrl A when the contents area has the focus Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips Bin clips and timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the location of your choice either in the contents area of the bin or on a timeline track The elements in the clipboard can also be pasted into a new project With this you can copy or move the selected element s within the bin e g from folder to folder within the timeline e g between tracks or within one track between the bin and the timeline tracks or vice ver s
91. determine the amount of heads and tails that should be captured in addition to the material pointed to by the source in and outpoints Afterwards the captured clips will provide the entered handles on either side of their in outpoints Enter the number of heads and tails in the entry field to the right either in frames or timecode notation can be switched with the combo box to the left By activating the check box Consolidate Clips you can prevent mul tiple capturings of the same material This is useful if the captured ma terial comes from the same source reel and some source in outpoints are either overlapping or near each other Use the Tolerance as set tings items to determine the tolerance for the detection of the consoli dated clips It specifies the maximal allowed gap length between two events of the same reel plus one frame If within the tolerance their source material will be combined consolidated and captured as a sin gle clip The tolerance can be entered in the entry field to the right ei ther in frames or timecode notation can be switched with the combo box to the left The button PREVIEW allows you to view the consol idation It opens the following window Consolidated clips Select consolidated clip hugoddr_edl Tapet Consolidated_001 Clips building consolidated clip Name of consolidated clip Consolidated_001 Cancel Figure 8 37 Previewing consolidated clips In this window the consolid
92. drawn access times to a single file one bar may be longer because several files were read written at the same time Figure 4 22 Chart of performance monitor individual file I O duration At the top left of the chart you can find the last measured access time It details in certain intervals during operation the measured access time in milliseconds i e the value of one bar in the chart At the top right of the chart you can find an indication about how many frames were processed total and how many drops occurred during this time When operating the access times are displayed via blue bars in the chart If bars reach the top line during an operation it may indicate dif ficulties during the loading of particular files However clips of a higher resolution usually require more time to access especially when transi tions are applied to the timeline Then high bars do not necessarily mean that a drop may occur soon Drops are detected by the real time core of the DVS system and they will be displayed as bars in red that are cut at the top 4 6 2 Chart Controls 4 40 With the chart controls you can control the appearance of the chart or create a proprietary DVS information file The chart controls provide the following items abled To use it you have to enable it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information i If the controls appear dimmed the
93. duraUON deiir einnar tae 7 3 length sristi nio renignri riaan 7 3 properties o on 2 5 3 15 7 1 FESIZE secccedseeceneacereateees enai 6 53 timeline element properties 7 1 ACCESS N occ 7 2 CIOS E E EE 7 6 effect settings cecene 7 12 effects list esseere 7 11 length of element ccxctctessezetcsc 7 3 of transitions essesi 7 7 of video clips n 7 10 E e AE T T 7 4 timeline marker 4 34 4 38 4 42 4 43 6 49 add automatically a i 6 50 add manually o a 6 50 configuration eec 6 49 delete scier eat eee 6 51 moving to n 5 17 6 49 8 63 POSION srogssirenin rone iin n 4 34 SOU E eecacaaeasceasaeaevexs 4 35 MEDIC aoaie aio aia 4 34 thumbnail ccecce 4 35 YDES engnanar 6 49 Timeline output TC ee 6 78 timeline scale ccc 6 26 configuration seee 6 9 title bar DiM sbssisestsens sasore 4 3 4 4 4 15 context menu bin ceee 4 4 effects pane eerren 4 32 title safety areas aisinn 5 2 tool area ree 2 7 4 1 change size x cascesces ccesxceaviecdiecees 4 2 MA ged tes EE 4 1 MOONS cidreira tices aect ead iiine 4 1 conforming tool aeee 8 1 tools and services ecce 2 4 defragmentation 2 4 A 22 tooltip 6 10 6 57 6 58 6 71 6 72 configuration eene 6 10 keyframing s es 7 29 track 01e E e E 6 33 MUTE sisese en trn saroiaren an 6 33 NaNe Sedacsd tea sos earrais 6 25 track buttons cceeeeees 3 10 6 34 track size oe seczece erent hnnsetsGeacteeewenatindsn 6 7 manual setting
94. e whether they should be interpreted as frames or perfo rations By default the keycode reference num bers of cut lists are interpreted as frames by the DVS software Convert to frame rate Converts the frame rate set with Current frame rate to another frequency It recalcu lates the in and outpoints and the durations will be adjusted see also Keep the clip dura tion constant Select from its drop down list the frequency that the added list should be converted to TC drop frame Same as TC drop frame above Keep the clip duration constant Will be observed during a frame rate conver sion Then the in and outpoints of the clips in the list are recalculated keeping the events durations constant Use as clip name Specifies what should be used as names for the EDL events Use as reel name Cut lists and FCP XML files only Sets what should be used for the reel names Source TC will be Configures what will be used as the source in and outpoints With this you can select for ex ample that the destination in and outpoints should be used as the source in and outpoints Use comment entry as ALEs and EDLs only Uses comment entries in the EDL as reel names or as the path for an on line conforming The first comment entries of the events will be interpreted The Conforming Tool Item Description Remove speed EDLs and FCP XML files only Remove
95. ecce 6 7 Opt ONS ccs cee ec ceased ctctnersticss 6 7 transition 3 13 3 14 5 29 A 5 automatic creation 3 14 6 33 6 41 change length nae 6 46 6 47 CG UG esac seaerac eae ceeeateteneaceens 3 14 Curation cccccceceeeeeeeees 3 14 7 3 ending point ercaciesnnceceeseretesecants 7 9 M EDL scascvacauaaseiant 8 13 8 34 9 9 lenet eeann aa 7 3 prerendering cecdaseccccusscsssccesasses 6 42 properties 3 14 7 1 7 7 AAAI Ee E ot oiiaecencreceenaeeeats 7 9 setting a transition ssdceccedectecsns 6 41 shapes of Wipes neeese 7 8 OLLES 7 9 starting point cinacteretreteccicreuasanas 7 9 trim backward sscsipa2eseccceauieceenianes 5 31 trim forward scezcacasundvauctaecessatonvees 5 31 trim mode 2 7 3 14 5 15 5 28 6 44 in outpoint information 5 29 U MMINg SsaadescasSasascececdacsade 5 31 6 47 conforming tool aese 8 23 controls nsscice diets vec es decent ececees 5 30 et Semen eee Pe eee ee ere eee 5 30 NpOINt te rcetesca ete eae deece ee sdes a 5 30 keyboard shortcuts 5 32 6 44 OU pOINT cs ces cic ducs cecenccerecds ascot 5 30 BIE creecctuietesenteundarseatedeicancete 6 48 SiD a 6 48 tutorial essre ancien 3 3 type of clips n e 4 11 type of display seenen 6 10 typographical conventions 1 5 U Undo e ne Rete ey Pee 9 17 user interface M NM ZE sesar irsini 9 2 OVETV EW nassssssssssserreererrrerrrrrerrn 2 6 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide V vectorscope 1
96. een ene 4 11 length 3 8 3 11 3 12 5 24 6 3 6 38 6 47 6 48 7 3 looped preview essees 8 63 MOVE cas taretininansccseeacenntateacis 6 35 multi clip sic tencaaatctasotecentnenacions 4 11 l 4 multiple found seee 8 21 NAME vesvesiecacvecexes 4 21 6 57 6 71 offline edited 5 21 8 64 8 66 outpoint information 6 57 6 71 pastiNg ccisrisinenio iii 4 18 6 38 pending n e 4 12 8 9 position 3 8 6 3 6 5 6 48 8 35 prerendering esssssssnsssrnirnennne 6 42 properties 2 5 3 6 4 21 6 59 6 73 7 10 8 63 real time capability 2 11 4 13 4 46 relinking 6 55 6 59 6 73 8 3 selecting in bin sezietccecdeczeteasecezs 4 18 selecting in timeline 4 6 37 sorting in bin Jesezechtecseeteceecterces 4 19 sorting into folder 2 0 4 19 SOUICE 4 23 5 25 5 26 6 55 6 57 6 60 6 62 text information 6 56 6 70 time stretching compression 6 53 6 58 6 72 tooltip 6 57 6 58 6 71 6 72 tooltip configuration 6 10 MMINg occ 5 31 6 47 RY IOCS sad nhreevaceteewiee RM nwte eesti 4 11 UNKNOWN 2ictecssusisveenssioiccaeens 4 12 Vv 0 0 siriririrni aata 4 11 6 56 yellow marking ccecce 4 13 clipboard 4 18 6 38 6 59 6 72 CLIPSTER 20 00 cceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 1 clipwise rendering cence assNiasestickiaas 6 79 C MOdE 0 ceceecceceeee eee eeeeeees 8 13 A 2 CMX neee 8 2 9 7 6010 Ca tenin
97. effects pane and select the menu option Clear all presets After this a warning message will appear on the screen e If you want to delete all preset effects from the effects pane con firm the warning message This will delete all preset effects from the effects pane Saving All Preset Effects You can save the contents of the effects pane i e all preset effects to a file e Call up the context menu on an entry in the effects pane and select the menu option Save all presets e In the opening dialog window specify a storage path and file name for the effects file to be saved and confirm your entries with the button SAVE File extension xml Effects file This will save the preset effects to the specified file By performing the above detailed procedure several times you can build up a library of dif ferent effects settings that can be loaded again later and thereby added to any project you want Loading All Preset Effects Already saved preset effects can be loaded at any time into the Edit Tool again With this you can add the presets available in the file to your cur rent content of the effects pane z7 Preset effects can be loaded from various sources You can use i a specially created preset effects file see section Saving All Preset Effects on page 4 31 a standard project file or its de rivatives autosave or backup files see section Save on page 9 6 To load preset effects perform the
98. figure 7 35 on page 7 40 The parts of the image shown in black are not selected white parts are Default Shows the source image only Shapes are not displayed in this view nor can they be de fined Once a shape is defined you can close the preview window at any time Afterwards it can be displayed again by selecting for example the Out Line setting of the View combo box 7 12 3 Adjusting the Shapes Defined shapes can be adjusted with the settings items at the top right of the settings pane They will be applied to the shape that is currently selected in the shapes list see section The Shapes List on page 7 51 X Position 60 00 Y Position 50 00 100 00 100 00 50 00 50 00 50 00 Figure 7 50 Items to adjust a shape X Position These settings change the horizontal x axis vertical y axis position of the shape The settings are in per cent of the image with values ranging from O left down to 100 right up X Size These settings alter the size of the shape i e its width x size and height y size in percent of the Y Position ERD shape Values range from O to 200 X Shape Currently without function Y Shape Softness Adjusts the softness feathering of the shape All shapes will be adjusted Values range from O no feathering to 100 full feathering 7 54 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 13 The Operator 6 Vector CC The 6 Vector
99. file directory to the contents area of the bin with the help of the mouse fe You can also drop the file directory on a folder in the folder area of the bin e g the root folder 4 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 8 COVAA MC xyz project_O5 scene T Jee Ay File Edit iew Favorites Tools Help DLE Folders Name Size Type a E Hollywood o0000 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E Hollywood 00001 yuv 4 050KB YUV File Rtsatend intemal fran E Hollywood 00002 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E Holywood o0003 yuv 4 050KB YUV File 3 Hollywood 00004 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E Hollywood 00005 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E Hollywood 00006 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E Hollywood 00007 yuv 4 050KB YUV File a project_06 E Hollywood 00008 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E project _07 S Hollywood 00009 yuv 4 050KB YUV File a project _08 3 Hollywood 00010 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project_09 S Hollywood 00011 yuv 4 050KB YUN File a project_10 E Hollywood 00012 yuv 4 050KB YUV File a project_11 x B Holywood 00013 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File sl Address v iNm_xyz project_05 scene_1 Figure 4 7 Drag and drop of clip to bin You may select more than one directory e g with the Ctrl key pressed and drag them to the contents area of the bin The respective clips will all be added to the bin With video if you select another file than the first frame file in a video directory the scrub bar
100. file frame numbering can be configured with the name i options items see section Name Options on page 6 87 Normally the count will start with 0 with the amount of digits depending on the amount of frames to be finalized The Timeline The matching audio files will be stored in these subdirectories as well meaning the audio files will be appropriately cut to match the length of video stored in this folder The place holder lt Channels gt in the file names of the audio files above indicates the selected audio channels of the area Channels when individual mono or stereo files are created Then for each enabled check box one file will be created When a file with multiple channels is generated the lt Channels gt place holder will be left out When video still image sequence or audio clips are finalized or record ed an additional file with the name SequenceInfo xm1 is created in the main directory of the clip It is used by the DVS software to enable a recognition of multi clips with different Files per folder settings for example during a drag and drop procedure to the bin z For further information about multi clips see section Details Li about Clips on page 4 10 S If a container format is selected as the file format the file will be stored in the main directory i e under Clip 6 7 6 Name Options In the DVS software you can receive during a finalizing variable information in file names
101. file where the in point should be set and add it to the bin The scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail will be set accordingly e After that simply select the clip and drag it either to the control area or a video or audio track of the timeline to start your editing work The Edit Tool will use the selected inpoint as the starting point of your clip if this feature is enabled However if you drag a video clip from the bin to the control area of the Edit Tool the software switches to the The Tool Area source edit mode where you can select the in and outpoint of the clip frame accurately before adding it to the timeline see section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 18 Changing the Properties of Clips In the bin you can call up the properties of clips Then you can for ex ample assign flags to clips or change their properties such as their names or video formats Use the opening window to change the clip s properties if the DVS software does not recognize its video or audio for mat correctly e Call up the context menu on a clip present in the contents area of the bin and select the menu option Properties This will open the Clip properties window where you can change the clip s properties 7n Some clip properties can only be altered if the clip is not already i present in the timeline Furthermore the properties of audio multi clips can only be changed by individually altering the properties of each audio cl
102. filters selected J via the combo box Filter With the Rotation slider and its entry field at the bottom of the settings pane you can rotate the clip full circle 180 By dragging the slider to the left or entering a negative value in the entry field you can rotate the image counter clockwise and by dragging the slider to the right or en tering positive values you can rotate the image clockwise Slider Entry Field Slider Movement Seet ein Values left negative right positive i If a clip is rotated the clip has to be prerendered prior to a play page 6 42 Rotation out see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on The check box Keyframing activates keyframing for this RRR mA effect Further information about this can be found in section Keyframing on page 7 21 7 20 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 8 Keyframing For effects there may be keyframing available It allows you to use the effect on a clip s timeline with definable points of settings keyframes With this you can easily configure for instance smooth transitions be tween these effect s settings for example to fade in the effect during a play out of the clip This feature is available for zooming and panning see section The Operator Zoom Pan on page 7 16 For a description how to activate it please refer to the section of the above mentioned effect Once activate
103. following e Call up the context menu on an entry in the effects pane and select the menu option Load all presets This will open the standard dialog window for the selection of a file 4 31 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 32 e In the dialog window select the file that contains the desired set tings from the list box or enter its name in the respective entry field File extensions xml Effects file cp Project file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file e Once the appropriate file is selected confirm your choice with the button OPEN The preset effects available in the file will now be added to the effects pane In case the effects pane already contains preset effects they are not deleted but will remain there while the new preset effects will be added Sorting Default and Preset Effects The default effects as well as preset effects can be sorted You can sort them in descending or ascending order If your project contains a lot of preset effects this may make it easier for you to find an individual ef fect To sort the effects do the following e Simply click on the title bar Available Operators above the effects pane with the mouse This switches between a descending and ascending order of the effects tree as well as of all effects visible in the effects pane DVS The Tool Area 4 4 Jobs The tab Jobs details infor
104. for a play out nor can they be deleted via the software In such a case they have to be deleted manually again A 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide A 26 Index Numerics VD LUT eeniteevectvacieeediaecndts 7 31 A 16 BID eden EE E 1 6 3D LUT siccstseiete nr ecaseeiees 6 18 A 17 color cube nsss 6 20 A 18 description n n A 17 enable eet cteeectee eect eee 6 21 TUG ocdcenchicsnusciedecetcecasetexeuieness 6 20 file syntax eocaneotectedcesetes A 18 A 20 finalizing o ae 6 81 logarithmic color space 6 20 profile warcreistareviyecacioscps snes 6 19 visualization a se 6 20 Cs See eee rE arrei 2 11 4 22 6 vector color correction 7 10 7 55 alpha channel n n 7 56 RUN EE E 7 55 IOW a eee ee E O ee 7 55 A about the software sesen 9 27 action safety areas eeen 5 2 activating proxies 4 23 9 22 add clip to in ccscecccscessceeceeseee 3 4 4 6 9 6 to timeline cc eee 3 7 6 2 to timeline certain length 6 38 add EDL to DIN scce 8 6 8 41 9 6 to timeline n on 8 10 8 56 AIV loca ea tetas 6 13 6 17 ALE svicceciavdrinteoreriesiectieneestetvertedee A 1 ALE file ieseseseeteccees 8 6 8 7 9 6 clipwise rendering scsesscsissndacees 6 79 EXPONE cesera a a 9 7 l l I l naming convention ec 8 6 alpha channel 7 39 7 47 7 54 of video clip neeese 6 59 6 68 AMOdE cinereo 8 13 A 1 analog output settings c 6 12 AUdIO so
105. format This settings group will be available right after initiating the export Se lect from the combo box Format the format of the data list to be ex ported Settings Group Media for export When the settings group Media for export is selected you can choose and configure the media that should be exported The Menus Export as amp name x Video x Audio x Gaps as black clips Transitions mod lt eep transitions Range Cancel Figure 9 5 Media for export settings Video An activated check box determines that video should be part of the data list Then the video of the selected EDL or the contents of the video track selected via the combo box to the right will be ex ported If exporting from the conforming tool no track can be selected When exporting the time line the combo box will display only those tracks where content is available and only one video track can be chosen for an export Audio An activated check box determines that audio should be part of the data list Then the audio of the selected EDL or the contents of the audio tracks selected via the combo box es to the right will be exported If exporting from the conforming tool no track can be selected When exporting the timeline you can add additional combo boxes via the button H to include more tracks in the data list However the combo box es will display only those tracks where content is available
106. from the sorting order list In case the check box of this setting is deactivated the events on the tab EDL Clips will be captured in the sequence that the table is sorted by Speed effects of the EDL to be captured must be rendered meaning im age files may be omitted or created anew according to the specified speed To receive speed effects the check box Render speed effects has to be activated The Apply to setting allows you to limit the capturing You can perform it either on all clips of an EDL or on a selection of clips reels A selection can be specified either when the EDL is available in the timeline see section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 or in the conforming mode see section The Conforming Mode in General on page 8 26 When everything is set as desired and confirmed with the OK button a batch list of the events to be captured will be created and the DVS software switches to the batch record mode of the I O Tool The batch list will be displayed in the capture list table of the I O Tool ready to be captured the record path or how to initiate the record operation see the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide As soon as the capturing is finished you can switch back to the Edit Tool of the DVS software and find the clips of the EDL already linked to the newly recorded material i For further information about how to adapt the capturing e g Create in TL This button creates and build
107. gap is indicated by a red line in the timeline scale If this occurs you can move the clip easily to the beginning of the timeline with a double click of the mouse on the timeline scale see sec tion Moving Clips in the Timeline on page 3 10 i If the clip is released somewhere in the video track a gap part e Now add the second clip of the bin to the timeline clip B If clip B is dropped in the middle of clip A in the video track clip A will be divided and the rest of it will move to the end of the timeline _ This behavior can be changed via the button INSERT This but li ton switches between the insert and the overwrite mode of the Edit Tool In the overwrite mode the rest of the clip or at least the contents of clip A with the length of clip B would be over written For the rest of this tutorial we suppose that this has happened and that clip A is divided into two by inserting clip B in the middle of it Audio clips can be dragged from the bin to the audio tracks of i the timeline area If the audio clips incorporate more than one mono or stereo channel the additional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one If you drag a clip from the bin to the control area of the Edit Tool the software switches to the source edit mode where you can select the in and outpoint of the clip frame accurately be fore adding it to the timeline Once everything is set
108. in the entry fields to the right either in frames or timecode notation can be switched with the combo boxes When confirmed with the OK button the pre post rolls will be added as clips showing black images in front and or behind each clip in the timeline Once set they can be adjusted easily by applying this function again with different settings i e they will be adjusted not doubled This way they can also be removed from the timeline Either set them to a length of zero 0 or deactivate their check boxes After this the pre post rolls will be removed from the timeline Update linking With this button you can check the Online statuses of the EDL clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 i e you can check if the material that is linked to these clips is still available on the storage If inconsistencies are found you will receive the following error mes sage Update linking The link of s its and their conforming A V clips is no longer valid The status o wing clips is Offline again lt list of clips gt Figure 8 40 Error message of inconsistencies in source material The error message provides you with a detailed list of all clips that could not be verified Afterwards all inconsistent clips will be set to the status Offline and must be conformed again 8 59 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 7 Conforming Mode The Preview Area With the conforming mode of the Edit
109. mode as well You can also change in and outpoints of clips with their re spective representations in the timeline directly see section Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 44 As soon as two clips are present in the video track s of the timeline the trim mode can be activated via its button from the controls see section Controls on page 5 15 Then the control area changes its appear ance and you will see something like the following Figure 5 22 The trim mode When the trim mode is activated the Edit Tool will automatically jump to the nearest cutting point of the timeline and the timeline cursor will be positioned there accordingly If the timeline cursor is positioned on another cutting point than the desired one move it to the correct one with the respective controls EEEE EE or key A S on your key board In this mode you cannot move inside the project as usual The i timeline cursor is restricted to the location of cutting points only The control area in the trim mode shows then the two clips adjacent to the selected cutting point The left overlay shows the outpoint and the PVs The Control Area last frame of the clip left to the cut transition while the right one dis plays the inpoint and first frame of the clip to the right If in and outpoints were already trimmed for your clips you will see the determined in and outpoints in this mode The se lected
110. monitor connected to the digital video interfaces of the DVS system The Edit Tool supports 3D look up tables from various suppliers such as ARRI or Kodak To apply a 3D LUT you have to load its file first and create a profile for it Afterwards the loaded 3D LUT file has to be en abled for the DVS software The 3D LUT support of the DVS software is an optional fea i ture Depending on the configuration of your DVS system it may not be available 6 18 PVs The Timeline Via the SETTINGS button you can access the items to load a 3D LUT file into the Edit Tool It is located at the top left side of the timeline area After pressing this button the Time line output settings window is displayed At the bottom of this window you can find the Options area where further optional settings are provided To the right you can find the set tings items to load a 3D LUT file The other items available in the Options area are explained in i their respective sections see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 section Further Audio Con figurations on page 6 17 and section Cropping the Time line on page 6 21 Video Cropping a Cropping i 3D LUT Video 3D LUT _ SD LUT management Audio Scrubbing x Monitoring Figure 6 17 Items to load a 3D LUT file After clicking on the button 3D LUT a window opens to load a 3D LUT file and create a profile for it 3D L
111. of Spycer you can check the state of copy processes and if required resume them For an improved performance it is recommended to upgrade each Spycer stand alone application involved in the conforming process to version 1 4 3 2 or higher 8 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 2 First Steps to Make a Conforming This section describes the first and recommended approach to a con forming with the Edit Tool It will be described how to add EDLs to your project how to build up a timeline as well as how to set up and perform the conforming Usually when everything is set correctly and the points listed in section Important Notes on page 8 3 are observed the con forming will be successful In the software as well as this manual data lists that can be i handled by the DVS software may also be referred to as EDLs i e implying not the standard but the term edit decision list in general 8 2 1 Importing and Adding EDLs 8 6 EDLs can be used very easily in the Edit Tool They just have to be im ported and added to the bin of the Edit Tool To do this you can use the same procedures as to add a clip to the bin see section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 6 However instead of being available in the contents area of the bin EDLs will be added to the folder area When adding an EDL this way you have to observe where to i add the EDL An EDL can only be imported to a standard folder
112. option Re solve Multiple found clip in section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 Found results Name 0 Audio resolution Resolution 19 30 pixel Audio samplerate Color depth 10 File format Colormode Te File path Aspect ratio 9 File name Framerate 29 97 Duration Audio channels Name i Audio resolution Resolution 19 30 pixel Audio samplerate Color depth 10 5 File format A Colormode iK File path Aspect ratio 9 File name Framerate 29 97 Duration Audio channels Name 2 Audio resolution ne Resolution ixe Audio samplerate Color depth its File format Quic Colormode ae File path iv T Image v Figure 8 46 Multiple search results in preview area 8 67 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Via the combo box at the bottom left of the preview area you can con figure the appearance of the displayed clips i e whether they should be displayed as thumbnails with text or with their text information only By selecting one of the clips in the thumbnail view the thumbnail pro vides as usual in the DVS software a scrub bar which allows you to pre view the material in still images see also section Preparing Clips for Editing Purposes on page 4 20 With this you may be able to identify the clip that belongs to the selected event more easily Once the correct clip has been found you have to select it in the pre view area and press the button ASSIGN at the bottom right of the
113. particular RGB value of an image s pixel is not directly de scribed through a node it has to be interpolated The RGB nodes can be placed in a spatial graph cube Any input RGB value will be de scribed by a set of surrounding RGB nodes Undefined example 768 448 256 832 448 256 input value 420 22 alae 3 8 768 448 192 B 76 8 384 256 832 384 256 R 768 384 192 832 384 192 Figure A 1 Surrounding RGB nodes of an undefined input value With the known look up output values of these eight RGB nodes the required R G B value can be calculated interpolated A 5 2 3DL Files A 3d1 LUT file is a plain ASCII text file that has to match the follow ing properties Lines starting with a hash are comments and will not be evalu ated PVs Appendix The first uncommented line defines the input values RGB nodes i e the bit depth e g if the end value is 1023 than 10 bit and the number of nodes All following lines provide the output values R G B for one RGB node Each following line consists of three values R G B The separation is made by spaces You have to define all 173 x 3 values and the triplets have to be in ascending order The values have to be stated according to the bit depth between zero 0 and lt end value of RGB nodes gt After some comments for example about the file and its values the file starts with the input values The
114. parts of the scrub bars will be shown in light grey while the deselected parts are shown in dark grey Above each overlay you can find further information about the clip Be side the name of each clip as it is present in the bin you can get infor mation about the clips in and outpoint on the timeline or if applicable about the type of transition that is applied to the cutting point With transition applied Transition types lt clip 1IN gt lt clip 1 gt lt clip 1 OUT gt lt clip 2 IN gt lt clip 2 gt lt clip 2 OUT gt overlay left overlay right Hard cut Cut lt clip 1 IN gt lt clip 1 gt lt cut clip 2 IN gt lt clip 2 gt lt clip 2 OUT gt overlay left overlay right Figure 5 23 In and outpoint information of a cutting point in trim mode The in and outpoint information are provided either in timecode or in frames depending on the selected notation for the Edit Tool see section Configuring the Timeline Scale on page 6 9 5 6 1 The Trim Controls In addition to the in and outpoint information and the overlays where you can see the end and start frame of the clips the control area in the 5 29 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 30 trim mode provides the following elements to control a trimming frame accurately Items Description Blue bar The blue bar between the two overlays represents the cut between the two clips It can be selected with
115. performance monitor is dis Currently this button provides no functionality The Tool Area DYVSInto 4 6 3 The Status Bar The slider to the right of the UPDATE button deter mines the viewing resolution of the chart When pulled to the left you will receive a higher resolu tion The bars displayed in the chart will get thinner and more bars will be displayed in the chart When pulled to the right the bars will get thicker and fewer bars will be visible In case of problems with your DVS system you may get asked by the DVS service department to create and generate log files Then you may use the but ton DVSINFO to store the most important informa tion in one file in ASCII format The file name of the log file will be requested_dvsinfo_ lt sys tem time gt txt with the lt system time gt added in the format yyyy mm dd_hh mm ss It will be stored in the subfolder dvsinfoin the log directory in the application data path of the current user SAPPDATA DVS Clipster for the actual location type in at a command line echo SAPPDATA then press Enter lt 7 When exiting the DVS software a DVS in i formation file without requested_ in front of the file name is by default written to the stated location Only the last ten files will be stored The button RESET enables you to set the indication about how many frames were processed total and how many drops occurred during this time at the top right side of t
116. performance monitor is set to the overall file I O workload set ting the chart indicates the overall workload of the system during a timed interval 40 ms Figure 4 21 Chart of performance monitor overall file I O workload With this setting you can find at the top left of the chart the value of the last multi threaded operation It details in certain intervals during operation the workload of all threads in percent i e the value of one bar in the chart At the top right of the chart you can find an indication about how many frames were processed total and how many drops occurred during this time When operating the system s workload is displayed via blue bars in the chart The bars may well reach the 100 line during an operation which does not necessarily mean that a drop may occur soon It simply shows that all threads of the software were processing continuously at that point of time and that no thread was idle Drops exceed the work load of the system shown in the chart They are displayed as bars in red that are cut at the top The Chart in Individual File I O Duration If the performance monitor is set to the individual file I O duration setting the chart of the performance monitor shows the access times of single files which is especially useful when the system is operating in 4 39 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs the single threaded I O mode If used in the multi threaded I O mode the
117. process it further with the conforming mode of the Edit Tool see section The Conforming Mode in General on page 8 26 8 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 2 2 Building up a Timeline Normally the goal of a conforming process is to have a timeline of the imported EDL properly conformed in the timeline tracks of the Edit Tool ready for further processing For this you have to build up a time line of the EDL in the timeline area of the Edit Tool e Select the EDL in the folder area of the bin and drag and drop it with the mouse into a video audio track of the timeline area It can be dropped anywhere you want A timeline of the EDL can also be built up with the button i CREATE IN TL of the conforming mode see section Conforming Mode The Conforming Controls on page 8 41 To build up an FCP XML file you have to use one of its se quence folders sorted under the main folder Perform Slave Figure 8 3 Drag and drop of EDL to timeline When the mouse button is released a window similar to the following will be displayed on the screen The Conforming Tool li Create in timeline Name General Settings Video Audio Position Creation mode Further options Transition mode Figure 8 4 Dial Creating an ED project_30 stding to destination TC A by Destination TC IN x E kd x v v According to EDL Create Cancel og window
118. project in a different storage location Further information about this can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 Once the render operations are finished their entries will disappear from the list of the Jobs tab Afterwards you can begin to work with the proxies They will be already activated in the bin and ready for use After a proxy generation save your project file If an already AN saved project file is not saved again after creating proxies the proxy files will not be recognized by the Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more Neither will they be used for the project nor can they be deleted via the software They have to be deleted manually see section Cleaning Tempo rary Data Manually on page A 24 For further information about the Jobs tab see section Jobs i on page 4 33 9 4 6 Delete all proxies When you are finished with your editing work using the proxies you might want to dispose of them i e delete them from the storage For 9 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs this select the menu option Delete all proxies on the Bin menu It will delete all proxies that were created for the current project menu option Delete proxy on the context menu of a clip in Mzn In case you want to delete a single proxy only you can use the the bin Further information about proxies in general and their handling can be found in section Work
119. range from 100 to 100 7 35 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs The check box Hold B W allows you to hold the black and white points of the image When it is activated a gamma correction will be per formed between adjusted black and white points With the check box deactivated the black and white points will be disregarded and a gam ma correction will be made on the full value range of the image s color channels instead Example To see the effect of the check box Hold B W lower the black and white points of an image for example by flattening its contrast set to a negative value Afterwards adjust the gamma of one of the col ors with the sliders for gamma Once this is set you can see the effect of the check box in the video overlay and in an RGB parade immediately see section The Video Scopes on page 5 3 When activated a color correction will be per formed between the limited black and white points only when deac tivated the adjusted black and white points will not be observed 7 10 5 Color Wheel To the right of the settings pane you can find a color wheel It contains the colors according to their hue and saturation HSL color space and additionally indicates all color components RGB and CMY With the hues set on the rim of the circle the distance from the circle s center de termines the saturation of the respective color The color distribution in a color wheel is the same
120. respective controls EEEE EE of the control area see section Controls on page 5 15 The appearance of timeline markers can be configured to your i liking with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide A list of all markers positioned in the timeline is available via the tab Markers of the tool area see section The Marker Table on page 4 34 This section explains how to set and use markers Marker Types Currently there is only one type of marker available for the timeline Timeline Marker The default marker type for the timeline Markers of the type Timeline Marker can also be used to i show where drops occurred during a real time operation If this happens they can be easily placed via the performance monitor of the DVS software Afterwards they will be indicating the po sition of the drops that occurred see section The Performance Monitor on page 4 36 6 49 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs How to Set Timeline Markers Manually Markers of the type Timeline Marker can be manually placed in the timeline of the Edit Tool For this perform the following e Move the timeline cursor to the position where the marker should be set e After this select the button MARK available in the user interface of the Edit Tool Alternatively you can also use the menu option Add Mark ij er on the context menu of the timeline scale This
121. returning to the window Show Hide handles the maximum lengths of the handles that can be set for the clips in the timeline will be indicated in the entry field of the set ting Handles as With this applied the showing hiding of handles can be performed without causing a further warning Add pre post roll This function adds black clips in front and or behind each clip in the timeline These can be used as pre post rolls for the clips of an EDL for instance when recording them back on tape again The black clips that are inserted are generated virtually from a single black image add ed to the main storage of your system The clips also provide virtual source timecodes matching the source timecodes of the clips they pre cede or follow in the timeline see section About Source Timecode on page 2 16 When adding pre post rolls transitions will be replaced by i hard cuts However they can be restored again by selecting the menu option Undo on the Edit menu see section The Edit Menu on page 9 17 A click on this button opens the following window Add pre amp post roll x Pre amp post roll settings X Pre roll Frames v 10 x Post roll Frames F10 Cancel Figure 8 39 Adding pre post rolls The Conforming Tool By activating the check boxes to the left you can decide whether pre or post rolls or both should be added to the clips in the timeline Their lengths can be entered
122. rf64 Broadcast wave format Platform indepen wav dent file format for sound Extension of the Wave format capable of storing multiple mono or stereo channels together with metadata and enabling file sizes of more than 4 GB Wave wav File format for digital audio waveform data under Windows Capable of storing multiple mono or stereo channels CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 4 1D LUT Files A one dimensional look up table 1D LUT file defines values for color and or gamma correction Depending on the color depth for each in put value the file specifies an output value for each color component and the alpha channel key It is a plain ASCII text file that has to match the following properties Lines starting with a hash are comments and will not be evalu ated There is a designated line designated with the color depth for the four color component values RGBA For example for 10 bit video data the lines will start with zero 0 and end with 1023 Each designated line consists of four values RGBA The separation is made via tabulators TAB The LUT file has to provide 1024 x 5 input output values as used in 10 bit video mode If you work with 8 bit video data only every fourth value will be used from the LUT The values have to be in incrementing order The color component values have to be stated as floating point val ues between zero 0 and one 1 After some comments for example
123. s online help 1 6 PVs Introduction 1 4 Important Notes Please observe the following while using the Edit Tool gt be gt Only use the designated video drive main storage to store video and audio data Other storage locations will be too slow for real time operations Leave about 15 of the overall main storage capacity empty of data for real time performance reasons The real time capability of CLIPSTER depends to a large ex tent on the performance of the system s hardware Therefore it is recommended to terminate all other programs when working with the DVS software After copying or recording large amounts of data to the main storage it is recommended to leave the DVS software running for a longer period of time e g over night without perform ing any real time tasks play out or record or having the slave mode VTR task mode activated This will give the built in de fragmentation tool time to reorganize the files on the storage for an optimized real time performance For this the automat ic starting of the defragmentation tool has to be enabled Your DVS system has been tested thoroughly and is very reli able However because of the vast amount of third party software available its reactions on the installation of such could not be tested The installation of third party software may disrupt the real time capability and or limit the function ality of your system 1 7 CLIP
124. section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 so that it is synchronized with the contents of the built up EDL With this done you can activate the split screen function For a comparison with an offline edited clip it is also possible to i recreate edit points Further information about this can be found in section Recreating Edit Points for an Offline Edited Clip on page 8 66 DVS The Conforming Tool e On the video overlay of the preview area call up the context menu and activate the menu option Split screen see section The Video Overlay on page 8 61 After this the video overlay will show you the contents of the two video tracks i e the two of the highest priority for a vertical editing that pro vide contents video track with z P lower priority laine T 9 video track with higher priority Timeline Figure 8 43 Split screen In the bottom left part of the video overlay you can find the contents of the video track with the higher priority In our demonstration here it is the low resolution video material added to the second video track of the timeline At the top right the original video material is displayed i e the contents of the EDL built up in the first video track lower priority Because the EDL material is already linked to high resolution content and the video format of the timeline is set appropriately its size does not match the size of the low resolution clip To chang
125. software are currently processing and no thread is idle The Tool Area If drops occur they will be entered in the drop table of the performance monitor and red bars will appear in the chart Then please proceed as follows e Check the position of the drops on the video timeline by double clicking entries individually or by selecting the MARK ALL button of the table controls e Afterwards perform the play out operation and the checking of the drop positions again e Then compare the results and confront them with the following table Marker Timeline ee Probable Cause Solution Position Element At certain On video clip s Material at certain Check the material on the storage and position s or transitions frames faulty replace the faulty files After this the problem should be resolved Atrandom Within certain The material has a res Finalize the timeline to a format that video clips olution that is too high can be handled in real time see sec tion Finalizing the Timeline on page 6 76 After this the problem should be resolved The storage location is not real time capable Move the material to a real time capa ble storage The storage location where the material is stored is too full It is recommended to use only 85 of the overall storage capacity If the storage is too full delete some of the data On transition s Timeline material has a resolutio
126. table ccinisactsinensccssesentacitencsaicas 4 34 of clip sesse 4 21 6 57 6 71 thumbnail oiccen 4 35 of EDE cnonn ennai 8 7 8 31 YDES sanirati 6 49 Of TACKS ciriaisissesexisavenavenavonayas 6 25 marking of clips n 4 13 name options finalizing 6 87 master OCK sess acenesducsardeazedanstwnie 6 34 new master mute cecce 6 34 DiN eae erent ete eee 9 19 matching a frame 64 6 57 6 60 folder nosccsccccererreee 4 8 4 15 maximizing control area overlay 5 2 PIQICCU aed icetenscivin i n nias 9 3 MENU bal ccc ccceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 7 9 1 next cutting point 5 17 8 63 help eiere ieren 2 10 NO thumbnails gt scineccscvsndaeasssacssmenencs 6 9 program ICON s cteresicctanssssttsaecans 9 27 NONE sisirin oitenta oireina 8 35 IMIG e sac tonacuect te eS eke tse 2 7 37 NOLES daan aa 1 7 8 3 minimizing the user interface 9 2 project management 2 14 mirroring the video image 7 10 7 30 number of tracks n 6 7 missing frames 4 38 4 39 6 60 8 22 9 19 o mixing audio cecce 6 16 mode Offline 8 24 8 32 8 33 8 48 Conforming 20 2272 2 ckactests 2 7 5 15 offset CCIE a insvesnesstessescaxeite 2 7 5 1 5 15 EDL event ceecee 8 37 fine tuning seeen 3 8 6 36 EDL reel cccccceceseeceeeeeeeeees 8 39 NSE ossstsccacesiacnans 3 8 6 31 6 36 export EDL 22 4 2 dsduaceessecasceeders 9 11 overwrite n s 3 8 6 32 6 36 frame number finalizing
127. table in section The Drop Table on page 4 42 table controls Via the table controls you can either save the results shown in the drop table to a file or set markers in the timeline of the Edit Tool where the respective drop took place They are in detail explained in section The Table Controls on page 4 43 If the chart controls the drop table as well as the table controls are dimmed the performance monitor is turned off Then in the status bar the message Performance Monitor disabled will be displayed To mea sure the workload of the system with the performance monitor it has to be enabled via the Configuration Tool of the DVS software see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information 2 The DVS software is able to process several different image i files simultaneously multi threaded I O mode Therefore x one bar drawn in the chart may represent several file accesses Although the multi threaded I O mode is the recommended mode for the DVS software it can be set to a single threaded I O mode via a setting available in the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide As soon as the software is started the performance monitor will write by default a drop report into the subdirectory drop_reports under the directory log in the application data path of the current user SAPPDATA DVS Clipster for the actual location type in ata command line echo APPDATA then press Enter
128. the DVS software and thus the Edit Tool the bin is by de fault activated in the tool area If the bin is not displayed in the tool area of the Edit Tool select the tab Bin to activate it Then the area will look similar to the following figure Markers Perform title bar e FES a folder area e contents area e button area e um Figure 4 4 The bin With the bin you can perform a clip and project management by creat ing folders and sorting your video and audio material into them Fur thermore you can preview your material via thumbnails and select a preliminary inpoint for the respective clip For this the bin provides the following elements Most areas or items of the bin provide a context menu to make the various functions of the bin available to the user title bar With the title bar you can change the layout of the bin or sort your created folders present in the folder area folder area In the folder area you can create folders to sort and structure your video and audio material This way you can perform a clip and project management 4 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs contents area In the contents area you can see the video or audio material already added to the bin and sorted into the folders via their thumbnails or text information If the thumbnail view is activated a scrub bar to preview your material in still images and to set roughly the inpoint of t
129. the Edit Tool see section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 18 However after clips or other time line elements are added to the timeline you still have the possibility at hand to change their in and outpoints There are two ways to change the in and outpoints of timeline ele ments already added to the timeline 1 You can change the in and outpoint of adjacent clips to a cutting point via the trim mode of the Edit Tool or 2 you can change the in and outpoints manually in the timeline track directly Both procedures are detailed in this section ing of in and outpoints in the timeline tracks can be used for all timeline elements i e video clips audio clips and embedded operators e g transitions iJ While the trim mode is used for video material only the chang For a frame accurate trimming of the in and outpoints you may also use the appropriate keyboard shortcuts after the se lection of the in outpoint handler see also section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 7 They can be used in the trim mode of the control area as well as in the timeline of the Edit Tool How to Change In Outpoints with the Trim Mode With the trim mode of the Edit Tool you can change the in and out point of adjacent video clips to a cutting point You can activate the trim The Timeline mode with its button from the controls of the Edit Tool JE see section Controls on page 5 15 When the trim mode is
130. the Unlimited setting only when you are sure that your rendering causes less than 20 000 frames 6 85 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 86 With the files per folder items set to 20 000 our examples given in sec tion Configuring Video on page 6 79 and section Configuring Au dio on page 6 83 would lead to the following output on the storage when as the video output format the dpx file format were selected and for audio the wav file format tempest act05 scene dl _ Clip m Clip 0000 m Clip _0000000 dpx m Clip _0000001 dpx m Clip m Clip _ 0019999 dpx LW Clip lt Channels gt 0 wav m Clip 0001 H Clip 0020000 dpx H Clip 0020001 dpx m Clip LW Clip lt Channels gt 1 wav me Clp rus L SequenceInfo xml In the path V tempest act05 scene01 a directory will be creat ed carrying the name Clip Beneath it a subdirectory will be created with the name Clip_0000 In this subdirectory the first 20 000 frames of the finalizing will be stored The file name of the first frame of your rendered timeline will be Clip_0000000 dpx The number in the file name will increase by one with every generated frame file frame number If the 20 000th frame is reached the Edit Tool will again create a subdirectory Clip_0001 in the selected path and start the generation of the next 20 000 frames and so on until the project is rendered completely ac cording to your settings The
131. the clip clip A is added to the timeline However its counterpart in the bin is neither removed nor deleted It will remain there for future use so that you can add the clip or other parts of it to the timeline again The video clip will be placed at the position of the mouse pointer where the mouse button is released However when the mouse pointer reach es certain elements on the timeline the added clip will automatically 3 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 8 align itself to these elements in our example here to the beginning of the timeline This behavior is called the snapping mode of the Edit Tool sition clips in the timeline It reacts not only to the starting point of the timeline but also to the in and outpoint of clips the po sition of the timeline cursor or the set in and outpoint of the timeline You can disable the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key i The snapping mode is a very useful feature if you want to po While the starting point of the clip its position and inpoint within the timeline is set during the drag and drop procedure by the position of the mouse pointer its outpoint is usually defined by the length of the clip However all these attributes can be changed easily after clips were added to the timeline their position within the timeline as well as their in and outpoints of the timeline without contents may appear in the timeline A
132. the mouse and when moving the mouse cur sor to the left or right you can trim the out and inpoint of the two clips adjacent to the cutting point simultaneously Thereby you will extend the length of one clip while shortening the length of the other at the same time With this kind of trim ming the total timeline length is maintained The out and inpoint handlers can be selected and moved with the mouse to set the out or inpoint of the clips The counters below the timelines of the clips dis play the length of the clips in timecode or frames notation calculated from the set in and outpoint handlers These are the other in and outpoints of the clips They cannot be selected and moved To adjust them you have to jump to their respective cutting points Out The OuT and IN buttons are toggle buttons In their active state i the respective in or outpoint is selected for a trim ming The OuT button selects the outpoint of the clip to the left side of the cutting point The IN but ton selects the inpoint of the clip to its right Then the respective in or outpoint can be changed with the controls below them The OuT and IN buttons will change their i state automatically when one of the trimming items above is selected directly for a trimming e g when you select the blue bar or one of the in or outpoint handlers PVs The Control Area Items Description The two entry f
133. the right because the scrub bar cursor will be placed accordingly Additionally the respective clip used in the time line will be marked and visible in the bin to facilitate the identification of the source material Further information about the source edit mode can be found in section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 18 Afterwards you have the possibility at hand to transfer the selected im age or the complete image sequence to another application for fur 6 61 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs ther processing see section Processing the Source Material of a Video Clip on page 5 25 To switch the control area back to its edit mode use the appropriate button of the control area E 6 5 5 Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element 6 62 The Edit Tool provides two ways to export either the original source ma terial or a copied version of it to a third party application of your choice You can export video data visible in the source edit mode of the Edit Tool or you can export video data that is available in the timeline to an other application This way you can process the source material of a video clip further and afterwards use it again in the DVS software with out any difficulty This section describes how to process source material when a video clip was already added to the timeline of the Edit Tool The export of source material that is visible in the source edit i mode of the Edit Tool
134. the work area see e g section Select on page 8 44 you can use this combo box to switch between a view of the selected elements only or of all elements PVs The Conforming Tool This allows you for example to perform tasks on the selected elements only e g printing see section Print on page 8 42 8 6 3 The Modify Controls The following describes the controls that allow you to modify EDLs or their elements Slip source TC Combine Slip source KC Reconform Remove from TL Accept changes Set status to offline Figure 8 28 The modify controls Setup This button allows you to set up and configure the currently selected EDL After pressing it the same window will be displayed as during the adding of an EDL to the bin see section Importing and Adding EDLs on page 8 6 Depending on the state of the EDL e g if it is already con formed and or built up in the timeline some settings items may not be available Additionally when working on an EDL that is already partially conformed changing the configurations will affect events with the status Offline only Combine With this button you can combine EDLs available in this project to a sin gle EDL It opens the following window 8 45 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 46 Combine Select EDLs to be combined C pro j e ct_3 0 The order of EDLs in the table above defines the orde
135. to configure the EDL creation in the timeline L twice in the timeline will duplicate it in the bin and timeline However if the first created EDL exists only par tially in the tim ing you wheth eline a dialog window appears beforehand ask er you want to duplicate the EDL or re create the missing clips By default newly added clips EDLs will be added for video in the next higher video track gt no 1 and for audio in the lowest audio tracks gt no 16 Anyhow this can be adjusted freely with the settings items described below This window allows you to configure the creation of the EDL in the timeline It provides the following settings items Item Description Name This field shows you the name of the EDL as it is available in the bin Video Determines in which video track to add the vid eo stream of the EDL With only one video stream available the video track can be selected freely with the entry field to the right 8 11 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Item Description Audio Determines in which audio track to add the au dio of the EDL To the left the possible audio streams of an EDL are detailed A lt x gt These can be assigned to audio tracks of the Edit Tool with the entry fields to the right An activated button between two audio streams configures them to stereo Then when these streams are detailed for an audio clip in the EDL a stereo
136. to see the effects immediately because it will always show the exact content of the outgoing signal iJ The selected SDI output raster is applied to the video overlay After pressing the button SETTINGS the following window will be dis played on the screen The Timeline r 3 3 Timeline output settings ix Name Timeline1 pm PREP E el Output DVVAnalog Format SD HD Film Other utic a Type Rat c PTE Full Internal Pulldown T T T T T T T iT ty APT T T iT T i T T T T Startphase 25 SMPT 74 29 97 SMPTE 274 AlV output channels TE 274 Audio auto retiming tatio wuto Original aspect ratio pping Cropping LUT 3D LUT ubbing Monitoring Cancel Apply Figure 6 12 Window to set the output settings As a standard after selecting the video format settings the SDI output configurations are displayed Use the provided items to set the video format accordingly In this window you can also set the software to an autoscaling of the material to be played out if its original resolution dif fers from the configured output raster Additionally you can determine here the amount of audio channels that will be embedded in the video signal AIV This is provided because some external devices have diffi culties when handling embedded audio that provides more than four audio channels With the tabs at the very top you can set the output format for the dif ferent ports The output vi
137. to the part you want to zoom into and press this button The graph will then display the select ed part only The graph will show the timeline s in and outpoint same as the i timeline Any deselected part will be displayed in a dimmed fashion A zooming can also be performed with the button GRAPH ZOOM Press ing this button while moving with the mouse to the right or left allows you to zoom in and out of the graph Alternatively instead of the but ton you can also use the keyboard combination Shift Ctrl then move the mouse The zooming will be made on the current viewing position In case you want to view a particular detail you can hold down the Ctrl key and draw a yellow rectangle with the mouse around it in the graph Once the mouse button is released the view of the graph will be adjusted to the width of the drawn rectangle When zoomed into the graph a scroll bar will be available at the top of the graph which allows you to change the viewing position on the graph s timeline You can also hold down the keyboard keys Shift Alt and move the mouse to the right or left to change the viewing position As long as the graph has the focus you can reverse a zooming and step between previous views on the clip s timeline with the keyboard keys Page Up and Page Down The viewing zooming can also be set back to the full view of the clip s timeline again For this you have to use the context menu of the graph
138. via the NAME OP TIONS button The name options allow you to write certain details of your files to be created to the file names automatically With them you can provide the file names with information such as the following Project name Color space File type Video format Bit depth Sampling rate Resolution Aspect ratio Date Frame rate File format Additionally with the name options you can adapt other name related options such as the numbering of the individual image files To configure the name options you have to perform the following e Click on the button NAME OPTIONS in the finalize dialog This will open the following window 6 87 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 Name options File name prefix File name et Color space gt _ a v Add Remove Modity ons not valid for container file formats Frame number m Q auto Cancel Figure 6 71 Options to configure a variable file naming To set the name options perform the following e f not already set as desired enter a file name prefix in the entry field File name e By activating or deactivating the File name extensions check box you can add variable and or static components to the file names combo box The upper combo box is used to assemble the file name extensions By positioning the cursor or marking variables separators via a double click of the mouse in this field the exte
139. video clip whose data is currently not available or an in valid clip Then wait a few seconds and give the software time to gather the data If after that the icon is still visible you have to set the properties of this clip correctly via its context menu or provide the right video material on the storage to receive a valid clip in the bin Multi clips are clips of either video or audio that are present in the bin as one clip but consist of several indi vidual clips on the storage Usually these individual clips are stored in a subdirectory each and all subdirectories are located under one main directory When adding a multi clip to the bin via a drag and drop procedure from a file manager see section Adding Clips to the Bin with a File Manager on page 4 7 you may select the main directory as a clip and add it to the bin All individual clips will then be available as one clip in the bin Even when dragged to the timeline the multi clip is handled as one clip CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs pending clip unknown Multi clips are a necessity due to file system limitations of the operating system meaning Windows may cause problems if more than 20 000 files are stored in one di rectory However the DVS software will create multi clips automatically for example during the finalizing of a project or when recording a clip with the I O Tool Then when the clip exceeds a configurable number of frames in on
140. want to apply another linking method you can work in the timeline directly Clips that could not be found will be indicated by the DVS software with the standard substitution image see section Con sistencies of Clips on page 6 59 Then you can start another autocon forming for these clips via the menu option Autoconform for example by selecting a different conforming method see section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 As well you can initiate an autoconforming and moreover edit the events of the EDL with the conforming mode of the Edit Tool There you can for instance define offsets or change the source in and out points so that the EDL matches the material on the storage For further information about this see section The Conforming Mode in General on page 8 26 If no matter what a conforming persistently fails for certain i events they can be manually referenced to source material by relinking them see section Relinking Clips on page 6 55 However then no new bin clip will be created but the proper ties of this event will be changed 8 22 PVs The Conforming Tool 8 3 Working with EDLs from the Timeline As soon as an EDL is available in the timeline see section Building up a Timeline on page 8 10 you can use the Edit Tool as usual and work with its clips on the timeline Furthermore if a conforming has been performed already you can evaluate and proce
141. will be added or subtracted from the source in and outpoints of the selected events Offset as Sets an offset value in timecode format positive timecode or negative that will be added or subtracted from the source in and outpoints of the select ed events Additionally once an option has been set you can specify the range of events that should be changed with the Apply to combo box They can be performed either on all clips of an EDL or the event s currently se lected in on the tab EDL Clips Slip source KC If keycodes are available in your EDL or cut list respectively they can be adjusted with this button in a single step It opens the following win dow Slip source keycode Offset Options QO Set new source IN KC Y KI 25 6413 4067 15 00 00 00 00 Selection Cancel Figure 8 32 Slipping keycodes This window provides you with the same possibilities as the window to slip source in and outpoints only that it adjusts keycodes For further 8 49 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs information about its settings items see section Slip source TC on page 8 48 Only the keycodes reference numbers can be altered Further information about keycodes can be found in section About Keycode on page 2 17 Accept changes When changes were applied to an EDL for example by altering their source or destination in and outpoints they will be displayed in orange o
142. window and their format refer to section About Timecode Frame i For more information about timecode frame number fields Number Fields on page 2 18 RS 422 Sony Select from the Remote protocol combo box the RS 422 protocol that should be used to control the DVS system see also section Slave Mode RS 422 Control on page A 21 in The buttons IN and OuT enable you to select an ut in outpoint directly from the current position of the timeline cursor Move the timeline cursor via the Pos field see below or its controls see below to the position that you want to set Then press the respective button and the entry field to its right will take on the selected position With an activated in or outpoint L buttons see below these buttons allow you to jump to the in outpoint directly These buttons activate the in and outpoint set in c their corresponding entry fields to the right 5 33 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 34 01 00 00 00 23 00 00 00 Pos 01 00 00 00 Frames Close To position the in and or outpoint you can also enter a particular position in the entry fields to the right directly For an activation of an in outpoint you may press Enter or use their activation but tons see above On the one hand the Pos field indicates the cur rent position of the timeline cursor for example during a play out operation of the Edit Tool s time line On the other it
143. you can drag the clip from its video overlay in the control area to the video track of the timeline PVs Getting Started 3 2 3 Changing the View of the Timeline Via the sliders below the audio tracks in the timeline area you can change the view of the tracks Figure 3 5 Timeline sliders With the left slider you can zoom in or out of the timeline keyboard shortcuts Up Arrow and Down Arrow If the slider is set to the left most point you are able to see the whole contents of the timeline When it is set more to the right you will zoom into the timeline When you have zoomed into the timeline you can change the viewing position of the timeline with the right slider You can go to the end of the timeline by pulling this slider to the right and to the beginning of the timeline by pulling it to the left Defaults group General you can set the way the Edit Tool performs a zooming on the timeline There you can set wheth er zooming should occur on the position of the timeline cursor or on the current viewing position of the timeline i Via the Configuration Tool button CONFIG or Options es For our example project we aim at having only two clips in the video track For this it is best to view the complete contents of the timeline e If appropriate use the sliders below the audio tracks in the timeline area to zoom out of your project Move the left slider to the left until you see the complete
144. you want to pronounce a color you would add more of the same color by drag ging the selectors toward the side of the circle that provides this color The button RESET sets the color wheel of the primary color correction back to its default state 7 37 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 11 The Operator 2nd Color Correction With the 2nd Color Correction operator you can adjust one color val ue in a video clip without affecting the other colors This type of color correction is often referred to as selective or secondary color correction The secondary color correction can be used for example to change the color of a shirt a car etc or to intensify those colors without influencing the rest of the clip It works similar to the blue screen effect in film and television where the blue of the background is keyed and replaced by another background image However instead of replacing the selected color with another image you can perform a color correction on it with the secondary color correction Color Correction Balance Figure 7 33 2nd color correction operator This section explains the usage and the items of the secondary color correction For this effect picture masks are available allowing you to limit i the effect of the secondary color correction to certain areas shapes in the images of a video clip see section Picture Masks on page 7 51 7 11 1 Usage of the Secondary Color Corr
145. 0 4 30 report drops 0 3 2 4 37 4 43 resetting timeline element properties 7 4 resizing of material n 6 82 resizing timeline element 6 53 resolution cceceeeeee eee eee ees 6 12 6 82 result file a gesriices ectesityaeret aih 4 43 ret M Ng occ 6 53 6 84 FOVEISE WIDE sitaiesasapidiesartinatuceds 7 9 PVG Scecsepeorsreceesdoneuenseadeeaeencncents 3 14 part of timeline aeee 5 17 RGB parade ccce 5 5 5 6 6 67 root folder bin nesese 4 16 fotat 222s oes aniridi 7 18 GGUS ocene 7 20 RS 422 eee 5 16 A 5 A 21 9 pin protocol A 1 A 21 Odetics asise A 4 A 21 protocol sace 5 33 A 1 A 4 RSX file waren eee eater aoe eine ree re wee 7 60 S safety areas 2c sessececcceacessecensrccenes 5 2 sample backward neccen 5 20 Sample count ssssssssnninnnnnrreeseeee 8 17 sample forward nsee 5 20 saturation 5 5 7 34 7 40 7 46 7 50 save DiM ene ener er earn ene eee eee 9 19 default configuration 9 25 global settings ccc 9 26 preset effects ienen 4 31 project nsccccccccecccren 9 6 9 7 scale of timeline see timeline scale scaling auto ecce 3 10 6 83 scene detection scere 6 65 edit scene markers 6 58 6 68 higher speed wccceteabcncserieazeteens 6 66 scene Marker scicesctelseracivicedeeabs 6 67 Stant eee ee 6 66 video SCOPE 2c tina ssatescutecztiesad 6 67 SESH SOUS siiicar 1 6 Aoo 2302s T A 5 audio configuration 6 18 scrub bar 2264 cctaccee
146. 00 cevctesteniiceanecees 5 5 vectorscope 75 detecvinisincstecenaneces 5 5 vertical editing ecce 6 63 A 6 video file format occ A 10 A 12 PONM AE ccecce 3 7 6 2 looped preview essees 8 63 OUTPUT iiciin enin 6 12 resolution nossen 6 12 6 82 still image format sezicsecesecsgretes A 10 thumbnail of clip ossee 4 11 vertical editing cecce 6 63 video board cceccccccrecnen 2 2 connecting the driver 9 23 driver ssssssssssessrresresrerrresrrrn 2 2 video clip ceisiai sins 6 56 A 6 see also video alpha channel conceseaaved 6 59 6 68 attach to audio 6 51 6 57 6 72 length cieiririsiissasiaakiniraE 5 24 properties 2 5 3 6 4 21 6 59 7 1 7 10 8 63 source 4 23 5 25 5 26 6 55 6 57 6 60 6 62 PMID All ccenseseetace dete ouies 4 11 video drive secacteectdecessosecvecsbsuctoeeests 1 7 video format see output format video overlay ecce 5 2 8 61 alpha channel seissestsivates 6 59 6 68 aspect ratio ccce 5 2 6 14 current job Secs sLoteereksardinetiteree 4 33 maximize enlarge cce 5 2 safety areas eeen 5 2 Ae E E cee cess ieee enact 5 3 split screen nccc 8 61 8 65 video raster 3 7 3 10 5 2 6 12 default cncraniesrsimeniomiaak 6 14 WIMPY ar a TA 6 14 information o 2 10 video SOOO Gs scietccxe nie tasajareassenseinayien 5 3 activation ccc 5 3 configuration eee 5 5 deactivation eccere 5 5 layout configuration eesse 5 4 RGB Pardee sscetcreninceitinsictee 5 6 scene detection
147. 00 01 00 03 00 29 00 58 00 29 00 59 Basics 60 Hz 30 Hz TC 60 Hz 01 00 01 00 01 00 ee vO s OL At even higher frame rates e g 90 Hz the timecode numbers will be tripled quadrupled etc making a timecode handling of all common frequencies possible Entering Timecode When entering timecode in one of the software s position or length in dicators you may omit digits if you enter less information the entered timecode will be interpreted from right to left the last number is the frame the next the seconds etc Every digit omitted between the co lons is assumed to be a leading zero You may also omit the separators colons However then you should observe that no digits are left out With omitted separators the entered timecode will be interpreted from right to left the last two numbers in dicate the frame the next two the seconds etc After pressing Enter on your keyboard the entered timecode is accept ed in the respective timecode field for example to move to a certain position Examples 1 9 jumps to 1 sec frame 9 00 00 01 09 109 jumps to 1 sec frame 9 00 00 01 09 247 jumps to 2 sec frame 47 00 00 03 23 if raster is in 24p Additionally in most position or length indicator fields you can enter a new value by either adding or subtracting the timecode or the frame amount from the given entry For this simply add the timecode or
148. 1 yuv 4 050KB YUV File S Hollywood 00002 yuv 4 050KB YUV File _ E Holywood 00003 yuv 4 050KB YUV File E Hollywood 00004 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File 5 Hollywood 00005 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File E Hollywood 00006 yuv 4 050 KB YUY File E Hollywood 00007 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File project_06 E Hollywood 00008 yuv 4 050KB YUV File project_07 8 Hollywood 00009 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File project_os S Hollywood 00010 yuv 4 050 KB YUY File B project_o9 E Hollywood 0001 1 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File project_10 E Hollywood 00012 yuv 4 050 KB YUV File a project_11 S Hollywood 00013 yuv 4 050KB YUV File i lt i u Figure 3 2 Drag and drop of clip to bin The respective video data will then be made available to the DVS soft ware and you will receive a thumbnail of the material in the contents area of the bin When the thumbnail is selected it provides the follow ing features Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform a Name Resolution Color depth preview Colormode Aspect ratio Framerate scrub bar _ e Audio channels Figure 3 3 Selected clip in contents area of bin 3 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs e Add another different clip to the bin by performing the drag and drop procedure again The new clip is added to the clip list of the bin as well Now two clips are available in the Edit Tool and you can start working with them With the scrub bar be
149. 37 9 13 search criteria for audio 8 17 8 39 configuration s es 8 7 8 45 search criteria for video 8 16 8 39 conforming tool s es 8 2 8 6 select EDL cerxtetigrecinioneee 8 42 consolidate clips 8 37 8 55 select entries ccc 8 44 convert frame rate ee 8 8 select updated EDL wx sicetecscatancees 8 47 Greate Sininen ainni 8 42 9 7 selecting o n 8 28 8 32 8 38 delete acisini aaay 8 41 SEUD vonnia 8 7 8 45 destination in outpoints 8 8 8 23 show hide handles 8 57 8 27 8 35 size of thumbnails 8 43 Disk Online 8 4 8 18 8 37 8 51 6 eee eee ene eee ee eee 8 29 drop frame timecode 8 8 source in outpoints 8 8 8 23 duplicate co 2sctcceextes2ceetces 8 11 8 42 8 27 8 34 8 48 8 64 duration ccccccccc eee eceec eee ee eee 8 31 Source TC in header 8 4 8 16 duration event 8 8 8 35 8 17 duration reel wesc cesecasrcustiesente 8 39 source search criteria 8 36 EXDOTE eee eee 8 42 9 7 source search type 8 18 8 35 8 38 File number as TC 8 16 8 37 speed effects cee 8 9 8 19 file number in outpoints 8 64 SpycerNet n s 8 18 8 51 format eeen 8 2 9 7 9 8 start Export n se 9 14 frame rate 1 00 8 7 8 28 8 31 start frame 8 36 8 37 8 39 head tail 0 8 34 8 57 8 62 statuses of clips n e 8 33 head tail capture data 8 55 thumbnails occ 8 44 head ta
150. 6 9 general information 0 8 2 Sf 1 gy 2h eee ne E 7 33 important notes s n 8 3 control area esses 2 7 5 1 link data ccce 8 50 maximize enlarge cece 5 2 multiple found ssscccecstesecsssseded 8 20 scrub bar ccecce 5 13 6 27 FECONFOIMM oc ccececcececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 47 controls eseseseeieeerereren 5 15 6 28 result sesse eratorri 8 20 chart controls 064 4 37 4 40 search criteria for audio 8 17 8 36 conforming controls 8 41 8 39 table controls 000 4 37 4 43 search criteria for video 8 16 8 36 trim controls ossis 5 30 8 39 conventions of user guide 1 5 source search type 8 18 8 35 8 38 COPY sassis 4 18 6 38 6 59 6 72 transfer data ae 8 24 8 52 COUNTEF nossssssesersrsrrnrererererrna 5 24 5 30 conforming mode 2 7 5 15 8 26 create conforming tool 5 15 8 1 8 2 bin clip finalizing 0 0 6 78 see also conforming data list n 8 42 9 7 see also EDL preset effect l 4 26 7 15 autoconforming 8 14 8 24 8 50 DIOR scce 4 22 9 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide CHOP DING aeran eons 6 21 enable cece tect dee ete reeeceied 6 24 Custom Name ccc 6 20 CUE ETT 3 13 5 29 6 40 MOVE Kiva aceuenseceiedsiverelas 5 30 cut list oaeee 8 2 8 6 9 6 A 2 naming convention e 8 6 cutting point sosccctcnansicobieectess 6 40 A 2 in trim mode nsss 5 30 in outpoint 3 14 5 15 5 28 6 44 8 63 previous next 3 13 5 17
151. 6 Properties of a Video CUP covcecccdsasessdcicaancsctessesaeastesmcasnenia 7 10 7 61 Adding Effects setosteiccadcsctcetesncesiericereiaiieieinaneicedecedants 7 11 7 6 2 Altering Effect Settings vere ewtcectictet aces eteeieteenecetticens 7 12 7 6 3 Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area 0 7 14 Contents 7 7 The Operator ZOOM Pan wo eee eee eeeeeeetntees 7 16 7 7 14 Items for ZOOMING 5 iccecccccaxccec teccvscediresastecctyieecedxeteeis 7 16 PoP 2 Items TOF PANNING seirleri reties ledge ninanasa 7 17 7 7 3 Advanced Settings 7 18 7 8 Keyframing assess cea sae essa c bs sescent esse ee 7 21 7 8 1 The Parameters List a c 7 21 7 8 2 Viewing the Graph sssssesssssssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreesssssssnnns 7 23 7 8 3 Moving within the Graph sssssssssssssrnrrrrerrreeessssessnnn 7 25 7 8 4 Setting Keyframes 6 cicccivecsssesesvccaeinedicestssseeseeeieceaeesies 7 27 7 8 5 Positioning Keyframes secere 7 27 7 8 6 Further Possibilities n hen acreenaeeie 7 28 7 9 The Operator FID Flop eseceeeeeeeererieeeerrerrirrerreereess 7 30 7 10 The Operator 1st Color Correction 0 0 eee 7 31 FAQ Static LUT viwusansartaereeneiiatedtsuencsith aooaa 7 31 7 10 2 Master Luma Chroma ccecce 7 32 PGS NGO erort risaune risina a Tiana e kaa aaa eaS 7 34 7 104 Litt Gamma Gait sicoiir 7 35 FACS Color Wheel messini aaa ai anaa 7 36 7 11 The Operator 2nd Color Correction ssec 7 38 7 11 1 Usage of the Secondary Col
152. 6 bit YUV 4 2 2 16 bit per component 32 bit average per pixel Container File Formats The DVS software supports the following container file formats for au dio and or video material Format Default File storage bie Description Name Extension format MPEG 11 mpg 3 x 8 bit RGB or 8 bit File format for the compression of video and MPEG 21 YUV compressed audio audio MPEG 4 mp4 3 x 8 bit RGB or 8 bit File format for the compression of video and YUV compressed audio as well as other media types Based on and or audio the QuickTime file format Phantom cine Raw uncompressed Raw video only file format developed by Vi Cine Raw sion Research for an on camera recording PVs Appendix Format Default File storage bane Description Name Extension format QuickTime mov Various e g RGB or Video file format that supports various file YUV either com storage formats either compressed or un pressed or uncom compressed Proprietary streaming video pressed audio technology developed by Apple 2K resolu tions or above are not supported REDCODE r3d 12 bit raw wavelet Raw 12 bit file format for the compression of compressed audio video at a variable bit rate Developed by RED Digital Cinema Camera Company for an on camera recording Windows wmv 3 x 8 bit RGB com Video file format that supports various file Media pressed
153. 7 transition ccce 6 41 source timecode 2 16 6 11 6 79 shapes 9 10 A 5 see picture mask aUdi soncco 2 17 Sharpness ccecce 7 18 conforming tool 8 3 8 4 8 16 TUNER errre 7 18 8 17 SEHN GS fascia at dees oaii 7 19 finalizing acerca 6 78 shortcuts ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 2 A 7 generic nissene 2 16 6 78 single threaded I O mode 4 37 4 38 offset woo cece 2 17 8 37 8 39 size REDCODE secc 2 17 of audio tracks ccecce 6 7 virtual 2 17 6 11 8 58 9 10 of timeline area ccn 4 2 6 6 source edit mode 2 7 3 8 5 15 5 18 of tool area sin deececca ccc seeaiedics 4 2 synchronize with timeline 5 21 of tracks eeen 6 7 split screen nsee 8 64 Of video overlay cesen 5 3 SOY CED diriririsirigisiecinior 2 4 2 9 4 10 Of video tracks se 6 7 conforming tool asss 8 4 slave MOE cc cece eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 16 SpycerNet acce 8 4 8 18 8 51 control wWINdOW niecce 5 33 StaACK dae eenesoraio res tare arenae nR 6 63 in outpoint control window 5 33 Start frame a a o 8 36 8 37 8 39 RS 422 protocol 5 33 A 1 A 4 start index finalizing 6 90 specifications o A 21 starting of play 5 16 5 21 5 34 8 63 Slide triMMINg ccc 6 48 starting of program eecceeeceeee 3 2 slip source KC sig case ctecacerecqneme recess 8 49 starting point slip source TC xetsicaretastienctaceseciee 8 48 CIID cassis vaetcovetindaunteces 3 8 6 3 6 5 slip sync audio ivnesa
154. 8 16 keyframing ecese 7 21 CCI AUS Gere scree ate terceeckes 7 20 color coding ccecce 7 22 CUVINE scisriririnirisscigiriniinirina ia 7 23 deleting keyframes 2 7 29 positioning of keyframes 7 25 7 27 reset 65 7 23 selecting keyframes 7 27 7 28 selecting settings secn cee deececanins 7 22 timeline cursor s es 7 25 LOOMED inisa eaos 7 29 V EW ZOOM sssssssssserireserererrrree 7 23 L length ED ng ceainenseenive veces gouseteneuat aceeee 8 31 EDL eel c 2scetiegehertateeeteckeetets 8 39 of audio CIPS n se 6 46 6 47 of clip 3 8 3 11 3 12 6 3 6 38 6 47 6 48 7 3 of EDL event cciesisescseseiiveatiseats 8 35 Of timeline n se 6 2 of timeline elements 0 lt cc 02 7 3 of transitions ac 6 46 6 47 of video clips n se 5 24 letterbox Ng ccce 6 21 NIA aa T 7 35 load oi aE E E 9 18 default configuration 9 25 2DE cniages seetacneranseenes sone 8 41 global settings icccncieiexisieeitudes 9 25 preset effects a se 4 31 project irisiniriiinocieiciniririrs 9 4 9 5 updated EDL ccecce 8 47 location Of prerender data n 2 14 of proxy data ss 2 14 Of STOVADE eee ee ee eee 4 13 locking tracks n se 6 33 log files Create a nee ee eee eee eee 4 41 drop report ccccmsass 3 2 4 37 4 43 DVS information file 3 18 4 41 location noscere 4 37 4 41 look up table lcc 7 10 A 4 ARRIRAW 0c ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 57 sample files sugreesaraewtntore 6 20 7 32 settin
155. Al ready specified tracks can be removed with the button in front of a combo box Gaps as black clips Export format EDL only If this check box is en abled gaps present in the timeline EDL will be handled as black clips in the data list Transition mode Export format EDL only Determines whether transitions should be retained in the data list or re placed by hard cuts instead 9 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS Range Sets whether the data list should include the com plete timeline A11 or the part between a set in and outpoint of the timeline only In lt gt Out When exporting from the conforming tool A11 should be selected Settings Group Timecode for export With the settings group Timecode for export you can configure the timecode information that should be exported t Export as Export format Media for 0 Source TC Destination TC Destination TC Curre 2 v Offset Figure 9 6 Timecode for export settings Source TC This combo box determines the type of timecode that should be set as the source in and outpoints in the exported data list You can select between Source TC File number as TC Current destination TC and Original destina tion TC The Source TC setting uses either the source timecodes available in the files headers when ex porting the timeline or the source in and out points of the EDL when exporti
156. CC operator enables you to adjust colors based on pre defined color vectors in a video clip without affecting other colors It operates similar to the secondary color correction but instead of freely definable color vectors it provides several predefined ones that can be used for a selective color correction In many cases when you want to perform a selective color correction applying a 6 vector color correc tion will be suffice Figure 7 51 6 vector color correction operator If the 6 vector color correction operator is used on a clip it has i to be prerendered prior to a play out see section Prerender ing of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Because the 6 vector color correction works similar to the sec ondary color correction and provides almost the same settings items this section explains only the differences For any infor mation not detailed in the following please refer to section The Operator 2nd Color Correction on page 7 38 Compared to the secondary color correction instead of defining a color mask you just have to use the predefined color vectors offered by the color vector list They can be adjusted only in so far that softness can be applied to the vector with the Threshold items Low Applies softness to the color vector from the center of the color wheel onwards i e by increasing this setting you can mask out lower saturated hues on a percent age basis The value range is from O to 1 Hi
157. Color Correction and Balance Area When the color vector is set and determined you can start to color cor rect it You can either alter the hue of the chosen color s or other prop erties such as brightness or saturation In other words to change a color 7 48 PVs Timeline Element Properties vector the settings of a primary color correction are at your disposal The respective settings items can be found in the color correction and balance area to the right of the settings pane Color Correction Ba Master Contrast 0 00 Gamma 1 000 Brightness 0 00 Gain 0 00 Lift 0 00 Luma High 0 00 Low 0 00 Chroma Hue 0 00 Sat 0 00 Figure 7 44 Color correction and balance controls The applied color correction will be shown in the preview window in its source view as well as in the video overlay and at the outputs of the DVS system In detail the color correction and balance area provides the following control elements and possibilities Color Wheel To the left of the color correction and balance area you can find a color wheel that shows you the color shifts when a color correction is per formed Figure 7 45 Color wheel of the color correction and balance 7 49 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 50 The outer ring of the color wheel displays the color vector that you have set with the color mask items to the left It can be selected with the mouse and turned around the color circle ther
158. Content settings Source clip information HD Font settings M x Re 1ec0 Width 1 p 1000 100 Xe Save settings Load settings Figure 5 15 Configuring the appearance of a display 5 11 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs On this tab you can for example set the font properties for text fields such as type size or color determine transparencies or position the display Once a set of displays is fully configured you can save them to a file button SAVE SETTINGS This way you can create burn in informa tion for various purposes that can be loaded at any time later again button LOAD SETTINGS PVs The Control Area 5 3 The Scrub Bar of the Control Area Below the video overlay a scrub bar of the timeline is available a Figure 5 16 Timeline scrub bar In contrast to the timeline of the timeline area where you can zoom in and out see chapter The Timeline on page 6 1 the scrub bar of the control area always shows the complete timeline of the loaded project You can use the scrub bar for overview purposes or to move within your project The scrub bar of the control area provides several features for example different colors indicating the state of the timeline The following fea tures are provided by the scrub bar Items of Scrub Bar Description in dark grey Parts of the scrub bar displayed in dark grey in dicate parts of the timeline that are
159. DENTE file oaan A 16 A 18 preview controls nn 8 62 Markers oriai ocersrin onaniaa 4 35 resolve multiple found 8 24 8 67 reel replacement list data list 9 13 scrub bar ccecce 8 62 configuration split screen nosece 8 64 DiD eo 3 4 4 4 SPICE Sa oe rer ere ere 8 4 load defaults n 9 25 supported file formats 8 3 load global settings 9 25 Timeline as EDL 8 25 8 31 of default settings 0 9 24 transfer data eee 8 24 8 52 Of POJE tS ame een eee ee 9 23 trimming CHS scatcectacctestense biases 8 23 save defaults n 9 25 view contents sses 8 60 save global settings 0 9 26 viewing EDL events a se 8 32 timeline ccce 6 6 viewing EDL reels acce 8 37 timeline marker ccce 6 49 viewing EDLS ccecce 8 30 v deo SCOpES 2 5 inieierstosiiexceisinaasi 5 5 viewing original EDL 8 40 Configuration Tool 2 4 2 9 9 25 working in the timeline 8 23 default settings ccceeccecericeceseesesd 9 24 connecting the driver aces 9 23 project settings cecce 9 24 consistency of clip 00 6 59 9 19 conforming 5 21 8 1 8 14 A 2 container format 6 79 6 83 6 87 A 2 see also conforming tool A 12 auto n a 6 65 8 14 8 24 8 50 contents storage ssscssciecescee 2 4 4 10 capture data ae 8 24 8 54 contents area bin 3 3 4 4 4 16 clip not found n se 8 21 context Menu n se 4 17 first steps ooeec 8 6 Continuously ssec
160. Displaying the Alpha Channel on page 6 68 Show properties With this menu option you can call up the proper ties of the timeline element where the context menu was invoked They will be shown instead of the visible audio tracks right below the timeline ar ea Via the properties you can for example adjust zooming and panning or set color gamma correc tions for the respective clip This is in detail de scribed in chapter Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 6 5 3 Consistencies of Clips During the loading of a project file or the import of a bin see section Open on page 9 4 and section Import Bin on page 9 18 video clips are checked for inconsistencies It is tested whether the first and the last frame of each video clip is available on the storage How ever frames missing inbetween the first and the last frame are not ver ified automatically If the first and or last frame of a clip is missing you will be in i formed about this the same way as described in section Check Bin on page 9 19 6 59 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs If a clip is played out where frames are missing the missing frames will be substituted by the DVS software automatically with a standard im age Figure 6 53 Substitute image for a missing frame Then it is best to check your bin and thus your timeline for inconsisten cies more thoroughly with the menu option Check
161. EDL Clips cecceesccccscssesceeeseeeees 8 32 EDL Reels cicesiectchcaciediexetecdceen 8 37 ADEE ene 8 30 EfFECIS cehscccdsjandoantnnnddceacetesieny 4 25 JODS ooeec 4 22 4 33 9 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Markers ccccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeaeees 4 34 Original EDL acce 8 40 Perfor cceceeccceeceeeeeeeseeeeueees 4 36 table controls accses 4 37 4 43 tail 3 12 3 14 6 32 6 33 6 41 6 47 8 34 8 53 8 55 8 57 8 62 A 5 target grOUP sapitirenecnciiomeie a eiantess 1 4 task bar eccere 2 3 2 8 2 9 temporary data clean manually ccecce A 24 prerender ssn 2 13 6 43 prerender data location 2 14 A 25 prOX ES ccepacctet ne mcce anes 2 11 9 21 proxy data location 2 14 text of clips n se 6 56 6 70 third party software s es 1 7 thumbnail ooann 3 5 4 11 at start and end only 6 8 6 9 audio clip cis exctarnsancevesgacttactense 4 11 conforming tool 8 43 8 68 CONTINUOUS noaie 6 8 6 9 file names instead of 6 9 in Video track oieee 6 8 invalid clip ssdecendtee cate secacctanaaceix 4 11 PUNEICUP israse 4 11 no thumbnail 006 6 8 6 9 pending clip o n 4 12 8 9 s r b Dar isrerirriisiaisisriniss 3 6 4 20 tEXTONIY orisiriniiisriresiioiiuiiisg 4 6 timeline markers n se 4 35 UNKNOWN 2 ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeete ees 4 12 VIGGO CUD cts staieezceenccietadens 4 11 WIEN TEXT iraia sieniin ta iadan 4 5 yellow marking g2 2c2s seca dc
162. Hardware finalize j Video 3B LUT Bitmap 0 s i 8 bit BGR ej Unlimited Format SD HD Film Other on 7 YUV range Head RGB range Full Timeline TC Offset 00 00 00 00 TC Drop frame Pulldown Startphase Resolution Frame rate 24 p Dominance Even fields Aspect ratio 1 777 Off SMPTE 274 File format 1 f vy Options Bit depth Render audio in Audio auto retiming Render Figure 6 66 Window to finalize a project Dvs The Timeline In this window the finalizing of the timeline has to be configured Its settings and the finalizing process in general will be described in this section 6 7 1 General Settings When performing a finalizing you have to specify some general set tings such as the storage information and some timeline settings first They can be made with the settings items at the top of the window to configure a finalizing File name result _finalized we Name options Render path a Bin v Render from InfOut Disable gap rendering Ey Generic timecode Timeline output TC Clipwise rendering _ Options Figure 6 67 The general settings In the entry field File name result enter the name of the clip to be gen erated You may also click on the button to the right of this entry field BB to select an already existing file Notation Standard file names of the Windows operating sys tem i e do not use the following characters TN eee 2 Se Furthermore leave out t
163. Item Text in bold only stands for other labeled items of the user interface File Directory structure or file Entry Parameters selections or entries made in the program it may also indicate a file syntax or contents of a file Key An individual key or a key combination on a keyboard Keyboard Shortcuts To perform options or procedures with the keyboard often requires a si multaneous pressing of two keys Example Ctrl F1 If this is given hold down the Ctrl key and press simultaneously the F1 key 1 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Screenshots The screenshots shown in this documentation may slightly differ from the user interface s displayed on your system They may have been taken for example from previous software versions or from systems with a different optional feature set However they should contain the items required to understand the described actions 3D Stereoscopy and Digital Cinema The items available to create and use 3D stereoscopic material or digital cinema content are optionally available and not described in this man ual These are for example the menu option Digital Cinema Delivery Tool the menu option Load KDM the tab DC reels the Stereoscopic output setting or any other DC CPL stream video or eye concerned item A description of them can be found in the CLIPSTER DCI Mastering supplement user guide accessible via the software
164. Keycode information stored in file headers can be used in the DVS soft ware for example during a conforming process see chapter The Conforming Tool on page 8 1 Keycode has its origin in the film world and is a variation of timecode to identify frames on a film roll It is a machine readable code printed at certain intervals along the edge of the camera negative film outside the perforations Besides containing data for instance about the film type the name of the manufacturer and the film stock it is used to number individual images i e it provides a reference number lt count gt lt offset gt for the image where the keycode is written The numbering available via keycodes can be used for example to match the film with a particular position of a data list e g EDL or cut list In the DVS software the keycode format normally is lt manufacturer ID and film type gt lt 6 digit film roll ID gt lt count gt lt offset gt Example KK217312 5235 04 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 8 About Timecode Frame Number Fields The DVS software provides various fields where data in timecode for mat is provided or an entry in such a format is necessary The timecode format is hh mm ss ff hours minutes seconds and frame num ber If or is displayed in an entry field a value i has not bec peclied so far Drop frame Timecode Indication The last colon of the timecode format may be disp
165. Ls and other data lists of various formats such as CMX or GVG as well as ALEs or cut lists In the software as well as this manual data lists that can be handled by the DVS software may also be referred to as EDLs i e implying not the standard but the term edit decision list in general Once everything is set up correctly the conforming will be successful and you will receive in the timeline properly linked clips Then you can continue your work on the project immediately The first steps to per form a conforming are described in section First Steps to Make a Con forming on page 8 6 However if the first steps of a conforming procedure fail you have to adapt the conforming for example by applying another linking meth od or by editing the events of the EDL This can be done either directly in the timeline or by using the conforming mode of the Edit Tool Then you can for example configure individual clips or complete reels to the requirements of your conforming Additionally with the conforming The Conforming Tool mode you can easily determine offsets adjust reel names or in and outpoints The possibilities when adapting the conforming in the time line directly are explained in section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 The possibilities of the conforming mode are in detail described in section The Conforming Mode in General on page 8 26 and the sections followi
166. Ls from the Timeline 0 c eeeeeeeee 8 23 8 4 The Conforming Mode in General cceeeeteeeeeeeeteeee 8 26 8 5 Conforming Mode The Work Area cceeeerrtteee 8 28 8 5 1 Viewing Es a oases nace ca teetccuscarckelancatienastesecuscxtheanedst 8 28 8 5 2 Adapting the Appearances of the Tables 00 8 29 8 5 3 Changing Values and Entries ana 8 29 8 5 4 The Tab EDLS ac cceceseeectecrtentcusihapcreentetseuateearcusteeesaesie 8 30 8 5 5 The Tab EDL Clips ssssssnnnsrrrnirenesrreessrrnssrrnnrrnnrnne 8 32 8 5 6 The Tab EDL Reels iiaiisiiioroarenorienaaerei 8 37 8 5 7 The Tab Original EDU acceseccts sesdaietosesteastsicteteielatatin 8 40 8 6 Conforming Mode The Conforming Controls 06 8 41 8 6 1 The Edit Comical Sisciieecsdicssitecesstcacare aedgebetedstdediedacdeteds 8 41 8 6 2 The View COMMONS oosececicscce ts eeetencnierey eeieeneneteaencueee 8 42 8 6 3 The Modify Controls wicicdcczcdesececateieti iar ieadieasbietetecice 8 45 8 6 4 The Execute Controls eesriie 8 50 8 7 Conforming Mode The Preview Area ceeee 8 60 8 7 1 Selecting Contents for Viewing eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 8 60 8 7 2 The Video Overlay t cischcceccucacehncteietasseatiettactartes 8 61 8 7 3 The Serub Bar socjcjcatacscarlatcaiecicd saps ssacdsees cccasaiactiedaes 8 62 8 7 4 The Preview Controls eeen 8 62 8 7 9 Clip di C6 8c gi cg eer err ee nn tisrin ere errr Terre 8 63 8 7 6 Working wit
167. Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element 6 62 6 5 6 Vertical Editing of Video Clips in the Timeline 6 63 6 5 7 Scene Detection rset eai 6 65 6 5 8 Displaying the Alpha Channel ees 6 68 6 6 Working with Audio Clips eeen 6 70 6 6 1 The Clip s Information sii sasoninanametrsereenassanignerisceednass 6 70 6 6 2 The Context Menu of Audio Clips siiccisisssssssssssesesesserees 6 71 GG Volume Controlisiisicssiisieroinr neons aat 6 73 6 6 4 Waveform Display aicaiessssesusnnnomnontcuniebdguneienstesearsvanet 6 75 6 7 Finalizing the Timeline ca sates accra hens eased ee 6 76 6 7 1 General Settings 532 ccc cectek es cedeenceesateantaeeteeueccnseees 6 77 6 7 2 Configuring Video seussegcica Tacs Ge tacaiiagsleenetntete teacecnage 6 79 6 7 3 Configuring Audio cSeetactca tines sech ecays Riche iaeeteetacdcates 6 83 SW ge Re 2 0 2p eee OP eee eee eer Me nee re nr er een re emer er 6 85 6 7 5 The Finalized Output Files per Folder ceee 6 85 6 7 6 Name OptOnS s 0sissicerecacrtsesunteetveatiertnaniinceesin 6 87 Timeline Element Properties 0 0 ccceeeeeteeeeteeee 7 1 7 1 Accessing the Timeline Element Properties eee 7 2 7 2 General Items of the Properties Area nccc 7 3 7 3 Changing Values of Sliders and Entry Fields 00 7 5 7 4 Closing the Timeline Element Properties 0 0 0 0 eee 7 6 7 5 Properties of a Transition ses ccscecstcetectesotsess reas eaaertee ies 7 7 7
168. Rename on its context menu it can be The Control Area renamed Further editing features for the displays in general are provid ed by the context menu as well e g Add new display Delete Copy or Paste Once a display is selected its properties will be shown in the settings pane to the right With the tab Content settings you can determine the content of the display You can choose between dynamic static text and an image via the radio buttons When Dynamic Static text is selected you can en ter the information that should be displayed directly in the entry field Static information can simply be typed in while variable information can be inserted with the Add elements combo box They will be in serted at the current cursor position Furthermore for text fields the fol lowing items are available Ala These items align the text of the display Add element Removes or adds labels to the variable informa labels tion For example when deactivating this check box the labels of already entered vari able information will be removed and newly added elements will be added without a label When Image is selected you can enter the path to the image file in the entry field Image or select it with the button to the right E It will then be visible in the video overlay and or at the outputs in its original resolution With the tab Appearance you can format the selected display Display settings Displays
169. S information file is as a stan dard automatically written Further information about the log files and the DVS information file can be found in section The Performance Monitor on page 4 36 The Tool Area On the left side of the user interface directly below the menu bar you can find the tool area It shows you depending on the optional features available or the currently activated software module as well as task mode various tools that can be used during your work The different tools are provided as tabs to switch easily between them tool tabs gt Ji Effects Jobs Markers Perform Figure 4 1 The tool area When you activate one of the inactive tool tabs the tool area will change its appearance and the respective tool will be displayed in the tool area Among the tools you can find for example the bin which provides initial access to the video material stored on your system or the performance monitor to assess the real time operation of the DVS system for example during a play out of the timeline This chapter describes the features of the tool area as well as the default tools available in the Edit Tool module in detail These default tools may also be available in the other software modules of the DVS software 4 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 1 Changing the Size of the Tool Area 4 2 Some tools may not be shown in full i e with all items or information displayed in th
170. STER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 1 5 New in the Edit Tool 1 8 The following lists the most important features and functions that were new in the latest versions of the Edit Tool Please note that the features and functions mentioned may be i part of optional packages For further information about new features please refer also to the release notes of the DVS software New in Version 3 2 Support of several new file formats Finalizing of mono audio files Introduction of a system specific Signing Key for the DCI Mastering Export of Avid Log Exchange ALE files New in Version 3 1 Support of 3D material including capturing and stereoscopic digital cinema packages New in Version 3 0 Enhanced burn in information for video overlay and video outputs Clipwise rendering for finalizing Frames fields display mode Support of source timecode for audio in the timeline Handling of REDCODE RAW data in real time Enhanced keyboard shortcuts New in Version 2 6 Easy to use digital cinema delivery tool to create content for digital cinemas Global settings snapshots Enlarging of the control area video overlay Display of alpha channel of individual timeline clips in the video overlay and at the video outputs New in Version 2 5 Comprehensive tool for an easy and fast conforming conforming mode of the control area Updated export to EDL Smaller chan
171. Start frame Audio search crite ria Same as the Search criteria setting on the tab EDL Clips but sets the search criteria for audio clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 Audio source TC type Same as the Source TC type setting on the tab EDL Clips but sets the timecode type for audio clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 Video path Same as the Path setting on the tab EDL Clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 with the exception that it is valid for video events of the reel only Audio path Same as the Path setting on the tab EDL Clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 with the exception that it is valid for audio events of the reel only No clips Shows the number of clips that the reel pro vides Duration Details the duration of the reel i e its length 8 39 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Column Description Found clips Indicates how many clips of the reel are already linked to data on a storage 8 5 7 The Tab Original EDL The tab Original EDL shows you the original file of the currently se lected EDL as it would appear in a text editor EDLs Tape2 FROM REEL NAME FROM CLIP NAME a4 TO CLIP NAME T 4 T FROM REEL Nat T EDL Clips EDL Reels Jfo_Night_ es_Ufo Night_ D wn LA Part0 Night Beau
172. Tail Shows the amount of head and tail available for an already conformed clip The values are in frames Keycode IN Keycode OUT These entries show the keycode in and out point Normally these information are detailed in cut lists only When available they can be changed either by entering an in outpoint manually or by using the button SLIP SOURCE KC see section Slip source KC on page 8 49 Only the keycode s reference num ber can be altered When changing one of the values the remaining value will be set accord ingly i e the duration will not be changed Al tered values will be displayed in orange The Conforming Tool Column Description Destination IN Destination OUT These settings detail the destination in and outpoint either in timecode or in frames Usually they determine the final position of the event on a built up timeline They can be changed by altering the clips representations of a built up EDL in the timeline Altered values will be dis played in orange Duration Specifies the duration of the event i e its length either in timecode or in frames depend ing on the selected notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 TL status Indicates the timeline status of the event i e the track audio A or video V and track number where the event can be found in the timeline Source type
173. This behavior i e the warning message as well as the marking i of a clip in the contents area of the bin can be configured with the setting Warn if base directory mismatch group Gener al in the Configuration Tool of the DVS software see CLIP STER Configurations user guide for more details Name St y File format Resolution 19 File path marked clip A Color dept its File name Colormode Frame size Aspect ratic 16 9 Data rate Framerate i Duration 236 Name File format TIFF Resolution ixe File path Color depth 8 File name Frame si Data rate Duration Figure 4 9 Clip marked in the bin In the figure above the top clip is stored on a system drive Because this location is not real time capable it may not provide enough data trans 4 13 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs fer rate to make the vast amount of data accessible in time a warning icon is visible at the top left side of the thumbnail and the respective val ue of the text information that is the cause for this warning is marked in yellow The location of the real time capable storage is a configurable setting in the Configuration Tool of the DVS software System base video di rectory see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide This setting is also used during the exchange of project files between different DVS sys tems The System base video directory should always be config ured to the native main storage stripe se
174. Tool s control area activated the result of your work on the timeline EDL can be reviewed and moni tored in the preview area It can be found at the right hand side of the conforming mode Clip properties Clip name Figure 8 41 The preview area At the top of the preview area you can find a video overlay showing you the contents of the timeline EDL Additionally a scrub bar is pro vided below the video overlay as well as preview controls At the very bottom some text information can be found detailing properties of the currently displayed clip With the preview area you can view either the clips assembled in the timeline or the clips of the EDL Furthermore it can be used in a split screen operation see section Working with Split Screen on page 8 64 and to resolve multiple search results found during con forming status Multiple found see section Multiple Search Results on page 8 20 8 7 1 Selecting Contents for Viewing With the preview area you can view either the clips assembled in the timeline or the clips of the EDL Whether it shows the contents of the 8 60 PVs The Conforming Tool timeline or the EDL depends on the state of the toggle button TIME LINE EDL of the preview controls see section The Preview Controls on page 8 62 With it you can manually select what should be dis played in the preview area Furthermore the preview area shows whatever you select in the work or ti
175. UT Management Output Color Add Delete Lin to Log Custom Name File incl Path sterluvDVS_Out_Of_Gamut3dl Cancel Figure 6 18 3D LUT file management 6 19 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Dvs 6 20 To load and administer available 3D LUT files the window provides the following items They can be found in the directory 1ut of the software s instal i Several sample LUT files are delivered with the DVS software lation path default C Program Files DVS Clipster More detailed information about 3D LUT files can be found in section 3D LUT Files on page A 17 Profile ADD DELETE LIN TO LOG Custom Name File incl Path 3D LUT Visualization In the list box Profile you can see a list of the already specified 3D LUT file profiles Each entry in this box represents one 3D LUT file Select from this list box one entry for instance to change its settings to delete it or to enable it Once a valid 3D LUT file is selected and a profile name is specified you can add it to the list box above with the button ADD Because one 3D LUT file can be applied to one profile only with this button you can also change the name of an already created profile or assign another file to it With the button DELETE you can delete an al ready specified 3D LUT file profile from the list box Simply select an entry from the list box and press this button to delete it Logarithmic
176. UV parade gt ance nscotustecevcent cuenta 5 7 Z zoom on timeline 3 9 5 13 6 27 ZOOMING onesies 6 59 7 10 7 16 TILED henecavecncataeesateataetaccusseaxs 7 18 PONS 22 ceseesacteceassccammse cases sence 7 16
177. Vertical Wipe from the list box To the left of the properties area you can also set the duration i of the transition frame accurately Simply type in the duration and confirm it with the Enter key This will apply the selected transition type to the transition between the two clips You may now use the controls of the Edit Tool to review its outcome In the insert mode there must be enough head and or tail li available of at least one clip to set a transition otherwise the button TRANS will be unavailable If there are not enough head and tail available you can use the trim mode of the Edit Tool to change the in and outpoint of the adjacent clips to a cutting point If you are in the overwrite mode of the timeline the Edit Tool will create the head and tail necessary for the transition automatically You can delete a transition the same way you delete a clip from the timeline Simply select the transition and press the key Del on your keyboard PVs Getting Started 3 2 7 Applying Effects to Clips in the Timeline Adding effects to the timeline of the Edit Tool and playing it out in real time is one strength of the DVS system Every clip in the timeline pro vides timeline element properties the same way a transition does You simply have to double click the clip on the timeline or invoke the con text menu of the clip and select the menu option Show properties Via the timeline element properties of a clip you c
178. X plug in inter face providing you with the possibility to extend the software module s effects feature set with plug ins developed by third parties The various available OpenFX plug ins offer you additional editing possibilities for your video processing tasks such as color correction or image process ing Once installed they can be accessed in addition to the standard ef fects operators as timeline element properties of clips Further information about this can be found in section Timeline Element Prop erties on page 7 1 2 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 2 2 Overview of the User Interface The following figure shows the user interface of the Edit Tool as it ap pears after starting the DVS software for information on how to start the software see chapter Getting Started on page 3 1 menu bar tool area control area Tet image e Slave q my nyan di N Ww Review Settings Atsawend v intemal fames v task bar timeline area Figure 2 2 User interface of the Edit Tool The DVS software is designed to run in full screen mode to provide for an undistracted view on the video material and the editing task at hand To switch to the operating system envi ronment use the Windows Zl key on your keyboard or se lect from the menu of the program icon on the menu bar the menu option Minimize see section Minimize on page 9 2 Via the check box Don t show this message again offered by informat
179. Zoom Pan D 21 El 200 ITU REC 709 3200 K Figure 7 52 ARRIRAW color correction operator Several standard matrices and LUTs are available Simply select from the Preset combo box the one that should be applied to the clip Its effect can be immediately seen in the video overlay 7 57 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 15 The Operator Delnterlace 7 58 Effects x The operator Delnterlace enables you to convert interlaced material fields on your system into the progressive image format frames If the deinterlace operator is used on a clip it has to be preren i dered prior to a play out see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Delnterlace Zoom Pan x Delnterlace Mode Dur 00 01 Even Odd Line_Duplication eJ Even Q Motion_Adaptive Jelnterlace threshold Modify before Modify after Modify all R eset Motion threshold Figure 7 53 Deinterlace operator This section describes in detail the settings provided by this operator The items available under the heading Mode determine the method used for the deinterlacing Line_Duplication Line_Interpolation This mode simply duplicates in the images the lines selected in the Even Odd area meaning either the odd or the even lines of an interlaced field will be doubled to get rid of the interlacing The method of doubling lines is most suited when your clip contains no m
180. a Elements such as clips pasted into the timeline will be added at the current position of the timeline cursor Furthermore to paste clips to different timeline tracks rather than the first track you have to lock the The Tool Area lower track numbers where the pasting should not occur see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 33 n When operating between bin and timeline or vice versa the se i lected clip s will be added i e copied x For these procedures the focus must be set correctly For exam ple when operating in the bin its contents area not the folder area must have the focus The cut copy and paste operations can be initialized either via the con text menu of the selected element s or via the usual keyboard short cuts see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 7 Clips within the bin can also be copied or pasted between folders via a drag and drop procedure see section Sorting Clips into Folders on page 4 19 Sorting Clips When the text information view is selected for the clips in the contents area of the bin see section Changing the View of Clips on page 4 5 you can sort the clips easily e In the text information table simply click on the respective column heading to sort the entries under this column in ascending or descending order Then the clips will be sorted accordingly and the type of order will be indicated by the triangle to the right of the colu
181. a you can make folders and directories to sort your material into This way you can perform a clip and project management In the contents area you can preview the material sorted into a folder via thumbnails or text information The thumbnails also provide a scrub bar to set roughly the inpoint of the respective clip 3 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 4 You can configure the appearance of the bin freely It will be i saved together with the project file You can arrange the areas horizontally if you like select the respective appearance from the context menu of the bin s title bar Via the buttons in the button area you can set whether the clips shall be seen as thumbnails with text or with their text information only The kind of text information displayed in the bin can be set freely with the Configuration Tool button CONFIG or Options Project config Furthermore the right edge of the tool area can be moved for example to display the contents of the activated tool com pletely Then in case of the bin you will be able to view the thumbnails together with all text information available If you pull the right edge of the tool area completely to the left the tool area will no longer be visible if you pull it completely to the right the control area will be hidden and the contents of the activated tool will be displayed in full To prepare the bin for a project you have to fill it
182. a corresponding note Anyway a lack of this note does not mean any commitment from DVS Digital Video Systems AG CLIPSTER DVS and Spycer are registered trademarks of DVS Digital Video Systems AG Adobe and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Apple Final Cut Pro and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Avid is a trademark or registered trademark of Avid Technology Inc or its subsidiaries in the United States and or other countries Kodak and Cineon are trademarks of Eastman Kodak Company RED REDCODE and R3D are trademarks of Red com Inc RED Digital Cinema Camera Company IRIX and SGI are registered trademarks of Silicon Graphics Inc Windows the Windows logo and Windows Media are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Any other product names mentioned in this documentation may be trademarks or registered trade marks of their respective owners and as such are subject to the usual statutory provisions PVs Headquarters DVS Digital Video Systems AG Krepenstr 8 30165 Hannover GERMANY Phone 49 511 67807 0 Fax 49 511 630070 E mail info dvs de Internet http www dvs de Support Phone 49 511 67807 125 Fax 49 511 371985 E mail support dvs de For the Americas U S Headquarters DVS Digital Video
183. a either a normal project file of the DVS software or a bin file which can be created via the menu option Export Bin see section Export Bin on page 9 19 File extensions cp Project file cb Bin file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file When loaded the selected bin with folders and clips will be imported into your currently active project The imported bin will be checked for inconsistencies i e it is tested whether the first and the last frame of each clip is actually present on the storage With the help of the menu option Check Bin of the Bin menu i you can perform a more accurate testing of your bin see sec tion Check Bin on page 9 19 If the first and or last frame of a clip is missing you will be in formed about this the same way as described in section Check Bin on page 9 19 PVs The Menus 9 4 2 Export Bin You can export the bin of your currently active project with the menu option Export Bin It will save the contents of your bin including all folders and clips to an extra file The selection of this menu option opens a standard dialog window to save a file where you have to specify the storage path and file name to export the bin File extension cb Bin file Once the contents of the bin is saved you can import it into another project whenever you want see section Import Bin on page 9
184. a right in front of the tracks with the mouse 00 00 Ternar t Teaser a5 00 00 M re j 0 Li Vv wan fHolhanood Figure 6 6 Setting track sizes manually The thumbnails or audio clip features will be scaled accordingly 6 2 2 Changing the Appearance of Video Clips To the right of the SETTINGS button you can find the thumbnails combo box When you click on the arrow to the right of the combo box with the mouse you will receive a drop down list Atstavend Internal f No thumbnails At startend Continuously File names Figure 6 7 List of thumbnails combo box From this list you can select the view of the video track s i e you can select the way the clips representations are displayed in the video track s For example the clips can be shown with continuous thumb nails in the video track s HOlivwoon SLLYWoop Figure 6 8 Continuous thumbnails 6 8 PVs The Timeline In detail the clips in the video track s can be set to the following ap pearances Selection Meaning No thumbnails The clips representations in the video track s of the timeline are shown without thumbnails At start end Thumbnails of the clips are displayed at the start and the end of the clips only e g as shown in figure 6 52 on page 6 56 Continuously All clips in the video track s are filled with thumbnails continuously as shown in the ex ample figure above File
185. a timeline and edit them with cuts dissolves wipes etc Clips of different formats and resolutions can be added to the timeline and processed for example via color corrections scalings or zooming and panning Additionally in this module you can perform a DCI Mastering and create properly encoded and encrypted digital cin ema packages DCPs see the CLIPSTER DCI Mastering supplement accessible via the software s online help The Edit Tool module sup ports edit decision lists of various formats via its sophisticated conform ing tool allowing you for example to import data lists conform them work with the built up timeline freely and afterwards export your work to a new edit decision list One of the main features of the Edit Tool is that all editing tasks are performed virtually i e the original material on the storage is never altered The clips used in the DVS software are only representations of the original material on the storage With this you can use the same material over and over again with different effects while the master is always maintained The I O Tool The I O Tool is mainly used for the digitization of a variety of different input sources meaning the recording capturing of video and audio data with the DVS system from other sources than computer storages You can capture material from any source you like and record it in a freely selectable format with or without color space conversion For in stance you ca
186. a zoom and pan effect each providing the correct effect settings for this re spective effects operator when applied to a clip The assignment of function keys for preset effects can also be adjusted manually The function key has to be stated last in the name of the preset effect in square brackets to enable it as a keyboard shortcut for a preset effect For example by chang ing a preset effect name to lt name string gt F2 you will assign the function key F2 to it 4 3 3 Using Preset Effects 4 28 When preset effects are available in the effects pane of the Edit Tool they can be applied to clips in the timeline easily line with the help of the timeline element properties area see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 and section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 i Effect settings can also be transferred to other clips in the time e A preset effect can be applied the same way as any default effect available in the effects pane of the tool area Simply drag and drop it to the effects list of a clip s timeline element properties as described in section Adding Effects on page 7 11 The predefined settings of this effect will be applied to the clip s timeline element properties right away PVs The Tool Area You can also use the preset effects to alter settings of an effects opera tor already applied to a clip e Select the effects operator
187. about the file and its values the file starts to list the color correction values Each line starts with the desig nation of the input value bit depth succeeded by the four color com ponent values first blue second green then red and last the alpha channel This leads to the following syntax Any comment Any comment lt input value gt lt B gt lt G gt lt R gt lt A gt A finished and complete LUT file may look like the following value pairs in the middle left out Any comment Any comment 0 OO FWN FP 0 009766 0 000000 0 000000 0 0 0 011719 0 000000 0 000000 0 0 0 013672 0 000000 0 000000 0 0 0 015625 0 001953 0 000000 0 0 0 017578 0 003906 0 000000 0 0 0 019531 0 005859 0 000000 0 0 1022 0 999023 0 988281 0 999023 0 0 1023 0 999023 0 991211 0 999023 0 0 PVs Appendix A 5 3D LUT Files Three dimensional look up table 3D LUT files are used for color cor rections and or color space conversions by defining output color values for input values They are available in various formats either encrypted e g e3d or unencrypted e g 3d1 or xm1 This section de scribes the unencrypted 3D LUT files A 5 1 General Description A 3D LUT file lists triplets of values for a color transformation Depend ing on the color depth of the 3D LUT each triplet of values R G B specifies the output values for a certain RGB node i e the resulting mapped values of input values T
188. act files 1 9 15 POSION iiin 5 23 INSETT naaa 9 5 of clip 3 8 6 2 6 3 6 5 6 48 Management s es 2 14 8 35 project file sohicciccssnesninixererexaces 9 3 9 5 of EDL in timeline ccc 8 12 file NAME nocne 9 6 9 7 prerendering sscsisssteslsecngoune 2 12 6 42 information seeren 2 10 color scheme clips os excdsnsecaccas 6 43 nSeries aeaa E 9 5 data location ccce 2 14 NEW 25 eects caeee eara iaon a Kaik 9 3 delete temporary data 4 33 6 44 OPEN scsi onai 9 4 9 5 6 58 A 24 recent osaan e 9 5 PrOBTESS s2estestteiacreitaetieeent 4 33 Fe E 9 6 9 7 secondary color correction 7 41 status MESSAGES ccecce 2 10 start process 6 43 6 58 9 15 project management 2 14 preset effect u 4 26 4 29 7 14 properties APPIY circinera 4 28 7 15 accessing 4 21 6 59 6 73 7 2 SAIS eo sscteeeereacccaseconten 4 26 7 15 COSINE acc 7 6 delete ciccctcosacsedeaticreiaiieejatezec 4 30 of clips 2 5 3 6 4 21 6 59 6 73 EXPONE enra ee 4 31 8 63 Mpo enasna 4 31 of timeline elements 7 1 load cvecividenieacividecnatide 4 31 7 15 of transitions ccce 7 7 rename nuussssssssssrrrirrrrrrreesreee 4 30 of video CIPS seeren 7 10 Se NI E E AE 4 31 7 15 protocol RS 422 5 33 A 1 A 4 SOF E T TS 4 32 DIOKY AE E 2 11 2 14 A 5 preview window 7 39 7 46 7 47 activate oo cece eee eee eee 4 23 9 22 alpha channel 7 47 7 56 CRC ALG e 4 22 9 21 picture masks s
189. activated the Edit Tool will automatically jump to the nearest cutting point in the video track s and the timeline cursor will be positioned accordingly Furthermore the control area then dis plays two video overlays The left one shows the last frame of the clip left to the cut while the right one displays the inpoint and first frame of the clip to the right You can then use the trim mode to change the in and outpoint easily e Select the in outpoint handler in the scrub bar below each video overlay with the mouse and move it to the desired position for the respective clip Mzn Fora frame accurate trimming you may also use the controls i below the two overlays see section The Trim Controls on i page 5 29 You cannot change the in outpoint beyond the limits of the original material on the storage Your alterations will be effective immediately in the timeline After changing the settings of the handlers you can for example define a transition between the clips or perform a play out in and outpoint in this mode can be found in section The G More information about the trim mode and how to adjust an Trim Mode on page 5 28 N The length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 How to Change In Outpoints in the Timeline You can change in and outpoints of tim
190. ake a clip directly from the contents area of the bin or 2 you can configure its in and outpoint beforehand via the source edit mode and then drag it from the control area to the timeline Both ways will be described in this section Afterwards the length of the timeline will be indicated in the field directly below the timeline scale length of the timeline s in and outpoint see also section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 29 re he ere a e _ ___ ___ timeline length 0 0 0 4 0 0 42 4 16 09 42 16 LIYWoop B Figure 6 1 Timeline length indicator During the adding of clips to the timeline the clip will be visible i in the video or audio track of the timeline and it will react to certain elements of the timeline snapping mode to allow for an automated positioning Further information about the snap ping mode can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 When adding or moving clips in the timeline you have to heed the current insert overwrite mode of the timeline More infor mation on this can be found in section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 31 6 1 1 Taking a Clip Directly from the Bin 6 2 You can take a clip directly from the contents area of the bin and add it to the tracks of the timeline For this perform the following e If required prepare the clip to be added to the timeline for edi
191. am icon on the menu bar see section Minimize on page 9 2 Via the check box Don t show this message again offered by information messages of the DVS software you can deacti vate the appearance of this particular message for the current software session i e next session it will be displayed again When starting the DVS software a drop report is as a standard automatically written Further information about the log files and the drop reports can be found in section The Performance Monitor on page 4 36 PVs Getting Started 3 2 First Steps in the Edit Tool This section introduces in a step by step description how to work with the Edit Tool It will be explained what to do to begin a project how to work with the timeline and how to perform some basic editing tasks Use this tutorial to familiarize yourself with the Edit Tool and the way it has to be handled 3 2 1 Preparing the Bin After starting the DVS software the Edit Tool will be started automati cally At the upper left side of the program window you can see the tool area with the bin activated by default Bin __ Effects Jobs Markers Perform title bar 6 LoS a i folder area e contents area e button area e em Figure 3 1 The bin activated in tool area The bin provides initial access to the video audio material stored on your system In the bin you can find two main areas In the folder are
192. an adjust zooming and panning or set color gamma corrections for the respective clip All settings can be transferred easily to other clips present in the timeline In this step to introduce the Edit Tool we want to apply a primary color correction to clip A of our example project For this perform the follow ing e Select the second clip in the timeline clip A with a click of the mouse Because in the previous step we have altered the properties of a transi tion the area of the timeline element properties should already be vis ible below the timeline As soon as the clip is selected it shows you immediately its properties If the timeline element properties area is not visible perform a i double click on the clip in the timeline or select the menu op tion Show properties of its context menu The effects operator Zoom Pan is by default available and active for all video clips in the timeline and thus is already available in the effects list of the timeline element properties e Next activate the tab Effects in the tool area of the Edit Tool Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform Available Operators orcorrection E restoration Figure 3 13 Selection of an effects operator The tool area displays all available effects operators on your system With a click of the mouse on the little plus or minus sign right in front of an entry or by double clicking an entry directly you can expand or collapse the opera
193. an also be adjusted with the color grey scale bars and the entry fields to the right as well as the controls at the bottom of the color mask area Further information about the color mask area with the preview win dow and all other items and controls can be found in section The Color Mask Area on page 7 42 Once everything is set correctly you can change or correct the selected color vector Color Correction After the color vector is set and determined you can start to color cor rect it You can either alter the hue of the chosen color s or other prop erties such as brightness or saturation In other words to correct a color vector the settings of a primary color correction are at your disposal For this you have to use the settings items and color wheel to the right of the secondary color correction properties color correction and balance area The applied color correction will be shown in the preview window in its source view as well as on the video overlay and the outputs of the DVS system PVs Timeline Element Properties Source Image Lele Figure 7 36 Color corrected example image Once the color alterations are set as desired the procedure to perform a secondary color correction is finished The changes are immediately applied to the selected clip in the timeline However prior to a real time play out the clip where the secondary color correction is applied has to be prerendered see section
194. an in and outpoint for the bin clip the source edit mode also provides the possibility to select other applications than the DVS software to process your video data with The Edit Tool provides two ways to export either the original source ma terial or a copied version of it to a third party application of your choice You can export video data visible in the source edit mode of the Edit Tool or you can export video data that is available in the timeline to an other application This way you can process the source material of a video clip further and afterwards use it again in the DVS software with out any difficulty This section describes how to process source material when a bin clip was dragged to the control area source edit mode of the Edit Tool The export of source material that is present in the timeline of i the Edit Tool is described in section Processing the Source Ma terial of a Timeline Element on page 6 62 When a bin clip is available in the source edit mode of the control area you can process its source material either by using the original data di rectly destructive export or by previously copying the material before hand To do this you have to use the menu option Export to Application on the context menu of the bin clip s video overlay 5 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 26 fHollywood iss deliv adalah Mm External HOLLY Figure 5 21 Processing video material The m
195. andard is the fastest search mode available because it uses an efficient algorithm Howev er under rare circumstances it may not be able to find the correct clips If the standard search does not yield the ex pected results you can use an Intensive search It will look through the found files one by one and thus takes considerably longer Render speed effects Speed effects that an EDL may provide can be processed by the conforming tool as well They have to be rendered during the conforming meaning image files may be omitted or created anew according to the specified speed This setting can be activated or deactivated with the check box to the left When activated you can enter the location where the files of the speed effects should be saved in the entry field direct ly or use the button to the right of this field E to select one If no location is set the speed ef fects files will be stored in a subfolder at the lo cation of the original clip Apply to This setting allows you to limit the procedure You can perform it either on all clips of an EDL or on a selection of reels clips A selection can be specified either when the EDL is available in the timeline see section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 or in the conforming mode see section The Conform ing Mode in General on page 8 26 e In this window configure the autoconforming according to the material to be conform
196. area detail the information of the EDL that is selected in this table see also section Viewing EDLs on page 8 28 By default the entry Timeline as EDU is available for all projects It shows the timeline of the project with all its clips as an EDL in the con forming mode The following explains the columns that are available on the tab EDLs Column Description EDL name This column shows the name of the EDL as it appears in the bin It can be altered freely and its counterpart in the bin will be named accord ingly This works also the other way around When changing the name of the EDL in the bin it will be altered in this field as well Frame rate Details the frame rate of the EDL TL status Indicates the current timeline status of the EDL i e whether it is already built up in the timeline Video tracks Details the video tracks that are currently used by the EDL in the timeline of the Edit Tool Audio tracks Details the audio tracks that are currently used by the EDL in the timeline of the Edit Tool No reels Shows the number of reels that are currently set for the EDL No clips Shows the number of clips that the EDL pro vides Found clips Indicates how many clips of the EDL are already linked to data on a storage Duration Details the duration of the EDL i e its length 8 31 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs When working on an EDL in this tab for example with t
197. area of the bin and select the menu option Rename After this you can change the name of the respective folder e Enter the new name of the folder via the keyboard and confirm it with the Enter key Then the selected folder will be given the new name Only previously created folders can be renamed The root fold er cannot be changed in any respect Deleting Folders Folders can be deleted the same way they are created via the context menu e Call up the context menu on a formerly created folder in the folder area of the bin and select the menu option Delete To delete a folder you may also select the folder and press the key Del on your keyboard After this a warning message will appear on the screen e If you want to delete the folder and all clips that are sorted into it confirm the warning message This will delete the respective folder where the context menu was in voked If clips were sorted into the selected folder they will be deleted as well Me Only formerly created folders can be deleted The root folder cannot be changed in any respect 4 2 5 Working with Clips in the Bin In the contents area of the bin you can see the video or audio material already added to the bin and sorted into the folders via their thumbnails and or text information If the thumbnail view is activated and a clip is selected in the contents area a scrub bar to preview your material in still images and set roughly the inpoint
198. as in a vec i torscope Further information about this can be found in sec tion The Video Scopes on page 5 3 Color Wheel Figure 7 32 Color wheel of the primary color correction 7 36 Timeline Element Properties When called for the first time you can find in the middle of the color circle three dots that overlay each other These are the selectors for the high mid and low tones of the image Each can be selected individ ually and positioned anywhere in the circle To select a particular tone selector when they are all located in the center of the circle click some where inside the color circle with the mouse Each click will bring an other selector to the foreground This is the high tone selector It will adjust the o brighter colors of the image while the luminance remains constant This is the mid tone selector It will adjust the aver age colors of the image This is the low tone selector It will adjust the dark bd er colors of the image while the luminance remains constant When positioning a tone selector in the color circle it will cause a color correction of the respective tones towards the color the selector is dragged to The farther away from the center the selector is positioned the more the saturation of that particular color increases For example if an image is too blue then you would drag one or all three selectors in the opposite direction of that color toward yellow In case
199. ate audio and video sepa S rately Both will automatically be included in the created file _ Audio output Channels File format Options Bit depth Render audio in Stereo files Audio auto retiming Off stereo 15 16 Figure 6 69 Configuring audio With the File format combo box select the file format of your audio file s to be generated For a list of the supported file formats see sec tion Supported File Formats on page A 10 To the right of the File format combo box you can find the button OPTIONS which provides 6 83 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 84 depending on the selected format further configurations for the files to be generated From the Bit depth combo box select the bit depth of the audio files The DVS software supports all common bit depths depending on the selected file format Use the Render audio in combo box to determine the output format of your files i e whether they should be rendered to individual mono or stereo files or a single file containing multiple channels depending on the selected file format Audio that is available in the timeline can be re timed i e time stretched or time compressed between different frame rates e g 23 976 Hz 24 Hz and 25 Hz For this select from the Audio auto retiming combo box the appropriate option When activated a retim ing will be performed automatically during finalizing with respect to the frame rate of the selected vi
200. ated clips are shown Only those events will be displayed that have been set to VTR i and are selected by the current setting of the item Apply to see below Either by selecting an entry from the combo box at the top or by using the buttons to the right EEEE MD you can step through the de tected consolidated clips In the table you can see for each consolidated clip the events of the EDL whose source material will only be captured 8 55 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 56 once Via the entry field at the bottom of the window a new name can be specified for the displayed consolidated clip Once confirmed with the button OK the source material of the EDL events shown in this window will be captured with the specified names and linked to the EDL events right after capturing With the check box Capturing order sorted by activated you can de termine the sequence in which the clips should be captured If you are capturing from an externally connected VTR it is recommended to sort the capturing in C mode to avoid cueing times of the VTR default set ting Select from the combo boxes the column headings tab EDL Clips that the batch list should be sorted by The batch list will be sort ed in the specified sequence from top to bottom e g first by reel names then by source inpoint With the button you can add ad ditional combo boxes for further sorting criteria With the button s E you can remove a combo box
201. aterial as well When linking to new material the source in and outpoint of i the original clip in the timeline are used i e its frame numbers To receive images in the timeline the new material must pro vide the same frame numbers for in and outpoint as the orig inal material 6 55 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 5 Working with Video Clips The Edit Tool works with representations of clips in the timeline only This means that as long as you perform your work on the timeline the original material on the storage is maintained and never altered The appearance of the clips in the video track s of the timeline i can be altered in several ways You can change the height of the track s and the display of the thumbnails You can also dis play an unlimited number of video tracks for a vertical editing in the timeline For more information about all this please refer to section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 This section describes several features of video clips added to the video track s of the timeline of the Edit Tool 6 5 1 The Clip s Information The video clips in the video track s of the timeline provide several in formation via their text display eee I 02 47 18 lt ee 14 11 18 R Hollywood 023 LLYWoon Figure 6 52 Representation of video clip The following information are provided top left Usually the exact inpoint of the clip on the timel
202. atiaeticentaiad 6 53 timeline o on 6 53 Disk Online 8 4 8 18 8 37 8 51 disk Space cc cess 2 11 2 13 display ectevsaaecincconctcealoatiateteanaretd 5 9 display settings burn in 5 10 for finalizing casas iousdteceretetseecees 6 81 display type ainesecscabtecetccasieveerectens 6 10 GOMINANCE cossirier 6 82 driver sssesssesesrssssrresrrresrrrrsrrrrrenne 2 2 CONNEC sccierretearserivertceceectenicee 9 23 drop 4 36 4 37 4 39 4 40 4 42 A 2 during play out secc 4 47 during record scssi 4 48 location sesssssseeseseesrerrrerrrreenne 4 42 YEDO cresien 3 2 4 37 4 43 reset COUnNtEr sisaccnweaviuceserenaces 4 41 troubleshooting ccecce 4 47 drop table seatcciarsahigesseessces 4 37 4 42 drop frame timecode 2 18 6 81 EDI scstesmecsatanstscsseatieclshcntateneeese 8 8 dropped frames audio see drop duration Clip iater 3 17 6 57 6 71 7 3 EDL oiis nasaian eannan 8 31 EDL event ccecce 8 8 8 35 EDL reel aiisreirenieitireiesteris 8 39 entry field siescccesiriiisssssss 6 30 timeline oeenn 2 10 6 2 timeline element nsss 7 3 transition ooeec 3 14 7 3 DVI output settings nnneniinieenn 6 12 DVS CineReel sissies 9 7 DVS information file 3 18 4 37 4 41 edit mode eccere 2 7 5 1 5 15 edit point see cutting point Edit Tool c ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 3 2 9 editing o ae 4 25 7 1 7 10 3 4 POIN cccteusasarentoanncteaceetenh 6 38 scene markers oien 6 58 6 68
203. ation Tool Here you can configure and set up the whole video system and the software With it you can for exam ple set up the period for the automatic save func tion of the project file autosave as well as more software specific settings such as the bin properties More information about the Configuration Tool as well as various other configurations that can be per formed can be found in the CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide For a more detailed description of all basic software modules as i well as other parts of the software together with references to their descriptions please refer to section Overview of the Software Structure on page 2 2 2 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 10 Additionally you can find at the bottom right of the task bar several items which will provide you with information about the currently load ed project the duration of its timeline in total and the set video output format for the timeline ee ee eee ee eee lb nee ne project information Figure 2 3 Project information The timeline s duration shows you the duration of all clips present in the timeline tracks and depends on the currently selected video output ras ter frame rate Furthermore to the right of the task bar you can find some status mes sages They will be displayed as soon as project relevant tasks are per formed for instance when a project is loaded or saved 4 II status and
204. ation is detected once more ther close the command line window or press the key combi i To terminate the manually started defragmentation process ei nation Ctrl C A 7 2 Cleaning Temporary Data Manually A 24 When working with the Edit Tool temporary data may be created to ensure a real time capable environment Temporary data can be proxies and or prerendered files both usually written to a location on your main storage especially reserved for this kind of data In case you are not sure whether the temporary data in this directory is necessary you can delete its whole contents manually Afterwards you may load your Appendix project file s again and begin new proxy generations and or preren dering processes It is recommended to perform the procedure described in the A N following only when you are sure that the directory for the temporary data contains material for the respective project s only For this it is best to use a project specific directory struc ture as described in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 Do not delete temporary data manually while the DVS soft ware is running specific in each project file With the respective project file loaded in the Edit Tool it can be found in the Configuration Tool of the DVS software group Project field Path for proxy data see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide i The path to the location of the temporary data is stor
205. ators of video clips provide you with additional editing features for your video processing tasks Depending on the overall con figuration of the DVS system and the optional features installed there may be numerous operators available that enhance the editing func tionality of your system This chapter describes the timeline element properties in detail First it will be explained how to access the properties followed by an explana tion of the items that are available in the properties area for all timeline elements After that it is described how to close the area of the timeline element properties to return to the view of the audio tracks again The chapter will be concluded with a description of the timeline element properties for each timeline element in detail Following the section dealing with the properties of video clips you can find each in a section of its own the explanation of all available effects operators 7 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 1 Accessing the Timeline Element Properties Effects x Zoom Pan 7 2 The properties of timeline elements can be accessed easily in the Edit Tool They will be shown instead of the visible audio tracks right below the timeline area in an area of their own To make this area visible per form the following e Call up the context menu of a timeline element present in the video track of the timeline area e Then select the menu option Show properties Alte
206. autoconforming Then you can start the conforming process right away by confirming the message with the OK button see section Conforming on page 8 14 Alternatively if you want to configure the EDL beforehand or record the clips of the EDL from a connected external player you can skip the automatic conforming with the button CANCEL Then you can process the EDL either in the timeline directly see section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 or use the conforming mode of the Edit Tool for further adjustments see section The Conforming Mode in General on page 8 26 8 2 3 Conforming 8 14 As soon as an EDL is available in the Edit Tool it can be conformed There are several ways to start an autoconforming An autoconforming can be started manually for example with the controls of the conforming mode of the Edit Tool Anautoconforming can be performed automatically right after the build up of an EDL in the timeline For an autoconforming the video audio data must be already i available as files on a storage There are other possibilities at your disposal to conform an EDL such as the capturing of the required data from an exter nally connected player For further information about these see section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 and section The Conforming Mode in General on page 8 26 The above mentioned methods to start an autoconforming will be de
207. based on the time of the shot i e on daylight changes z The timeline can provide an EDL in i C mode and A mode at the same time Just build up the same EDL twice in the timeline in different tracks and with different modes Any effects settings made for an EDL in C mode can also be received for the EDL in A mode By reconforming see section Reconform on page 8 47 the edited EDL with a duplicate of the EDL or with its original EDL file and then creating this EDL in the timeline in A mode the effects settings should be available in A mode as well if set up correctly and the clips provide different durations Transition mode Determines the way transitions will be created in the timeline It enables you to replace transi tions detailed in the EDL with hard cuts e Configure the list to be created in the timeline appropriately e Once everything is set confirm your settings with the OK button This will start the creation process and a progress bar may inform you about its status When finished the clips of the EDL will be available in the timeline of the Edit Tool If an EDL with unconformed events has been added to the timeline you will be asked whether you want to per form an autoconforming immediately CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Continuing with autoconforming ix Do you want to continue with autoconforming sible o e that the ED Figure 8 5 Continue with
208. be closed and the tool area of the DVS software will switch to the job list automatically see section Jobs on page 4 33 Additionally the state of the rendering process will be indicated by a progress bar As soon as it reaches 100 the process will be finished and the window with the progress bar will be closed You can then access the generated clip s on your storage as well as in the bin depending on your settings With the button CLOSE you can close the Finaliz ing window without starting a rendering process You will then return to the main window of the DVS software However already made settings in the Finalizing window will be stored 6 7 5 The Finalized Output Files per Folder The result output of a finalizing depends to some extent on the setting of the Files per folder items They allow you to configure the number of files that will be stored in one directory Files per folder Q Limited to 20000 Unlimited Figure 6 70 The files per folder items By default the files per folder items are set to 20 000 frames because this is an appropriate value for the file system of the operating system Values below 1 000 files cannot be set By activating the Unlimited setting no further subdirectories will be created and the rendered files will all be stored in the first generated subdirectory as described below Windows may cause problems if more than 20 000 files are stored in one directory Use
209. be in the edit mode Audio clips can be used the same way as video clips in the source edit mode When dragging an audio clip to the control area the audio clip will be shown in the video overlay with a part of its waveform The length duration of the waveform displayed can be configured via the Configuration Tool see the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for further information iJ The waveform of the audio bin clip is not displayed when per forming a play out of this clip in the source edit mode The entry fields of the bin clip are connected to the selected display type of the Edit Tool s timeline For example if source timecode is selected as the display type and such a timecode is provided by the clip the bin clip s entry fields will provide the source timecode instead of a relative timeline timecode see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 10 If your bin clip was already set to a preliminary inpoint in the bin you will see the selected inpoint in this mode How to set an inpoint for a clip in the bin can be read in section Preparing Clips for Editing Purposes on page 4 20 In the source edit mode you can select frame accurately an in and out point for your bin clip Once the in and outpoint is set you can drag the bin clip from the control area to the respective tracks of the timeline 5 19 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Dvs as described in section Taking a Clip from th
210. can be used to move the time line cursor by entering a particular position in its entry field afterwards press Enter With this button you can play out the contents of the timeline in real time When a play out is initi ated it will be displayed in the video overlay of the control area as well as at the video and or audio outputs of the DVS system After activation the button changes its appearance to its active state and you have to press it again to stop the play out This button toggles between the frames or fields display mode In its deactivated state the frames of a video clip are displayed when stepping one frame field backward or forward in the timeline When activated its fields will be displayed With these buttons you can step one video frame field for or backwards in the timeline The Pos field will indicate this accordingly With this button activated a play out of the time line will be performed endlessly in a loop Once the timeline cursor reaches the outpoint of the time line the play out will start from the inpoint again To switch off the loop mode simply click this button again This button activates the forward backward play mode of the timeline In this mode an endless play out of the timeline will be performed once a play out is started When the timeline cursor reaches the outpoint of the timeline the play out will be reversed and the timeline is played backwards speed 1 until the inpoint is reac
211. ccordingly You can also use the menu options Activate all proxies or Li Deactivate all proxies on the Bin menu to activate or deac tivate all proxies in the bin in one step see section Activate all proxies on page 9 22 and section Deactivate all proxies on page 9 22 S 4 23 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 24 Deleting Proxies Once you are finished with your editing work using the proxies you may want to dispose of them i e delete them from the main storage e In the contents area of the bin select the clips whose proxies you want to delete see section Selecting Clips on page 4 18 e Next call up the context menu on one of the selected clips and choose the menu option Delete proxy In case you want to delete all proxies available for the cur i rent project in a single step you can use the menu option Delete all proxies on the Bin menu see section Delete all proxies on page 9 21 The proxies of the selected clips will be deleted immediately from the storage and if applicable the bin clips will be configured back to their original source materials PVs The Tool Area 4 3 Effects The tab Effects of the tool area provides access to all effects delivered with the DVS software After starting the software the bin is by default activated in the tool area Once you select the tab Effects in the tool area the area will look similar to the following Bin
212. cesachatacecetececeteetce A 5 conforming tool n 8 62 control area ecen 5 13 6 27 cursor 5 14 5 20 5 23 6 28 8 62 8 63 CUISOF POSITION caterastsulacecdioncans 5 23 preview area ocr sistas daaiacbaseeentada 8 60 synchronize with timeline 5 21 thumbnail o ae 3 6 4 20 SD OUtpUHS eicscceeeceiateae asteeetceeneeeead 6 14 SDI OUTPUT ssiiieceneeteek 5 8 6 12 SEtt NgS ccecce 6 12 secondary color correction 7 10 7 38 alpha channel ssitvsaternacet iter ass 7 47 color mask nosice 7 39 7 42 color vector list ncc 7 41 high mid l0W ccn 7 37 pipette n 7 39 7 47 prerendering a ciiccrsasuateasecennas 7 41 preview window 7 39 7 46 7 47 primary color correction 7 40 7 48 reset color correction ee 7 50 reset color vector ocsecccce 7 47 selection shape n n 7 44 SOFTNESS oiccen 7 44 7 47 SABE ciriciri neneiia 7 38 selecting clips in DiN sessirnir 4 18 clips in timeline o n 6 37 EDL EVENTS rirerire 8 32 EDL reels liine 8 38 DIEE 8 28 updated EDL wccegisacretietaree cect 8 47 selection shape n 7 44 sequence processing 5 26 6 61 6 63 Sequencelnfo xml assecca 4 12 6 87 SEWING gossmieieere rerni 3 7 3 10 6 12 effects ccc 4 26 7 12 7 14 effects operator n 7 12 load global settings 0 9 25 PVs Index save defaults ccce 9 25 Source TC oo ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 11 6 79 save global settings 0 9 26 Source TC in header 8 4 8 16 8 1
213. ch as searching in the SpycerNet SpycerNet as well as on the local storage Disk On line When Disk Online or VTR TL is set as the Source type a i path has to be specified for the respective events on the tabs EDL Clips or EDL Reels see section Conforming Mode The Work Area on page 8 28 Events set to VTR will be ignored For them you have to per form a capturing see section Capture data on page 8 54 A click on the button LINK DATA opens the following window Link Data Aditional search criteria Reel name Get from header Clip name Get from file name Source searching settings Config Standard All levels Further options x Renderspeed effects Apply to All clips Link data Cancel Figure 8 34 Linking data This window provides almost the same settings items as the Autocon form window The ones that are missing should have been configured manually on the tabs of the work area The following describes the set tings items that are available in addition For information about the ones not described please refer to section Configuring the Autocon forming on page 8 16 Hosts for With the button CONFIG you can determine searching in where in the SpycerNet to search for clips It SpycerNet opens a window that lists all systems currently registered in the SpycerNet and their watch folders in a tree view Select the systems direc tories where to search for
214. clips in the timeline see section Using Preset Effects on page 4 28 Creating Preset Effects via the Keyboard Preset effects can also be created via the keyboard Then they can be used as keyboard shortcuts to apply the respective preset effect For this perform the following 4 27 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs e Select the adjusted effect from the effects list of the timeline ele ment properties e Then press the key combination Shift F lt n gt with lt n gt as the number of the function key on your keyboard that you want to assign the preset effect to i e keys F1 to F12 This will create a subeffect under the respective effects operator in the effects pane It will carry in its name the function key written in square brackets as the last element By performing the above said repeatedly you can create as many preset effects for this effects operator as there are function keys available Once available in the effects pane the name of the preset effect can be changed see section Administration of Preset Effects on page 4 29 and or it can be applied immediately to other clips in the timeline see section Using Preset Effects on page 4 28 The assigned function keys are valid for the selected effects op i erator alone meaning you can assign the same function key s to different effects operators For example you can assign the F2 key to a primary color correction as well as to
215. crease speed by 1 speed will be indicat ed in fps in play button L Increase speed by 0 1 speed will be indi Shift L cated in fps in play button Decrease speed by 1 speed will be indi D cated in fps in play button Decrease speed by 0 1 speed will be in Shift J dicated in fps in play button Step one 1 frame forward Right Arrow 4 Step one 1 frame backward Left Arrow 3 Step ten 10 frames forward Shift Right Arrow 2 Step ten 10 frames backward Shift Left Arrow 1 Jump to project begin Pos 1 Jump to project end End Go to next cutting point Ctrl Right Arrow S Go to previous cutting point Ctrl Left Arrow A Activate insert mode 3 Activate overwrite mode Imports a clip from the source edit mode into the timeline in insert mode V Imports a clip from the source edit mode into the timeline in overwrite mode B Trim move by one 1 frame forward Trim move by one 1 frame backward L Trim move by ten 10 frames forward Trim move by ten 10 frames backward M Add edit cutting point Shift H Set timeline inpoint Set timeline outpoint E I R O CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 8 Action Shortcut Set timeline in and outpoint at the
216. crub bar cursor out of the way to grab the in or outpoint handler e With the mouse select the in or outpoint handler and move each to their desired positions dlers you may also perform one of the following Either enter the position of the in and outpoint handlers in the in and out point entry fields of the position items then press Enter or move the scrub bar cursor to the desired position and press the in or outpoint button i For a frame accurate positioning of the in and outpoint han The still selected part of the scrub bar will be shown in light grey while the deselected part is displayed in a dark grey Additionally the counter will decrease PVs The Control Area 12 00 4 I gt Delete i 04 00 4 6 16 00 Figure 5 20 Set in and outpoint of the bin clip You can also work the other way around you can first deter i mine and set the length of the clip to be inserted and then move the partin light grey along the scrub bar with the mouse to position it When everything is set as desired select the bin clip in its video overlay and drag and drop it to the respective video or audio track of the time line see section Taking a Clip from the Control Area on page 6 4 for further information To switch the control area back to its edit mode use the appropriate button of the control area E 5 5 3 Processing the Source Material of a Video Clip In addition to setting
217. ctcsecestcontnetiecedacs 7 53 creation progress eessen 4 33 previous cutting point 5 17 8 63 data location n c 2 14 primary color correction 7 10 7 31 deactivate o e 4 23 9 22 brightness sessie 7 33 delete temporary data 4 24 9 21 color wheel ccecce 7 36 A 24 CONtraSt eee cee eee ee eee renee 7 33 USAgE ease 4 22 e E ate cat ta aretaee 7 35 workflow nsee 2 12 aMMa cctessecesacetesueatnew 4 33 7 39 PUdOWN grnininmeraunarteinarnas 6 82 global settings ee 7 34 Righi erisnimien aioi chee 7 33 R NUE cree eh cette nae eet i 7 34 NITE raisonne i ERER 7 35 raw content ccc cccccccccccccccccuceccccceee 2 15 NUP EEEE EEEE 7 34 real time master luma chroma n 7 32 capability of clips 2 11 4 13 4 46 reset color correction s 7 37 CONE oasssissssiiisssiieererrirrrrrserrrsens 4 38 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide operation 2 11 2 14 4 13 4 36 4 46 5 2 performance 1 7 4 36 4 44 WAM NG cee ianie e155 te Ghe eens tats 4 13 recent files ceecee 9 5 record performance nsss 4 44 resolving Crops eeee 4 48 REDCODE cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 15 camera parameters cecen 7 60 color correction sssr 7 60 source timecode ccceeeeeee 2 17 redo e E 9 17 FOC EAE E E A TET A 5 name in EDL 8 8 8 34 9 11 reference number keycode 2 17 8 8 8 34 8 50 relinking clips 6 55 6 59 6 73 8 3 renaming preset effects 0
218. cur in the timeline More information on this can be found in section In sert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 31 The in or outpoint handler will react to certain elements of the timeline snapping mode to allow for an automated position ing You can deactivate the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key Further information about the snapping mode can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 PVs The Timeline During the positioning of the in or outpoint handler of clips you can see a representation of the length of the clip in its timeline track The blue line right above the clip shows its original length lt head tail indicator Figure 6 42 Display of original length of clip With this you can easily determine whether and how much head or tail is available to for example create a transition 6 4 10 Advanced Trimming The advanced trimming features of the Edit Tool work the same way as the changing of in and outpoints of elements already added to the timeline see section How to Change In Outpoints in the Timeline on page 6 45 They are available when you select two or more in or outpoint handlers of timeline elements present in the timeline This procedure can be used for all timeline elements i e video clips audio clips and embedded operators e g transitions For further more general information about tri
219. cursor of the thumbnail a pos sible clip s inpoint will be set accordingly With this procedure folders in the folder area may be created automatically representing the directory structure on the stor age Then the clips will already be sorted into the respective folders This behavior can be configured with the Configura tion Tool of the DVS software see the CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide Folders may also be created automatically if an audio clip is registered as a multi clip For more information about multi clips see section Details about Clips on page 4 10 The respective data will then be made available to the DVS software and you will see it in the contents area of the bin By repeating the de scribed steps above you can add as many clips to the bin as you need Once clips are available in the bin you can start working with the Edit Tool and add them to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 The Tool Area Adding Clips to the Bin Using the Add Clip Menu Options You can use the Add Clip menu options to select video or audio clips that you want available in the bin For a list of the supported file formats see section Supported File Formats on page A 10 e Either select the Add Clip menu option on the context menu of the bin s contents area or the menu option Add clips on the menu Project section The Project Menu on page 9 3 Bot
220. cut T ting points of the current clip Delete timeline inpoint D Delete timeline outpoint F Delete timeline in and outpoint G Go to timeline inpoint Q Go to timeline outpoint W Add timeline marker Shift N Zoom into timeline Up Arrow Zoom out of timeline Down Arrow Mute on off video track 1 8 Mute on off video track 2 7 Mute on off audio track 1 9 Mute on off audio track 2 0 Mute on off audio track 3 J Mute on off audio track 4 Additionally the following keyboard actions and shortcuts may be helpful Action Key Action Enter double zero 00 in timecode fields numeric keypad Deactivate snapping mode Hold Shift key while working in the timeline with the mouse Slave mode on off Alt S Select several clips and or transi tions disjointedly Hold Ctrl key while selecting clips transitions with the mouse Select a range of adjoining clips and or transitions Hold Shift key while selecting clips transitions with the mouse Select all elements in the area that has the focus Ctrl A Copy bin clip to a folder of the bin instead of moving Hold Ctrl key while drag and drop of clip with mouse Copy selected elements to the clip board Ctrl C Appendix Action Key Action Cut selected elements to the clip Ctrl X board Paste from cl
221. d Its progress can be seen in the job list blue The clip is already prerendered With a double click of the mouse on the timeline scale below the yellow line you can start the prerendering process Alternatively you can use the menu option Prerender on the context menu of the timeline ele ment The progress of the rendering can be seen in the job list of the tab Jobs see section Jobs on page 4 33 6 43 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs You can delete prerendered data for example if it is no longer required with the menu option Delete prerendering on the context menu of a video clip For more information about the prerendering process in general see section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 After a prerendering save your project file If an already saved project file is not saved after a prerendering process again the prerendered files will not be recognized by the Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more They will not be used for a play out and have to be deleted manually as described in section Cleaning Temporary Data Manually on page A 24 Also related to the prerendering of files is the Prerender all i menu option on the menu Project see section Prerender all on page 9 15 6 4 9 Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements 6 44 Usually before a clip is added to the timeline you adjust its in and out point via the source edit mode of
222. d black areas are not selected i e keyed out gt Incase a clip provides no alpha channel the displayed images will be completely white showing that nothing is keyed out 6 69 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 6 Working with Audio Clips With audio clips it is the same as with video clips The DVS software works with representations of the clips in the timeline only Throughout your work in the Edit Tool the original material on the storage is main tained and never altered By default the timeline area will show 16 audio tracks where you can add audio clips in the desired sequence set fade ins and outs and con trol the volume of each clip The number of audio tracks displayed in the Edit Tool can be set freely see section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 7 To get a proper output you have to configure the audio hard ware output accordingly see section How to Configure the Audio Output on page 6 14 The DVS software supports audio files with multiple mono or stereo channels If you drag such a clip from the bin to the timeline the additional channels will be added to the other au dio tracks below the selected one This section describes several features of audio clips added to the audio tracks of the timeline 6 6 1 The Clip s Information Audio clips in the audio tracks of the timeline provide several informa tion via their text display 14 55 933 14 59 436 14
223. d clips and acti vate the menu option Create proxy or use the menu option Gen erate proxies on the Bin menu see section Generate proxies on page 9 21 This switches the tool area from the Bin to the Jobs tab which will then detail the status of the render operation s For each triggered render job one entry will be displayed In case of several render jobs they will be dealt with in the current sorting order of the bin see section Sort ing Clips on page 4 19 During the rendering the downconverted im ages of the proxy will be stored in a reserved location for proxies on the main storage It is best to handle and administer the proxy data project spe i cific meaning for each project in a different storage location Further information about this can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 The Tool Area Once the render operations are finished their entries will disappear from the list of the Jobs tab Afterwards you can begin to work with the proxies They will be already activated in the bin and ready for use After a proxy generation save your project file If an already saved project file is not saved again after creating proxies the proxy files will not be recognized by the Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more Neither will they be used for the project nor can they be deleted via the software They have to be deleted manually as described in section C
224. d for the respective effect the keyframe editor will be dis played in the settings pane of the effect Keyframe Editor 01 20 03 10 05 00 06 20 08 10 Frame In Out Graph Zoom X Colors Figure 7 14 Keyframe editor With the keyframe editor a keyframing of the effect s settings can be set On the left hand side you can find a list of the effect s settings that can be used for a keyframing On the right hand side the graph of the keyframe editor is displayed where a keyframing can be configured 7 8 1 The Parameters List To the left of the keyframe editor you can find the Parameters list It lists all settings of the effect that can be used for a keyframing 7 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 22 Parameters ZoomxX PanX x x x x x x Rotation Figure 7 15 Parameters list For each effect setting in the list there is one keyframing line available in the graph of the keyframe editor In the default view of the keyframe editor they are color coded meaning each setting is displayed in a dif ferent color and you can easily identify the keyframing line belonging to a setting because they are drawn in the same color However due to the fact that most effect settings have default values of either one e g 1 000 or 50 their respective keyframing lines may overlap each other in the graph With the list of parameters you can select the setting that should be keyframed When selecting a set ting fr
225. d how to set them can be found in the CLIPSTER Configu rations user guide 6 2 10 Naming Tracks When working with a lot of timeline tracks each can be given a name of its own to distinguish between them more easily For this simply type in in the entry field right above the buttons a name You can give track names to all tracks available in the timeline area Offline Figure 6 26 Example of track names Due to the fact that the area preceding each track will always be visible in the timeline area of the Edit Tool it may help you to identify individ ual tracks more easily 6 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 3 Controlling the Timeline Most work is performed in the timeline of the Edit Tool directly In the timeline you can arrange the sequence of video clips cut the material or set transitions and other operators for the clips Furthermore you can play out the timeline either the whole timeline or a defined range of the timeline This section explains in detail how to control the timeline Among oth ers it will be explained how to move within the timeline and how to set an in and outpoint for the timeline to play out or finalize the selected range only 6 3 1 Moving within the Timeline 6 26 The Edit Tool provides two representations of the timeline in its user in terface There is the timeline with timeline scale and audio and video tracks in the timeline area and there is a scrub bar of
226. d points are the start as well as end of the timeline or the set in and out point The first button jumps to previous points on the timeline while the second button jumps to next ones With the Lock button you can synchronize the timeline cursor of the timeline with the scrub bar cursor of the bin clip Then the timeline cursor will adjust to your moves of the scrub bar cursor for example if you scrub the bin clip s scrub bar or move via the buttons to step for or backwards The way the synchronization is performed can be set with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide This way you can check a conformed offline com posed project frame accurately with for example the master in the timeline and the offline edited clip in the source edit mode 5 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 5 2 Setting In and Outpoint for the Clip from the Bin 5 22 When the video or audio clip from the bin bin clip was dragged to the control area and the source edit mode is activated you can set the in and outpoint of the clip frame accurately For this you have to use the scrub bar and the position items fHollywood HOLLYWoo D scrub bar 20 00 gt position items e Joe w 00 00 20 00 07 05 Figure 5 19 Bin clip in source edit mode The scrub bar provides a timeline of the clip coming from the bin You can use it and the position items to adjust the in and outpoint of the
227. dard operating either compressed or uncompressed 3 x 12 bit XYZ 12 bit XYZ file format Flexible data and still image compression standard operating either compressed or uncompressed SG14 sgi 3 x 8 bit RGB 8 bit RGB file format SGI IRIX image format nee 3 x 16 bit RGB 16 bit RGB file format SGI IRIX image format Targa tga 3 x 8 bit RGB Targa image format Only uncompressed vari 4 x 8 bit RGBA and ants of this format are supported 8 bit Luma TIFF cif 3 x 8 bit RGB TIFF or Tagged Image File Format in 8 bit RGB A ELEE 4 x 8 bit RGBA and with or without key Highly flexible and plat 8 bit Luma form independent image format Not all vari ants of this format are supported 3 x 12 bit RGB TIFF or Tagged Image File Format in 12 bit 4 x 12 bit RGBA and RGB with or without key Highly flexible and 12 bit Luma platform independent image format Not all variants of this format are supported 3 x 16 bit RGB TIFF or Tagged Image File Format in 16 bit 4 x 16 bit RGBA and RGB with or without key Highly flexible and 16 bit Luma platform independent image format Not all variants of this format are supported CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide DVS Format Default File storage Descrinti escription Name Extension format YUV qnt 8 bit YUV 4 2 2 and Raw 8 bit YUV file format with or without qtl YUVA 4 2 2 4 key This file has no header The image for yuv ma
228. dated If already imported into the DVS software you EDL can use this option to select the updated EDL from the drop down list of the combo box It will list all EDLs available in the project With the check boxes you can determine that the clips of the updated EDL should be set to the same effects settings configured for the clips of the EDL to be updated To apply these effects settings correctly you can specify a tolerance value for the clip lengths with the Tolerance 8 47 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 48 settings Then a clip will receive the same effects settings as a clip of the older EDL if its duration is within the stated tolerance Enter the tol erance in the entry field to the right either in frames or timecode nota tion which can be switched with the combo box to the left Finally with the button RECONFORM you can automatically conform the updated EDL on the basis of the already conformed one Afterward the updated EDL can be selected in the bin from where it can be used as usual e g created in the timeline of the Edit Tool Remove from TL This button removes the EDL that is selected in the work area from the timeline sert overwrite mode see also section Insert Overwrite Mode i When removing an EDL from the timeline observe the in of the Timeline on page 6 31 Set status to offline With this button you can set the statuses of the EDL events that are cur rently sel
229. dattecicnsessartens 6 15 EDL TEE eonna 8 39 slip triMM Ing aistsasabincabasinaniakcaaauds 6 48 tranisiti N scissors 7 9 slow motion 6 53 6 58 6 72 status MESSAGES s 2 10 snapping mode 3 8 3 11 6 36 performance monitor 4 37 4 41 Snapshot ae ae eee 9 26 SLEPEO iccdicesscsatesaseniees 6 15 6 71 8 12 SOAP interface uee 9 26 StereoOSCOpyY icivicssisinsisaiusargierssanarens 1 6 SOFTNESS onone 7 9 7 44 7 47 still image format n A 10 software modules ccecce 2 2 2 9 stopping of play 5 16 5 21 5 34 8 63 software Structure s src 2 2 storage naese 1 7 3 4 4 6 4 44 sorting Capacity airean neons aiai 1 7 CIPS IN DiN ahcssareceseassi wisiviieees 4 19 CONTENTS sticciierstceintee cee 2 4 4 10 clips into folders bin 4 19 disk space n n 2 11 2 13 BDL eccswctainnighanawsatasasanincinnindais 8 29 files per folder finalizing 6 80 6 85 EDL events cccccesscecesineceeuceeeets 8 29 location aisiaiasiedesateceshintatoianieas 4 13 EDI eels ironinen 8 29 performance sissasersnvsenaces 4 36 4 44 OMVGCWS sdecescesceateoarseecesedeeniansass 4 32 synchronization 00 6 15 6 51 folders in bin ecc 4 15 System base video directory 4 14 9 20 timeline markers ccc 4 35 source Material cecce 6 57 T eEXpOrt ccecce 5 25 5 26 6 62 frame position cccssseesseessse E ee ey ee 4 1 PIFOXY eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneees 4 23 Bin oo cate es custo a aes 4 3 relinking n se 6 55
230. decdenay 9 19 configuration oo eee 3 4 4 4 contents area 3 3 4 4 4 16 context menu contents area 4 17 context menu folder area 4 14 context menu title bar 4 4 copying clips 0 4 18 4 20 creating a folder 4 8 4 15 deleting a clip cccdsv is svodssceerci cess 4 21 deleting a folder sxsc ccescseeccecccens 4 16 ORO a E T 9 19 folder area occ 3 3 4 3 4 14 yg lela geen eee erence cer reer 9 18 inpoint setting 0 3 6 4 20 load ccnn 9 18 NCW soinean eaan 9 19 pasting Clips rsisissrsissrrisisss 4 18 renaming a folder sccsssasiesessseeds 4 15 selecting clips wivasarienbarcieccteves 4 18 sorting clips into folders 4 19 sorting of clips neee 4 19 sorting of folders eeeeeeeeea 4 15 LORE ONY dorsiers reia 4 6 thumbnail o ae 3 5 4 11 thumbnail with text ee 4 5 title bar aaaeaii 4 3 4 4 4 15 view buttons neiccen 4 4 4 5 Din Clip osei 5 19 A 2 see also bin create finalizing 1 0 6 78 inpoint setting 3 6 4 20 PLAY a 5 21 reverse play sccnesactatsesceceniencs 5 20 bit depth V dEO Leenen 6 80 PVs Index black frames 6 78 MOUE s 6 29 brightness a n 7 33 7 40 7 50 IDOI scc 5 23 6 30 broadcast signal legal 5 4 IPISGRE Seccavescesstocsininacauss 5 17 6 31 broadcast standard n 5 3 Invert sirrinin 7 47 7 52 Broadcast Wave secc 2 16 Lin to Log sce gsccesccossacachseasscgsey 6 20 DUNIN osetossdeenandsencesnsegeelase
231. delete volume control point 6 71 Curation ossec 2 10 6 2 enable 3D LUT file sescsctvecececssss 6 21 enable cropping s s 6 24 forward backward play mode 5 34 BADE aS ee recieeercen senate 6 36 in outpoint 6 29 6 30 6 45 inconsistencies aec 6 59 indicator line ccecce 6 43 length indicator ssc cenceceecsd2cerees 6 2 NGS esses ieee aiia iaia 6 34 loop MOMS z2cavicsenccuat ten 5 17 5 34 move Within eccerre 6 26 MUTE sirean iiei 6 34 DW iiare aces decease eaves Eiaa 9 3 OUISED crisiectnasaedsusiethonatereacerectees 6 9 paste clips gatecnte tosses in tele iene 6 38 play cise tieaetesescesiateuiesad 5 16 8 63 properties of video clips 2 5 6 59 red line xsdzscesdzasetetesteesiaeseiadinas 6 36 C210 6 eee een a eer ee 9 17 relinking clips 6 55 6 59 6 73 8 3 reverse play veritatis 5 16 8 63 SVE 9 6 9 7 selecting clips wa ssiascectutecticestacen 6 37 time stretching compression 6 53 6 58 6 72 tooltip 6 57 6 58 6 71 6 72 tooltip configuration 6 10 UNIO prerii eerie es 9 17 PVs Index vertical editing ccc 6 63 yellow line ccecce 6 43 ZOOM oeeeceeceeseeeeees 3 9 5 13 6 27 timeline area n 2 7 change size ccce 4 2 6 6 timeline cursor 3 13 5 16 6 26 A 5 frame end marker 6 27 A 3 synchronize with source 5 21 timeline marker s es 6 50 timeline element acc2sc1d2ceesnseseeoeerevies A 5 delete range in timeline 6 39
232. deo format However please note that this feature provides no pitch control and should therefore be used for slight timing changes only With the check boxes of the area Channels you have to select audio channels for the output The stereo channel check boxes of this area are directly related to the audio channel output settings of the timeline see section How to Configure the Audio Output on page 6 14 They will render whatever audio track is set to the respective output chan nels Example The audio track 5 and 6 of the Edit Tool contain each audio with dif ferent contents Both tracks are configured to an output of channel 1 and 2 In the Finalizing window select the channels 1 and 2 for an audio file generation This will result in an audio file that contains the mixed contents of the audio tracks 5 and 6 Audio track of Edit Tool 5 6 Output path of tracks channels 1 2 channels 1 2 Output settings in Finaliz channels 1 2 ing window Results in file containing the mixed E of audio track 5 and 6 Dvs The Timeline 6 7 4 Finalizing The buttons at the bottom right hand side of the window Finalizing allow you to control this window Use the button RENDER to start the finalizing pro cess It will be available as soon as the necessary in formation are set such as output type storage information and format Then the Finalizing window will
233. deo format can be set separately for the SDI and the DVI analog outputs The settings items of the tab DVI Analog will be available once the check box Lock to Output is deactivated 6 13 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs As soon as you confirm your settings with the OK button they will be in effect The in and outputs of the system except the SD outputs will change their format respectively Depending on the selected video for mat for SDI the video overlay of the Edit Tool may change its aspect ra tio 16 9 4 3 et al In the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide you can configure the SD outputs as well as set an output raster that the DVS software should use as the default raster after starting a new project Mr Rasters for film not included in the SDI standard i e 2K with i 20 Hz or more are output via the analog and DVI outputs only In the Timeline output settings window you have further configuration possibilities at hand via the Options area at the bottom of the window There you can configure the following The video and audio track sizes as well as the number of tracks see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 The analog audio outputs to monitor audio during your editing work see section Further Audio Configurations on page 6 17 A3D LUT file to be used for the timeline optionally avail able see section Loading and App
234. dy described in section Configuring the Autoconforming on page 8 16 you can select here for video clips the following Start frame This setting is similar to File number as TC You can use it if there is no direct connec tion between file numbers and EDL timecodes With this set ting you can specify a start frame number that should be identified as the source inpoint see below The actual search will be performed as with File number as TC tab EDL Reels There you can assign a start frame number for a complete reel see section The Tab EDL Reels on page 8 37 i This setting can also be made on the When an autoconforming is performed for this event a manually adjusted set ting will be overwritten with the one of the autoconforming Source TC type If Source TC in header is selected in Search criteria you can select the type of time code that should be used for the search with this field It is the same setting as made for an autoconforming with source timecode see sec tion Configuring the Autoconforming on page 8 16 The Conforming Tool Column Description Offset Start frame When File number as TC is selected you can enter in this field a timecode frames offset for the respective event negative as well as positive The entered offset will be added to the source in and outpoint When Start frame is selected you can enter in thi
235. e 05 00 p 75 Figure 7 23 Positioning keyframes 7 27 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs During the moving of a keyframe with the mouse its position and set ting is displayed on the screen allowing you to accurately position and set the keyframe Each keyframing line represents a setting of the effect Thus to set and adjust a keyframe you can also use the settings of the effect directly Simply select one of the settings items in the settings pane of the effect and a keyframe will be created on the respective keyframing line at the position of the timeline cursor Then it can be adjusted to your needs with the settings item of the effect directly The settings items of the effect can also be used to adjust already avail able keyframes For this position the timeline cursor of the graph on a keyframe see section Moving within the Graph on page 7 25 and then use the settings item in the settings pane of the effect to change the keyframe An already created keyframe can also be adjusted precisely in the graph with a double click of the mouse on a keyframe This will open a small window in the graph where the setting of the keyframe can be entered Pana 3 00 3 00 Figure 7 24 Exact positioning of keyframe The range of possible values that can be entered is indicated in the win dow in square brackets Once a valid setting is entered the keyframe can be precisely set either by using the OK button o
236. e format Destination TC Export format EDL only Determines the type of timecode that should be set as the destination in and outpoints in the exported EDL You can select between Current destination TC and Original destination TC These settings perform the same as the ones explained for Source TC only for the destination timecodes Offset only for the destination timecodes Export format EDL only Same as Offset above Settings Group Reel name for export In the settings group Reel name for export you can determine the reel name s for the data list to be exported CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 9 12 Export as Export fo t p ma Reel name will be Timece port e currently set in data list Reel name for export p name Additional info for export eel name Camera Magazine number Path amp name Clip folder New global reel name __ Don t limit reel names to 8 characters OK Figure 9 7 Further options settings Usually when exporting from the conforming tool the reel name as it is currently set in the EDL will be taken When exporting the timeline the reel name as detailed in the header data of the files or UNNAMED if none is available will be used Via the radio buttons you can set other options for the reel name to be written to the data list The check box at the bottom of this settings group is available for the export format EDL only When acti
237. e Control Area on page 6 4 While in the source edit mode you can use the controls at the i bottom of the control area as usual They control the video overlay on the right side see section Controls on page 5 15 Furthermore although the edit mode is the most appropriate mode to perform editing tasks you can also perform your work in this mode In addition to setting an in and outpoint for the bin clip you can select in the source edit mode other applications than the DVS software to process your video data see section Processing the Source Material of a Video Clip on page 5 25 5 5 1 Controlling the Clip from the Bin Below the scrub bar of the clip from the bin bin clip you can find the controls to control the bin clip In detail they perform the following Audio clips provide the same trim and play out possibilities as i video clips The contents of the audio clip will be played out at channel 1 and 2 of the digital audio outputs If these are routed to the analog outputs you can hear the clip at these outputs as well see section Configuring the Video and Audio Out put on page 6 12 5 20 With these buttons you can step one frame sam ple for or backwards in the scrub bar of the bin clip The scrub bar cursor will move accordingly With this button you can play out the bin clip backwards i e it will start a reverse play out When a reverse play out is initiated the co
238. e Effects list of the timeline element properties CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Effects Lok x Figure 7 6 Drag and drop of effect This will apply the selected effect to the clip whose properties are dis played in the area of the timeline element properties Its settings con trols will be made available in the settings pane to the right where you can then perform the desired adjustments see section Altering Effect Settings on page 7 12 Some effects are not real time capable Prior to a play out their i application to a clip in the timeline has to be rendered see sec tion Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 To delete an applied effect from the effects list of the clip in the timeline you can select the respective effect and press the key Del on your keyboard 7 6 2 Altering Effect Settings With the timeline element properties area you can set the properties of a video clip via the available effects operators The effects added to a video clip in the timeline can be accessed easily with the effects list to the left 7 12 PVs Timeline Element Properties Effects x Zoom Pan effects list e B im ilter Adaptive Filter real time Aperture Rotation jm Figure 7 7 Video clip properties Simply select an effect from the effects list and its settings are immedi ately displayed in the settings pane to the right of the list Then they can be
239. e TIMELINE EDL button is a toggle button For further information about it see section Se lecting Contents for Viewing on page 8 60 EHE H With these buttons you can step one frame field for or backward in the displayed contents The scrub bar cursor will move accord ingly anani With this button you can play out the displayed contents backwards i e it will start a reverse play out Once activated the button changes its appearance to its active state To stop the re verse play out you have to click it again L With this button you can play out the contents that is currently displayed After activation the button changes its appearance to its active state QE and you have to press it again to stop the play e With this button activated a play of the dis played contents will be performed endlessly in a loop Once the scrub bar cursor reaches the end of the contents the play will start from the be ginning again To switch off the loop mode sim ply click this button again EE These buttons jump to particular points on the contents currently displayed in the preview area such as in outpoints or timeline markers The first button jumps to the point that is previously located while the second button jumps to the next one 8 7 5 Clip Properties As soon as you select an element for viewing see section Selecting Contents for Viewing on page 8 60 additional information about the 8 63 CLIPSTER Edit Too
240. e appear ances of the tables can be found in the area View of the conforming controls see section The View Controls on page 8 42 7n Some columns of the tables are hidden by default such as the i ones to configure a conforming manually for individual events Source type Search criteria and Offset Start frame For information about how to display these see section View set tings on page 8 43 The entries in the tables can be sorted in descending or ascending order For this simply click on the respective column heading with the mouse that you want to sort the list by most columns offer this feature This switches between an ascending and descending order of the entries in the respective column The type of order will be indicated by a triangle to the right of the column heading 8 5 3 Changing Values and Entries In most views of the work area you can change the displayed elements to adapt the conforming to your needs To change a table entry on one of the tabs you have to double click it or press the keyboard key F2 after selecting the respective field If an editing is allowed the appear ance of the field will be slightly altered whereupon you will be able to modify it Depending on the type of field that you want to edit there may be additional user interface items available then Changes to events can only be performed as long as they are unconformed status Offline 8 29
241. e currently visible area of the tool area To get a better view on the individual tools or make items visible that are otherwise hidden you can change the size of the tool area For this perform the following e Move the outer right edge of the tool area to the left or to the right with the mouse Then you will be able to view for example the thumbnails of clips present in the bin together with all their text information Name a Resolutior Color dept Colormod pir Aspect rati Framerate Audio cha ame Figure 4 2 Adjusting the size of the tool area horizontally If you pull the right edge completely to the left the tool area i will no longer be visible and thus can be turned off If you pull the right edge completely to the right the control area will be hidden and you can see horizontally the contents of the respec tive tool in full Additionally you can alter the size of the tool area vertically e Move the lower edge of the tool and control area which is also the upper edge of the timeline area up or down with the mouse to enlarge or reduce the areas Figure 4 3 Adjusting the size of the tool area vertically The vertical size of the tool and control area will adjust itself automati cally which will also affect the size of the timeline area see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 for further in formation PVs The Tool Area 4 2 The Bin After starting
242. e directory the DVS software divides the clip and saves it in as many subdirectories as needed un der one main directory Afterwards this main directory can be added to the bin as a multi clip To recognize multi clips correctly a metadata file Sequence Info xm1 is created as well detailing the number of files per folder for this clip Further information about fi nalizing and the storing of a clip in subdirectories can be found in section Finalizing the Timeline on page 6 76 When adding a main directory with one or more i audio clips in subdirectories to the bin it is checked whether they are multi clips If regis tered as such a thumbnail for each multi clip will be added to the contents area of the bin as described above In addition one or more sub folders will be created in the bin which will con tain the individual clips used for the audio multi clips This behavior is useful because contrary to video multi clips you cannot change the properties of an audio multi clip via the context menu If you want to change the properties of an audio multi clip you have to change them for each clip individually in its respective bin subfolder see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 Clips of either audio or video that were not completely recorded receive this icon Then you will know that parts of this clip may be missing However you can already use them in the timeline of the Edit Tool and work
243. e in outpoint will be deleted If both are deleted the whole timeline will be available again for a play out 6 3 3 Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline The INSERT button toggles between the insert and overwrite mode of the Edit Tool Insert Mode In the insert mode a moved or added clip is inserted between the video material already present in the timeline The video material behind the insertion point is moved backward from its position 6 31 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 32 on the timeline In the insert mode no video material will be overwritten and intact undivided clips will be divided at the insertion point To set a transition in the insert mode there must be enough head and tail available otherwise the TRANS button will not be available For more information about transitions see section Setting Transitions on page 6 41 When working with attached clips in the timeline the over write mode is activated automatically Then you cannot switch to the insert mode anymore Further information about this and the attachment of clips can be found in section Attaching Audio Clips to Video Clips on page 6 51 Example With the insert mode activated add a clip from the bin to the timeline or move a clip to the middle of an intact clip insertion point The result will be that clip no 1 gets divided at the insertion point The added clip no 2 will be placed here while the rest of cli
244. e linking acrcasssscscraasuansous 8 59 View settings ccecce 8 43 VolUMe cadccsenreceiaiaiettaectneniions 6 73 WaVe crisci e 6 75 byte order ossssscscierrrer 6 80 C camera parameters ccce 7 60 cancel job seesce oe ea cece eevee ead 4 33 capacity storage eccere 1 7 CANAAN sscsectnicneneenbacoreseetee 2 3 4 10 change contents of timeline 6 63 chapter Overview sesiecssssesccaadenteryinas 1 3 chart ctixsecccicdetsendhviecsiiene 4 36 4 38 CONOIS ccccsscvideccecavecesete 4 37 4 40 resolution s es 4 41 check for inconsistencies 8 59 9 4 9 18 9 19 CHOMA een no eee ey eee ee 5 5 CineReel oui cececkt scat tocetenstuetenensheeeeeas 9 7 clear DiN sierra 9 19 el e E E E A 2 add to bin n on 3 4 4 6 9 6 add to timeline 3 7 6 2 add to timeline certain length 6 38 alpha channel iicscssesesess 6 59 6 68 arrange on timeline a an 6 35 AUCIO ercis xin Yetewinsadcudde 4 11 6 70 change appearance video 6 8 change contents only 6 48 COONS enaa cence 6 43 8 26 COMSISIENCY venetian 6 59 9 19 COPYING 1 4 18 4 20 6 38 crop contents essees 6 21 cutting a clip cinctcesseseimkaiecens 6 40 delete effect secsetstieei ees 7 15 delete from bin n 4 21 delete from timeline 3 10 6 39 6 57 6 71 duration 3 17 6 57 6 71 7 3 file name display o oo 6 9 frame missing 4 39 6 60 8 22 9 19 inpoint information 6 56 6 70 invalid Senne nee een
245. e receding image with less contrast With the slider you can set the softness to values between O and 100 However with the percentage value to the right of the slider you can select values even greater than 100 Use the controls to the right of the entry field to step the value up or down until it is set as desired Start The Start entry field indicates in percent the starting point of the transition If adjusted the operator will begin the transition at a later point of its phases to blend into the receding image If this value is greater than the value set in the End entry field the transi tion effect will be reversed i e a change will appear towards the increasing black area see graphics in figure 7 4 on page 7 8 This button transfers the value set in the End entry field to the Start entry field from right to left A A d 0 v This button exchanges the values between the End and Start entry fields The value of the End entry field will be transferred to the Start entry field and vice versa With this button you can transfer the value set in the Start entry field to the End entry field from left to right End The End entry field indicates in percent the ending point of the transition If adjusted the operator will conclude the transition at an earlier point of its phas es to blend into the receding image If this value is less than the value set in the Start entry field the transition
246. e this you have to adjust the scaling of the clip timeline by setting one of the following Either adjust the autoscaling of the timeline see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 12 or use the zooming and panning operator see section The Operator Zoom Pan on page 7 16 to scale the clip to the appropriate output format Once this is done the two different contents can be compared for in stance by playing out the timeline and you can view it in the video overlay as well as at the outputs of the DVS system 8 65 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Figure 8 44 Split screen in operation With the yellow line separating the tracks contents the split screen op eration can be adapted to your needs Figure 8 45 Adapting the split screen operation By positioning the squares at either end of the yellow line with the mouse you can change the orientation of the line in the video overlay freely Additionally the line itself can be moved in the video overlay to set the separation to a different part of the displayed images 8 7 7 Recreating Edit Points for an Offline Edited Clip 8 66 For a comparison with an offline edited clip see section Working with Split Screen on page 8 64 it is also possible to recreate its edit points for instance to verify more easily that transitions match the conformed high resolution master in the timeline e Add the EDL of the master once mo
247. e to create more than one control point and set them accordingly There is no limit in the total number of control points and new ones can be cre ated as described above As an example the following figure shows an audio project with control points set to create fades vrastere 0 1 oh 20 Figure 6 63 Fades achieved with the CLIPSTER Edit Tool To control the setting of a control point the Edit Tool shows you its cur rent volume level in decibel via a tooltip Simply move the mouse cursor over a control point to view its setting Figure 6 64 Decibel setting of control point The decibel scale of the Edit Tool is as follows Decibel Indicator Loudness in 12 dB 25 6 dB 50 0 0 dB 100 The Timeline Decibel Indicator Loudness in 6 dB 200 12 dB 400 While a totally decreased control point means that audio is muted a fully increased one does not necessarily mean that audio is set to 200 You can move a control point beyond the limits of the audio clip which will increase the volume over 200 This will be indicated by a shifted 100 level line it is then located in the lower half of the audio clip 6 6 4 Waveform Display With the button WAVE you can switch on or off the waveform display of the audio clips in the timeline You can find it at the bottom of the timeline area to the left of the sliders that change the timeline s view directly to the right of the
248. e viewing position of the timeline with the right slider You can go to the end of the timeline by pulling this slider to the right and to the beginning of the timeline by pulling it to the left Via the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations i user guide you can set the way the Edit Tool performs a zoom ing on the timeline There you can set whether the zooming should occur on the position of the timeline cursor or on the current viewing position of the timeline The cursor of the timeline provides a special feature when zoomed far into the timeline Then it provides a frame end marker which indicates where this particular image ends in the timeline HOLLYWOOD HOLLYWOOD HOLLY WOO p line of timeline cursor frame end marker Figure 6 29 Timeline cursor when zoomed into the timeline As you can see in the figure above the frame selected with the cursor is the 8th frame of the 12th second and it ends where the 9th frame starts The frame end marker is very useful when you want to perform frame accurate cuts or other edit works Moving via the Scrub Bar of the Control Area In contrast to the timeline of the timeline area the scrub bar of the con trol area always shows the complete timeline of the loaded project It can also be used to move within your project 6 27 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs scrub bar with cursor 6 28 Figure 6 30 The scrub bar There are several ways to move with
249. e works with standard computer files Video and audio data should be stored on the designated storage only e g the system s main storage or a DVS SAN Other storage locations may be too slow for real time operations Furthermore it is strongly recommended to use the main stor age for video and audio as well as project related data only Save other data on the system disks The Tool Area When adding clips to the bin with a procedure other than a record some properties may not be discerned properly due to missing file header information Then they will either be de duced from the file format color space etc of the clip or configured to the currently set timeline output settings If the properties of the clip do not match the material on the stor age you have to change them accordingly see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 Adding Clips to the Bin with a File Manager In the following it is described how to use a standard file manager of the operating system to move video or audio clips to the bin e Open a Windows file manager for example the Windows Explorer with the keyboard combination Windows 4 El e Inthe file manager select an audio or video file either a file within a directory or the directory itself on the storage where the video data is stored e Fora list of the supported file formats see section Support ed File Formats on page A 10 e Drag and drop the selected
250. ea you do not have to define an outpoint for the clip nec essarily The clip will be cut to its correct length automatical ly due to the set outpoint in the timeline For the next step you have to observe the insert overwrite mode In the insert mode the contents of the timeline as it is will be preserved and moved backwards in the timeline while in the overwrite mode it will be overwritten see also section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 31 e Add the clip to the timeline as described in section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 and drag it to the set inpoint of the time line With the snapping mode active the clip will adjust itself automatically at the inpoint of the timeline when the mouse cursor is in close proxim ity to it After releasing the mouse button the clip will be added to the timeline at the exact position Furthermore if its length exceeds the length of the marked part of the timeline via in and outpoint it will be trimmed to the exact length determined by the outpoint of the timeline automatically The length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be i adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties is see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 6 4 5 Deleting Timeline Elements in a Specified Range You can delete all timeline elements in a specified range of the timeline easily To determine the range and part of the
251. eby causing a hue shift the hue slider to the right will change accordingly With this any shift of the color vector towards another color can be seen at once in the wheel It is the color that the color vector in the outer ring is positioned above In addition to the above said the color wheel can be used the same way as the color wheel of the primary color correction but will affect the se lected color vector only instead of all colors in the image So for further information about its usage see section Color Wheel on page 7 36 Additional Controls The additional controls of the color correction and balance area are lo cated to the right of the color wheel and below it Most of them provide the controls for a color correction With them you can alter for exam ple the hue of the chosen color vector or other properties such as brightness or saturation Because the controls i e the sliders to the right of the color wheel pro vide the same features as the ones of the primary color correction a de scription of them can be found in section The Operator 1st Color Correction on page 7 31 Nevertheless when using these controls only the selected color vector will be affected The button RESET sets all controls and the color wheel of the color cor rection and balance area back to their default values and states PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 12 Picture Masks For effects there may be picture masks ava
252. ec Video Raster Video Bit Rates Audio Bit Depth and Channels2 Format AVC Intra 960 x 720p 50 59 94 1440 x 1080i 23 98 25 4 2 0 1440 x 1080p 23 98 25 29 97 4 2 0 50 720p 23 98 25 29 97 50 59 94 1080 25 29 97 1080p 23 98 25 29 97 100 16 bit 0 2 4 MXF P2 DNxHD 1080p 23 98 24 25 36 1080p 29 97 45 720p 23 98 25 60 720p 29 97 75 720p 23 98 25 90 also in 10 bit 720p 29 97 110 also in 10 bit 720p 50 115 1080p 23 98 24 1080i p 25 120 720p 59 94 145 1080i p 29 97 1080p 23 98 24 175 also in 10 bit 720p 50 185 1080i p 25 all also in 10 bit 720p 59 94 220 1080i p 29 97 all also in 10 bit 16 bit 0 16 Each audio channel will be recorded in a separate file Re cording 16 audio channels will gener ate 16 individual MXF files for audio mono MXF OP Atom 1 If not mentioned otherwise all in 8 bit 4 2 2 2 Observe the limitations as indicated For example for DVCAM either four 4 or no zero 0 audio channels have to be selected PVs Appendix Audio only File Formats The following audio only file formats are supported Format Name Default Description Extension AIF aif Audio interchange format Platform inde AIFF aiff pendent file format for sound Capable of storing multiple mono or stereo channels BWF
253. ected on the tab EDL Clips back to Offline again see sec tion The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 It will remove already established linkings to video and or audio material for the selected events so that they are unconformed again Slip source TC BISA The source in and outpoints of unconformed events can be adjusted with this button in a single step It can be used either on a selection of events or on all displayed on the tab EDL Clips A click on this button opens the following window Slip source timecode Options 00 00 00 00 0 d Offset as timecode 00 00 00 00 Apply to Selection Cancel Figure 8 31 Slipping source in and outpoints The Conforming Tool To adjust the source in and outpoints you can select between several possibilities and you have to choose one via the radio buttons The smallest largest source in outpoint available among the selected events cannot be set beyond the boundaries of a 24 hours timeline combo box With this item you can set either a new source inpoint or a new source outpoint Select the re spective option from the drop down list of the combo box Then enter in the field to the right the new in or outpoint in timecode format If more than one event will be altered it sets the source position of the smallest largest value All other events will be adjusted accordingly Offset as frames Sets an offset value in frames positive or nega tive that
254. ection Attaching Audio Clips to Video Clips on page 6 51 Enable tooltip Clips added to the timeline provide various infor mation via tooltips With this menu option you can activate or deactivate the display of the tool tips when the mouse cursor is placed over a clip in the timeline area If it is activated the menu op tion will show a cross in front Additional informa tion about tooltips can be found in section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 10 Time stretching Time stretching mode Video and audio clips added to the timeline can be time stretched or time compressed to speed up or slow down the play out of a clip for example for slow or fast motion purposes Further information about these menu options can be found in section Time Stretching or Time Compression of Clips on page 6 53 Conforming This menu option will be available for clips of an EDL after the EDL has been created in the time line It is explained in section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 Select all With this menu option all clips in the timeline area can be selected in one step Further information about how to select clips in the timeline can be found in section Selecting Clips on page 6 37 Cut Copy Paste Using these menu options timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the loca t
255. ection Performing a Cut on page 6 40 Additionally when calling the context menu on the video clip the fol lowing menu options are provided to edit the scene markers Add scene Adds a scene marker manually It will be added at marker the current position of the timeline cursor Delete scene Deletes the scene marker currently selected by the marker timeline cursor This menu option will be available as soon as the timeline cursor is positioned on a scene marker Split at scene Cuts the clip at the position s of the scene mark markers er s In case the scene detection was performed on several clips in the timeline it has to be applied to each clip separately 6 5 8 Displaying the Alpha Channel 6 68 For blue screen operations or compositing the alpha channel key of a video clip is important With the DVS software you can display the al pha channel of individual clips in the video overlay as well as at the out puts of the DVS system The Timeline To display the alpha channel of a video clip you have to activate the menu option Show Alpha Channel only on the context menu of a video clip in the timeline of the Edit Tool see also section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 57 Then the video overlay and the DVS system s video outputs will show you the alpha channel mask of the video clip where the menu option was activated The parts of the images displayed in white are selecte
256. ection When applying the secondary color correction to a video clip you can adjust one color value or color range in the images of this clip without affecting any other colors The following provides information on the steps necessary to use the secondary color correction Selection of a Color Vector First when using the secondary color correction you have to select a color vector from the provided list to the left color vector list It will afterwards hold your data of the selected color or color range as well as the information about the performed color correction 7 38 Timeline Element Properties The DVS software provides overall seven predefined color vectors One that has all colors selected and six others that provide each a different color by default red green blue yellow cyan and magenta Toleranc es and softness are also predefined in these vectors Nevertheless each of the provided vectors can be used and adapted to define your color or color range and every one may hold a different color as well as a unique color correction Simply select one of the color vectors from the color vector list and alter its settings in the settings pane with the color mask color correction and balance items Further information about the color vectors and the color vector list can be found in section The Color Vector List on page 7 41 Defining a Color Mask After selecting a color vector from the vector list you have to
257. ed e Once everything is set start the autoconforming with the button AUTOCONFORM This will start the conforming process and a progress bar will inform you about its status When finished you may receive log messages inform ing you about the success of the conforming see section Evaluation and Further Processing of the Conforming on page 8 20 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 2 4 Evaluation and Further Processing of the Conforming 8 20 After an autoconforming is finished you may receive log messages which will inform you about clips where problems were detected during the conforming The following provides information how to resolve them If the respective EDL is not already available in the timeline i you should add it right now as described in section Building upa Timeline on page 8 10 Still regardless of the state of an EDL and its clips conformed or un conformed as soon as it is built up in the timeline you can use the Edit Tool as usual and work in the timeline Then you can for example add other standard clips to the timeline or change the clips of the EDL as you want e g via trimming or color correction You can also import other EDLs and add them to the timeline as well During editing the clips of the EDL in the timeline will stay linked to the EDL visible in the bin and the conforming mode All changes to the timeline will be reflected either in the Timeline as EDL
258. ed project e If applicable shut down the DVS software e Open a file manager e g the Windows Explorer e Select the project specific path of the temporary data on your main storage e Delete all files and directories stored in the respective directory manually e After that start the DVS software and load the project s in ques tion Once each project is loaded the DVS software recognizes that the tem porary data is no longer available For prerendering this means that all parts of the timeline that had to be prerendered are marked for a prerendering again see section Preren dering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Then you may start a new prerendering process for example with the menu option Prerender all see section Prerender all on page 9 15 For proxies this means that you will receive the original material auto matically again Afterwards you may start a new proxy generation pro cess for example with the menu option Generate proxies see section Generate proxies on page 9 21 Once the creation of the new temporary data is finished you can be sure that all files in the directory for the temporary data are valid ones After the creation of temporary data save your project file If an already saved project file is not saved after such a process again the temporary files will not be recognized by the DVS software when the project file is loaded once more Neither will they be used
259. ee section The Task Bar on page 2 9 itshows two browsing panes where you can browse for data easily Additionally you can see right below the menu bar the bin as it is available in the Edit Tool When audio or video clips are displayed in the browsing panes of Spycer they can be dragged and dropped to the contents area of the bin without any difficulty Further explanations of Spycer and its usage are not part of this user guide You can find them in the Spycer user guide time the initial setup of the application may be launched In or der to run Spycer you have to specify these see the Spycer user guide for further details i When the software module of Spycer is started for the first Adding Clips to the Bin via a Capturing Clips can also be added to the bin by performing a capture operation with the I O Tool of the DVS software Once the record is finished the recorded clip s will be available in the contents area of the bin Contrary to all previously described methods to add a clip to the bin this procedure will set the properties of the clips correctly No manual configuration of their properties will be necessary for example to cor rect their color space field mode etc see attention note in section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 6 The exact procedure how to add clips to the bin via a capture operation is not described in this user guide It is in detail explained in the CLIP STER
260. effect will be reversed i e a change will appear towards the increasing black area see graphics in figure 7 4 on page 7 8 As soon as an item of the transition properties is altered its effect is im mediately applied to the selected transition between two clips Once the transition properties are set you can for example review the tran sition and evaluate its effect easily with the button REVIEW of the con trols see section Controls on page 5 15 7 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 6 Properties of a Video Clip Every video clip added to the timeline provides timeline element prop erties which offer you additional editing features for your work These editing features can be accessed in the form of effects operators Depending on its optional features DVS provides for the Edit Tool var ious operators that enhance the editing functionality of the DVS soft ware The following operators are available Effects Operator Availability Description 1st Color Correc tion 2nd Color Correc tion 6 Vector Color Correction ARRIRAW Color Correction Flip Flop Zoom Pan Delnterlace R3D Decode default default default optional default default default optional Operator for a primary color gamma correction Additionally you can as sign a static look up table LUT to clips and thus perform a color and or gamma correction with a single file Vecto
261. eline elements such as a video clip already added to the timeline For this perform the following e Select from the clip s representation its in or outpoint handler and move it to the right or to the left to extend or reduce the clip s length in the timeline f You cannot change in and outpoints beyond the limits of the original material on the storage 6 45 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 46 e _ _ handler Figure 6 40 Changing of in or outpoint This will change the in or outpoint of the clip accordingly This procedure can be used for all timeline elements i e video clips au dio clips and embedded operators e g transitions To adjust their length in the timeline simply select their in outpoint handler and move it to the right or left of the timeline The following figure shows for ex ample how to change the length of a transition n A oe 06 11 01 00 to J9 le S Uf o_ Ni Hol hy ood Figure 6 41 Changing the length of a transition The length of a timeline element i e its outpoint can also be adjusted frame accurately with its timeline element properties see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 As long as the insert mode of the Edit Tool is active the subse quent clips and embedded operators will automatically adjust their positions on the timeline respectively When the Edit Tool is set to the overwrite mode gaps may oc
262. eline will begin with zero and end with its total duration see also section Changing the Display Type on page 6 10 You can receive additional information about the clips via their tooltips which can be customized to your needs see section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 10 for further information 6 6 2 The Context Menu of Audio Clips The context menu of audio clips usually invoked with a right click of the mouse provides the following menu options and functions that can be used with audio clips Remove control With this menu option you can delete a volume point control point that was set on the volume control line see section Volume Control on page 6 73 Delete This menu option deletes the respective clip where the context menu was invoked from the timeline Alternatively you can select the clip and press the Del key on your keyboard 6 71 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 72 Attach Disconnect ele ment Disconnect group Disconnect timeline These menu options enable you to work with at tached clips Sometimes during your editing work you may want to group audio and video clips for example if they are already perfectly aligned and in synchronization For this the timeline provides the possibility to attach audio to video clips Fur ther information about how to work with at tached clips and how to use these menu options can be found in s
263. en created it will be available in the bin instead of the original high resolution clip Nevertheless the bin clip and all its representations in the timeline are still linked to its original material and by turning the proxies on or off you can decide whether the material of the higher resolution should be used or the proxies Thus you can work with the downconverted clips as usual in the timeline but when playing out or finalizing you can switch back to the original material in high res olution eal Sees Scanner Storage Array ac Wa o Working with 2K proxies ES o Finalizing with original Film Printer Display of one 4K stream Original Proxies Original 1 4K or higher 2K 4K or higher Figure 2 5 Possible workflow when using proxy data With this workflow you will be able to finish for example a conformed 4K project with 2K proxies in real time by using transitions color cor rections zoomings as well as pannings and or other editing features Once your job is done the DVS system can finalize render the whole project from the original high resolution material Afterwards to check the rendered master you may play it out in real time provided the mas ter does not exceed 4K 10 bit To recognize the downscaled data belonging to one project i easily it is recommended to store it project specific for each project separately For further in
264. en in the job list of Spycer Copy processes via the transfer data feature of the conform ing tool can be paused manually on the remote Spycer or au tomatically via a real time process of the DVS system However in the conforming mode they will still be displayed as Is transferring Via the job list of Spycer you can check the state of copy processes and if required resume them For further information about the job list Spycer in general as well as the high speed copying routine see the Spycer user guide Capture data In case the material for a conforming is not already online stored on a storage you can capture it from an externally connected system with this button It creates a batch capture list for the events that are man ually set to VTR as the Source type see section Conforming Mode The Work Area on page 8 28 A setting to VTR for Source type can be performed automat i ically For this simply follow the message displayed in case no clip of the EDL is set to VTR A click on the button CAPTURE DATA opens the following window Capture data ba Add head amp tail Handles as __ Consolidate Clips Tolerance as Consolidated clips X Capturing order sorted by Reel name Source IN Further options x Renderspeed effects Apply to Figure 8 36 Capturing data The Conforming Tool With the check box Add head amp tail activated you can
265. en it is shut down The project related settings available on the Defaults tab will be used for each initialized new project For more information and a complete description of the Configuration Tool please consult the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide PVs The Menus 9 5 4 Load configuration defaults With the menu option Load configuration defaults you can load configuration settings previously saved to a file as the new default set tings of the Configuration Tool see section Save configuration de faults on page 9 25 The selection of this menu option opens the standard dialog window for a file selection where you have to select the desired file that contains the default configuration settings File extension t CE Configuration file After loading the new settings will be set as the default settings of the Configuration Tool They will be applied for example each time a new project is initialized Additionally in the Configuration Tool you have the possibility at hand to transfer the default settings to the project re lated settings and thus to enable them for your currently active project 7n Some changes to the system settings will be in effect after a re i start of the software only x A Further information about the Configuration Tool and its set tings can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 9 5 5 Save configuration defaults Different tasks may ask f
266. ensoseebes 5 8 Link data s es 8 50 display settings duss1sdccrcdoeassceves 5 10 Koe to e E T 8 41 for finalizing uaea 6 81 Eole E E meee eae ee 5 21 7 46 D HON relenetcetencceacnemtescteeastccnte 8 49 Mark All naerenn 4 43 S goatee 7 32 8 44 8 46 8 56 9 9 Modify after a e 7 4 6 16 7 32 8 12 8 44 8 46 Modify all oae 7 4 8 56 9 9 Modify before eies 7 3 F Edit cosstadseczersteazteeesiacs 3 13 6 40 Monitoring eccccccccecc 6 18 Matk niian 6 50 Name options ssssnnnnneinieeeeneee 6 87 SDT cre a 6 19 next cutting point 3 13 5 17 8 63 e PAE TET 7 47 7 48 7 55 of timeline tracks 3 10 6 14 6 34 Ast e EE 7 47 7 48 7 55 Options ccenn 6 80 Accept changes icncviscatsiasipaecins 8 50 OUDOIN iriran 5 23 6 30 Add nae 6 20 7 27 COMET E 5 17 6 31 Add pre post roll ee 8 58 Pipette n 7 39 7 46 ASSISEN TO o ee 8 68 play oec 5 16 5 21 5 34 8 63 audio routing ccce 6 14 Preview ccecce 8 55 Autoconform secc 8 50 previous cutting point 3 13 5 17 Capture data cecce 8 54 Center aeea premieres pee 6 24 PANE eeaeee eevee 8 42 ONG OU serros ienen 4 44 Reconform 2icsiseciecacesainiataenuxts 8 47 NOSE sascataspatiehacesasdceedc iste 8 41 Remove from TL nasas 8 48 COMDING sevesedes cosa seceeebscssecscsace 8 45 Reset 4 41 7 4 7 23 7 37 7 47 COMME esirinnas 2 9 7 50 7 52 conforming mode n 5 15 Reset All ccecce 7 52 Create in TL ccceeeeeeeeeee eee 8 56 reverse play 5 16 5 20 8 63 ODDIE c
267. enu option Export to Application opens a submenu where you can select another application than the DVS software to process your video data To have an application available in this submenu you have to i define and set it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool group External see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Please note that you have to set the appropriate pro gram parameters if applicable in the Options entry field as well Please note that the Destructive export option is valid for all specified external applications If activated the source data will always be processed directly When saving the data in such a case with an external application the source material will be overwritten As soon as an application under this option is selected the video data will be transferred to the respective program according to your settings made for this application in the Configuration Tool For a detailed description of the settings see CLIPSTER Con i figurations user guide In the source edit mode of the Edit Tool you can select an in and outpoint for a clip to be added to the timeline When se quence processing is activated each frame between the set in and outpoint of the clip will be sent to the external application If a non destructive export is selected for the external applications the source material of the clip will be copied to the same path and location where the original mater
268. eo Stereo Channel 1 Channel 2 button left of right of activated stereo clip stereo clip Once the settings for the respective track are set confirm and activate them with the button OK of the audio track properties window i Audio will be given out via AES EBU and embedded in the vid eo signal simultaneously Via the SETTINGS button in the timeline area of the Edit Tool see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 12 you can configure the analog audio outputs see section Further Audio Configurations on page 6 17 and the maximum amount of audio channels that will be embedded in the video signal 6 2 7 Further Audio Configurations Via the SETTINGS button you can configure the an alog audio outputs to monitor audio during your work with the software It is located at the top left side of the timeline area After pressing this button the Timeline output settings window is displayed At the bottom of this window you can find the Options area where further optional settings are provided To the right you can find the set tings items for a further configuration of audio 7 The other items available in the Options area are explained in Li their respective sections see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 section Loading and Apply ing a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 and section Cropping the Timeline on page 6 21 Video Cropping Bi
269. eral Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 6 4 7 Setting Transitions When at least two clips are present in a video track of the timeline you can set a transition between these two clips After the setting of a tran sition you can change its properties or if applicable prerender the tran sition see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 This section describes in the following the necessary procedures to ap ply transitions to cutting points on the timeline To apply a transition to a cutting point perform the following e Move the timeline cursor to the cutting point between the two clips with the respective controls e g EEEE EE see also section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 26 and section Con trols on page 5 15 If you activate the trim mode the Edit Tool will automatically jump to the nearest cutting point see section The Trim Mode on page 5 28 This will make the button TRANS available in the user interface f To set a transition there must be enough head and or tail avail i able of at least one clip to make a blending possible otherwise the button TRANS will be unavailable You can create the nec essary head and tail manually by adjusting the in and outpoint of clips see section Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 44 If you are in the overwrite mode of the timeline the Edit Tool will create the head and tail for the tra
270. es Figure 5 7 The vectorscope 75 The colors of the output image should be located within the area en closed by the squares Any point beyond them will be located inside the headroom and it may not be possible to give it out correctly during a play out RGB Parade The RGB parade displays graphically the distribution of the color com ponents red green and blue RGB Each component is displayed sep arately For a parade the output image is evaluated line by line and for each line the color distribution is drawn Figure 5 8 The RGB parade White areas of an output image would appear as an accumulation of dots in all three color components near the 100 line minus head room if applicable Black image areas would be displayed as an accu 5 6 The Control Area mulation of dots in all three color components near the 0 line plus headroom if applicable When playing out in RGB this video scope can be used to evaluate the color distribution of the output image ac curately YUV Parade The YUV parade displays graphically the distribution of the compo nents Y U and V separately The Y graph is shown on the left side while the color difference signals U and V are displayed in the middle and to the right As with the RGB parade the output image is evaluated line by line and for each line the distribution is shown Figure 5 9 The YUV parade However because U and V can take on negative as well as positi
271. es yellow lines in several ways 3 Figure 7 41 Altering the selection shapes You can select a shape completely and drag it to the position within the bar that you want to cover 1 Because the hue bar represents a color wheel in this case not i the area of the selection shape is moved but the colored back ground You can select the top and bottom sides of the shapes and move them 2 thereby reducing or enlarging the area covered by the selec tion shapes Finally you can select one of the four corner points and po sition them to your liking 3 7n The softness settings of each shape may lie outside the vector i area settings but not within i e the left or right corner points can only be dragged to be level with its opposing point on the other side of the shape but not further As already mentioned the settings of the selection shapes corner points can be seen in the entry fields to the right The top entry fields display the settings of the six corner points for the color vector i e they show the settings of the left two corner points of each shape The bot tom six entry fields show the settings of the right corner points and in dicate the softness of the vector You can also adjust the color vector softness in the entry fields directly by simply entering a value 7 45 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 46 and afterwards pressing Enter on your keyboard The value ranges that can be en
272. es your orig inal material will never be altered This section describes how to work with the timeline of the Edit Tool in general 6 4 1 Moving Clips within the Timeline To arrange the clips in the desired sequence on the timeline as they should be played out in the end you may have to move clips within the timeline which is very easy with the Edit Tool Simply select a clip and drag it with the mouse to the desired position on the timeline Although the following is shown with video clips the same ap plies to audio clips as well Alternatively clips can also be moved with the keyboard see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 7 6 35 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 36 its B Landscap fb ath ane Landscap Figure 6 34 Moving a clip With the insert mode activated if a clip is moved to a cutting point the clip will be inserted there while the rest of the material moves back wards in the timeline If it is dropped in the middle of another clip this clip will be divided and its rest as well as the rest of the track s contents will be moved to the end of the inserted clip This behavior depends on the selected mode of the timeline With the overwrite mode activated the moved clip will over write the contents of the track from the point of the insertion on See section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 31 for more details When the moved clip come
273. ess Otherwise when new material is copied to a sys tem it may not be recognized by the DVS software properly due to The Conforming Tool missing metadata information which are only extracted after a thor ough scan Prior to conforming via the SpycerNet for the first time it is recom mended to initiate a rescan of the watched folders on each system involved in the conforming process update of the Spycer data base Before updating see to it that the configuration settings men tioned above are set appropriately A rescan is mandatory if the scanning of file headers was disabled on a system If a search via the SpycerNet persistently fails make once again sure that the Spycer database on the systems where the search is per formed is up to date When conforming on a remote system in the SpycerNet real time processes on this system may prohibit an answer with the result that no clips will be found time out Make sure that no real time pro cesses are running on the remote system An answer of remote systems can also be prohibited when there is a lot of traffic in the network Performing the conforming at a differ ent time may yield better results Copy processes via the transfer data feature of the conforming tool can be paused manually on the remote Spycer or automatically via a real time process of the DVS software However in the con forming mode they will still be displayed as Is transferring Via the tab Job List
274. f heads and tails in the entry field to the right either in frames or timecode notation can be switched with the combo box to the left Avoid warnings if file folder already exists Normally when transferring data it is checked whether the material to be copied already ex ists in the target directory If files folders are al ready present you will be notified about this by the software By activating this check box you can suppress these notifications and the mate rial will be overwritten immediately Apply to This setting allows you to limit the procedure You can perform it either on all clips of an EDL or on a selection of clips reels A selection can be specified either when the EDL is available in the timeline see section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 or in the conforming mode see section The Conform ing Mode in General on page 8 26 When everything is set you can start the transfer of data with the but ton TRANSFER DATA Then the source data will be copied by the DVS high speed copying routine to the specified target directory on your main storage During this the statuses of these events will be changed 8 53 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 54 to Is transferring see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 Once the transfer is complete the statuses will be set to Online RT The progress of the copy procedure s can be se
275. f the aspect ratio is different you will receive black bars in the finalized images With this combo box set to Crop and the Original aspect ratio check box activated the images will be scaled to their maximum allowable width or height so that you receive a full image at the output If the aspect ration is different parts of the images may be cropped With the Auto scale setting set to off the material will maintain its original size With the combo box Auto scale set to Fit or Crop and the Orig inal aspect ratio check box deactivated the aspect ratio the rela tion of width x and height y of the video format will not be preserved The resulting images will be stretched or compressed if the aspect ratio is different and you will always receive a full image at the output More details about autoscaling in combination with aspect ra tio can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 6 7 3 Configuring Audio The settings items at the bottom of the finalizing window allow you to configure a finalizing of audio To make them available the check box Audio output has to be activated With the finalizing function of the Edit Tool you are able to generate video and audio together or separately if desired Simply select the ap propriate output check box see also section Configuring Video on page 6 79 If a container format is selected as the file format e g Win i dows Media you cannot gener
276. f the window or by pressing Enter 7 8 6 Further Possibilities 7 28 When working with keyframes there are further possibilities at hand for example to select and position keyframes or to delete them Just as easily as single keyframes can be selected with the mouse sev eral keyframes can be selected For this hold down the Shift key and draw a rectangle around them Timeline Element Properties Figure 7 25 Selecting several keyframes Once the mouse button is released the keyframes within the rectangle will be selected Then they can for example be positioned all at once by moving one of them with the mouse The selected keyframes can be deselected with the menu option Deselect Keyframes of the graph s context menu see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 Of course created keyframes can also be deleted For this you have various possibilities at hand You can select one or more keyframes in the graph and press Del on your keyboard or the button DELETE be low the graph or you can use the menu option Delete Keyframe of the context menu of the graph see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 Keyframes can also be deleted by resetting the keyframing line s see section The Parameters List on page 7 21 With the menu option Enable Tooltips of the context menu of the graph see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 you can turn on or off tooltips for the keyframing editor independent from the rest of the tooltips dis played in the Edi
277. files on the storage provide source timecode information You can select the type of timecode that should be used for the search with the combo box to the right Then if the source data stated in the EDL matches the header data of a found audio clip and when the duration of the audio clip is suf ficient the respective EDL clip will be appropri ately linked f The Edge code amp Time of Day i setting searches in both header fields If one matches and the duration is suf ficient the respective clip will be linked With the Sample count setting selected the audio clips will be linked if their duration com prises the source outpoint of the audio event Reel name Narrows down your search AND search Searches for the reel name as it was determined during import of the EDL either for example in the files header data in the directory path where the found clip is stored or in its file name prefix Clip name Narrows down your search AND search Searches for the clip name as it was determined during import of the EDL either for example in the directory path where the found clip is stored or in its file name prefix CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Source type Sets the source search type You can choose between Disk Online SpycerNet and VTR TL The Disk Online setting searches for the clips on the local storage in the specified loca tions Video path and Audio
278. folders of the bin 8 33 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 34 Column Description Reel name Details the name of the reel that this clip be longs to as it was determined during the import of the EDL It can be altered freely If you enter anew not existing reel name the reel count on the tab EDL increases and you will receive a new reel on the tab EDL Reels as well as in the bin Please note that in some EDL standards the reel name is restricted for example to a maxi mum number of characters Essence type A V Shows the type of the event i e audio A or video V Additional numbers indicate the stream s connected to this event Transition type TT Indicates the transition type that precedes this event e g cut C dissolve D or wipe W lt SMPTE no of transition gt see also section Properties of a Transition on page 7 7 Speed factor The speed of this event as determined by the speed effect of the EDL Source IN Source OUT These entries specify the source in and out point of the event either in timecode or in frames They can be changed either by entering an in outpoint manually or by using the button SLIP SOURCE TC see section Slip source TC on page 8 48 When changing one of the values the remaining value will be set ac cordingly i e the duration will not be changed Altered values will be displayed in orange Head amp
279. formation about this please re fer to section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 More information about the handling of proxies in the DVS software can be found in section Using Proxies on page 4 22 2 4 2 Working with Prerendered Data Prerendering generates another kind of proxies this time from clips and operators added to the timeline that are not real time capable A prer endering means that the Edit Tool calculates the respective clips and op erators effects before a play out takes place and stores the calculated Basics extra files rendered images in a location for temporary data on the main storage These proxies are then used for a play out instead of the original material in the timeline and on the fly handled operators Depending on your system capabilities all timeline elements i e clips as well as operators such as transitions or color corrections can be sub ject to a prerendering For example when using a clip of a resolution that exceeds the real time capability of your DVS system it will be marked visibly in the timeline that it is not real time capable In order to play it out in real time you will have to prerender it beforehand and it will be rendered in the format that is currently set as the video output format The prerendered proxies carry project specific file names same as the proxies created from the bin and are generated and administered by the Edit Tool automatically The links t
280. frame amount with a minus or plus sign to the given entry in the time code frame number field After that press Enter to confirm your entry Examples 1 23 2 05 jumps to 4 sec frame 4 00 00 04 04 if raster is in 24p 4 04 53 jumps to 1 sec frame 23 00 00 01 23 if raster is in 24p Switching the Notation Scales e g on timelines and position and length indicators can be switched from a display of the timecode notation to frame numbers and vice versa For this it is best to use the context menu of a time code frame number field e g the position field of the timeline cursor see section Controls on page 5 15 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 01 23 x Timecode _ Frames Figure 2 6 Context menu of a position field Select from the context menu the respective menu option This will change the position and length indicators of the respective software module to the selected notation A switching of the notation may effect the selected display type internal frames timecode will be used and vice versa see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 10 2 20 Getting Started This chapter provides you with some general information necessary to begin your work with the Edit Tool software module First the steps to start the DVS software and the Edit Tool will be explained This is fol lowed by a beginner s tutorial that shows you how to work with the Edit Tool In a step by
281. frame field backward or forward in the timeline When activated its fields will be displayed With these buttons you can step one frame field for or backward in your project The timeline cur sor will move accordingly Alternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts Left Arrow Right Ar row or 3 4 With this button you can play out the timeline backwards i e it will start a reverse play out Once activated the button changes its appearance to its active state To stop the reverse play out you have to click it again Alternatively you may use the key board shortcut J to start a reverse play out and Space K Shift K to stop it When increasing or decreasing the speed of the play out see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 7 the current speed if negative will be indicated in frames per second fps in this button With this button you can start a play out of the timeline After activation the button changes its ap pearance to its active state UM To stop the play out you have to click this button again Alternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts Space 5 to start or Space K Shift K to stop a play out When increasing or decreasing the speed of the play out see section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 7 the current speed if positive will be indicated in frames per second fps in this button i The Control Area Review To view your project on an additional
282. from the effects list of the timeline ele ment properties so that its settings are visible in the settings pane to the right e After this drag and drop the preset effect into the settings pane 7n In case the preset effect has been assigned a keyboard i shortcut see section Creating Preset Effects via the Key board on page 4 27 you may also press the function key of the respective preset effect to apply it By pressing an unassigned function key you can call up a list of all available preset effects for this effects operator Then you can use it to select one of the preset effects and apply it same as Load Preset see section Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area on page 7 14 The predefined settings of the preset effect will be set for the already applied effects operator same type as the effect selected from the effects list of the timeline element properties G The settings will only be adjusted if the preset effect is of the 4 3 4 Administration of Preset Effects To facilitate your work with preset effects they can be administered in several ways For example they can be renamed or deleted as well as saved or loaded This section explains the various possibilities to admin ister preset effects Most of these tasks require the usage of the context menu of an effect in the effects pane usually invoked with a right click of the mouse 4 29 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User G
283. from the source edit mode into the timeline by using the keyboard shortcuts V in insert mode or B in overwrite mode The Timeline timeline video track audio tracks HOLLYWOO p R Name Tim We1 Figure 6 3 Drag and drop of video clip to timeline Once the mouse button is released a representation of the clip is added to the timeline The clip will be placed at the position of the mouse pointer where the mouse button was released When adding a video clip and releasing it somewhere in the i video track a gap may appear in the timeline It can be closed automatically with a double click of the mouse on the timeline scale see also section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 While the starting point of the clip its position and inpoint within the timeline is set during the drag and drop procedure by the position of the mouse pointer its outpoint is defined by the set outpoint made in the source edit mode These attributes can be changed easily after the clip was added to the timeline which is described in section Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 44 If you drag an audio clip to the timeline that contains more i than one mono or stereo channel multiple channels the ad ditional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one To switch the control area back to its edit mode use the appropriate button of the control area
284. g With them you can move for instance in a zoomed clip to the part of the clip image that should be displayed during a play out For exam ple if you move the X slider to the left the image will move to the left and if you move the Y slider to the left it moves up Slider Slider Image Factor and Pixel Movement Movement Range left negative X right positive 7 17 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Slider Slider Image Factor and Pixel Movement Movement Range Y As already indicated in the table above to the right of the sliders you can find entry fields where you can specify either the image movement factor or the movement in pixels manually Simply enter the respective value with the appropriate sign as specified in the table to pan the im age The factor and pixel range entries have to be set in dependence on the settings made for zooming 7 7 3 Advanced Settings Below the items for panning you can find a combo box to determine the filter used for zooming as well as two sliders to set the rotation and sharpness Filter Adaptive Filter real time Aperture Rotation LT _ Keyframing Figure 7 13 The advanced settings items The combo box Filter is associated with the sliders for sharpness set ting Aperture and zooming It determines the algorithm that will be used to change the video image content The following settings are available on
285. g of 1D LUT aseeseen 7 31 setting of 3D LUT 6 18 6 81 setting of static LUT 0 0 02 7 31 specification 1D LUT A 16 specification 3D LUT A 17 PVs Index NOP enee sees al damm modules menirii ee 2 9 loop mode sda teat te icacetteeanad 5 17 5 34 AOE pana eee 7 19 looped preview n s 8 63 monitoring lOW EE E 7 34 7 37 7 55 AUCIO serapi niani nr aoi enii 6 17 MUNA kocar 5 5 5 7 color correction cccceceeeeeeeees 5 3 UDINE sosescsrsssissiirsiirsesisssisssgss 7 46 performance ssnin 4 36 LUT MONO uu eee eeceee eects eens 6 15 6 71 8 12 see 3D LUT moving CWDS 22ecavstiesahiteieexiccecessctss 6 35 see look up table multi clip sciicccince aenshonsenas seecics 4 11 A 4 audio ooon 4 8 4 12 6 78 M properties os ccscncasocese areecs 4 12 4 21 Sequencelnfo xml 4 12 6 87 maintenance cc eccccccccccccccuucccucecuues A 22 multi device o c 1 2 marker scene cscscccrreecren 6 67 multiple channels audio 4 11 6 4 6 5 OCI ae EE 6 58 6 68 6 70 6 84 marker timeline 4 34 4 38 4 42 Multiple OGIO o3cc8 cre cedeed steateeatense 8 33 4 43 6 49 multiple found aeee 8 21 add automatically 00 6 50 multi threaded I O mode 4 37 4 38 add manually oac 6 50 4 46 configuration RA DANERA ES 6 49 muting acK Sonuna eaa 6 33 delete ororen enan att 6 51 moving to 5 17 6 49 8 63 N POSION sessie rison 4 34 Beas see ect ETE 4 35 name
286. ges to keyframing Adaptable frame numbering for name options during finalizing Introduction Automatic creation of metadata file SequenceInfo xm1 during finalizing capturing for multi clip detection Presets for time stretching and time stretching for audio Relinking of clips in the timeline Consistency check of clips allows to change the software s default paths to find clips of projects exchanged between systems New in Version 2 4 DCI Mastering Variable information in file names for finalizing name options New in Version 2 3 Scene detection Render times for prerendering and finalizing approx two times faster Real time effects can be finalized at least in real time speed Background rendering tab Jobs of the tool area 6 vector color correction Marker list with thumbnails Adaptive scaling algorithm New in Version 2 2 Color scheme for prerendered clips Enhanced output settings for SDI and DVI analog Lin to Log conversion for 3D LUTs Slave mode remote control switchable between different protocols More than 100 graphic file formats for import loading New in Version 2 1 Archive function via the Extract files menu option Bin clip properties accessible from timeline context menu Keyframing for Zoom amp Pan Burn in information at the outputs Slave mode control window Configurable keyboard shortcuts function keys for preset effects Picture masks shapes for secondary color correction
287. gh Applies softness to the color vector from the rim of the color wheel onwards i e by lowering this setting you can mask out higher saturated hues on a percent age basis The value range is from O to 1 The buttons a and a P show you the selected color vector in the video overlay of the Edit Tool and at the output of the system The button a shows you a view of the alpha channel white selected black deselect 7 55 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs ed The button a P shows you the alpha channel together with the original image the selected colors will appear in grey The finally ap plied color correction can be seen when both buttons are deactivated With the items of the Color Balance area you can perform the color correction They are almost identical to the ones offered by the second ary color correction but provide for example no tone selectors or gam ma settings For further information about them please refer to section The Operator 2nd Color Correction on page 7 38 7 56 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 14 The Operator ARRIRAW CC When adding a clip in the raw data format of ARRI cameras to the time line the operator ARRIRAW CC will be by default assigned to the clip see also section Working with Raw Content on page 2 15 With it you can perform a color correction by setting a matrix and LUT for the clip in the timeline Effects al Au Color Correction x ARRIRAW x
288. h Split Screen eee eee cece scene eee aes 8 64 8 7 7 Recreating Edit Points for an Offline Edited Clip 8 66 8 7 8 Resolving Multiple Found ciciccsnerscecicesnaseninavtasatconmrent 8 67 Th Menus hoe oases ead ecce tec ence Ea eae EEE KA E 9 1 9 1 The Menu of the Program Icon n se 9 2 91 1 MINIMIZE ssri roiiccrariini aoea teara 9 2 92 EXE anara ee a eE A a EENE 9 2 9 2 The Project lt 9 0 ee pee mere een eee re 9 3 921 NEW ace tees acting aeaa ienaa ac ae PAETE E ONE die 9 3 B22 Operin erei i eats 9 4 9 2 3 Recent files scecececieczevesecs caczacezz ad veivesezeasaciabesetceesees cade 9 5 9 2 4 Insert Project secs so acce ia erncd arate dette cesasatanenseeeieerecannctaces 9 5 Contents 92 5 SOC CIPS erecta ee ete ae 9 6 9 2 6 Add ALE Add Cutlist Add EDL Add FCP XML 9 6 FT GR oT ee PORE oer AA eer Ere orien nen 9 6 9 2 8 SANG hoes saree ee et 9 7 92 9 A TG Cel apt ace st sccaneecenccceacecasasucss sasaisti 9 7 9 2 10 EXPOTE Sica soisi aii a wieced tecai geet 9 7 9 211 FNaAlZE eee ee a ee 9 14 9 2 12 Prerender all me eer eR ne mre et Oey Pe Cer ae eee 9 15 9 2 13 Extract MCS cx siecractetecenticcecest icon oss iiair 9 15 D2 WA EX Ui becttcaticanettepeieeii N een 9 16 93 The Edit Menu nioen sitene iania 9 17 93 1 0 Te ne Pe ne cee ee ee ee er ear a aiae 9 17 93 2 Red arisia caso a sk ata e cede dos 9 17 9 4 The Bin Menu Remeee eer teer nt nia ee DN Griarene aarreenn e
289. h possibilities open a standard dialog window of the operating sys tem for the selection of a file Add Clip Look in a R a D D 5 D D D a R 4 File name Files of type All files C Figure 4 8 Dialog window to add a clip to the bin e Select a video or audio file from the list box or enter its name in the entry field File name If you select another file than the first video frame file in a video directory the scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail a pos sible clip s inpoint will be set accordingly e Confirm your selection with the button OPEN The selected video or audio clip will then be added to the contents area of the bin By repeating the described steps above you can add as many clips to your bin as your project needs Once clips are available in the bin you can start working with the Edit Tool and add them to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 4 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Adding Clips to the Bin Using Spycer To add clips to the contents area of the bin you can also use Spycer the content management software integrated in the DVS software It is the best and most informative way to add clips to the bin because with Spycer you can for instance perform management tasks on the clip or preview it before adding it to your project Once the Spycer software module is activated with the button SPYCER in the task bar of the DVS software s
290. hat the DVS system provides Choose one of the video format type buttons to display in the list box below the video formats sorted under this type Then select from the list box the desired format that the project s timeline should be rendered to The selected format will also be shown on the right side of the video configuration area in the editable resolution fields and if appropriate the pulldown drop frame items will be made available If you have selected a YUV format as the file format the YUV range setting has to be applied It specifies whether the color space range of the finalized clip will be in a restricted Head or in a full value range Full The same applies to the RGB range setting If you have se lected an RGB file format this setting will be evaluated It specifies whether the color space range of the finalized clip will be in a restricted Head or in a full value range Ful 1 Further information about color space ranges and color space conversions can be found in the CLIP STER Configurations user guide In the field Timeline TC Offset select a timecode frame offset for the rendered clip It will be evaluated if for the clip to be generated a file format is selected that stores source timecode information in its header e g dpx Then the clip will provide this timecode offset in its source timecode If appropriate and available select whether drop frame timecode should be applied to the source timecode writ
291. he i controls of the conforming mode all tasks are performed on the selected EDL only In case you want to work on several EDLs at once you have to combine them see section Com bine on page 8 45 8 5 5 The Tab EDL Clips 8 32 The tab EDL Clips shows all clips events of the currently selected EDL It provides information for example about their names statuses and source in and outpoints EDL Reels Original EDL Status Reel name Multiple found SETZ Offline Tape2 American _Beauty_Pan01_ Multiple found MENGA Figure 8 19 The tab EDL Clips By selecting one or more clips in this view of the EDL its representa tion s in the timeline area will be selected as well This works also the other way around To select more than one element in this view on the EDL you can use the usual methods provided by the DVS software see section Key board Shortcuts on page A 7 or the functionality of the SELECT button see section Select on page 8 44 Additionally to select several adjoining elements you can select one with the mouse keep the mouse button pressed and then move the mouse to the point where the selection should end All adjoining elements will be selected The following explains the columns that are available for the tab EDL Clips On this tab you can change the settings for individual events However to change the settings for several events in a single step it may be more ap
292. he RGB nodes input values are not explicitly listed in a 3D LUT file In a 3d1 file they are available in the first un gt commented line of the file and determine bit depth and number of nodes for the 3D LUT In an xm1 file these information are set as attributes of the 3D LUT tag The DVS hardware can handle 17 nodes in a 3D LUT with an accuracy of 12 bit meaning 17 nodes for R times 17 nodes for G times 17 nodes for B 17 x 17 x 17 173 4913 R G B values The nodes determine the RGB input values Nodes as for example listed in a 3d1 file 17 nodes 10 bit 0 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1023 Resulting in the following RGB nodes of node 1 2 3 17 18 19 20 34 35 36 289 290 291 4911 4912 4913 R G B 0 0 0 0 0 64 0 0 128 0 0 1023 0 64 0 0 64 64 0 64 128 0 64 1023 0 128 0 0 128 64 0 1023 1023 64 0 0 64 0 64 1023 1023 896 1023 1023 960 1023 1023 1023 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs For the 17 nodes 17 output R G B values have to be set in the 3D LUT file The first triplet describes the output value of the first node the second triplet of the second node and so on The numbers lines of an RGB node can be calculated with the follow ing formula of node 17 x indexp 17 x index index 1 indices range from zero 0 to 16 Example for the node 768 384 192 172 x 12 17 x 6 3 1 3574 In case a
293. he chart back to zero Afterwards you may start a new evaluation of the real time performance of the DVS software which in turn may report new drops in the table e This button does not reset the drop table i of the performance monitor For this you have to use the button CLEAR of the table controls see section The Table Controls on page 4 43 Right below the chart controls you can find the status bar which will provide you with status messages about the operation of the perfor mance monitor 4 4 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs DY SInto Reset Switched view to Show overall file 10 WORKLOAD Figure 4 23 Status message in the status bar The messages in the status bar inform you for instance about whether the performance monitor is enabled and ready to measure the work load 4 6 4 The Drop Table As soon as drops occur during your real time operation entries will ap pear in the drop table one for each drop that could be detected If the drop table is unavailable dimmed the performance i monitor is disabled To use it you have to enable it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configu rations user guide Timeline TC Frame File Name Path N american_beauty_ VivFILM4K american_beau 0 50 display 09 29 299 american_beauty_ ViFILM4K american_beat display 10 00 american_beauty_ Vi FILM4K american_beat S 11 40 51 display 10 01 30
294. he file extension Example Clip However instead of the entry field to set the file name you may also use the NAME OPTIONS button to the right With it you can endow the file name with variable information and or adapt the numbering of the created image files Further information about this can be found in section Name Options on page 6 87 In the entry field Render path you have to state the storage path where to store the new clip You may also click on the button to the right of this entry field to select an already existing directory or cre ate a new directory via the provided buttons of the opening dialog win dow If the entered path does not exist it will be created Notation drive_letter directory subdirectory Instead of the backslash you may also use a slash Example V tempest act05 scene01 Regarding file name and path it would be sufficient for a rendering to enter a path in the field Render path and to state a file name All other information necessary such as the numbering of frames will be added 6 77 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 78 by the DVS software automatically For further information about this see section The Finalized Output Files per Folder on page 6 85 with the name options described in section Name Options i The numbering of files frames can be configured in more detail on page 6 87 The combo box to the right of the Render path items dete
295. he heads and tails that should be shown or hidden Afterwards each trim point of the clips in the timeline i e their in and outpoints will be adjusted accord ingly Enter the length in the entry field to the right either in frames or timecode notation can be switched with the combo box to the left gt 0 positive Maore of the handles will be shown in the timeline i e the durations of the clips increase lt 0 negative Hides handles i e the dura tions of the clips decrease 8 57 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 58 All available Displays all heads and tails in the timeline as they are available for each clip However be cause handles rarely are of the same lengths they cannot be restored by using this function again with an inversed setting see below By performing this function a second time with an inverse sign plus minus the effect on the clips in the timeline can be reversed Yet the same can be achieved even if transitions were replaced by hard cuts with the menu option Undo on the Edit menu see section The Edit Menu on page 9 17 When the OK button is clicked the showing hiding of heads and tails will be applied to the clips in the timeline If the entered lengths of han dles would either reduce or exceed the duration of at least one clip be yond the boundaries of its source material you will be informed about this by the DVS software Then when
296. he images Decrease this parameter in case moving objects in your prerendered result still contain some interlacing effects The lower the value the more pixels are deinterlaced This slider sets the motion threshold for the se lected methods It is used to detect regions with moving objects in an image By decreasing this parameter you apply the deinterlacing to a larg er area in the images Use it in case interlacing effects are still visible in your prerendered re sults 7 59 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 16 The Operator R3D Decode When adding a clip in the REDCODE raw format to the timeline the operator R3D Decode will be automatically assigned to the clip see also section Working with Raw Content on page 2 15 With it you can adjust the RED camera parameters 7 60 Figure 7 54 Decode operator for RED camera material The tabs at the top left of the operator provide you with the following customized settings Customized settings stored in the metadata of the clip Metadata default settings Defaults and settings stored in an RSX file RSX File By switching between the tabs their settings will be immediately ap plied to the clip and the effect can be seen in the video overlay How ever only the customized settings can be altered the others are available for reference reasons only and cannot be changed The settings on the tab RSX File will be available if
297. he left one shows the se lected video scope while the right one displays the video overlay as usual 5 4 Figure 5 4 Video scope in control area With the menu option Above overlay available on the context menu of the control area this layout can be altered When the menu option is deactivated the scope and the overlay are displayed separately in the control area when activated the selected video scope will be superim posed on the video overlay Figure 5 5 RGB parade superimposed on video overlay Most video scopes provide in its graph an indication of the headroom In case your project has to provide a legal broadcast signal no color component should reach into that area When staying on the computer side and working with RGB material the headroom may be disregard ed Further information about color spaces headroom and full val i ue ranges as well as color space conversions can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide The Control Area By using the menu option Analyzer off the selected video scope can be turned off again at any time The color of the graph of the graph s background as well as of the drawn data for vectorscopes and the YUV parade only can be adapted to your needs via the Configuration Tool Please refer to the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for further information The menu option Scene Detection provides an RGB parade For further information about this vide
298. he part of the scrub bar in light grey you can position the scrub bar cursor there in stantly PVs The Control Area 5 4 Controls At the bottom of the control area the controls to play out and move within your current project are located In addition to other important buttons you can also find buttons to switch between the different modes of the control area here the edit mode the source edit mode and the trim mode With this button you can switch to the edit mode The edit mode of the Edit Tool is the standard op erating mode of this software module By default this mode is activated after the starting of the pro gram In the edit mode usually only one video over lay is visible where you can see and check your changes applied to the clips in the timeline This button activates the source edit mode of the Edit Tool where you can select the in and outpoint of a clip coming from the bin before adding it to the timeline Once everything is set you can drag the clip from the control area to a video track of the timeline The source edit mode is described in more detail in section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 18 You can switch to the trim mode of the Edit Tool with this button After its activation the Edit Tool will automatically jump to the nearest cutting point and the timeline cursor will be positioned there Use the trim mode of the Edit Tool to change in and outpoint of adjacent clips to a cutt
299. he respective clip is provid ed by a clip once it is selected You can administer the clips directly or add new clips to the bin with the help of the context menu of the contents area Via the context menu of a clip you can also create a proxy from it in case its video format exceeds the real time capability of CLIPSTER view buttons Via the view buttons of the bin you can select whether the clips in the contents area shall be seen as thumbnails with text or with their text informa tion only This section explains all features provided by the bin of the DVS soft ware in detail 4 2 1 Configuring the Bin 4 4 With the bin you can perform a clip and project management You can structure the clips by sorting them to different folders and you can pre view the clips as well as access additional information via their text dis play in the bin To serve all these functions at once you can change and configure the layout of the bin freely The areas of the bin can be arranged horizontally or vertically The appearance of clips in the contents area can be changed Both procedures are explained in this section Changing the Layout of the Bin To provide for example for a better view on the material in the bin the areas of the bin the folder and the contents area can be arranged hor izontally or vertically via the title bar of the folder area For this do the following e Call up the context menu of the bin s title bar
300. he timeline you can add a transition between the clips In our example we want to apply a transition to the cutting point between clip B and clip A For this perform the following e Via the controls EEE HE or the keyboard shortcuts S jump forward and A jump backward you can move the timeline cur sor to cutting points on the timeline Use the respective button or key to go to the cutting point between the clips Perform Colormede ete M timeline cursor Timeme Figure 3 11 Timeline cursor at cutting point 3 13 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 14 This will make the button TRANS available in the user interface e Select the button TRANS A transition appears between the two clips ee eT timeline moo 4 9 8 ee cursor 0 A age ar eo transition Figure 3 12 Transition in timeline With the transition available between the two clips you can now call its properties for example to change the type of wipe for the transition e With the mouse double click the transition in the timeline Alterna tively you can invoke the context menu on the transition usually with a right click of the mouse and select the menu option Show properties The properties will be shown instead of the visible audio tracks right be low the timeline area see section Properties of a Transition on page 7 7 e With the properties of the transition available select as a transition type for example
301. he timeline area If you pull the edge completely down the timeline area can be i hidden You can also pull the edge completely up to hide the tool and control area The same way you can adjust the size of the audio track area Take the edge directly above the audio tracks and move it up or down If you pull the edge completely down the audio tracks will be hidden If you pull it farthest up you can hide the video track s The Timeline Video and Audio Track Properties Via the SETTINGS button you can alter the size and number of video and audio tracks It is located at the top left side of the timeline area After pressing this button the Time line output settings window is displayed At the bottom of this window you can find in the Options area further optional settings To the left you can find settings to alter the size and number of the video and audio tracks in the timeline The other items available in the Options area are explained in i their respective sections see section Further Audio Configu rations on page 6 17 section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 and section Cropping the Time line on page 6 21 Options Trade Size Video Custom Audio Small Figure 6 5 Track size options With the fields for the track sizes you can adjust the height of the tracks for video and audio separately Either change the sizes by selecting one of the preset sizes fr
302. hed where the play out will be performed forward again To switch off the forward backward play mode you have to click this button again This button deactivates the slave mode and closes the Slave mode control window The Timeline For the editing process the Edit Tool provides a timeline with video and audio tracks where you can add the clips in the desired sequence as they should be played out in the end You can then for instance define wipes dissolves or cuts for the material This chapter explains how to work with the timeline in detail It will be discussed how to add clips to the timeline and how to work with them afterwards The latter will include among others descriptions on how to move in the timeline how to perform cuts and how to set transitions Additionally because the timeline area is the most important part for your work with the Edit Tool it can be configured freely which will also be addressed here The chapter will be concluded with a description of how to finalize the timeline 6 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 1 Adding Clips to the Timeline To begin an editing work you have to drag the clips to the video and or audio tracks of the timeline first You can add clips of different formats to the timeline because the DVS software works format independent and is capable of handling even high resolution film material There are two ways to add a clip to the timeline 1 You can t
303. heel The color wheel of the color mask area shows you the selected color vector in a circle The circle contains all colors according to their hue and their saturation HSL color space and additionally all color compo nents are indicated RGB and CMY The distance from the circle s cen ter determines the saturation of the respective color The color distribution in a color wheel is the same as in a vec torscope Further information about this can be found in sec tion The Video Scopes on page 5 3 selected color vector _ gt _ softness tolerance not selected Figure 7 39 Color wheel of the color mask area 7 43 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 44 While the selected color vector is displayed in a light grey the colors not selected are shown in a darker grey The blue grey surrounding the vec tor marks the softness tolerance of the selected color vector i e the colors lying in this area will be selected as well but a color correction will only be performed on them on a percentage basis This percentage basis is calculated from their distance from the selected color vector meaning when a value is near the selected color vector almost all pix els of this color will be selected close to 100 while colors at its outer edge are barely selected close to 0 The color vector and softness can be changed either with the preview window by selecting col
304. her a user de fined inpoint or the very beginning of a timeline Timeline mode during your work with timeline elements When moving or adding clips in this mode no gaps will appear in the timeline and the current content of the timeline will be pre served A machine readable code printed along the edge of the camera negative film It provides data for example about the film type the name of the manufacturer and the film stock Additionally a reference number for the respec tive image is given in order to match the film with a particular position of a data list Keycodes can also be stored in file headers if supported by the file format see also source timecode A 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 4 keyframing LUT look up table multi clip Odetics protocol RS 422 online conforming operator outpoint clip outpoint data list outpoint timeline overwrite mode The usage of an effect on a timeline with defin able points of settings keyframes e g for to fade in out this effect In general a table used to transform data With the DVS software a LUT is used to map indexed colors of video images to a specified set of out put values A clip that is handled as one clip although it con sists of several individual clips Multi clips are di rectories of the file system that contain subdirectories with frames image files and or audio files The subdirectories and files mus
305. ia the menu options of the menu Help It contains the following menu op tions About Manuals Figure 9 16 The Help menu They will be described in the following sections 9 6 1 About You can receive further information about the DVS software with the menu option About on the menu Help For example here you can find detailed version numbers of the individual software parts of the DVS system 9 6 2 Manuals The online documentation of the DVS system can be accessed via the menu option Manuals on the Help menu It opens an overview page in HTML format where you can select a separate documentation for the different parts of the DVS system all in HTML format 7n The manuals for the DVS system are also available in PDF for i mat which is suited most if you want to print out the docu ment The documentation in PDF format can be accessed easily via the navigation buttons at the bottom of each HTML page 9 27 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 9 28 Appendix This chapter provides further information about the Edit Tool A 1 Glossary of Terms Here you can find several terms and their meaning as they are used in this documentation 1D LUT A look up table LUT see below that provides for one input value a set of output values usu ally RGB 3D LUT A look up table LUT see below that provides for three input values RGB a set of output val ues RGB 9 pin protocol Protocol f
306. ial is stored with an incrementing number add ed to the directory name of the clip lt name of clip s directo The Control Area ry gt lt incrementing number gt After this the copied source material will be opened in the external application where you can pro cess it In the meantime a new bin clip will be added to the bin of the Edit Tool which will refer to the location of the copied material Once the material is processed with the other application you can save it and then use the new bin clip as well as the unaltered original source in the DVS software as usual its bin clip is still present in the bin When a destructive export is selected for the external applications no changes will be applied to the bin or the bin clip in the Edit Tool The source material is sent directly to the external application where it can be processed Once the changes are saved the material can be imme diately accessed via the old bin clip in the DVS software However due to the destructive export your original source material on the storage will be lost 5 27 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 6 The Trim Mode 5 28 i With the trim mode of the Edit Tool you can change the in and outpoint of adjacent clips to a cutting point for exam ple if there are not enough head and tail available for a transition When a transition is already applied to the cutting point the in and outpoint of the clips can be changed in this
307. ide the functionality of the video system Without them the system would not be able to display any video signals nor would the DVS software components be operational The PCI video board driver controls the video board and thus the in and output of video signals It runs in the background of your video sys tem and is therefore not visible Software User Interface and Software Modules The software user interface is the visible part of the DVS software pack age It consists of individual software modules which control the DVS system and are used to perform editing and video as well as audio pro cessing tasks These modules are the Edit Tool the I O Tool the Con figuration Tool and Spycer the innovative content management Basics software by DVS They are the basic software modules of the DVS sys tem i e the ones that you will use most in your every day work You can see them in the drawing above in the oval Software User Inter face tools and modules available on your system Further informa i Depending on your system configuration there may be other tion about these can be found in their respective user guides Once the DVS software is started you can access the different modules available on your system easily via the task bar of the user interface see section The Task Bar on page 2 9 The Edit Tool The Edit Tool is the software module that allows you to assemble video and audio material on
308. ields below the OuT and IN button allow you to monitor and adjust the trimming The left field indicates the changes to the outpoint of the clip to the left of the cut the right field dis plays the changes to the inpoint of the clip to the right To use the fields to adjust the trimming se lect the out and or inpoint with the buttons OUT and IN then enter the trimming values positive or negative either in timecode or frames notation and press Enter Further information about time code frame number entry fields can be found in section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 EHE HH With these buttons you can trim the out or in point selected via the buttons OUT and IN one frame for or backwards The respective handler will move accordingly If both buttons are activat ed the out and inpoint will be both adjusted si multaneously These buttons allow you to trim the out or in point selected via the buttons OuT and IN ten frames for or backwards The respective handler will move accordingly If both buttons are activat ed the out and inpoint will be both adjusted si multaneously 5 6 2 Setting In and Outpoints of Clips If clips are already present in the timeline of the Edit Tool you can change their in and outpoint with the trim mode even if a transition is already applied to the cutting point To do this frame accurately you have various controls at hand either to mo
309. ietseeees 4 13 time compression 6 53 6 58 6 72 time stretching 6 53 6 58 6 72 time stretching mode 6 54 TIME COE ou cee cec ccc cecc eee eeeeeeeeeeene ees 2 16 asterisk lt ccectssueaseacia facsietverseastte 2 18 Burn in xasnettesesndicscet endenteiede 5 8 drop frame 2 18 6 81 8 8 EDL timecode 05 8 8 9 10 entering eet toee 2 ales tees 2 19 EE TE TEATE T 2 18 FORMAT sirrien iae 2 18 greater 30 HZ eee 2 18 MOTATION eee eec eee eee eee eeeeeee ees 2 19 ONSET sihncsncecteatswnneeten totes 6 9 6 81 source 2 16 6 11 6 79 8 3 8 4 8 16 8 17 9 10 A 5 switch notation 2 19 6 9 8 44 timecode frame number field 2 19 5 17 MElNE birrittan vacate 3 6 6 1 activate in outpoint 5 33 add clip arereeeeeneene ire reer re ee 3 7 6 2 add clip of certain length 6 38 add EDL naaie 8 10 8 56 add timeline marker 6 50 arrange clips ssssnnnnninineeeeeeee 6 35 blue line ccce 6 30 build up of EDL isssjseevece 8 10 8 56 change appearance ecce 6 6 change contents secc 6 63 check for inconsistencies 8 59 9 4 9 18 9 19 clipwise rendering 6 79 Glose gap screenies 6 37 configuration 2252 201 lt 2ntnssseiatececeet 6 6 CONMO oszicctsastitestnaideerseieeraciey 6 26 COPY GUE seeceSecaa tect tetas 6 38 create data list 8 42 9 7 CHOP scotia so T 6 21 delete clip oer 6 57 6 71
310. ight E to select them After confirming your alterations with the button OK the DVS software will change its default paths and search for the clips at the new locations If found they will be immediately available in your project PVs The Menus 9 4 5 Generate proxies For each clip available in the bin that may exceed the real time capabil ity of the DVS system you can create a proxy to ensure a real time ca pable environment To create proxies select the clips that you want to create a proxy of from the bin Afterwards use the menu option Gen erate proxies to create the proxies z7 Alternatively you can select the menu option Create proxy on i the context menu of a clip in the bin Further information about this can be found in section Using Proxies on page 4 22 More general information about proxies and their handling can be found in section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 s This activates the Jobs tab in the tool area which will then detail the status of the render operation s For each triggered render job one en try will be displayed In case of several render jobs they will be dealt with in the current sorting order of the bin see section Sorting Clips on page 4 19 During the rendering the downconverted images of the proxy will be stored in a reserved location for proxies on the main stor age 7 Itis best to handle and administer the proxy data project spe i cific meaning for each
311. il transfer data 8 53 timecode seeen 9 10 MpOT scndnoSseeen cred eedvasecett 8 6 8 41 timeline status ccccesesscnaticcesaseaas 8 31 keycod dorminta 8 8 transfer data 22 0 0c08 ince 8 24 8 52 Keycode in header 8 16 transitions 8 9 8 13 8 34 9 9 keycode in outpoints 8 34 8 49 trimming clips essees 8 23 8 64 Update catratesaniiasaionsecraaieniipensene 8 47 length ia te eer 8 31 values in orange 8 27 8 30 length event Gozcisecuccstdectcyeces 8 35 video track ecc 8 11 8 31 length reel cscccccccccess 8 39 view Contents ccecce 8 60 link data sirriinisiiiiiiesesiaiiaini 8 50 view of EDLs 8 29 8 43 8 44 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide view selected only ccce 8 44 VIR esenee 8 35 8 54 VIRT L sieri 8 18 8 37 8 51 ol ol ae ee ne S 3 15 4 25 see also preset effect apply sretemmntanetcenes 3 15 4 25 7 11 delete from clip 3 16 7 14 7 15 disable 224 SO ob te cece 7 13 effects list censesesedcacsotedseextecensal 7 11 enable mro on e a 7 13 MpOTE aitess ceesrescvecccseasctececees 4 31 SEQUENCE dirn a ieira 7 14 settings annn 4 26 7 12 7 14 SOTE disco ata 4 32 title bar soeiceceesceeexsnccedeteeencaceest 4 32 effects list seskectentsentalenacssqeialecnates 7 11 embedded audio 6 13 6 17 embedded operator 202 0sd ssenesccans A 3 enabling SD LUD drsi ieira ance 6 21 audio scrubbing cacce 6 18 color lt 1 01 0 fe 7 42
312. ilable They allow the usage of an effect on a selectable part of a clip only The part of the images that will be affected can be set with freely definable shapes masks This feature is available for a secondary color correction see section The Operator 2nd Color Correction on page 7 38 For a description how to activate it please refer to the section of the above mentioned effect Once selected for the respective effect you will receive another settings pane in the area of the timeline element properties Shapes X Pasitio 50 00 Shape 01 50 00 100 00 100 00 50 00 50 00 50 00 x x x x xi x x x x x Reset Invert Reset All Figure 7 46 Picture masks settings pane With the items available in this settings pane the picture masks can be set To the left a list of shapes can be found which can be used for ex ample to define the shapes To the right some settings items are locat ed available for a configuration of the shapes 7 12 1 The Shapes List From the Shapes list to the left choose one of the available shapes for a picture mask Once the procedure to configure a shape is completed it will hold your data of the set shape Up to ten different shapes can be defined 7 51 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs shapes Shape 01 Shape 02 Shape 03 Shape 04 Shape 05 Shape 06 Shape OF Shape 08 Shape 09 x x x x x x x x x x Shape 10 Reset Invert Reset All Figu
313. ill be added at the respective po sition to the video clip 00 00 downtown _usa_ Figure 6 59 Scene marker on clip The result of a scene detection can be influenced with settings in the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide The scene detection will be running until the play out stops at the end of the set timeline stretch or until it is terminated manually e g with the controls 6 67 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Editing the Scene Markers The scene detection detects cuts reliably when the changes of scenery are distinct However if the content of the images varies much cuts may be detected wrongly For example with its standard settings the scene detection will sometimes mark a camera panning as another scene because the image content between two frames differs consider ably Then you have the possibility at hand to edit the detected scenes After analyzing a clip you can jump to scene markers by selecting the clip in the timeline and using the respective controls i SGN or key A S on your keyboard Then by stepping single frames forward and backward you can determine whether the scene marker is properly placed If not it can be taken with the mouse and moved to another position freely 00 00 downtown _usa_ _ Figure 6 60 Moving scene markers Once the scene marker is positioned correctly you can for example apply a hard cut to the clip see s
314. imeline For example the option All online RT clips selects all clips on the timeline that have the status Online RT for further statuses as well as explanations of them see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 Autoconform Performs the same operation as the button Au TOCONFORM of the conforming mode See section Autoconform on page 8 50 Resolve Multiple found clip If not already visible this menu option switches to the conforming mode of the control area and displays in the preview area the clips that were found for this EDL entry Then you can as sign one of the found clips to this EDL entry and thus resolve its state See section Resolv ing Multiple Found on page 8 67 for further information Transfer data Starts the process to transfer data from a non real time capable storage e g on a remote sys tem to the main storage of the DVS system See section Transfer data on page 8 52 Capture data Starts the process to capture data See section Capture data on page 8 54 Set status to offline With this menu option you can select the range of clips that should be set to the status Offline see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 i e whether only the currently se lected clip s or all should be set to offline See also section Set status to offline on page 8 48 8 24 The Conforming Tool
315. immed in the timeline area PVs The Timeline 6 4 Working with the Timeline in General After adding clips to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 you can begin your editing work by for exam ple altering the sequence of clips cutting clips or defining transitions To view your work on an additionally connected monitor you i have to configure the output format of the timeline accordingly see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 12 Performing editing work on clips in the timeline of the Edit Tool is very easy because most editing functions are immediately at hand where they are needed most For example the transition properties can be ac cessed directly from its visible part in a video track You can use the video overlay of the Edit Tool to monitor and check the progress of your work Most of the time the editing work and its output effect can be seen in the video overlay instantly For example clips of different sizes in the video track s of the timeline may be cropped stretched or compressed or scaled according to your settings for the re spective clips and your output settings All these effects can be viewed instantaneously via the video overlay of the control area The DVS software uses only representations of the original ma i terial on the storage for the clips in the bin and the timeline All gt editing tasks are performed virtually and at all tim
316. in your project with the scrub bar of the control area Select the scrub bar cursor HESS with the mouse and move it to the left or right to the desired position Click anywhere below or above the scrub bar to position the scrub bar cursor there instantly Click on a position on the scrub bar outside the visible part of the timeline to move the scrub bar cursor there instantly You can also move the visible part of the timeline on the scrub bar to the left or right with the mouse to select another part of the timeline in the timeline area for viewing Further information about the scrub bar can be found in sec tion The Scrub Bar of the Control Area on page 5 13 Other Ways to Move within the Timeline For a frame accurate moving or to play out and review the timeline you may use the controls of the control area of the Edit Tool With them you can jump to cutting points and timeline markers or step one frame for or backward They are in detail described in section Controls on page 5 15 Of course via a play out you can also move within the timeline There are several ways to play out the timeline You can play out the whole timeline you can review a part of the timeline and you can play out a part of the timeline The Timeline The first two are also initiated via their respective controls of the Edit Tool the play and REVIEW button However to play out a defined part of the timeline
317. ine This value and its notation depend on the i display setting for the timeline time code frame notation see section Config uring the Timeline Scale on page 6 9 and the display type setting of the timeline see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 10 6 56 The Timeline top right bottom left bottom right S Usually the exact outpoint of the last frame of the clip on the timeline This value and its notation depend on the i display setting for the timeline time code frame notation see section Config uring the Timeline Scale on page 6 9 and the display type setting of the timeline see section Changing the Display Type on page 6 10 Name of the clip as it is available in the bin together with its folder path Length duration of the clip tooltips which can be customized to your individual needs see i You can receive additional information about the clips via their section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 10 for further information 6 5 2 The Context Menu of Video Clips The context menu of video clips usually invoked with a right click of the mouse provides the following menu options and functions that can be used with video clips Match frame Delete If you want to know the exact position of an indi vidual frame in the source material of the video clip or transfer this image or the complete image sequence to an
318. ing in Real Time on page 2 11 and section Using Proxies on page 4 22 After the selection of the menu option Delete all proxies all proxies will be deleted immediately from the storage and if appropriate the bin clips will be configured back to their original source material 9 4 7 Activate all proxies With the menu option Activate all proxies you can activate the usage of all proxies that are currently available for your project in one step Then the respective bin clips and all their representations in the timeline will show you the downconverted materials instead of the originals that exceed the real time capability of the DVS system After this the bin clips are configured to the proxies as their source and the properties of the clips will detail this accordingly Alternatively you can use the menu option Activate proxy on i the context menu of a clip in the bin to activate a proxy indi vidually Further information about proxies in general and their handling can be found in section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 and section Using Proxies on page 4 22 9 4 8 Deactivate all proxies 9 22 The menu option Deactivate all proxies deactivates the usage of all proxies currently available for your project in a single step When prox ies are deactivated the bin clips and all their representations in the timeline will show you the original high resolution materials in the Edit Tool instead of the downcon
319. ing of the key framing line of the selected setting You can tog gle between them With Natural Spline activated the keyframing line will be curved be tween the keyframes with Linear it will be straight from keyframe to keyframe To activate Natural Spline at least one additional keyframe has to be set on the keyframing line of the select ed setting This menu option resets the selected setting of the parameters list It removes all additional key frames from the keyframing line restores its de fault values and sets it back to Linear The button RESET sets all settings of the parameters list back to their default values and states i e all additional keyframes will be removed from their keyframing lines their default values will be restored and their curving will be linear again 7 8 2 Viewing the Graph Because an effect is valid for a single clip in the timeline the graph of the keyframe editor usually shows the timeline of the selected clip Nev ertheless it can be set to a viewing zooming of your needs When trimming a clip in the timeline while the keyframing ed i itor is visible trimmed parts will be shown dimmed with a blue hue the trimming will be displayed in the graph The 7 23 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Add 7 24 06 20 Delete Graph Zoom Figure 7 17 The graph To work on a selected part of a clip you can use the button FRAME IN OUT Set the timeline s in and outpoint
320. ing point for ex ample if there are not enough head and tail avail able for a transition The trim mode is described in more detail in section The Trim Mode on page 5 28 This button activates the conforming mode of the Edit Tool s conforming tool It allows you to add import data lists to the timeline conform them and work with them in anyway you want After wards you may export the timeline for example as an EDL or process it further via finalizing or ar chiving The conforming tool and its mode is de scribed in more detail in chapter The Conforming Tool on page 8 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 16 Frames The SLAVE button activates the slave mode of the Edit Tool With the slave mode the DVS system can be controlled via RS 422 from another workstation e g a VTR or a digital disk recorder such as the Pronto3 by DVS Then it will behave like a VTR by using preroll postroll etc The specifications of these parameters can be found in section Slave Mode RS 422 Control on page A 21 When the slave mode is activated the slave mode control window will be displayed on the screen see section The Slave Mode Control Window on page 5 33 To clear the software from the slave mode press the button CLOSE of the window Slave mode This button toggles between the frames or fields display mode In its deactivated state the frames of a video clip are displayed when stepping one
321. initiated Only representations of the clips are created E The DVS CineReel as a storage for video material will be too slow for real time processes It is recommended to copy the ma terial to the main storage of the DVS system beforehand Before connecting another DVS CineReel save the project and A start a new one Otherwise the references to the first DVS CineReel will be void 9 2 10 Export as With the menu option Export as of the Edit Tool you are able to cre ate data lists in the ALE or EDL format from the timeline of the Edit Tool or from an EDL in the conforming tool see section Export as on page 8 42 EDLs can be created in the CMX or GVG format The se 9 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 9 8 lection of this menu option opens the following window where you have to specify the creation of the data list further Export as Export format Media fe information rmat will be disregarded Additional info Path amp name Figure 9 4 Window to specify the export To the left you can find several settings groups to configure the export When selecting one of them with the mouse its configuration settings will be displayed to the right of the window Select each of the settings groups and specify the necessary details for the export as described in the following The button RESET sets all settings of this dialog window back to their default values Settings Group Export
322. ion messages of the DVS software you can deacti vate the appearance of this particular message for the current software session i e next session it will be displayed again 2 6 PVs Basics After starting the DVS software the Edit Tool software module is acti vated automatically Here you can see the following items menu bar tool area control area timeline area At the top of the user interface you can find a menu bar This menu bar provides access to functions and tasks of an administrative nature for the DVS software Here you can find for example import and export functions as well as several menu options generally concerned with projects and project files A description of the menu bar can be found in chapter The Menus on page 9 1 Directly below the menu bar you can find the tool area which may show you depending on the currently active software module and or on the optional features avail able various tools that can be used during your work with the system The tools are provided as tabs to switch easily between them By default you can find among the tools for example the bin which provides initial access to the video material For more details about the tool area and the individual tools see chapter The Tool Area on page 4 1 To the right of the tool area you can find the control ar ea In the Edit Tool this area is used to pre and review your current project At the top you can find the
323. ion of your choice Further information about this can be found in section Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips on page 4 18 PVs The Timeline Relink clip Once a clip is available in the timeline it can be relinked i e referenced to other source material manually from the timeline directly For further in formation about this see section Relinking Clips on page 6 55 Bin Clip With this menu option you can open from a clip in properties the timeline the properties of its source clip in the bin see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 6 6 3 Volume Control The button VOLUME is important for audio clips You can find it at the bottom of the timeline area to the left of the sliders to change the timeline s view This button displays or hides the volume control lines of audio clips With the volume control lines you can change the volume for each clip separately If the button VOLUME is in its active state the volume control lines are visible volume control 14 56 933 14 59 436 A j line trol point m ee lt 100 level line control point lt _a _ _ fAudio SingSingSing 0 1 Figure 6 62 Volume control of audio After dragging an audio clip to one of the audio tracks from the bin the whole volume control line is set to 100 as shown in figure 6 61 on page 6 70 In this state there may be two volume control points avail ab
324. ip duration constant EDL name numbering Source timecode Reel name Modify duration Modify duration Cancel Figure 8 1 Example dialog window to configure an EDL It provides the settings items as described below Depending on the type of EDL added the configuration win dow may provide different settings items The descriptions be low detail all items that can be available even if not present in the figure above Item Description Name This field determines the name of the EDL as it will appear in the bin It can be altered freely Current frame rate Sets the frame rate of the EDL i e the video raster s frequency that was used during the cre ation of the list If not already set correctly se lect the matching frame rate from the drop down list of the combo box 8 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 8 Item Description TC drop frame Sets whether drop frame timecode should be applied to the frequency indicated in the com bo box to the left Further information about drop frame timecode can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Gauge Cut lists only Allows you to set the type of film as well as its perforation Select the matching type from the drop down list of the combo box Extension Cut lists only Determines how to interpret the reference numbers of the keycode information in the files headers on the storage i
325. ip in the provided bin subfolder of the audio multi clip The window of the clip properties can also be opened from a clip added to the timeline see section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 57 The properties of several clips can be changed in a single step by selecting the clips in the bin and then opening their proper ties The description of the Clip properties window is not part of this user guide It is in detail described in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Deleting Clips To delete a clip from the contents area of the bin perform the following e Call up the context menu on the clip that you want to delete in the contents area of the bin and select the menu option Delete Alternatively you may also select the clip and press the key Del on your keyboard After this a warning message will appear on the screen e If you want to delete the clip from the bin as well as all its represen tations present in the timeline confirm the warning message This will delete the selected clip either video or audio from the con tents area of the bin If the clip was already added to the timeline its representations there will be deleted as well 4 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 2 6 Using Proxies 4 22 A proxy can be used when working with high resolution film material such as 4K It is a downscaled clip of the high resolution data that will be internally u
326. ipboard to the selected Ctrl V position location Open Windows Explorer Windows C E neg Open Task Manager Ctrl Alt Del Switch to Windows desktop Windows 24 D Switch to another program Alt TAB A 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 3 Supported File Formats The DVS software supports over 100 graphic and image file formats Most are made available by a special library For a list of all these file formats see http www xnview com en formats html1 The tables in the following list the file formats that are supported by the DVS software directly Some are video or audio only file formats and some are container file formats that contain audio as well as video They are listed accordingly in this section Mzn Some of the file formats i a may belong to optional packages a may not be real time capable cannot be captured a may require the installation of third party programs e g mov Video only File Formats The following video only file formats still image formats are support ed by the DVS software Format Default File storage rare Description Name Extension format ARRIRAW ari 12 bit raw uncom Raw 12 bit file format developed by the ARRI pressed Group for an on camera recording Available for a loading only BMP bmp 3 x 8 bit RGB and 8 bit RGB file format with or without key 4
327. is described in section Processing the Source Material of a Video Clip on page 5 25 When a clip is present in a video track of the timeline area you can pro cess its source material either by using the original data directly de structive export or by previously copying the material beforehand To do this you have to use the menu option Export to Application on the context menu of a video clip in the timeline of the Edit Tool It opens a submenu where you can select other applications than the DVS soft ware to process your video data see also section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 57 To have an application available in this submenu you have to Li define and set it first This can be done with the Configuration Tool group External see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Please note that you have to set the appropriate pro gram parameters if applicable in the Options entry field as well Please note that the Destructive export option is valid for all specified external applications If activated the source data will always be processed directly When saving the data in such a case with an external application the source material will be overwritten Export to Application gt XnView Adobe Photoshop Figure 6 56 Accessing an external application The Timeline This menu option will export the source material of the clip according to your settings made for this application in the Config
328. itossa deiae tain 6 17 aperture see sharpness application export 5 25 6 58 6 62 destructive 5 25 5 26 6 62 sequence processing 5 26 6 61 6 63 applying effects 3 15 4 25 7 11 applying preset effects 4 28 7 15 archiving a project c d ctccecetcesitenee 9 15 ARRIRAW assecc 2 15 color correction ccce 7 57 aspect ratio esssesssennenennnn 5 2 6 82 during Cropping n se 6 22 during finalizing ceecee 6 82 video overlay eee 5 2 6 14 zoom and pan cect cscnstieessrectmans 7 17 asterisk timecode ecce 2 18 At start end ccecce 6 9 attaching audio to video 6 51 6 57 6 72 audio 3 6 3 8 4 7 6 4 6 5 6 70 analog output n 6 17 Broadcast Wave ccce 2 16 channels acce 6 16 6 84 channels embedded 6 13 6 17 during scrubbing ccecce 6 18 FAES riiiiiciiirsneirititrerikaskinitis 6 74 file format occ A 12 A 15 M X NG eere 6 16 MON tOT NG occ 6 17 multi clip o 4 8 4 12 6 78 multiple channels 4 11 6 4 6 5 6 70 6 84 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide audio clip OUTPUT cessccettimetes tink 6 14 6 84 peaks arcore eee 6 74 sample secc 6 15 A 3 A 4 S P SYNC ctecccetenngietatbacsarenusiedt 6 15 source timecode ecceeeeeee 2 17 thumbnail of clip oseese 4 11 VOLUME seeiis 6 73 Waveform nccc 5 19 6 75 EON 6 70 A 1 see also audio attach to video change length delete volume control point file number display type properties
329. ix embedded operator frame end marker full head vs full head vs tail inpoint clip inpoint data list inpoint timeline insert mode keycode An operator such as a transition that is embed ded in the timeline and visible as a timeline ele ment When zoomed far into the timeline the timeline cursor will provide a dotted yellow line that in dicates where the selected image ends on the timeline Color value range of video clips indicating a full value range full With this black will be repre sented in 8 bit data by O and white by 255 See also head Color value range of video clips indicating a re stricted value range and thus headroom head With this black may be represented in 8 bit data by 16 and white by 235 See also full Material at the beginning of a clip that is avail able but neither used nor visible in the timeline of the DVS software due to an inpoint adjust ment trimming See also tail Starting point of a clip For video material either the first file on the storage or a first frame virtu ally set trimmed in the DVS software For au dio material either the first sample of a file or a virtually set trimmed inpoint in the DVS soft ware Starting point of a data list event Usually two inpoints are set in a data list one for the source material on a storage and one for the destina tion of this material on a timeline Starting point of a timeline It is eit
330. ject with the Configuration Tool of the DVS software in the group Project of the tab Project see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide as well as section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 for more in formation 2 6 Working with Raw Content CLIPSTER s hardware allows you to work with raw content in real time With this you can use for example the original 4k REDCODE data in 12 bit Please note that some of these workflows may be part of op tional packages The raw data can be loaded into the software and used as any other material in the timeline without any rendering or preprocessing In case the video data comes in a container file format together with audio and or metadata they will be used as well If the data is split into sev eral clips the DVS software can detect this and use it as a single clip multi clip see section Details about Clips on page 4 10 After adding to the timeline the video clips are provided with some times special effects operators automatically The following table shows the raw content that can be loaded and their accompanying effects op erators Raw Content Effects Operator REDCODE r3d R3D Decode which controls the camera pa rameters of REDCODE raw data See section The Operator R3D Decode on page 7 60 ARRIRAW ari ARRIRAW CC which color corrects the raw data of cameras by ARRI See section The Op erator ARRIRAW CC on page 7 57 Phant
331. jumps to a pre viously located point in the graph while the second button jumps to the next one Timeline Element Properties EE ey Vth these buttons you can step one frame field for or backward in the clip currently under process ing The cursor will move accordingly Alternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts Left Ar row Right Arrow or 3 4 when the timeline has the focus 7 8 4 Setting Keyframes Keyframes for an effect setting can be set easily in the keyframe editor A single click on the respective keyframing line of the setting in the graph will create a keyframe mouse cursor to E a n set a keyframe E keyframe Figure 7 22 Creating keyframes Usually the keyframe will be created on the keyframing line of the set ting that is either selected or available first in the parameters list see section The Parameters List on page 7 21 To create keyframes you can also use the button ADD below the graph It will create keyframes on all visible keyframing lines at the current lo cation of the timeline cursor Additionally with the menu option Add Keyframe of the graph s con text menu see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 you can create a keyframe for the setting that is currently selected in the parameters list The key frame will be created at the position of the timeline cursor 7 8 5 Positioning Keyframes Once a keyframe is created it can be moved and positioned freely with the mous
332. l user guide The items Files per folder allow you to limit the number of files that will be stored in one directory Further information about this can be The Timeline found in section The Finalized Output Files per Folder on page 6 85 The Video 3D LUT items are optionally available They are identical to the 3D LUT settings available for the timeline A 3D LUT will not be ap plied automatically to the rendered files even if one is set for the output of the timeline In case you want to apply a 3D LUT most probably the same you have set for the timeline you have to select it here and ac tivate it with the respective check box For further information about how to do this refer to section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 The Burn in items are similar to the burn in settings available for the video overlay and the video outputs Any display settings already set for the video overlay outputs will not be applied automatically to the ren dered files If you want to have burn in information in the rendered im ages you have to activate them with the respective check box and if required configure them to your liking with the button DISPLAY SET TINGS For further information about this refer to section Head up Display Burn In on page 5 8 SD ee On the left side of the area to configure ronan video you can find some buttons and a list box to select one of the various video formats t
333. l User Guide PVs clip displayed in the video overlay will be provided at the bottom of the preview area Clip properties Clip name Reel name EDL name o path o file name Audio file name Duration Figure 8 42 Clip properties Besides standard information such as the clip s name or the EDL and reel name it belongs to you can find here for example information about the in and outpoints of source keycode and file number provid ed by the clip 8 7 6 Working with Split Screen 8 64 This section describes how to set up a split screen operation in the Edit Tool Using the split screen function it is possible to view the contents of two video tracks side by side in the video overlay of the preview area With this you can for example compare a conformed EDL built up in the timeline with an offline edited low resolution clip of the EDL To set up a split screen operation perform the following The item to activate the split screen is only available with the Li preview area set to the timeline view see also section The Video Overlay on page 8 61 e If required build up your EDL in the timeline of the Edit Tool and conform it see section First Steps to Make a Conforming on page 8 6 e Then configure the timeline to provide a second video track see section Video and Audio Track Properties on page 6 7 e Add the offline edited low resolution clip the second video track of the timeline see
334. layed in the software as a full stop Then the timecode fields of the software will display for example 12 25 07 instead of 12 25 07 This indicates that the drop frame timecode feature is activated When entering timecode the last colon can also be replaced by a full stop Further information about drop frame timecode can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Higher Frequencies and Timecode Format Additionally an asterisk may be added to the timecodes of the DVS software e g 12 25 07 This will be the case when the video ras ter s frequency exceeds 30 frames per second because the original timecode format is limited to frame rates as high as that To account for video rasters with higher frequencies e g 720p at 60 Hz one time code number is used for several video frames meaning every second third or fourth timecode provides the same timecode number the frames notation see below is not affected and is tagged with an as terisk to mark it as repeated At the output repeated timecode numbers are particularly flagged as well The standard timecodes that will be used for such procedures are 24 Hz 25 Hz and 30 Hz For example a video raster frequency of 48 Hz is provided with a 24 Hz timecode while a 60 Hz frequency receives a 30 Hz timecode This will result in a doubling of the timecode numbers 60 Hz 30 Hz TC 60 Hz 00700 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 00 02
335. layed with text in formation only If Image is selected there will be an additional column available showing you the thumbnails of the EDL clips reels first im age Timecode Frames This combo box performs the same operation as the context menu on a position length indicator in the DVS software For further information about this see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 Select With this button you can select mark entries in the table of the dis played tab It may be useful for example in case a lot of elements are displayed in the table and a selection would otherwise be tedious to make It opens a window as the following Select Criteria for data selection Clips with status Online RT Cancel Figure 8 27 Making a selection With the combo box to the left determine the criteria that should be used to make the selection There will be different criteria to choose from depending on the tab displayed in the work area When a criteria is selected you can specify the parameter on which to make the selec tion with the combo box to the right The button R to the left adds another set of search criteria items that will also be used to make the selection With them an AND search is provided You can add as many AND searches as you like and they can be deleted by clicking the button i in front of a criteria item Show When a selection is made in the table displayed in
336. le one at the beginning of the clip and one at its end Whether the start and end control points are available depends on whether the clip is trimmed in and or outpoint adjusted To tune the audio volume up or down you have to either use the al ready available volume control points or create new ones To create a new volume control point perform the following e Move the mouse cursor horizontally on the volume control line to the location where the control point should be added As soon as you can add a control point the mouse cursor changes to a cross e Then click with the mouse 6 73 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 14 40 000 6 74 This will create a control point which can be moved in every direction on the audio clip The control points react to certain elements in the video and audio tracks of the timeline snapping mode to allow for an automated positioning You can deactivate the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key Fur ther information about the snapping mode can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 To delete a control point select from its context menu the menu option Remove control point see also section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 71 When you move the control point up or down you can turn up or down the volume of the respective clip If you want to create audio peaks or fade in or out audio you hav
337. lean ing Temporary Data Manually on page A 24 For further information about the Jobs tab see section Jobs i on page 4 33 Activating or Deactivating Proxies The created proxies substitute the original high resolution material on the storage to make the environment of the DVS system real time ca pable By activating or deactivating proxies their usage instead of the original material can be determined When a proxy is activated the bin clip and all its representations in the timeline will show you the down converted material when it is deactivated the original high resolution material is used in the Edit Tool To activate or deactivate proxies perform the following e In the contents area of the bin select the clips that provide a proxy see section Selecting Clips on page 4 18 e Next call up the context menu on one of the selected clips and choose the menu option Activate proxy If this menu option shows a cross in front after it was clicked the prox ies are activated and will be used for the selected clips The selected bin clips are now configured to the proxies as their source and the proper ties of the clips will detail this accordingly In case the menu option does not show the cross in front the proxies of the selected clips are deactivated Then the original materials will be used for the respective bin clips and their representations in the time line The properties of the clips will detail this a
338. lect an LUT file entry from the list box and press this but ton to delete it If more than one LUT file is loaded the button SAVE will combine their color correction settings and create a new LUT file from the already set ones The selection of this button opens a standard dialog window to save a file There you have to specify the storage path and file name of the new LUT file Once you confirm your settings with the button SAVE the file will be created After that you can use this single LUT file instead of several ones to color correct video clips Several sample LUT files are delivered with the DVS software They can be found in the directory 1ut of the software s instal lation path default C Program Files DVS Clipster Once finished with the loading of a static look up table you can per form further adjustments to the appearance of the clip via the controls to the right of the primary color correction More detailed information about 1D LUT files can be found in J section 1D LUT Files on page A 16 7 10 2 Master Luma Chroma 7 32 With the Master Luma and Chroma items you can adjust the lumi nance as well as color settings Timeline Element Properties Master Luma Chroma Master Contrast Gamma Brightness Luma Hi g h Low Chroma Hue Saturation 0 00 1 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Figure 7 29 The area for master luma and chroma With the Master items you ca
339. licate Print Figure 8 24 The edit controls Load This button allows you to import an EDL into the Edit Tool It performs the same operation as for example the Add ALE or Add EDL menu options of the menu Project see section The Project Menu on page 9 3 The complete procedure is described in section Import ing and Adding EDLs on page 8 6 Close This button closes an imported EDL Afterwards it will be removed de leted from the Edit Tool i e from the bin as well as from the conform ing mode In case it was built up in the timeline you will be asked whether the clips should be removed from the timeline as well If this is denied the EDL folders in the bin will be changed to standard bin fold ers and the EDL clips in the timeline will be converted to standard clips 8 41 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs During the closing procedure you will also be asked whether you want to save the EDL i e whether already made changes should be saved as an EDL In case you confirm this the procedure to export an EDL will be initiated see section Export as on page 8 42 Export as This button exports the selected EDL with all changes applied to an EDL It performs the same procedure as the menu option Export as of the Project menu but for the currently selected EDL only see sec tion Export as on page 9 7 Duplicate This button duplicates the selected EDL After
340. lip from the timeline Just select the effect from the effects list in the timeline element properties and press the key Del on your keyboard Getting Started A once set and configured effect can also be used as a template effect preset effect for other clips in the timeline Then you can use the same effect settings several times in this project without laboriously configuring the effects operator anew Fur ther information about this can be found in section Effects on page 4 25 To the left of the properties area you can also set the duration of the clip selected in the timeline area Simply type in its dura tion and confirm it with the Enter key CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 3 Exiting the Program To end the current software session perform the following There is no way to end the Edit Tool alone When you exit the Edit Tool the whole DVS software will shut down Therefore it is recommended to finish all tasks such as a record or play out operation beforehand Otherwise the respective task may get interrupted e Select the option Exit on the Project menu or press the key combi nation Alt F4 alternatively You may also use the menu option Exit of the program icon i on the menu bar of the user interface see section Exit on page 9 2 The DVS software will be closed and you can then for instance shut down the system i When exiting the program a DV
341. ll be performed if their status is Online NRT A click on the button TRANSFER DATA opens the following window Transfer data General Settings RT path for data uce file structure x Add head tails Handles as Further Settings _ Avoid warnings if file folder already exists Apply to Selection Transfer data Figure 8 35 Transferring data PVs The Conforming Tool Use the settings items as detailed in the following to configure the copy process RT path for data Specify in this entry field the path on your main storage where to save the copied data or use the button to the right of the field to select one directly via the opening dialog window Reproduce file structure If activated the directory structure as found on the foreign system will be recreated on your storage i e the complete path to the clip on the foreign system will be created in the speci fied target directory RT path for data If de activated only the main directory of the clip with the clip stored beneath it will be created Add heads tails With this check box activated you can deter mine the amount of heads and tails that should be copied in addition to the material pointed to by the source in and outpoint Afterwards the transferred clip will provide the entered handles on either side of the clip if not enough material is available the maximum amount that is pos sible Enter the number o
342. lor mask i e no changes can be performed to the color vector softness When this button is activated the color mask area is locked when it is deactivated chang es can be performed Timeline Element Properties INVERT With this button you can invert the color vector that is currently selected Afterwards all colors that were previ ously deselected are selected RESET The button RESET sets the selected color vector back to its default values Soft With this slider and its entry field to the right you can ad just an overall softness for the selected color vector as well as for an already set softness By dragging this slider to the left you will reduce the softness by dragging it to the right it will be increased The softness entry field to the right of the slider will change accordingly You can also set the softness in the entry field directly by entering a value and afterwards pressing Enter on your key board When adjusting the overall softness all values of the softness entry fields above the controls as well as the softness corner points of the selection shapes will be al tered as well This item is most useful when performing a quick color correction You just have to pick roughly your color vec tor e g with the pipette and afterwards you can adjust your selection swiftly by using the Soft setting a When the preview window is displayed on the screen you can switch its view to a display of the alpha channel
343. low the thumbnails visible when a clip is selected you can preview the material and roughly select an inpoint for the respec tive clip However for our demonstration here we will leave the clips inpoints as they are iJ A When audio should be used in your project you have to drag add audio clips to the bin as well If you select another file than the first frame file in a video di rectory the scrub bar cursor of the thumbnail the clip s in point will be set accordingly You may select more than one video directory in the file man ager and drag them to the contents area of the bin The respec tive clips will all be added to the bin You can also add clips to the bin by using the menu option Add Clip on the context menu of the contents area or the menu Project Add clips Via the context menu of a clip in the bin either audio or video you can call up the clip s properties Most of these can only be altered if the clip is not already present in the timeline When adding clips to the bin with a procedure other than a record some properties may not be discerned properly due to missing file header information Then they will either be de duced from the file format color space etc of the clip or configured to the currently set timeline output settings If the properties of the clip do not match the material on the stor age you have to change them accordingly see section Changing the Properties
344. ls If you want to adjust the outpoint of the clip to the left of the cutting point the OuT but ton has to be activated if you want to set the inpoint of the clip to its right the IN button has to be selected If both buttons are acti vated the out and inpoint will be adjusted simultaneously e Next use the controls below the OuT and IN button to position them frame accurately Figure 5 24 Trim controls The respective handler s will move accordingly As well the counter s will in or decrease for the selected clip s Your alterations are effective immediately in the timeline and you can now for example define a transition between the clips or perform a play out To switch the control area back to the edit mode use the appropriate button of the control area E PVs The Control Area 5 7 The Slave Mode Control Window The DVS software provides in some of its software modules a slave mode Usually it can be activated with the button SLAVE Then the fol lowing window may be displayed on the screen allowing you to control the respective software module without relinquishing the slave mode 4 Slave mode x Remote protocol Figure 5 25 Slave mode control In slave mode the DVS system will behave like a VTR by using preroll postroll etc The specifications of these parameters can be found in sec tion Slave Mode RS 422 Control on page A 21 This section ex plains the items provided by the Slave mode
345. luminance chang es the chroma settings remain as they were Values range from 100 to 100 With the Chroma items you can adjust color related settings such as the hue Hue Saturation 7 10 3 Global The hue setting moves the colors of the images around the color wheel in the HSL color space 180 It is recommended to use this setting lightly for small corrections only Adjustments greater than 10 usually produce dramatic color changes A color s saturation is its intensity A higher saturation will make the color to appear richer while a lower sat uration makes it look paler or in other words the sat uration is the proportion of grey in relation to the color s hue This setting can be set between 100 grey and 100 full saturation The Global items provide you with sliders for each color value R G and B as well as a master slider to adjust them all at once Figure 7 30 The global color settings Use the sliders R G or B to step up or down the color values of the im age for the respective color component red green or blue With the master slider RGB to the left you can set the settings for all three color components at once even after already adjusting individual color com ponents 7 34 Timeline Element Properties The check box Hold Luma allows you to hold the luminance level of the clip while adjusting a single color component Usually while adjust ing a color component the lumina
346. ly i connected monitor you have to configure the output format video raster of the timeline accordingly see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 12 If you activate a play action of the clip A from the bin in the source edit mode see Z section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 18 a play out of the timeline will be terminated With this button activated a play out of the time line will be performed endlessly in a loop Once the timeline cursor reaches the outpoint of the timeline the play out will start from the inpoint again To switch off the loop mode deactivate this button You can jump to particular points on the timeline such as cutting edit points and timeline markers with these buttons The first button jumps to the point that is previously located on the timeline while the second button jumps to the next one Al ternatively you may use the keyboard shortcuts A and S This button toggles between the insert and over write mode See section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 31 This button plays around the current position of the timeline cursor several sec in a loop To deacti vate the loop review press the button REVIEW again The duration of the review can be configured freely with the with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more in formation This field shows the current position of the timeline cursor in
347. lying a 3D LUT File on page 6 18 A cropping for the whole timeline see section Cropping the Timeline on page 6 21 The rest of the available items in this window i e the items of the areas Name and Format are described in more detail in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide How to Configure the Audio Output The timeline area contains several audio tracks where you can add au dio clips in the desired sequence and set fade ins and outs To output audio via the digital audio outputs of the DVS system you have to con figure the audio output accordingly set to your liking see section Video and Audio Track Proper ties on page 6 7 i The number of audio tracks displayed in the Edit Tool can be In the areas preceding the audio tracks you can find the audio routing button R PVs The Timeline audio routing button for 2nd audio track Figure 6 13 Button to configure the audio output settings With these buttons you can set for each track separately the audio out put After pressing one of the R buttons the following window will be displayed t Track 2 properties Audio Mode _ Copy to all tracks Output Path s TI j d alesd 6 8 Figure 6 14 Window to configure the audio output settings In the area Audio Mode select whether the audio mode of the track should be mono or stereo The Edit Tool applies the selected audio mode directly to the respective audio t
348. mation about the status of render operations that have been initialized in the DVS software On this tab you can find for example information about the progress of prerenderings or proxy generations For each triggered job one entry will be displayed Markers Perform yy for holly Figure 4 18 Jobs in progress Whenever possible the render jobs will be performed in the back ground of the system i e during their creation you can continue to work in the timeline of the Edit Tool as usual In case of several render jobs they will be processed one at a time in the order indicated Once the render operations are finished their entries will disappear from the list of the Jobs tab For further information about renderings in general see section i Working in Real Time on page 2 11 or section Finalizing the Timeline on page 6 76 The corresponding clip and processed image will be displayed in the video overlay when selecting from the list the job that is currently under processing When entries are displayed in the list on the tab Jobs you can cancel the respective job and thus delete its created files For this call up the context menu on the job entry that you want to abort It offers you the following Delete Cancels the selected render job where the context menu was called and deletes already rendered files Delete all Cancels all render jobs listed on the tab Jobs in a single step Already rendered files
349. mation about timeline markers can be found in i section Marking Positions in the Timeline on page 6 49 and section The Marker Table on page 4 34 The following controls are available This button saves the entries in the drop table to a file Enter in the opening dialog window a storage path and file name for the drop table list to be saved Then confirm your settings with the button SAVE and the table will be saved to the specified location Compared to the drop report saved by de i fault by the performance monitor this button only saves the entries currently available in the drop table see section The Performance Monitor on page 4 36 As soon as the real time operation is finished and when drops have occurred the button MARK ALL will be available With it you can retrieve further in formation about the locations where drops oc curred It places timeline markers in the timeline of the Edit Tool for each entry available in the drop ta ble 4 43 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Once the placing of the markers is finished this button shows the labeling UNMARK ALL Then you can remove with it all timeline markers from the timeline in one step A The MARK ALL button will not be available i in the I O Tool because this module pro vides no timeline where markers can be set leat The CLEAR button deletes all entries displayed in the drop table Afterwards you may start a new
350. mation file 3 18 4 37 4 41 finalizing conoesicaceetaceinoiante2uctices GaP HAG nessies A 3 change soeces 5 30 6 44 l 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide delete 5 23 6 29 6 30 6 31 details eScace aca den scene sesncrerecender 5 29 handler 06 5 24 5 30 6 45 handler trimming cecce 6 47 information 5 29 6 56 6 70 marker vesceaGeeccdvaicdesatenceecucessuse 5 30 setting for timeline 6 29 6 30 setting DIN ccecce 3 6 4 20 setting in source edit mode 3 8 5 22 setting in timeline 3 12 6 45 setting in trim mode 5 28 5 31 6 44 slave mode control necces 5 33 WIMMINE sictiesaseenrasiaieeiesdaad 5 30 inpoint entry field 0 5 23 6 29 insert mode 0 3 8 6 31 6 36 with attached clips 6 52 6 53 insert PIOlE CU oeaiei 9 5 interlace material deinterlace 7 10 7 58 gil gy Meee nee eee meee Serer eat ee 6 11 Is transferring 8 5 8 33 8 54 J JOD eee eee eee ener ener renter eer 4 33 background ccecce 4 33 CANCE casa snctelagyesassiessgenteeeeeee 4 33 video overlay ccecce 4 33 K key see alpha channel keyboard shortcuts s s s 6 29 keyc de sus eeiieteescardeseies 2 16 2 17 burn in cosactdeatcacencerachecaeeec canst 5 8 conforming tool 8 16 8 49 EDL ras ne 8 8 notation lt csccccesasceaccentalensceesnescs 2 17 reference number 2 17 8 8 8 34 8 50 Keycode in header n
351. me 6 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs line as described in section Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline El ements on page 6 44 dure the Edit Tool will either align the clips horizontally in one track of the timeline or put each clip into another track directly below the selected one This drag and drop behavior can be configured with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Con figurations user guide for more information i If more than one clip is selected for the drag and drop proce If you drag an audio clip to the timeline that contains more than one mono or stereo channel multiple channels the ad ditional channels will be added to the other audio tracks below the selected one 6 1 2 Taking a Clip from the Control Area 6 4 When a clip from the bin is dragged to the control area the source edit mode is activated where you can set the in and outpoint of the clip frame accurately ii Further information about the source edit mode and how to set in and outpoint for a clip there can be found in section The Source Edit Mode on page 5 18 When the in and outpoint are set as desired perform the following e Select the bin clip in its video overlay and drag and drop it to a video or audio track of the timeline Video clips can only be dragged to the video track s of the Edit i Tool and audio clips only to the audio tracks Alternatively video clips can be imported
352. meline area For example if you select an EDL from the tab EDLs in the work area see section The Tab EDLs on page 8 30 the complete EDL will be shown in the preview area in the current sorting order of the EDL on the tab EDL Clips see section Adapting the Appearances of the Tables on page 8 29 This can be used on complete EDLs individual events or reels Then if appropriate the toggle button TIMELINE EDL will be switched accordingly and the scrub bar of the preview area will show the timeline of the selected EDL or EDL event see section The Scrub Bar on page 8 62 If more than one element of an EDL is selected the preview area will show you the one at the top of the selection When working in the timeline timeline has focus the toggle button TIMELINE EDL will be switched accordingly and the preview area will show you the contents of the timeline at the current position of the timeline cursor z EDL events with the status Online NRT see section The Tab Li EDL Clips on page 8 32 cannot be played because their content is located on remote systems in the network They can only be viewed in still images Additionally there may be a time delay until the material is displayed in the video overlay de pending on the current data transfer rate of your network S 8 7 2 The Video Overlay The video overlay at the top of the preview area allows you to preview the contents of the timeline or
353. mming see sec tion Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 44 outpoint handler inpoint handler Figure 6 43 In and outpoint handlers selected To select more than one handler perform the following e Select one of the desired handlers with a click of the mouse e Hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on another handler with the mouse e Perform this step for as many additional handlers as you want 6 47 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 48 After that you can click on one of the handlers and drag it to another position The rest of the selected handlers will act accordingly head and tail available for all selected timeline elements other i To trim several in or outpoint handlers there must be enough wise a trimming will not be possible With the selection of more than one handler of timeline elements you have some advanced possibilities for trimming at hand If you select the outpoint handler of one clip and the inpoint han dler of the neighboring clip to the right as can be seen in figure 6 43 on page 6 47 you can extend the length of one clip while shortening the length of the other at the same time Thus the timeline length will be maintained M ST Figure 6 44 Selected in and outpoint handlers of neighboring clips If you select either two outpoint handlers or two inpoint handlers you can adjust the length of the two clips simultaneously ee
354. mn heading The sorting will also be available after switching to the thumbnail view of the bin again The already sorted clips can even be sorted further i e they can be sort ed by up to three criteria in total With this you are able for instance to sort clips by their names as well as by their duration e To sort the list further hold the Ctrl key pressed while clicking with the mouse on another column heading To the right of the additionally selected column heading a figure will ap pear to indicate that this is the second or third criteria the list is sorted by Whether this sorting occurs in ascending or descending order is de termined by the sorting order of the very first column heading i e if the first selected column is sorted in descending order all following sorting criteria will also be sorted in descending order By repeating the last step you can sort the list of clips by up to three criteria and the whole sorting will also be available when switching to the thumbnail view of the bin Sorting Clips into Folders As soon as clips are present in the bin you can sort them into previously created folders see section Creating Folders on page 4 15 to keep your project file in order and thus to perform a clip and project man agement CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 20 e To sort the clips into folders simply select the clips in the contents area of the bin and drag and drop them to the respecti
355. ms casei etc eeetac 2 es tealeGisee nn toe donee easels A 1 A 2 Keyboard Shortcuts tee atse cree coezeseasass Heeecorsearediuactevetecieseens A 7 A 3 Supported File Formats cececxsccateccsstnshesateceeccsttetslateenmsereects A 10 A ID LUT ceeneeree rere eee erer tren etre reenter E are A 16 AS 3DLUTFilES eee reece ner eee ee Prepare cr rer eer eere A 17 A 5 1 General Description ccacsesias srakeswettcccctesaseantebeedhacetests A 17 A52 SDFGS vroa aa a eaaa ieee aeece A 18 A53 IS acta ees eee es A 20 A 6 Slave Mode RS 422 Control eesceesceeseeeeeeeeseereseeeaes A 21 A 7 System Maintenance sintsanveredsatvcamansraodeetenanmeniosnanaussniesatuents A 22 A 7 1 The Automatic Defragmentation Process eee A 22 A 7 2 Cleaning Temporary Data Manually 0 0 0 0 eee A 24 MUCK a a deatae Sisaoeevortotduandatesereatundeaias l 1 Introduction This documentation describes how to use the Edit Tool of CLIPSTER the real time conforming and finishing system manufactured by DVS CLIPSTER is a powerful high resolution video workstation with enor mous flexibility especially designed to meet the demands of modern post production houses CLIPSTER offers capturing online editing and storing of digital film and audio data in one device The system performs all works in real time Video data is stored and worked with in its original uncompressed for mat independent of resolution color space and bit depth All formats and
356. n Use the Resolution fields to change the height and width of the clip The Frame rate entry field will be evaluated if a file format is selected that stores source timecode information in its header e g dpx Then the specified timecode will provide the entered frame rate as the source timecode s frame rate Use the combo box for the field mode to select whether your material to be generated should be interlaced progressive or segmented frames From the combo box Dominance select the dominance of your inter laced material The Odd fields value starts with the second video field of the interlaced image while the value Even fields begins with the first video field Via the entry field Aspect ratio you can change the aspect ratio of your image content and thus compress or stretch the image The aspect ratio value should be entered as the value of the x axis divided by the y axis Aspect ratio x y The Auto scale and Original aspect ratio items enable you to scale and resize your original video material Both settings are concerned with the video format of the clips in the timeline and their output for the clip to be rendered must be seen in relation to the selected video format of the new clip PVs The Timeline With the combo box Auto scale set to Fit and the Original aspect ratio check box activated the clips of the timeline will be scaled to their maximum allowable width or height so that no infor mation gets lost I
357. n adjust luminance relevant settings such as gamma or brightness Contrast Gamma Brightness With the contrast items you can set the contrast of the clip s images An increase of the contrast setting will push the image colors more towards their full col or whereas a decrease will adjust the colors more to wards a tone of grey You can adjust the settings between 100 no contrast and 100 maximum contrast Gamma adjusts the mid tones of an image Lowering the value will darken the mid tones bringing the im age closer to black Raising the value will lighten the mid tones while bringing the image closer to white Sometimes this setting can be used to make details visible that are usually hidden in shadows or high lights The settings range is between 0 1 and 3 where 1 represents the unchanged image The brightness setting adjusts the luminance of the image and indicates the bright and darkness of the image colors It is measured between 100 black and 100 white The items of the group Luma allow you to adjust the white or black point of the clip s images High Adjusts the brighter parts of the clip i e the gain or white point By using this setting only the luminance changes the chroma settings remain as they were Values range from 100 to 100 7 33 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Low Adjusts the darker parts of the clip i e the lift or black point By using this setting only the
358. n after the selection of the menu option Save As This menu option allows you to save a project file under a different name see also section Save on page 9 6 from the ones usually saved via the DVS software Further in formation about this can be found in the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide i The VTR task mode of the I O Tool uses project files different S 9 2 9 Update CineReel The DVS CineReel is a transportable outdoor proof hard disk array es pecially designed for the on set use of digital film capturing The film material is directly stored on the hard disk array and when finished the array can be disconnected and transported to an editing site while the crew continues to capture on the set with an empty DVS CineReel At the editing site the hard disk array can be connected to a DVS system easily and the material will be instantly recognized Then it can be pro cessed right away The menu option Update CineReel on the Project menu checks whether a DVS CineReel is connected to the DVS system Then in the bin a folder with the name CineRee1 is created and the film material on the hard disk array is referenced to this folder In the newly created folder the directory structure on the DVS CineReel is imitated and for each clip present on the hard disk array a bin clip will be available You can then work with the data immediately With the menu option Update CineReel no copying process of any kind is
359. n capture data from telecines VTRs or even cameras as desired in an automated batch processing mode or manually Of course playing out the recorded material as well as of all other clips present on the system can be performed without any effort as well Fur thermore the processing of data lists is fully supported in the software for example via import and export functions 2 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 4 Integrated Spycer With Spycer the innovative content management software by DVS you can manage your content easily It is a software application capable of handling large amounts of video data and their corresponding meta data providing you with integrated browse search and management tools to retrieve data and gather information about them locally as well as via a network Additionally it can be used to preview clips and add them to the bin of the DVS software thus offering you even more pos sibilities than a file manager Spycer is already integrated in the DVS software It can be accessed the same way as the other software mod ules and is thus not needed as a stand alone application For CLIPSTER users it comes with the complete feature set and furthermore works seamlessly together with other available DVS products such as the DVS SAN The Configuration Tool For the configuration and setup of the whole DVS system and its soft ware you can use the Configuration Tool Here you can set up for ex
360. n it lists the color correction values leading to the following syntax Any comment Any comment lt RGB nodes according to bit depth and of nodes gt lt R of 1 node gt lt G of 1 gt lt B of 1 gt lt R of 2 node gt lt G of 2 gt lt B of 2 gt lt R of 3 node gt lt G of 3 gt lt B of 3 gt lt R of lt of nodes gt node gt lt G of lt of nodes gt gt lt B of lt of nodes gt gt The following shows an example of a 3DL file 10 bit value pairs in the middle left out Any comment Any comment O 64 128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 1023 27 25 23 27 26 23 34 35 39 Al 43 51 56 59 75 87 88 117 17 126 192 120 122 252 43 0 280 98 0 334 134 0 375 159 0 404 171 0 423 1023 988 893 1023 989 893 1023 990 894 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 5 3 XML Files A3D LUT xml file is a plain ASCII text file that has to conform to the XML standard It offers the following tags and attributes lt LUT3D gt The root element base tag that includes the other el ements and tags It should provide the following at tributes name The name of the 3D LUT file N The number of nodes i e 17 BitDepth The bit depth of the 3D LUT file lt values gt Child element tag that contains the R G B output values for the RGB nodes Each line consists of three values R G B The separation is made by space
361. n moving or adding clips in the timeline with the overwrite mode activated gaps may occur in the timeline no content to output in this part of the timeline Further information about gaps and how to close them can be found in section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 6 3 4 Muting and Locking Tracks The video and audio tracks of the Edit Tool can be muted and or locked independently i e they can be enabled or disabled for a play out as well as for an editing work If a track is muted its content will not be played out if it is locked no editing work such as a cutting of clips can be performed in this track 6 33 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 34 master mute lock e 1 To lock or mute a track you have to use the buttons available in the ar eas right in front of the tracks The button M mutes the track bar it from an output while the button L locks it bar it from an editing work Timeline lock button Figure 6 33 Buttons to lock and mute tracks With the M and L buttons to the left side of the timeline scale you can mute and lock all video and audio tracks with one click master mute lock Afterwards you may use the mute and lock buttons of in dividual tracks to enable them for the respective work again This may be especially useful when working with a lot of tracks When locking tracks and thus preserving them from changes the locked tracks will appear d
362. n page 8 30 EDL Clips Displays all clips events of the currently selected EDL See section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 EDL Reels Displays all reels of the selected EDL See section The Tab EDL Reels on page 8 37 Original EDL Displays the EDL in its original form i e as it would appear in a text editor See section The Tab Orig inal EDL on page 8 40 This section explains the features and tables provided by the work area 8 5 1 Viewing EDLs To display a certain EDL on the tabs of the work area you can choose between different possibilities You can select the EDL that should be shown from the bin directly from the table entries provided on the tab EDLs see section The Tab EDLs on page 8 30 or 8 28 PVs The Conforming Tool via the EDL combo box of the controls see section lt EDL gt on page 8 42 Additionally to view the EDL of a certain clip on the timeline you can select the menu option Conforming Show in the corresponding EDL on the context menu of the timeline clip see section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 8 5 2 Adapting the Appearances of the Tables Once an EDL is selected and shown in the work area on one of its tabs the appearance of the displayed table can be adapted to your needs in various ways For example besides changing the width of the columns you can also display or hide columns All controls to adapt th
363. n select in the image directly the colors that you would like to add to your alpha mask i e your color vector A left click of the mouse selects the color where the pipette cursor is positioned A right click of the mouse deselects all colors Nevertheless to select a whole range of colors more quickly you can also draw a rectangle in the preview window This will select all colors in the rectangle pipette rectangle Figure 7 43 Selecting colors in the preview window To facilitate the selection of a color vector the view of this window can be switched between three different states 1 When the button a is enabled the preview window will show you a view of the alpha channel of the currently selected color vector The white pixels in this view are selected while the black pixels are deselected 2 When the button a P is enabled the original image will be shown in the window together with an alpha mask of the selected color vector displayed in grey 3 If both above mentioned buttons are disabled the image will be shown with the color correction performed i e when changes were made to the settings in the color correction and balance area their effect can be seen in the preview window All views of the preview window are displayed in the overlay of the Edit Tool and at the output of the system as well As soon as you are finished with your color vector selection you may close the preview window at any time 7 11 4 The
364. n that is too high for two simulta neous video streams If the respective transitions are dis played in the timeline without a prer endering indication reduce the value that indicates when a timeline element has to be prerendered see Configura tion Tool in the CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide Then prerender the transitions see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 After this the problem should be re solved 4 47 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs pable Marker Timeline rk Probable Cause Solution Position Element Throughout the The storage location s Move the material to a real time capa timeline is are not real time ca ble storage The storage location s where the material is stored is are too full It is recommended to use only 85 of the overall storage capacity If the storage s is are too full delete some of the data Configurations of the system have been al tered so that it is no longer capable of real time operations Contact the DVS service department One or more hard disks of the storage array may be damaged Replace the defective disk s as de scribed in the hardware guide of the DVS system 4 48 iJ hardware guide After applying the recommended solution the problem should be re solved However if the drops persist please contact the DVS service department If dr
365. n the tab EDL Clips By clicking this button you can accept the changes Then all entries in the table will be displayed in the standard colors of unmodified events again 8 6 4 The Execute Controls 8 50 The following describes the controls that allow you to process EDLs Execute Autoconform Create in TL Link data Show handles Transfer data Add prefpostroll Capture data Update linking Figure 8 33 The execute controls Autoconform This button starts an autoconforming process for the EDL that is cur rently selected in the work area After pressing it the same window will be displayed as after initiating an autoconforming e g after the build up of an unconformed EDL in the timeline For further information about this window as well as about the autoconforming process see section Configuring the Autoconforming on page 8 16 When an autoconforming is performed manually adjusted set tings for events see section Conforming Mode The Work Area on page 8 28 may be overwritten with the ones set for the autoconforming Link data With this button you can start a conforming by using linking methods that have been manually set for events for example on the tab EDL Clips see section Conforming Mode The Work Area on The Conforming Tool page 8 28 The linking data feature is able to perform different search es in a single step in accordance with your settings su
366. n the timeline area at the moment due to zooming or parts of an EDL event which are deselected via a set in and outpoint i e its head and tail in light grey Parts in light grey indicate either the part of the timeline that is currently visible in the timeline area or the part of an EDL event that is select ed via a setin and outpoint i e the visible part of the EDL event after building up the EDL in the timeline The blue line indicates the part of the EDL event timeline that is selected via in and out point mmn em With the scrub bar cursor you can move within the EDL event timeline Simply select the cur sor with the mouse and move it along the scrub bar to the desired position You can also click somewhere on the scrub bar to move the cur sor there immediately 8 7 4 The Preview Controls In addition to moving the scrub bar cursor manually you can control it via the preview controls below the scrub bar e g the play button In 8 62 PVs The Conforming Tool detail the controls beneath the scrub bar perform the following func tions i A preview can also be controlled with some of the keyboard shortcuts described in section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 7 x Depending on the statuses of EDL events see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 some controls may not be avail able e g a play out cannot be performed with material on a remote system Th
367. names Instead of seeing the thumbnails continuously the clips are filled with their file names instead i e you will see the original file names of the re spective image files throughout the clip which may be especially helpful during frame accu rate editing 6 2 3 Configuring the Timeline Scale The timeline scale can be adapted to the needs of your project You can either set a special offset or switch the notation of the scale timeline scale rnin I Ot 12 15 15 09 12 16 WLY wWOO p E Figure 6 9 The timeline scale To set a timeline offset for example to match the current project with other projects you have to use the TC Offset item of the output set tings window see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 12 The timeline of the Edit Tool will then provide this offset Additionally the timeline scale as well as all position and length indica tors in the Edit Tool can be switched from a display of the timecode no tation to frame numbers and vice versa Further information about this can be found in section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 6 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 2 4 Configuring the Tooltips of Clips All clips added to the timeline of the Edit Tool i e video as well as audio clips provide various information via tooltips These information will be displayed as soon as the mouse cursor is placed over a clip CET Type Clip
368. nce of the clip is changed as well i e changes occur in the Brightness setting too When this check box is activated during the adjustment of a color component e g G instead of adjusting the brightness parameter the luminance of the image is set via the remaining two values R and B which will be set according to your changes while the luminance level is preserved 7 10 4 Lift Gamma Gain To the right of the Global items you can find the Lift Gamma and Gain items where you can adjust the individual color components in more detail This area provides the same sliders as the previously de scribed ones but for further accuracy they are split into the three con trast shades lift gamma and gain Lift Gain Hold B W x RGB RGB RGB 0 00 1 000 R 1 000 0 00 B 0 00 1 000 Figure 7 31 The detailed color settings Use the sliders the same way as described for the global color settings Then you can set the values for each color component of the brighter average and darker parts of an image separately for example by alter ing the brightest parts of the image highlights while preserving the av erage and darkest parts shadows Lift Adjusts the darker parts of the clip i e the lift or black point Values range from 100 to 100 Gamma Adjusts the average parts of the clip i e the gamma or mid tones Values range from 0 1 to 3 Gain Adjusts the brighter parts of the clip i e the gain or white point Values
369. nd administer the temporary data project i specific meaning for each project in a different temporary stor age location Further information about this can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 A part of the timeline that has to be prerendered before a play out will be displayed with a yellow line in the timeline scale Depending on the optional features and the hardware equip i ment available your DVS system may still be able to handle el ements that are marked to be prerendered in real time However if non real time capable material is played out frames will be dropped see section The Performance Moni tor on page 4 36 With operators that are not real time ca pable the system will simply not apply them In both cases the material has to be prerendered prior to a play out Whether the DVS software marks a timeline element to be pre rendered can to some degree be determined with a setting in the Configuration Tool More information about this can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide lt lt _ _ yellow line Pe Lae Se Ihave Figure 6 39 Timeline element marked for prerendering Additionally video clips that are subject to a prerendering will be marked in the timeline with colors yellow The clip has to be prerendered see figure above purple The clip is currently prerendere
370. ne Elements on page 6 42 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 5 Notes on Project Management To display material of a very high resolution or to enable a real time play out of some operators e g the secondary color correction the DVS system may create proxies as well as prerendered files Both ways to maintain a real time workflow are based on the same principle They use calculated extra files to either enable a play out prerendering or make your working environment more comfortable proxy generation For further information about proxies or prerendered data see Li section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 The location where these extra files are stored is saved project specific in the project file i e each project file can have a different directory for proxy data and the exact location will be stored in the project file Therefore it is suggested when working with proxies or prerendered material to store the project s data in a directory of its own DVS rec ommends when working with different projects to create for each project a project specific directory on your main storage where to save the project file Beneath it create a subdirectory for the additional data Vs lt project specific directory gt lt proxy data directory gt lt project file gt cp This structure guarantees a clear and easy to manage project You can set the storage location of such data for the currently loaded pro
371. ng from the conforming tool If the clips in the timeline are configured to show a virtual source timecode this timecode will be taken When exporting the time line and no source timecodes are provided by the clips their file numbers will be translated into timecode For further information about source timecode see section Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode on page 2 16 The Menus When selecting File number as TC the file numbers of the file names on the storage will be translated into timecode and set as the source in and outpoints of the exported data list When ex porting from the conforming tool the source in and outpoints specified in the EDL will be used With the destination timecode settings you can determine that the internal timecode count of the timeline when exporting the timeline or the des tination timecodes of the EDL when exporting from the conforming tool should be set as the source in and outpoints When exporting from the conforming tool you can also select between the destination values as they are currently set Current destination TC or as they are available in the original EDL Original desti nation TC see section The Tab Original EDL on page 8 40 Offset With this entry field you can define an offset for the source in outpoints selected via the Source TC setting Enter the respective offset that will be added to the in and outpoint values in timecod
372. ng this one Furthermore the conforming mode can also be used to verify the result of the conforming With the split screen function of the preview area you can easily compare the built up EDL in the timeline with a low res olution clip created from the offline edited EDL frame accurately For further information about this please refer to section Working with Split Screen on page 8 64 8 1 3 Important Notes This section provides some notes that should be observed prior to per forming a conforming Further information about source timecode and keycode can i be found in section Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode on page 2 16 For a conforming with source timecode or keycode dpx mov mxf as well as REDCODE and Broadcast Wave files are supported For further information about Spycer see the Spycer user guide If no matter what a conforming persistently fails for certain events they can be manually referenced to source material by relinking them see section Relinking Clips on page 6 55 However then no new bin clip will be created but the proper ties of this event will be changed General The most important concept for a successful conforming is that you should know your source for example whether the files to be con formed provide a timecode via their frame numbering whether the directories are named according to reels or the files headers pro vide source timecodes and o
373. nitor the trimming or to ad just it With the trim mode activated and the timeline cursor positioned at the desired cutting point between two clips perform the following e You can also change in and outpoints of clips with their re Li spective representations in the timeline directly see section Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 44 5 31 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 32 e Select the in or outpoint handlers in the scrub bars of the clips with the mouse and move them to the desired position for each clip i As long as the insert mode of the Edit Tool is active the subse quent clips and embedded operators will automatically adjust their positions on the timeline respectively When the Edit Tool is set to the overwrite mode gaps may occur in the timeline More information on this can be found in section In sert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline on page 6 31 You cannot change in and outpoints beyond the limits of the original material on the storage However if the duration of the clips is long you can adjust the handlers only roughly Then to set them more accurately you may use either the keyboard controls of the DVS software see section Keyboard Short cuts on page A 7 or the controls below the two scrub bars as de scribed in the following e If not already set accordingly select the appropriate out or inpoint via the OuT and IN button of the trim contro
374. not visible in the timeline area at the moment You can change the size of this part by zooming in or out of the timeline see section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 26 in light grey Parts in light grey show the part of the timeline that is currently visible in the timeline area You can change the size of this part by zooming in or out of the timeline Furthermore by moving within the timeline you can change its position see also section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 26 the mouse and moved along the scrub 2 bar to switch the view of the video and audio tracks in the timeline area to an other part of the timeline i This part can be selected directly with S CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Items of Scrub Bar Description The blue line indicates the part of the timeline selected via the timeline s in and outpoint For information on how to set the in and outpoint of the timeline see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 29 en mei With the scrub bar cursor you can move within your project Simply select the cursor with the mouse and move it along the scrub bar to the desired position You can also click on a posi tion outside the visible timeline area on the scrub bar directly to move the cursor and the visible part of the timeline there immediately Additionally with a mouse click directly below or above t
375. nsions can be assembled or edited using the items described below Additionally the drop down list of this com bo box provides some predefined exten sions The last ten assembled and confirmed name extensions can be found here as well They will be available for the duration of the project and saved together with the project file 6 88 The Timeline Extension will be Select from this combo box the variable or separator that should be transferred to the upper combo box The variables will be re placed during the operation with the respec tive data If none is available Unknown will be output The variable Customized can be used for user defined strings With Customized se lected the user defined string can be entered in this combo box and then transferred to the upper one with the button ADD ADD Use this button to transfer the selected ex tension to the upper combo box It will be inserted at the current cursor position REMOVE By double clicking marking variables or separators in the upper combo box they can be deleted with this button To delete exten sions even without marking you may also use the respective keys on your keyboard i e Backspace and Del MoDIFY This button will be available when a user de fined string variable Customized is dou ble clicked marked in the upper combo box Then you can edit the text of this string in the field Extension
376. nsition automatically This means that parts of the clips will be moved for the transi tion Due to the moving of the clips the creation of a transition in the overwrite mode may cause gaps in the timeline More in formation about the overwrite mode can be found in section Overwrite Mode on page 6 32 e Select the button TRANS A transition appears between the two clips by default set to a Cross fade wipe 6 41 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs lt a transition Staples_Ufo_Nigk Hollywood Figure 6 38 Transition between clips The exact position of the transition depends on the available head and tail If head and tail are sufficiently available for both clips the transition will be positioned exactly in the middle of the timeline cursor The transition is now added to the timeline and you can proceed for instance by calling up its properties and altering them to adjust the transition to your needs How to do this and the individual items avail able to change a transition are described in chapter Timeline Element Properties on page 7 1 You can delete a transition the same way you delete a clip from i the timeline Simply select its visual representation in the time line and press the key Del on your keyboard or select from its context menu the menu option Delete Depending on the resolution of the material and the type of operators used in the timeline it may be necessary to prerender the
377. ntents of the bin clip between the set out and inpoint will be displayed in its overlay on the left as well as at the video output of the DVS system Once activat ed the button changes its appearance to its active state To stop the reverse play out you have to click it again The Control Area Lock With this button you can play out the bin clip in real time When a play out is initiated the con tents of the bin clip between the set in and out point will be displayed in its overlay on the left as well as at the video output of the DVS system If the bin clip is an audio clip the contents of the au dio clip will be played out at channel 1 and 2 of the system s digital audio outputs If these are routed to the analog outputs you can hear the clip at these outputs as well see section Configuring the Video and Audio Output on page 6 12 After ac tivation the button changes its appearance to its active state MM and you have to press it again to stop the play out To view the bin clip video on an addition i ally connected monitor you have to con figure the output format video raster of the timeline accordingly see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 12 With the activation of a play of the bin A clip a play of the timeline will be termi nated These buttons move the scrub bar cursor to the next marked point on the scrub bar of the clip coming from the bin Marke
378. o ensure it provides the correct length in the timeline in and outpoint remain constant while the speed is changed z7 Clips can be set back to a speed of one 1 easily by setting the i speed factor back to one 1 However depending on the time stretching factor s used rounding errors may occur meaning for frame accurate length you may have to trim the outpoint of the clip 6 4 14 Relinking Clips Clips of either video or audio can be relinked in the timeline i e they can be referenced to other source material manually from the timeline directly To do this perform the following e Select the clip whose source material should be changed in the timeline e Then select from the context menu of this clip the menu option Relink clip see section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 57 and section The Context Menu of Audio Clips on page 6 71 This will open the standard dialog window of the DVS software for the selection of a file e Select the new source in this dialog window Once confirmed with the button OPEN the clip selected as the new source will be referenced to the clip s representation in the timeline and a new bin clip will be added to the root folder of the bin Afterwards in case of a video clip you will see the new video material in the video overlay once the timeline cursor is positioned on this clip Any heads and tails configured for the clip will be available with the new source m
379. o prerendered proxies will be stored in the project file and when opening the project later again it will not be necessary to render them anew When working with prerendered data you may get proxies on the stor age that are no longer required for your current project but occupying disk space This will happen for example as soon as a timeline element was prerendered and afterwards deleted or changed Even a switching of the video format will make the already prerendered data obsolete due to the fact that the extra images may no longer coincide with the newly selected format Because the software can never be sure when proxies are truly obsolete for a project they will remain on the storage of your system Nevertheless to delete prerendered data you can use the menu option Delete prerendering on the context menu of a video clip see section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 57 easily it is recommended to store them project specific for each project separately For further information about this please re fer to section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 i To recognize the prerendered data belonging to one project s Related to a prerendering of timeline elements are the Preren der all menu option on the menu Project see section Prer ender all on page 9 15 and the section Real time Capability of Clips on page 4 13 section Jobs on page 4 33 and sec tion Prerendering of Timeli
380. o scope see section Scene Detection on page 6 65 Vectorscope 100 The vectorscope 100 is most suited when playing out in YUV It dis plays the chroma information of an output image without its luma in formation i e the color components U and V without Y Figure 5 6 The vectorscope 100 This scope shows a circular graph where the center represents no chro ma color saturation zero All white black and grey parts of the output image are located at the center of the graph The more the color values of an image increase the farther away the graph s dots will be dis persed from the center Regarding color the abbreviations R G and B of the video scope indicate the usual primary colors red green and blue while Mg stands for magenta Cy for cyan and YI for yellow secondary colors The color distribution in a vectorscope is the same as in a color i wheel as for example in the secondary color correction see S section The Operator 2nd Color Correction on page 7 38 Vectorscope 75 The vectorscope 75 is the same as the vectorscope 100 see sec tion Vectorscope 100 on page 5 5 However to provide safe col 5 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs ors for example for a legal broadcast signal this video scope already indicates the safety area of the colors The dotted line represents the full color values 100 whereas the squares show the colors with 75 of their valu
381. of Clips on page 4 21 3 2 2 Adding Clips to the Timeline For the editing process the Edit Tool uses a timeline with several video and audio tracks where you can add the clips in the desired sequence as they should be played out in the end You can then for instance de fine wipes dissolves or cuts for the material There is no need to worry about your original material being in different resolutions bit depths 3 6 Getting Started timeline video track audio tracks color spaces or file formats The DVS system works format indepen dent and is capable of handling material up to 4K To view your project on an additionally connected monitor you have to configure the output format of the timeline according ly The setting of the output format video raster of the project can be configured with the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the timeline area To begin an editing work you have to drag the clips to the timeline of the Edit Tool first During all works with the DVS software your original material i will never be altered The clips in the software are only repre sentations of the original material on the storage All editing tasks are performed virtually e Select a clip clip A in the contents area of the bin and drag and drop it to the beginning of the video track Perform Slave Figure 3 4 Drag and drop of clip to timeline Once the mouse button is released a representation of
382. of the Edit Tool as usual to move in or play out the timeline see section Moving within the Timeline on page 6 26 The cursor of the graph will be moved accordingly You can set an in and outpoint for the timeline see section Set ting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 29 for example to confine a play out to the clip currently under process ing or to zoom further into the graph see section Viewing the Graph on page 7 23 When moving the graph s timeline cursor with the mouse its exact po sition is displayed to the left of the cursor Figure 7 20 Exact positioning 1 Additionally you can move the timeline cursor with the menu option Set Marker Position of the graph s context menu see figure 7 18 on page 7 25 It will open a small window in the graph where the position of the timeline cursor can be entered Marker 00 00 09 15 05 12 Ok Figure 7 21 Exact positioning 2 The range of possible values that can be entered is indicated in the win dow in square brackets Once a correct position is entered the marker can be positioned there exactly either by using the OK button of the window or by pressing Enter Furthermore there are some buttons available at the bottom of the keyframe editor that allow you to move the graph s cursor my You can jump to particular points in the graph with these buttons e g to keyframes and the begin ning end of a clip The first button
383. of the combo box directly You can enter the aspect ratio in any format you like either by typing in a floating point number or its original division formula The cropping will be applied to the video output representation the video overlay as well as to the vid eo output directly as soon as a predefined aspect ratio is selected or a typed in value is confirmed by pressing the Enter key Notation Floating point or division x y Examples 1 77777778 16 9 With the Hold aspect ratio check box you can lock the aspect ratio selected with the combo box above Then when changes are applied manually to the cropping e g via the entry fields or the sliders the chosen aspect ratio will be maintained In the middle of the window you can find a representation of your cur rent video output With the items provided by and positioned around the image you can change the cropping manually Figure 6 23 Manual controls of cropping 6 23 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 24 To change the cropping manually use for example the entry fields and type in the desired values in pixels The cropping will be applied to the representation as well as to your video output as soon as a value is con firmed by pressing the Enter key You may also use the sliders at the bottom and to the left to change the cropping Furthermore you can select the cropping borders as well as the cropped image to adjust the cropping manually The sliders a
384. of the currently selected color vector with this button In this view you can discern immediately the parts of the image that will be affected Black areas will not be affect ed while all parts shown in white will undergo a color correction Further information about the preview win dow can be found in section The Preview Window on page 7 47 a P When the preview window is displayed on the screen you can use this button It will switch the view of the preview window and show you the original image se lected by the timeline cursor together with an alpha mask of the selected color vector The colors that are cur rently selected by the color vector will be shown in grey Further information about the preview window can be found in section The Preview Window on page 7 47 The Preview Window The preview window and the pipette of the secondary color correction are the easiest way to select a color vector This window will show you the image of the frame currently selected by the timeline cursor It can be displayed on the screen with the button PIPETTE of the color mask controls see section Color Mask Controls on page 7 46 Then the button a P will be switched on automatically as well enabling you to 7 47 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs see the selected color vector more clearly because it will be shown in grey As soon as the preview window is visible the pipette is automatically active With it you ca
385. of the respective clip is provided by each thumbnail The Tool Area File format TIFF File path Framerate Duration Name Neuschwanstein_ File format TIFF A Resolution 1920 x 1080 pixel File path V section31 clips Color depth 8 bits File name Neuschwanstein_ 05d tif Colormode RGB 4 4 4 Frame size 6 2 MB _ Aspect ratio 1 77777778 16 9 Datarate 186 5 MB s Framerate 29 97p Duration ted Name Riesenrad File format File path Duration File format File path File name RGB 4 4 4 o1 Framerate 2 Duration Figure 4 12 Clips in the contents area of the bin In this section you can read what to do to administer clips For some of these tasks the context menu of the clips in the contents area is used It provides different clip related functions such as the add ing of a new clip to the contents area of the bin or altering its properties Name Resolution Add Clip lect all Cut Copy Paste Create proxy Properties Figure 4 13 Context menu of a clip in the bin 4 17 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs If the contents area is empty of clips and you call up the con i text menu not all menu options are displayed How to add clips to the contents area of the bin is in detail de scribed in section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 6 How to work with proxies in the bin is described in section Us ing Proxies on page 4 22 Selecting Clips Clips can be selected or
386. oll wheel of your mouse to step up or down the value In most of the above mentioned cases you can in or decrease the step ping value that will be used for the adjustments by pressing the Ctrl key to increase or the Shift key to decrease the stepping value Fur thermore with a double click of the mouse on a slider field you can on most sliders reset its setting to its default value 7 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 4 Closing the Timeline Element Properties 7 6 The timeline element properties can be closed the same way they are called After this the view of the audio tracks will be restored To close the timeline properties area perform the following e With the timeline elements properties area visible below the time line area call up the context menu of a timeline element present in the video track of the timeline area e Then select the menu option Show properties Alternatively you can double click a timeline element in the timeline directly to close the properties This will close the properties area and afterwards the audio tracks will be visible again in the user interface of the Edit Tool PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 5 Properties of a Transition As soon as a transition is selected in the timeline its properties are dis played in the timeline element properties area right below the timeline area If the properties area is not visible in the Edit Tool you have to displa
387. om Cine Raw 1st Color Correction which applies the color cine correction as specified in the file header of Phantom Cine Raw data See section The Op erator 1st Color Correction on page 7 31 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 2 7 Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode Some file formats for clips e g dpx files are capable of storing more information than just their image content These information are usu ally written in a specified format into the file headers which can be read and interpreted by different software applications that support these kind of information Among the information stored you can find for example the name of the creator usually the program that created the files the creation time and date the timecode and or the keycode Most of the data stored in file headers and transmitted to the DVS soft ware during a capturing will only be recorded and given back again during a play out if appropriate However DVS especially makes use of the timecode and keycode information The DVS software supports additional information such as i source timecode in the dpx mov mxf as well as RED CODE and Broadcast Wave file formats However some fea tures e g multiple timecodes or the editing of header data are available for dpx and REDCODE files only With the help of Spycer the header data such as timecode or keycode information can be adjusted to yo
388. om the combo boxes to the left Sma11 Medium Large or enter the pixel height manually in the adjoining entry fields Individual track sizes can also be configured for each track in i the timeline area manually see section Changing Track Sizes Manually on page 6 7 Additionally you can find here to the right entry fields where you can set the amount of audio and video tracks that will be visible in the time line area Working with several video tracks vertically in the timeline is i different from the usual approach of a horizontal editing in a timeline Then the different tracks of the timeline form a stack Further information about this and how to work with vertical editing can be found in section Vertical Editing of Video Clips in the Timeline on page 6 63 Further information about the Timeline output settings window can be found in section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 12 Changing Track Sizes Manually The track sizes can also be manually set in the timeline area Setting the tracks to individual sizes may be useful in case you want to focus on im 6 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs portant tracks or display an audio track with an audio waveform more clearly see section Waveform Display on page 6 75 The video and audio tracks can be adjusted to an individual height For this you have to move the bottom line of a track separation line in the are
389. om the list you can click on the stack of keyframing lines in the graph and create a keyframe for this particular setting even if others are visible on top of it However this works only as long as there is no other keyframe available at this location In case you accidentally se lected another stack of lines the keyframe will be created instead on the keyframing line first available from the top of the parameters list You can see the selected keyframing line and whether oth ers are on top of it more clearly with the check box Colors deactivated Then the keyframing lines are displayed without color cod ing except for the currently selected line which will be highlighted in blue as long as no other lines are on top of it The check boxes in front of the settings in the parameters list allow you to display or hide keyframing lines in the graph If the check box in front of a setting is activated its keyframing line is displayed if deactivated itis hidden With this you can display only those keyframing lines in the graph where a keyframing should be performed Additionally the settings entries of the Parameters list provide the fol lowing context menu Timeline Element Properties Parameters x x x x x Linear Natural Spline Reset parameter 2Zo A 40 Zoom 7 Pan X Linear __ Natural Spline Rote Reset parameter Figure 7 16 Context menu of parameters list These settings determine the curv
390. on page 6 18 6 27 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Video Cropping el aL e _ cropping options Video 3D LUT fai 3D LUT Audio Scrubbing x Monitoring Figure 6 20 Items to crop the timeline With these items you can adjust and crop the output image for exam ple to add black bars to your video output A click on the button CRoP PING opens the following settings window Timeline cropping Output Aspect ratio Figure 6 21 Window to crop the video output During configuring the cropping will appear in the video over lay and at the video output of the DVS system However this is temporary and for monitoring reasons only To apply the set tings to the timeline the cropping has to be activated with the check box Video Cropping in the Options area of the Time line output settings window see below At the top of the Timeline cropping window you can find items to control the aspect ratio of the cropped image 6 22 PVs The Timeline Output 1 32 1 7 Film 2048 x 1556 Aspect ratio 2048 1556 _ Hold aspect ratio Figure 6 22 Aspect ratio controls The Output information at the top provides you with details about the currently set video format and its aspect ratio Directly below it you can find the Aspect ratio combo box where you can either select one of the predefined aspect ratios from the provided list or simply enter the desired ratio in the field
391. only you have to set an in and outpoint for the time line How to do this is described in section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 29 Once they are set you can initiate a play out of the defined range with the play button of the controls see section Controls on page 5 15 In addition to the controls of the user interface there are a lot of key board shortcuts available These complement the controls some of them even do not have a control element in the user interface and you can use them for a faster working with the software A list of all key board shortcuts can be found in section Keyboard Shortcuts on page A 7 6 3 2 Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline With the button to the left of the button DELETE displaying IN OUT you can set an in and outpoint for the timeline A play out or finalizing if set accordingly will then be performed in the defined range between in and outpoint only The way the timeline is played out can be configured with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information The way a finalizing is performed can be configured during the setup of the finalizing process see sec tion Finalizing the Timeline on page 6 76 E When this button is labeled IN OUT you can set the timeline s in and outpoint The DELETE button is a toggle button If it is ac tivated EEES you can delete the in and or outpoint
392. ons user guide for more information If not set correctly a conforming will always fail To be successful the frame rate detailed in the header data should match the frame rate of the EDL DVS stores in the headers of dpx image files at a location for user defined data the reel tape names To avoid conflicts due to identical source timecodes keycodes this information can be used for a conforming to distinguish between different reels However files created by other systems may not provide reel names in their headers Then a search for reel names should be either deactivated or limited to the folder or file names Via Spycer you can take a look at the header data provided by the files to determine for example that the appropriate source time codes keycodes frame rate or reel names are available If required the header data can be adjusted Conforming with the SpycerNet In case you want to conform with Spycer and the SpycerNet see to it that the Spycer application on your system as well as on all partic ipating systems is configured appropriately e g local content man agement enabled On the remote systems in the SpycerNet the permissions Browse and Search as well as Read Essence should be set at least Without reading permissions multi clips will not be recognized correctly Make sure that file headers are fully scanned Configuration Tool group Spycer Scan Filter by each Spycer involved in the con forming proc
393. ontrol the black low Toe mid Center high Knee and white point You can either set the control points in the curve directly with the mouse or adapt their positions with the items to the right Black point 4h 4h 4h 4m 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4 Figure 7 55 The curve settings items The items to the right determine the positions of the control points by setting their location on the x and y axis of the curve Their values range from O left down to 100 right up For further information about the individual settings please re fer to the original documentation of the RED camera 7 61 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 7 62 The Conforming Tool With the conforming tool of the Edit Tool you can conform for exam ple offline composed projects This chapter explains how to conform data lists e g EDLs or cut lists with the Edit Tool First an introduction to conforming and the con forming tool in general is provided as well as some notes about what to observe prior to a conforming process After this follows a description of how to perform a conforming with the Edit Tool the first steps However if the described conforming procedure fails you may use the timeline features of the conforming tool or the conforming mode of the control area to adapt the conforming These two features of the con forming tool will be described next in this chapter 8 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool Use
394. ool User Guide PVs 5 24 Items Description __ J The in and outpoint handlers together with the blue line show you the selected part of the clip To position them you can select and move the in and outpoint handlers with the mouse They can also be set via the in and outpoint position items Once the final length of the clip to be in i serted is set you can move the selected gt part of the scrub bar indicated by the blue line with the mouse to position it The counter displays either the length of the clip in timecode format or the amount of frames that the bin clip will provide when dragged to the timeline This is calculated from the set in and outpoint handlers Scrub bar in dark Parts of the scrub bar in a dark grey show the grey parts of the clip that were deselected via the set in and outpoint If you click on such a part the scrub bar cursor will be positioned there instant ly Scrub bar in light Parts of the scrub bar displayed in light grey in grey dicate the part of the clip that is selected via the set in and outpoint If you click above or below such a part the scrub bar cursor will be posi tioned there instantly To set the in and outpoint perform the following If your bin clip was already set to a preliminary inpoint you will i see the selected inpoint in this mode Then you can adjust it more accurately e If necessary pull the s
395. ops occur during a record operation with the DVS system one or more hard disks of the storage array may be damaged In this case replace the defective disk s as described in the The Control Area To the right of the tool area you can find the control area of the Edit Tool This area is used to pre and review your current project and set frame accurately the in and outpoint of clips either coming from the bin or already present in the timeline After starting the program the control area of the Edit Tool is in its edit mode video fi overlay scrub bar e controls e Mle Figure 5 1 The control area With the control area in the edit mode you can see at its top the video overlay which is used to view the video material Below the video over lay ascrub bar of the timeline is available At the bottom of the control area the controls to play out and move within your current project are located Here you can also find the buttons to switch between the dif ferent modes of the control area as well as other important buttons All items of the control area are described in detail in the following sec tions 5 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 1 Maximizing the Control Area By performing a double click with the mouse on the upper part of con trol area video overlay you can maximize the control area With this all other areas of the user interface will be hidden instantaneously and y
396. or timeline element transition The calculation and rendering of timeline ele ments prior to a play out because they exceed the real time capability of the DVS system User defined settings of an effects operator They are available as subeffects under the re spective effects operator in the tool area With them you can apply the same settings of an ef fect over and over again in the timeline A proxy is a downscaled clip of high resolution data that will be internally used by the Edit Tool as a substitute for its original material to ensure a real time environment By activating or deac tivating proxies you decide whether the real time capable material is used or the high resolu tion data In the DVS software reels are used to distinguish between different sources of video material Each specified reel can point to one location such as different tapes from a VTR or another externally connected player device Interface for serial data communication See also 9 pin protocol and Odetics protocol A representation of a timeline in software It provides a slider or cursor that you can use to move through the data of the material To shuttle or perform a search run Timecode information stored in the header of a file e g in dpx image files You can use the source timecodes for example in the timeline of the Edit Tool instead of the internal relative timecode provided by the timeline If a clip does not contain s
397. or Correction s s 7 38 7411 2 The Col r Vector List ci xe cas ccsciecee cei earn nrnna 7 41 7 11 3 The Color Mask Area ce 7 42 7 11 4 The Color Correction and Balance Area secc 7 48 7 12 Pict re Lec ene ee rte rene E 7 51 712 1 The Shapes VISE xsd acer cxcaacecrist tee itina 7 51 7 12 2 Setting Shapes ooh tress sstarence are ceseeo essences eee 7 52 7 12 3 Adjusting the Shapes sseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 54 7 13 The Operator 6 Vector CC saicccsessd 4 5 23 8 caleden togiardescecausses 7 55 7 14 The Operator ARRIRAW CC sscssascccsaceesscieheadedcteneceeeiiate 7 57 7 15 The Operator Delnterlace xcs soe csctes aioe cesacteadcecssbeeieiesseces 7 58 7 16 The Operator R3D Decode s es 7 60 The Conforming Tool 0 0 cc cece eseeeeeeeeeeteeteteeeeeeeeees 8 1 8 1 Introduction to Conforming with the Edit Tool 8 2 8 1 1 Conforming in General ss2 cccccscecsiececcscatecectesveceusseevectess 8 2 8 1 2 The Conforming Tool and its Mode n se 8 2 8 1 3 Important NOLES sisceisiciieiieiscrisdisornana eea 8 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide 9 vi 8 2 First Steps to Make a Conforming esee 8 6 8 2 1 Importing and Adding EDLS cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeee etter eee 8 6 8 2 2 Building p a Timeline i2c2ctutoants2cacces ies tgutaantioreieesia ant 8 10 8 23 CONTONMINE sevar eee ee Oy On epee ee reer nee 8 14 8 2 4 Evaluation and Further Processing of the Conforming 8 20 8 3 Working with ED
398. or different settings With the menu option Save configuration defaults you can save the current default and system settings to an extra file Thus you can build up a library of dif ferent configuration settings and use them in the future again for dif ferent purposes without configuring the whole system anew The selection of the menu option Save configuration defaults opens the standard dialog window to save a file where you have to specify the path and file name for the configuration file to be saved File extension cf Configuration file Once the current default and system settings are saved you can load them into the DVS software again whenever you want see section Load configuration defaults on page 9 25 7n Further information about the Configuration Tool and its set i tings can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 9 5 6 Load global settings With the menu option Load global settings you can load global settings previously saved to a file see section Save global settings 9 25 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs on page 9 26 The selection of this menu option opens the standard dialog window for a file selection where you have to select the file that contains the desired settings File extension cos Global settings file After loading the new settings will be applied immediately and the ap pearance of the DVS software as well as its current configura
399. or is ready to assess the performance workload 4 45 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 46 Measuring the Performance Once the performance monitor and the software are prepared as de scribed in section Preparing the Software and the Performance Mon itor on page 4 44 you can begin the assessment of the workload e Start the play out operation of the material added to the timeline with the play button available in the control area of the Edit Tool see section Controls on page 5 15 This will start the play out of the video material added to the timeline and as soon as the play out starts the performance monitor will start its monitoring of the performance as well Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform Update CT a DYSInfo Reset Switched view to Show overall file IO WORKLOAD Date Time Type Timeline TC Frame AC MarnkAll Clear Figure 4 27 Healthy performance Because the DVS system is capable of handling even high resolution material in real time you usually will not encounter any problem The performance bars will always appear in blue and no drops should occur The DVS software is able to process several different image files simul taneously multi threaded I O mode and one bar shown in the chart may represent several file accesses Thus the bars may well reach the 100 line during an operation which does not pose a problem to the real time operation It simply shows that all threads of the
400. or serial data communication The RS 422 RS 422 9 pin protocol is widely used for a com munication between a range of equipment such as VTRs digital disk recorders mixers edit controllers etc See also RS 422 and Odetics protocol DVS supports this protocol in master and slave mode A mode Sorting of material according to a final edited timeline non linear editing With this a data list would be sorted by destination in and out points for example See also C mode ALE Avid Log Exchange A list which describes a timeline with clips For further details about it and its format see the documentation of Avid Technologies See also data list audio clip A file of the Windows file system that contains audio data autoconforming The initial and automatic conforming of a data list See conforming CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 2 bin bin clip C mode clip conforming container format cut list cutting edit point data list drop dropped frames audio EDL effect Library and clip management tool of the DVS software Either a clip present in the bin or dragged to the control area of the DVS software With the latter and when in the Edit Tool the software switches to the source edit mode and the bin clip will be available in the left of the two video overlays Sorting of material according to a source linear editing e g when capturing from a tape With this a data list would
401. ors via the pipette directly or with the bars slid ers and entry fields to the right of the color wheel Additionally the col or mask in the color wheel can be selected with the mouse and moved to another position in the color wheel This way not only the hue of the color mask can be adjusted but its saturation as well The Bars and Entry Fields With the bars and entry fields you can change the color vector shown in the color wheel and visible in the alpha mask of the preview window Lum Color hlin Hue hlin 306 00 Figure 7 40 Bars left and entry fields right The bars show you the exact values of the color vector displayed in the color wheel Each bar provides either a trapezoid or a rectangle yellow lines in the following called selection shapes that mark the respective hue saturation or luminance currently selected The settings of the se lection shapes corner points can be seen in the entry fields to the right The left two corner points of the selection shapes select the vector while the right two corner points of each mark the softness of the set Timeline Element Properties ting Therefore in case the shape is no trapezoid but a rectangle no softness is selected for the respective value 7n The settings of the left two bars are displayed in the color i wheel to the left The luminance setting is not shown in the col or wheel s You can change the areas bordered by the selection shap
402. orted by the DVS soft ware Index This chapter facilitates the search for specific terms 1 2 Target Group 1 4 To use this user guide and the Edit Tool correctly you should have ex perience in PC handling and be familiar with the hardware handling of a video system If you want to use the software to its full potential you should also have extensive knowledge in the field of digital video Furthermore to use the DVS system in connection with other equip ment e g a VTR you should know how to handle this equipment PVs Introduction 1 3 Conventions Used in this User Guide The following typographical conventions will be used in this documen tation e Texts preceded by this symbol describe activities that you must per form in the order indicated Texts preceded by this symbol are parts of a list Texts preceded by this symbol are general notes intended to fa li cilitate work and help avoid errors You must pay particular attention to text that follows this symbol to avoid errors Texts enclosed by quotation marks are references to other man uals guides chapters or sections Window Text in bold with single quotation marks indi cates a window name BUTTON Text in small caps and bold indicates push but tons Group Menu Text in italic and bold indicates either a group name menu name or options in a menu list Menu Option In the specified group or menu select the stated item
403. other application for further pro cessing you can select the menu option Match frame Further information about this feature can be found in section Matching an Individual Vid eo Frame on page 6 60 This menu option deletes the respective clip where the context menu was invoked from the timeline Alternatively you can select the clip and press the Del key on your keyboard Attach Disconnect element Disconnect group Disconnect timeline These menu options enable you to work with at tached clips Sometimes during your editing work you may want to group audio and video clips for example if they are already perfectly aligned and in synchronization For this the timeline provides the possibility to attach audio to video clips Fur ther information about how to work with at tached clips and how to use these menu options can be found in section Attaching Audio Clips to Video Clips on page 6 51 6 57 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Dvs 6 58 Enable tooltip Clips added to the timeline provide various infor mation via tooltips With this menu option you can activate or deactivate the display of the tool tips when the mouse cursor is placed over a clip in the timeline area If it is activated the menu op tion will show a cross in front Additional informa tion about tooltips can be found in section Configuring the Tooltips of Clips on page 6 10 Time stretching
404. ou can see the video overlay enlarged The previous layout of the user interface can be restored by performing the same procedure again 5 2 The Video Overlay With the video overlay you can view the material present in the time line All clips and added operators to the timeline as long as they do not require prerendering can be viewed in real time While working the video overlay will always adjust to your moves on the timeline This provides a total control for your work and you can immediately monitor your progress The video overlay will adapt its layout aspect ratio to the currently set video output raster of the timeline Due to the fact that the output ras ter may have an effect on the video material of the timeline you can use the video overlay to see its output effect immediately For example clips of different sizes in the video track s of the timeline may get cropped stretched or compressed or scaled according to your settings for the respective clips and your output settings All these effects can be viewed instantaneously via the video overlay Further information about how to set the video output raster can be found in section Con figuring the Video and Audio Output on page 6 12 This section describes the possibilities of the video overlay in detail 5 2 1 Configuring the Video Overlay 5 2 The video overlay can be configured to your liking You can adjust the safety areas as well as the size of the o
405. ource timecode information it can be virtually provided with one Material at the end of a clip that is available but neither used nor visible in a timeline of the DVS software due to an outpoint adjustment trim ming See also head Position indicator of the timeline Video and audio clips or operators that are visi ble in the tracks of the timeline A transition effect between two video clips CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 6 vertical editing video clip VTR VTR timeline To add timeline elements to other video tracks in the timeline than the first one When different timeline elements occupy the same space at the same time in the timeline the contents of a play out can be easily changed at that particular position Usually a folder directory of the file system that contains frames image files Video tape recorder A device to record image and sound data magnetically on tapes Timeline of the VTR task mode that provides a length of 24 hours Video and audio material can be stored anywhere on the timeline See the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide PVs Appendix A 2 Keyboard Shortcuts For a more easy and a faster control of the Edit Tool there are various keyboard shortcuts available which are listed in the table below Action Shortcut Play speed 1 Space 5 Stop speed 0 Space K Shift K Start play out from inpoint 6 In
406. oving objects The effects of the line interpolation method are almost identical to the ones of the line duplica tion Every second line in the image is dropped and replaced by an interpolation of neighboring lines Thus slow moving objects in your clip will most likely be rendered with a good result be cause differences between two lines are calcu lated and averaged out Timeline Element Properties Motion_Adaptive This mode will yield good results when your clip contains moving objects because motion in the clip s images is detected automatically A line in terpolation will be applied only when interlacing effects are found This mode provides best qual ity and does not lose general resolution as only in fast moving parts an interpolation is applied The items of the Even Odd area are used to determine the starting field for the calculated Even Odd With the sliders below Delnterlace threshold Motion threshold result The even numbered lines starting with line 0 are used as the starting field for the application of a deinterlacing All odd numbered lines re main unaltered The odd numbered lines starting with line 1 are used as the starting field for the application of a deinterlacing All even numbered lines re main unaltered the previous settings can be refined This slider sets the deinterlacing threshold for the selected modes It is used to detect whether interlacing is present in t
407. p no 1 moves to the end of clip no 2 02 00 04 00 06 00 08 00 10 00 12 00 14 00 16 00 Le amei er P OR ORE The gist of the insert mode is that the contents of the timeline will be preserved at all times and that no clips will be deleted Furthermore during your editing work the clips will always stay in connection with previous or following clips so that no gaps will occur in the timeline Overwrite Mode In the overwrite mode a moved or added clip replaces the vid Jy eo material behind the insertion point Dvs The Timeline In the overwrite mode you can set a transition between two neighbor ing clips at all times If needed the Edit Tool will create the necessary head and tail automatically This means that parts of the clips may be moved to enable the transition which in turn may cause gaps in the timeline For more information about transitions see section Setting Transitions on page 6 41 Example With the overwrite mode activated add a clip from the bin to the time line or move a clip to the middle of an intact clip 04 00 06 00 08 00 10 00 a ieam ia te mat a a a aas ia M 14 00 16 00 L m itam ee imme ee lani La iaaea m L insertion point The result will be that clip no 1 gets divided at the insertion point The added clip no 2 will be placed here while the rest of clip no 1 is over written Whe
408. path including all subdirectories The setting SpycerNet utilizes the SpycerNet to search for clips Its main advantage is that you can include remote systems in your search but it may also be helpful during local searches especially when large amounts of data should be searched through faster search Once this setting is selected the button to the right of the combo box Source type will be available E With it you can select hosts and directories in the SpycerNet that should be searched for the clips including all subdirectories With the setting VTR TL you can select a VTR timeline project for the conforming see the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide i e the clips on the 24 hours timeline of the selected VTR project Video path and Audio path will be used Video path Available for Disk Online and VTR TL De termines where to search for video clips Either enter a directory path directly or use the button to the right i to select the location Several locations can be specified by separating them with an asterisk e g E dir_1 F dir_2 With VTR TL selected this entry must point to a VTR timeline project file cp the same that is set for audio Audio path Same as Video path but determines where to search for audio clips The Conforming Tool Source searching mode Sets the mode that should be used for the search You can select between different search modes St
409. pecific for each project sep arately For further information about this please refer to section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 You can set the storage location of such files for each project differently via the Configuration Tool on the tab Project group Project field Path for proxy data see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 2 4 1 Working with Proxies A proxy is a downscaled clip of a higher resolution greater than 2K Usually proxies will be used as a substitute when working with high resolution film material such as 4K or higher Then the original data will be downconverted to a 2K format that can be handled by the DVS soft ware and system in real time without any problem In this workflow you will add the high resolution clips as usual to the bin But prior to using them in the timeline you will create proxies of them The downconverted images of the proxy will be stored in a re served location for temporary data on the main storage The stored proxies carry project specific file names that are generated and administered by the Edit Tool automatically for the currently loaded project The links to the proxies will be stored in the project file and when reopening the project again you will not have to create them again When working with proxies a lot of image files may be gener ated amounting to a large proportion of disk space CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Once a proxy has be
410. point of the clip moves to the right when time com pressed the clip will be shortened outpoint moves to the left If the check box is deactivated the length of the timeline element in the time line will be preserved meaning when time stretched the outpoint of the clip will be trimmed back and when time compressed the possible alteration depends on the available tail of this clip without tail a time compression will not be possible The configured time stretching or time compression will be in effect for the clip in the timeline as soon as it is confirmed with the OK button The button CANCEL closes the window without altering the settings Time stretching or time compression can also be performed directly in the timeline This may be helpful when adjusting clips to a specific length in the timeline for example to fit inbetween two other clips For this the Time stretching mode menu option on the context menu of The Timeline a clip has to be activated check box in front of menu option activated Then all alterations to the clip s in or outpoint in the timeline see sec tion Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements on page 6 44 will be a time stretching or time compression and the values in the time stretching or time compression window will be altered au tomatically With this the clip and its in and outpoint can be easily aligned to other elements in the timeline via the snapping mode of the Edit Tool t
411. pre view area This will resolve the status Multiple found of the event and it will be linked to the selected material 8 68 The Menus At the top of the Edit Tool software module you can see a menu bar menu bar e ZIE F 2 2 110 Bit Figure 9 1 Menu bar of DVS software This menu bar provides access to functions and tasks of an administra tive nature for the Edit Tool Here you can find for example import and export functions as well as several menu options generally concerned with projects and project files This chapter describes the menu bar of the user interface All menus and menu options will be explained 9 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 9 1 The Menu of the Program Icon The program icon on the menu bar of the user interface provides menu options to control the user interface of the DVS software in general Here you can find the following menu options Figure 9 2 The menu of the program icon They are described in the following sections 9 1 1 Minimize To reduce the DVS software to a button on the taskbar of the Windows operating system click the Minimize menu option on the menu of the program icon You can then for instance access other programs that are installed on your system 9 1 2 Exit The menu option Exit ends the current Edit Tool session There is no way to end the Edit Tool alone When you exit the Edit Tool the whole DVS software will shut down
412. process for the connected storage that defragments previously copied or recorded data on the hard disk array so that they are more suited for real time operations The automatic defragmentation process is supplemented by i the defragmenter included in Spycer which can be used for ex ample for a selective defragmentation of single clips Further information about this can be found in the Spycer user guide Starting the Process The automatic defragmentation process is automatically started to gether with the DVS software It is then running in the background of the system and will operate during stand still times The automatic starting of the defragmentation tool of the DVS i software can be enabled or disabled via the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more informa tion An automatic defragmentation will not be performed if real time tasks play out or record are running on your system or when the slave mode VTR task mode is activated The process can also be started manually at any time when the DVS software is not running see section Starting the Process Manually on page A 24 Exiting the Process Because the defragmentation process is automatically started together with the DVS software it will be exited with it as well As soon as the user interface of the DVS software is closed the process will be halted and shut down as well Operation
413. propriate to alter them for a complete reel see section The Tab EDL Reels on page 8 37 Changes to events can only be performed as long as they are unconformed status Offline The Conforming Tool Column Description Event A unique number for each event given in the order as processed from the original EDL file Clip name Details the name of the clip as it was deter mined during the import of the EDL It can be altered freely Status Indicates the current timeline status of the clip Online RT Online NRT Is transferring Multiple found Offline The clip is conformed and linked to data on a real time capable storage The clip is conformed and linked to data on a non real time capable storage e g on a remote system To make it real time capable it should be transferred to the main stor age of the DVS system see section Transfer data on page 8 52 The clip is currently trans ferred copied from another system to the local storage see section Transfer data on page 8 52 After this its status will change to Online RT There are multiple search re sults available for this clip see section Resolving Multiple Found on page 8 67 The clip is unconformed be cause a conforming has not been made yet or no clips could be found Original This clip does not belong to an EDL It is a normal clip avail able in one of the standard
414. ps of the EDL For an autoconforming you can select between Source TC in header Keycode in header and File number as TC The first two settings should be used if the headers of the video files on the storage pro vide source timecode or keycode information If Source TC is selected you can select the type of timecode that should be used for the search with the combo box to the right Then if the header data of a found video clip matches a source in outpoint stated in the EDL the re spective EDL clip will be appropriately linked The Edge code amp Time of Day i setting searches in both header fields If one matches the respective clip will be linked The Conforming Tool The File number as TC setting should be used if timecodes of the original source were used for the numbering of the image files With this setting the timecode information stated in the EDL source in and outpoints will be translated into frames with the frequency set for the EDL Afterwards these numbers will be searched for in the file names If matching frame numbers are found within a video clip in as well as outpoint the respective EDL clip will be appropriately linked Audio source TC Determines how to perform a search for audio material of the EDL For an autoconforming you can select between Source TC in header and Sample count The source timecode setting should be used if the headers of the audio
415. r Guide PVs 8 1 Introduction to Conforming with the Edit Tool This section provides an introduction to conforming and the conform ing tool in general Additionally you can find here some important notes about what to observe prior to a conforming process 8 1 1 Conforming in General Conforming in general is the process of linking a data list such as a cut list or a list in the edit decision list EDL standard to audio video ma terial on a storage which enables one to work further on already edited projects On a DVS system this would normally be the linking to the original high resolution material thereby taking advantage of the real time power of the DVS system for further processing A conforming may be required for instance during the editing of dig ital movie shots in film projects An editor cuts scenes of the film on an editing workstation using low resolution material When finished an EDL can be created of the created project which can afterwards be sent to other editors i e only the EDL has to be sent This EDL can then be imported in other applications and after a conforming the work on the respective project can be continued e g color graded 8 1 2 The Conforming Tool and its Mode 8 2 The conforming tool of the Edit Tool has been designed for an easy and fast conforming With it you can load import data lists build up a timeline from them as well as set up and perform the conforming It can handle ED
416. r based secondary color cor rection allowing you to color correct your clip with several definable color vectors Color correction operator providing six predefined colors for a selective color correction Special operator that color corrects the raw data of cameras by ARRI Operator that enables you to mirror the video image vertically and or horizontally Allows for example to set zooming and or panning for the video clip in the timeline It is by default available for all clips in the timeline Applies either line based algorithms or motion estimation for a deinter lacing of interlaced material With it you can render a clip from an inter laced image format to a progressive one Special operator that allows you to control the camera parameter set of REDCODE data In addition to these the Edit Tool supports the OpenFX plug in inter face enabling you to extend its effects feature set with plug ins devel oped by third parties Once installed they can be accessed in the effects pane the same way as the effects operators provided by DVS see sec tion Effects on page 4 25 Timeline Element Properties Usually effects operators are applied to single clips on the timeline only but their settings can be transferred to other clips of the timeline easily see section General Items of the Properties Area on page 7 3 This section explains in detail the possibilities when dealing with the properties of
417. r in one step A prerendering may be indicated prior to a play out when the DVS system is not able to handle the contents of the timeline in real time for instance a special operator Further information about this can be found in section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Depending on the number of elements to be prerendered the i length of the elements and the configured output settings the prerendering may take some time Further information about how to manage projects best when parts of the timeline need to be prerendered can be found in section Notes on Project Management on page 2 14 After a prerendering save your project file If an already saved project file is not saved after a prerendering process again the prerendered files will not be recognized by the Edit Tool when the project file is loaded once more i e they will not be used for a play out They remain on your storage and have to be deleted manually as described in section Cleaning Tempo rary Data Manually on page A 24 9 2 13 Extract files The Extract files menu option copies all files on the timeline to a specified directory or volume thus allowing you to archive an edited project The directory structure of the files on the storage will be copied as well Once this menu option is selected the following window will be displayed on the screen Extract files from Project x Destination Heads Tails Cancel
418. r of these EDLs in the estination s of the first EDL will be used as reference The destination time ther EDLs will be recalculated automatically Don t show this message again Name of the combined EDL Figure 8 29 Combining EDLs Use the items at the top of the window to select the EDLs that should be combined If you want to combine the timeline of your project with an EDL you have to create an EDL of the timeline first by dupli cating the entry Timeline as EDL on the tab EDLs see section Duplicate on page 8 42 From the very first combo box choose the EDL that should be used as the starting point for the combined EDLs With the button E to the left you can add additional combo boxes to the first one to select addi tional EDLs that should be appended to the first one The drop down lists of the combo boxes show all EDLs that are available in the project With the button s H you can remove the respective combo box The EDLs will be combined in the specified sequence from top to bot tom The destination timecodes of the top EDL will be taken as the ref erence The destination timecodes of the appended EDLs will be recalculated so that they appear one after another behind the first EDL in a timeline In the entry field at the bottom of the window you have to enter the name of the combined EDL Once everything is set the EDLs can be combined to a single one with the button OK Afterwards the com bined
419. r programs the check box is de activated If the driver is not in use by another program a simple play out i operation of the timeline in the DVS software will connect the driver to the DVS software again automatically 9 5 2 Configuration project The Configuration Tool provides overall two configuration groupings You can define project related settings in a project grouping tab Project or you can configure default settings that will be used for the DVS system in general as well as for each new project tab Defaults 9 23 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs see section Configuration defaults on page 9 24 While the first one includes settings that will be used for the currently active project only and stored together with the project file the latter contains settings that will be used for each new project as well as for a general setup of the DVS system Because the default settings include configurations regarding the DVS system as well it provides compara tively more settings than the project related ones Use the default set tings in case you want to change the system settings or the default values for each initialized new project The settings of the tab Project will be stored together with the current project in the project file only and are therefore just temporarily available as long as this particular project is not closed The Configuration project menu option enables you to configu
420. r reel names etc To be successful the conforming has to be set accordingly The frame rate of the imported EDL must be set correctly It must be set to the native frame rate of the EDL otherwise the timecodes will be calculated wrongly Please observe a possible drop frame timecode as well Anautoconforming as described in section First Steps to Make a Conforming on page 8 6 can be performed with source timecode 8 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 4 keycode or file numbers Offsets cannot be set at this stage For this you have to use the conforming mode Cut lists without source in and outpoints will be automatically pro vided with this information by the DVS software They will be cal culated from the data available in the list However this information may require manual adaptation To add the EDL to the timeline the frame rate of the video format of the timeline must match the frame rate of the imported EDL For this you can either set the timeline s frame rate to the frame rate of the EDL or convert the timecodes of the EDL to another frame rate Please observe a possible drop frame timecode as well Conforming with Header Data When autoconforming on a connected storage Disk Online with the setting Source TC in header make sure that the default source timecode setting Default source TC is set cor rectly in the timecode settings of the Configuration Tool see CLIP STER Configurati
421. rack and it will be down or up mixed before it reaches any output While the smallest unit of a video clip is a single frame field the small est unit of an audio clip is a sample The DVS system provides up to 48 000 samples per second of audio 48 kHz opposed to the respec tive video frequency setting frames per second for the video output With the area Slip Sync you can bring your video and audio output into synchronization by adjusting the audio offset For this the area pro vides different settings items where you can specify the positive or neg ative offset value either in milliseconds samples frames or via a timecode If you adjust one setting the other ones will be set accord 6 15 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs ingly With the check box Copy to all tracks the adjusted offset can be transferred to all other available audio tracks easily Simply enable the check box and confirm your setting with the OK button to copy the synchronization settings to all audio tracks In the area Output Path s you can see the different digital audio channels that the DVS system provides With a click on the respective button select the digital audio channel s that should be used for the output An activated button between two channels configures the two channels to stereo With the settings of the area Audio Mode and the ones of the area Output Path s you can mix the audio signals of your project accord ing to your needs
422. re and set up the project related settings of the DVS system and software It will open the Configuration Tool with the tab Project activated Then you can configure for example the paths for the temporary data as well as other project specific settings such as the appearances of clips in the bin All changes performed on this tab will be saved together with the project file For more information and a complete description of the Configuration Tool please consult the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide 9 5 3 Configuration defaults 9 24 The Configuration Tool provides overall two configuration groupings one for project related settings tab Project and one for default set tings that will be used for the DVS system in general as well as for each new project tab Default Further information about the two configuration groupings as i well as about the project related settings can be found in sec tion Configuration project on page 9 23 The Configuration defaults menu option enables you to configure and set up the system settings as well as the default values for each ini tialized new project It will open the Configuration Tool with the tab Defaults activated Then you can set up for example the TCP IP set tings of the DVS software as well as the period for the automatic save function of opened projects autosave The default configuration set tings are saved automatically together with the software wh
423. re 7 47 Shapes list The settings of the selected shape are displayed in the settings pane to the right of the list Then they can be altered according to your liking and the changes are directly applied to the clip in the timeline With the check boxes in front of the shapes in the list you can display or hide shapes after they have been defined If the check box in front of a shape is activated it will be displayed and used on the clip if de fined if deactivated it is hidden With this you can easily enable or dis able defined shapes Additionally below the shapes list the following buttons are provided RESET This button resets the selected shape of the list It deletes the defined picture mask and sets the set tings items back to their default values INVERT Reverses all defined shapes Instead of masking the area within the defined shapes it masks the area outside of the shapes RESET ALL This button resets all shapes of the list in a single step All picture masks are deleted and the set tings items are set back to their default values 7 12 2 Setting Shapes 7 52 Once a shape from the list of shapes is selected it can be enabled and defined For this position the timeline cursor on an appropriate image in the video clip that shows clearly the area where the shape should be defined Then to enable and determine the shape you have to use the items at the bottom right of the settings pane Timeline Element Proper
424. re to the bin see section Importing and Adding EDLs on page 8 6 In the setup configure the EDL s source in and outpoints to the destination in and out points set Source TC will be to Destination timecode e After this build up the EDL in the timeline see section Building up a Timeline on page 8 10 During the configuration of the build up select as its position According to destination TC as well as empty video audio tracks for the creation The Conforming Tool e Then perform an autoconforming for this EDL see section Con forming on page 8 14 by configuring it to find the offline edited clip Once the events of the EDL are successfully conformed and linked to the offline edited clip it will be available in the timeline with all its edit points 8 7 8 Resolving Multiple Found The preview area of the conforming mode can also be used to resolve multiple search results found during conforming see section Multiple Search Results on page 8 20 With the conforming mode activated and switched to the tab EDL Clips the multiple found hits can be identified easily via the status Multiple found see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 When such an EDL event is selected in the table the preview area will alter its appearance and the found search results for this event will be displayed You can also display the search results of such a clip when working on an EDL from the timeline see menu
425. resolutions can be processed from SD up to 4K and the final result can be played out in a freely selectable format Conversions and calcu lation times for render processes are rarely necessary because of the high quality hardware developed by DVS Additionally up to 16 channels of audio can be in or output by CLIPSTER and their data can be accessed and processed in the software as easily as the video material All video and audio data are stored in the Windows file system and thus accessible right away when working with other applications The Edit Tool of CLIPSTER is the main part of the DVS software pack age It is a software module that enables you to add video and audio clips to a timeline in any sequence you like and in a freely configurable number of tracks When working with video you can edit your material with cuts dissolves wipes etc and scalings pannings zoomings and or color corrections Thus you can create your perfect project When working with audio you can control the volume of a clip at every position in the timeline for example to create fade ins and outs Dur ing all times your original material is never touched or altered because all editing processes are performed virtually Of course to provide for the best possible integration the Edit Tool supports edit decision lists of various formats via import and export functions For conforming or the mastering of digital cinema content there are also advanced tools avail
426. rierai aranne 6 22 REVIEW sseiercie iiias iris 5 17 Delete 5 23 6 20 6 29 7 29 sample backward n c 5 20 Display settings acsccccrcdaxerarade dis 6 81 sample forward eeen 5 20 Duplicate ascent aicetecaceestiodneee 8 42 SAVE Becta teaches Nast tec 4 43 7 32 DVS HG secorir ot 4 41 Select Sane ee et eee ner z ee 8 44 Edit eierniie iiai 2 9 Set status to offline 00 8 48 edit mode cece ceceeeeeeeeeee ees 5 15 Settings 3 7 3 10 6 7 6 12 6 17 end of clip ceceteccesetecicecess 5 21 8 63 6 19 6 21 EXPO aS dooiers 8 42 SetuP sonia 8 45 E e C E T 5 16 5 34 Slave sessscecasavacect veersevease 5 16 5 33 frame backward scce 5 20 Slip source KC sisatsomnteccascsdinee 8 49 frame forward siscetacesncasaevaerints 5 20 Slip source TC ataceeteteepiaestetiets 8 48 Frame In Out ascese 7 24 source edit mode 5 15 5 18 frame field backward 5 16 5 34 SIV CSl aces n a 2 9 7 27 8 63 start of clip seee 5 21 8 63 frame field forward 5 16 5 34 TEX sivsatr rii eroro nioan niai 4 5 7 27 8 63 Timeline EDL 8 61 8 63 Frames cccecceceeeeeeeeeeees 5 16 5 34 TVANS oo eccecceccecceeceeeeeeaeees 3 14 6 41 Graph ZOOM aizcosiccsstactdanasaeces 7 24 trim backward srezcscssercesartaemans 5 31 PAO E EEE 2 9 trim forward cess icee bso aeicgeeeeantans 5 31 MAZE aenenere eee renner er eee ner et inaia 4 6 trim mode ae eee ee 5 15 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Unmark All aansens 4 44 Updat
427. ritten as the source timecode to the location in the files headers es pecially reserved for that kind of metadata Afterwards the finalized clip will contain the selected source timecode and it can then be used by ap plications that support source timecode The following settings are available Timeline The internal timecode of the Edit Tool s timeline output TC is written to the correct location in the file headers i e afterwards the internal timecode of the timeline is provided by the files as their source timecode The Timeline Source TC The source timecode provided by the clips al ready present in the timeline is written to the files headers as their source timecode i e if the clips already provided source timecode it will be preserved Clips without source timecode in formation may receive a virtual source time code see section Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode on page 2 16 mats see section Notes on Source Timecode and Keycode on page 2 16 To use the combo box Generic timecode the File format combo box has to be set to one of these file for mats The Clipwise rendering items can be used for example to create dig ital deliverables With them you can finalize the clips of the timeline to individual clips on the storage When the check box is activated for ev ery clip in the timeline an individual clip in the selected file format will be created Additionally a
428. rmines if and where to create bin clips for the clips to be generated It lists the folders that are available in the bin and if one is selected the generated clip s will be automatically sorted into this folder of the bin If audio is ren dered these clips are registered as multi clips and further subfolders will be created each containing the individual clips used for the audio multi clip The option bin will create the bin clip s in the root folder of the bin whereas the option none prevents the creation of bin clips With the combo box Render from you can select whether the whole timeline A11 or the timeline stretch between the set in and outpoint only In Out should be rendered If In Out is selected but no in and outpoint is defined in the timeline the whole timeline will be ren dered The check box Disable gap rendering determines whether gaps in the timeline of the Edit Tool will be rendered or not It can be used in conjunction with still image formats only meaning it will be ignored when rendering to a container file format If deactivated gaps present in the timeline will be rendered to black frames when activated they will not be rendered and the respective frames will be left out from the image sequence With the combo box Generic timecode you select the timecode type that should be written as the source timecode into the files if supported by the file format During finalizing the selected timecode will then be w
429. rnatively you can double click the timeline element in the timeline to call up the properties The properties area will be displayed right below the timeline area in stead of the audio tracks It will show you immediately the properties of the selected element where the context menu was invoked Zoom amp Pan Rotation Width m Height EE Lock xj Filter Adaptive Filter real time Y Aperture Rotation LI Keyframing Figure 7 1 Video clip properties With the timeline element properties area visible in the user interface you can display the properties of every timeline element as soon as it is selected in the video track Thus fast editing operations can be per formed easily in the Edit Tool without laboriously calling the properties of each element again To view changes to an effect with the overlay of the control area immediately make sure that the timeline cursor is posi tioned on the clip where the effect was added PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 2 General Items of the Properties Area This section explains the items that are available in the properties area for all timeline elements e Depending on the type of element selected from the timeline i not all items may be available If they are dimmed they cannot be used in conjunction with this timeline element Once the timeline element properties are visible beneath the timeline you can find to the left side the following elements Dur 05
430. rrently avail able in the selected EDL It provides information for example about their names and conforming methods 8 37 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 8 38 Original EDL Figure 8 20 The tab EDL Reels By selecting one or more reels in this view on the EDL the clips belong ing to this reel will be selected in the timeline area and on the tab EDL Clips as well This works also the other way around meaning when all clips of a reel are selected in the timeline and or on the tab EDL Clips the respective reel will be selected in this view as well To select more than one element in this EDL view you can use the usual methods provided by the DVS software see section Keyboard Short cuts on page A 7 or the functionality of the SELECT button see section Select on page 8 44 Additionally to select several adjoin ing elements you can select one with the mouse keep the mouse but ton pressed and then move the mouse to the point where the selection should end All adjoining elements will be selected The following explains the columns that are available on the tab EDL Reels When changing settings on this tab the settings of all events i that belong to the respective reel will be changed if their status is Offline The changes can be seen in the respective columns of the events on the tab EDL Clips Column Description Reel name Details the name of the reel as it was de
431. s You have to define all 17 x 3 values and the triplets have to be in ascending order The values have to be stated according to the bit depth The following shows an example of a 3D LUT XML file value pairs in the middle left out lt LUT3D name DVS Example 3D LUT N 17 BitDepth 16 gt lt values gt 3113 0 2674 3011 0 2341 3055 0 2484 2833 0 3307 2721 0 4971 3078 0 7032 4249 0 9383 5632 0 12272 6910 0 15632 7805 0 18808 8417 0 21373 8964 0 23256 9366 0 24656 65535 65395 57730 65535 65378 57973 65535 65368 58109 lt values gt lt LUT3D gt A 20 Dvs Appendix A 6 Slave Mode RS 422 Control For slave mode the DVS system supports the RS 422 9 pin control pro tocol as well as a subset major commands of the Odetics protocol When acting as a master the DVS system uses the RS 422 9 pin control protocol In case you want to control the DVS system in slave mode via RS 422 the following specifications have to be set on the master device to en sure frame accurate editing preroll gt 1 sec edit lag edit delay 7 frames postroll 1 sec A 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A 7 System Maintenance This section contains topics related to system maintenance work Carry out the described tasks whenever necessary A 7 1 The Automatic Defragmentation Process A 22 The DVS system provides an automatic defragmentation
432. s should be sorted by see also section Sorting Clips on page 4 19 The sorting will also be available after switching to the thumbnail view of the bin again A scrub bar to preview and set an inpoint is available in the thumbnail view of the bin only With the button IMAGE you can activate the view of the iJ thumbnails again For the thumbnail view of the contents area there are also text information available that can be set via the Configuration Tool as well see above These texts will then appear to the right of the thumbnail as shown in figure 4 12 on page 4 17 4 2 2 Adding Clips to the Bin Before you can begin to work with clips in the Edit Tool you have to fill the bin with clips available on the system There are several ways to fill the bin with clips of video and audio 4 6 1 You can open a standard file manager e g the Windows Explorer and drag and drop the clips either a file within a direc tory or the directory itself to the contents area of the bin 2 you can use the menu option Add Clip on the context menu of the bin s contents area or the menu option Add clips of the Project menu to fill the bin with contents 3 you can drag and drop contents to the bin with the help of Spycer the content management software module or 4 you can capture clips with the I O Tool software module of the DVS software All these procedures will be explained in this section iJ The DVS softwar
433. s close to certain elements of the timeline it will automatically snap and position itself to these elements This is called the snapping mode of the Edit Tool It makes an easy positioning of elements possible The moved clip will react to the following ele ments Starting point of timeline Start and end points of timeline elements e g clips and transi tions The position of the timeline cursor Setin and outpoint of the timeline You can disable the snapping mode and activate a fine tuning mode by pressing the Shift key In the overwrite mode when moving clips or performing other work gaps may occur in the timeline A gap means that a clip is no longer in connection with previous or following clips in the timeline and when played out there will be nothing to output in this part of the timeline A gap is indicated by the Edit Tool via a red line in the timeline scale PVs The Timeline A ad line Figure 6 35 A gap in the timeline Then you either have to move the other clips respectively or fill the gap by adding another clip see section Adding Clips of a Certain Length to the Timeline on page 6 38 Additionally you have the possibility at hand to close the gap automat ically When positioning the mouse cursor over a gap red line on the timeline scale it will change its appearance to a hand Then you can close the gap with a double click of the mouse The starting point of a gap as
434. s field the frame number that should be identified as the source inpoint i e this frame number will then be assigned to the position stated in Source IN and taken as a reference to calculate the remaining values In case this setting is made on the tab i EDL Reels for the reel of the event any manually specified value here will be overwritten Path Details where to search for clips for this event If applicable it is already set to the path that was selected during an autoconforming see section Conforming on page 8 14 By changing this entry you can select a new loca tion for the search when Disk Online or VTR TL is selected For further information see Video path and Audio path in section Con figuring the Autoconforming on page 8 16 Consolidated clips Shows the name of the consolidated clip i e the future source clip for this event see sec tion Capture data on page 8 54 Bin clip Details the path and name to this event in the bin of the DVS software Comment If applicable this field shows comments that were available for this event in the originally im ported EDL file It can be changed freely i e you can change already available comments or enter new ones When exporting to an EDL the entries in this field will be added as comment s for this event to the exported EDL 8 5 6 The Tab EDL Reels On the tab EDL Reels you can find the reels that are cu
435. s of the pictures further enhanced Special filter available for a conversion of clips in larger resolutions to lower ones re ducing interlace flickering as well Optimized for a conversion of HD material to SD Downconvert real time Same as the Downconvert filter with the sharpness and details of the pictures further enhanced Software Filter rendering With this setting the best possible filter is se lected It provides a software based sophisti cated algorithm for all settings on the operator Zoom Pan However if this fil ter is used the clip has to be prerendered prior to a play out see section Prerender ing of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 With the Aperture items to the right of the Filter combo box you can sharpen or blur the image The slider and its entry field to the right find their main usage when Moir effects occur in your images Moir ef fects are interferences in your video output signal usually caused by fine black and white image details in your video clip such as striped or checked patterns If such interferences in your output occur use the CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs slider and pull it to the left or right until the jittering or other interfer ences disappear Slider Slider Position Result Factor or Factor Range left blur lt 1 Aperture right sharpen 1 Me The Aperture slider is not available for certain
436. s speed effects effects included in an EDL by either modifying or keeping the durations of the events Remove EDLs and FCP XML files only Same as Re transitions move speed effects only for transitions Apply to all In case you have added several EDLs to the bin inasingle step e g via drag and drop of more than one EDL from a file manager to the bin each will usually invoke a setup window When activating this check box the currently speci fied settings will be applied to all EDLs i e you have to set them only once e Configure the list to be added appropriately e Once everything is set as wanted confirm your settings with the OK button This will start the import process When finished the selected and con figured EDL can be found in the folder area of the bin with the clips of the EDL already sorted into reel subfolders Of course as long as no conforming has been made the clips are marked as pending clips with out thumbnail preview see section Details about Clips on page 4 10 By repeating the described steps above you can add as many EDLs to your project as you want Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform Folders a ae E oi Figure 8 2 EDL added to the bin Once an EDL is available in the bin you can start a conforming process at any time see section Conforming on page 8 14 build up a time line of the EDL in the Edit Tool see section Building up a Timeline on page 8 10 or
437. s up the EDL that is currently selected in the work area in the timeline In case the events of the EDL are already conformed the clips in the timeline will show the linked material right away After pressing it the same window will be displayed as after drag The Conforming Tool ging an EDL to the timeline directly see section Building up a Time line on page 8 10 Show handles When the tab EDL Clips is activated with the currently displayed EDL built up in the timeline you can use this button to show hide heads and tails i e with this function you can relocate the trim points of all clips in the timeline in a single step It works also with standard clips of the Edit Tool when the EDL of the timeline Timeline as EDL see section The Tab EDLs on page 8 30 is duplicated and built up in the tim line A click on this button opens the following window by hard cuts However they can be restored again by selecting the menu option Undo on the Edit menu see section The Edit Menu on page 9 17 i When showing or hiding handles transitions may be replaced X t Show Hide handles Handles settings Q Handles as Frames lt o d All available may cause asynchronism OK Cancel Figure 8 38 Showing or hiding heads and tails In this window you can choose between several possibilities by select ing one of the radio buttons to the left Handles as Determines the lengths of t
438. s well as the entry fields and if applicable the aspect ratio will be altered ac cordingly Figure 6 24 Adjusting the cropping manually with the mouse The button CENTER is a toggle button Once activated the cropped im age will be centered in the representation and locked there With this when changes are applied to the cropping the cropped part will always stay in the middle of the image Once everything is set as desired confirm your selection with the OK button at the bottom of the Timeline cropping window The button CANCEL will close the window for the cropping settings without confirming any of the alterations However the cropping will be in effect for the timeline only if the check box Video Cropping in the Options area of the Timeline output settings window is activated Video Cro p pin g Cropping Figure 6 25 Activation of the cropping of the timeline PVs The Timeline Then the configured cropping will be applied to the whole timeline of the Edit Tool The color value of the black bars added to the timeline via i cropping and played out via the DVS system depends on the setting for the color space range specified in the video output settings Via the color space range settings you determine whether this value is given out in a restricted e g with a value of 16 setting Head or in a full value range with a value of O setting Full Further information about color space ranges an
439. s you may change the out put video format to a video raster with a higher frame rate e g to 720p 60 to get a higher scene detection speed see section How to Configure the Video Output on page 6 12 Once everything is set you can start the scene detection at any time e Select from the context menu of the timeline scale the menu option Scene Detection from in to out Prerender 00 00 Add marker fdovuntown_usa_ Match frame Delete from in to out Scene Detection from in to out k Figure 6 57 Starting a scene detection This will activate the scene detection The Edit Tool starts to play out the timeline or the selected part of it and in the control area the video scope Scene Detection is activated 6 66 The Timeline Project Edit Bin Options Help Erec MJobs Maker Perom Name Resolution Color depth Colormode Aspect ratio Framerate LL Asi channels gt m a i We anad Figure 6 58 Activated scene detection The video scope Scene Detection is an RGB parade that can be used to evaluate the scene detection see section The Video Scopes on page 5 3 Furthermore its graph will flash in white every time a scene is detected During the scene detection a luminance mean value is calculated over a number of frames of the played out clip This is compared to a mean value of the single frame that is currently played out If both values dif fer to some degree a scene marker w
440. section Check Bin on page 9 19 PVs The Menus Additionally with the project file the bin the timeline the viewing set tings the output settings etc will be set anew and the layout will be updated 7n In the Edit Tool only one project file can be processed at a time i If you open another project or activate the menu option New the currently active project file will be closed However if you have already performed changes to the project you will be asked by the program if you want to save the current project The VTR task mode of the I O Tool uses project files different from the ones usually saved via the DVS software Further in formation about this can be found in the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide 9 2 3 Recent files The Recent files option on the Project menu opens a submenu where you can find project files that were recently opened in the DVS soft ware From the submenu select a file to work with the respective project again f You can adjust the number of files that will be listed on this Li submenu via the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configu rations user guide for more details amp 9 2 4 Insert Project The menu option Insert Project enables you to import already fin ished and saved projects into the currently loaded project The bin as well as clips present in the timeline including all transitions and effects settings will be imported With this feature you can
441. sed by the Edit Tool as a substitute for its original material to ensure a real time working environment Once a proxy has been cre ated it will be available in the bin instead of the original material Nev ertheless the bin clip and all its representations in the timeline are still linked to the original material and by turning the proxies on or off you can decide whether the material of the high resolution is used in the Edit Tool or the proxy Thus you can work with the downconverted clips as usual in the timeline but when playing out or finalizing you can switch back to the original material in high resolution This section describes how to administrate proxies in the DVS software e For more information about proxies in general see section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 Creating Proxies For each clip available in the bin that may exceed the real time capabil ity of the DVS system you can create a proxy to ensure a real time ca pable environment This means when the resolution of the clip is greater than 2K you can create proxies via its context menu in the bin If the clip s resolution does not exceed the real time capability i of the system the respective menu options to administrate proxies will not be available e In the contents area of the bin select the clips that you want to cre ate proxies of see section Selecting Clips on page 4 18 e Next call up the context menu on one of the selecte
442. select between the various timecodes provided by the clips which may give you more control over their position in the timeline zn REDCODE files store two timecodes Time Of Day and Edge i Code which you can select in the software as well x Audio files equipped with source timecode usually provide a start timecode only Subsequent timecodes will be calculated and drop frame timecodes are currently not supported In the Configuration Tool of the DVS software you can configure the general way the software should deal with timeline and source time code see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Here you can set in the respective group the type of source timecode that the DVS software will use as the default source timecode Additionally you can specify which timecode should be given out when performing a play out Furthermore throughout the DVS software individual clips may use dif ferent source timecodes which is a setting that can be adjusted in the clip s properties see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 The type of source timecode used by each clip can be changed even when the clip is already used in the timeline of the Edit Tool And when clips do not provide a source timecode of their own you can set the clips to show a virtual source timecode The DVS soft ware will then use the timecode specified as the source timecode offset as the virtual source timecode 2 7 2 About Keycode
443. sing the menu option Select all of a timeline track s context menu 6 4 3 Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips Bin clips and timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the location of your choice Further information about this can be found in section Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips on page 4 18 6 4 4 Adding Clips of a Certain Length to the Timeline 6 38 If you want to fill a gap in the timeline or fill a particular part of the timeline with other video or audio material you can add a clip to the timeline with the help of the timeline s in and outpoint 3 point and 4 point editing This will then fill the selected particular part of the time line To add a clip of a certain length to a particular part of the timeline per form the following e Set the inpoint of the timeline at the position where the clip to be added should start see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 29 e Set the outpoint of the timeline at the position where the clip to be added should end see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 29 PVs The Timeline e Next prepare the clip to be added to the timeline as indicated in section Adding Clips to the Timeline on page 6 2 for example by determining its in and outpoint zn When adding a clip via the source edit mode of the control i ar
444. ss its result directly in the timeline With the edit mode of the control area activated see section Con trols on page 5 15 the clips of an EDL are displayed as standard time line clips ete Ma Timelin Figure 8 11 Conformed EDL in timeline edit mode By stepping through the timeline for example or by playing it out you can immediately see where the EDL clips require adjustment such as multiple or not found clips see section Evaluation and Further Pro cessing of the Conforming on page 8 20 The following describes the possibilities that are available for EDLs in the timeline All can be a found on the context menu of a clip in the timeline under the menu option Conforming see e g section The Context Menu of Video Clips on page 6 57 By changing in outpoints of clips from an EDL in the timeline i trimming you change the destination in outpoints of the EDL To change source in outpoints you have to use the con forming mode see section The Conforming Mode in Gener al on page 8 26 8 23 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide Conforming Select Autoconform Resolve Multiple found clip Transfer data Capture data Set status to offline Show in the corresponding EDL Show in Timeline as EDL Figure 8 12 Conforming functions provided in the timeline Select With this menu option you can choose be tween different methods to select clips on the t
445. step description you will be instructed what to do to start your first project and how to perform some basic editing tasks 7D More detailed information about individual items or steps de i scribed here can be found in the other chapters of this user guide The chapter will be concluded with a description how to shut down the software 3 1 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 3 1 Starting the Program 3 2 This section provides you with a description how to get the Edit Tool started To start the program you have to do the following e Select from the START button menu of Windows on the submenu DVS the entry for the DVS software for example All Programs DVS DVS Clipster Alternatively you may also start the program via its icon on the desktop of Windows This will load the DVS software As the starting user interface the Edit Tool will be started automatically Because the DVS software is designed to run in full screen i mode to provide for an undistracted view on the video material and the task at hand the following shortcuts may be helpful To open the Windows Explorer Windows 9 E To open the Task Manager Ctrl Alt Del To switch to the Windows desk Windows 4 D top To switch to another application Alt TAB To minimize the user interface for example to access other ap plications you may also use the Minimize menu option of the progr
446. storage of the DVS system will always be in a perfect state for real time oper ations The DVS defragmentation process uses proprietary routines AN to defragment the data on the storage The results will not be b the same when using a third party defragmentation tool be cause it will not heed image file sequences Therefore do not use such for the defragmentation of the main storage A triggered defragmentation process is automatically halted as soon as a real time task is performed or the DVS software is set to one of the other above mentioned states and it will be started again when the software provides the operating conditions of the defragmentation process once more After copying or recording large amounts of data to the stor A N age it is recommended to leave the DVS software running for a longer period of time e g over night without performing any real time tasks play out or record or having the slave mode VTR task mode activated This will give the defrag mentation tool time to reorganize the files on the storage for an optimized real time performance For this you may also start the defragmentation process manually see section Starting the Process Manually on page A 24 A 23 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Starting the Process Manually The defragmentation process can also be started manually for exam ple if its automatic starting during the starting of the DVS software is disabled
447. switch notation 2 19 6 9 8 44 I O mode frame offset cccceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 9 6 81 multi threaded 4 37 4 38 4 46 frame rate ooo ccececceeeeee eee eee ees 2 18 single threaded 4 37 4 38 ee STO FG O84 jO Tool sausa 2 3 2 9 4 10 frame field backward 5 16 5 34 7 27 CON MENU sciccecececdcacdaheviecleeaaiacdes 9 2 8 63 import frame field forward 5 16 5 34 7 27 oTi ARAE E A S 9 18 8 63 ies data SE acct cdeitece cies Setaecacigeeels 2 3 frame end marker timeline cursor 6 27 default configuration load 9 25 A 3 El cecsecese oaccceznen tcaonce 8 6 8 41 frames seinen seretieeeteeenteneneentens 2 19 7 ee 4 31 frames vs fields display 5 16 5 34 global settings ss0 6 9 25 Fal a a 6 25 6 81 e achsdoe ose eece cose Aecetetaeecnece 9 5 f l aaeanoa etna thc a A 3 important NOLES cccccccccececececece 1 7 8 3 f ll SC EEr scccvcspatsnessesctaseandecaes 2 6 3 2 information function key eeren 4 28 clip duration wo 6 57 6 71 clip inpoint o n 6 56 6 70 G clip outpoint n n 6 57 6 71 name of clip n se 6 57 6 71 GAWD cin sece ccd tomecensntescccecndccscrameccsea 7 35 project file ooo cece cece cccccceceeees 2 10 SAMMA oes eeee reeset eee e eters 7 33 7 35 timeline duration 4 00 s00 2 10 gap in timeline scanecentntescteasneneacess 6 36 via tooltips s s s 6 10 6 57 OSE a a 6 37 video raster cccccceccccccccccucecs 2 10 TiN e e A 6 38 infor
448. t of the DVS system see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide Other storage locations may be too slow for real time operations Via the setting Additional real time paths of the Configura tion Tool you can also configure other storage locations as real time storages 4 2 4 Working with Folders in the Bin The folder area of the bin is used to create folders to sort and structure your video and audio material by sorting them to different folders This way you can perform a clip and project management In this section you can read what to do to create folders and how to administrate them For most of these tasks the context menu of the folders in the folder area is used It provides different folder related functions such as the creation of a new folder in the folder area or the renaming of an exis tent one New folder Add ALE Add Cutlist Add EDL Add FCP XML Delete Rename Figure 4 10 Context menu of a folder in the folder area For information about the menu options starting with Add see section Importing and Adding EDLs on page 8 6 The Tool Area Creating Folders Via the context menu you can create a new folder manually in the fold er area of the bin e Call up the context menu on a folder in the folder area of the bin and select the menu option New folder This will create a new folder in the folder area It will be placed as a sub folder below the selected folder where
449. t Tool 7 29 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 9 The Operator Flip Flop The flip flop operator enables you to mirror the video image vertically and or horizontally If the flip flop operator is used on a clip it has to be preren i dered prior to a play out see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Effects Flip Flop x Zoom Pan Flip mirror a x Flip Flop gt _ Flop mirro Dur 15 15 Modify before Figure 7 26 Flip flop operator The following settings are available on the flip flop operator Setting Meaning Flip When this check box is enabled the clip s im ages will be flipped in horizontal direction i e the image is mirrored along the vertical axis Flop Activating the Flop check box will mirror the images along the horizontal axis thereby turning the pictures upside down 7 30 PVs Timeline Element Properties 7 10 The Operator 1st Color Correction The operator 1st Color Correction can be used to perform a primary color and or gamma correction on the currently selected clip in the timeline It provides a user interface where you can load a static LUT as well as several sliders for a more immediate control Figure 7 27 1st color correction operator This section describes in detail the settings provided by the 1st Color Correction operator 7 10 1 Static LUT With the operator 1st Color Correction
450. t fol low specific guidelines to be recognized by the DVS software as a multi clip Protocol for serial data communication similar to the 9 pin protocol but with an extended com mand set See also RS 422 and 9 pin protocol DVS supports the major commands of this pro tocol in slave mode Special term indicating the process of using and referencing to clips that are already present ona storage via a data list An editing effect that can be applied to video clips either as an embedded operator or as an operator set via the clip s timeline element prop erties End of a clip For video material either the last file on the storage or a last frame virtually set trimmed in the DVS software For audio mate rial either the last sample of a file or a virtually set trimmed outpoint in the DVS software End of a data list event Usually two outpoints are set in a data list one for the source material on a storage and one for the destination of this material on a timeline The end of a timeline It is either a user defined outpoint or the last frame sample of the time line s content Timeline mode during your work with timeline elements When deleting or moving clips in the timeline gaps may appear and by adding or moving timeline elements the contents of the timeline may be overwritten Appendix prerendering preset effect proxy reel RS 422 scrub bar to scrub source timecode tail timeline curs
451. t is recognized by the file size This is done yuv8 with a table of predefined file sizes Compo nent order UYVY yuv10 10 bit YUV 4 2 2 and Raw 10 bit YUV file format with or without YUVA 4 2 2 4 key This file has no header The image format is recognized by the file size This is done with a table of predefined file sizes Component or der UYVY Bits are packed tightly from left to right for three component samples then two bits of padding zero to fill up to four bytes The lines are padded to a multiple of four bytes The file is padded to a multiple of 512 bytes yuv16 16 bit YUV 4 2 2 Raw 16 bit YUV file format This file has no header The image format is recognized by the file size This is done with a table of pre defined file sizes Each component is stored as a 16 bit value in big endian byte order left aligned Component order UYVY 1 DVS saves files of this format by default in big endian byte order However during load ing both formats little and big endian byte order can be read 2 Regarding the file type V2 is the DPX file format according to SMPTE 268M 2003 the remaining V1 are SMPTE 268M 1994 b e stands for big endian l e for little endian 3 Real time capability optional Cannot be captured 4 Not real time capable A finalizing can only be performed uncompressed Cannot be cap tured 5 8 bit YUV 4 2 2 and YUVA 4 2 2 4 8 bit per component 16 bit average per pixel 6 1
452. ta en 6 80 A 13 color component n se 7 34 color correction 22 deccetterieesceeceeticeds 6 59 see also 6 vector color correction see also primary color correction see also secondary color correction liBrary viisiin ioneina 7 42 monitoring of correction 5 3 settings 1st CC n se 7 31 settings 2nd CC n se 7 38 settings 6 Vector CC ee 7 55 settings ARRIRAW CC 7 57 settings R3D Decode 7 60 color cube ccce eee eeee eee es 6 20 A 18 color MaSK eters aeicagansseeeceeticsteedss 7 42 BOC aieeaa erir 7 39 color scheme clips conforming tool n 8 26 prerendering ccccceccccceeeen 6 43 PVs Index color space range ceee 5 4 6 25 capture data ieee 8 24 8 54 finalize sacecceeesanceseeavsardaceenssute 6 81 changing EDLs scce 8 29 color value a a 6 25 A 16 A 17 clip not found seee 8 21 color vector nnee 7 38 7 41 color scheme clips sescseteieateonss 8 26 disaDle sporirea 7 42 data listesine 8 2 enabler sorisreteriisisnisrinsi ranih 7 42 EDL oe oinin aaa 8 2 8 6 E E 7 47 first STEPS caiscinssagrisassantannuausdennts 8 6 color wheel 7 36 7 43 7 49 important notes eee 8 3 command line 4 37 4 41 A 24 multiple found wes ecestcre eee cse ss 8 20 comment offline clip 8 24 8 32 8 33 8 48 burn in saciieaavedaeacaceteete veda tedreccacas 5 8 offline edited clip 8 64 8 66 IN EDL ou eee 8 8 8 37 9 13 preview area ccecce 8 60
453. tails if available Column Description Nr Number of the marker in the timeline Action In Shows the actual position of the marker or in terms of a timeline stretch indicated by the marker its Action Inpoint It is displayed either in timecode or in frames notation depending on the selected notation for the Edit Tool see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 The Tool Area Column Description Action Out Shows the end of the timeline stretch indicated by the marker see Action In Action Dur Shows the duration of the timeline stretch indi cated by the marker see Action In Name In the fields of this column you can enter a cus tomized name for the marker The number of characters is not limited and all characters are allowed Marker Type Indicates the type of the marker Further infor mation about the available types can be found in section Marking Positions in the Timeline on page 6 49 Comment Same as the column Name but used for com ments about this marker For some markers comment entries will be automatically generat ed by the Edit Tool However they can be easily changed and adapted afterwards Thumbnail This column shows a preview of the frame where the marker is positioned in the timeline as a thumbnail The thumbnail view can be configured via the Configuration Tool group
454. ten to the files with the TC Drop frame combo box It will be evaluated if for the clip to be generated a file format is selected that stores source timecode informa 6 87 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 82 tion in its header e g dpx Further information about drop frame timecode can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide If appropriate and available select the necessary pulldown method from the Pulldown and Startphase combo boxes The pulldown fea ture may be necessary when working with film originated material and offers a film to NTSC conversion It renders for example video data that is in 24 progressive frames sec film as 30 interlaced frames sec NTSC To use this feature the video track s of the timeline should i contain 24p material only With the CHECK button to the right you can ascertain that all material in the timeline is in this for mat Prior to using pulldown it is recommended to check the timeline with this button Further information about the pulldown settings and pulldown in general can be found in the CLIPSTER Configurations user guide With the fields regarding the REET 1920 x 1035 resolution of the rendering you GANES 30 interlaced set the actual output resolution A Odd fields of the clip to be rendered and generated As the fields indicate you can alter the resolution to any for mat you like and the new clip will be present in this resolutio
455. ter mined during the import of the EDL It can be altered freely and its counterpart in the bin will be named accordingly Please note that in some EDL standards the reel name is restricted for ex ample to a maximum number of characters Source type Same as the Source type setting on the tab EDL Clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 The Conforming Tool Column Description Video search criteria Same as the Search criteria setting on the tab EDL Clips but sets the search criteria for video clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 Video source TC type Same as the Source TC type setting on the tab EDL Clips but sets the timecode type for video clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 Offset Start frame Start TC Same as the Offset Start frame setting on the tab EDL Clips see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 with the following ex ception The offset start frame entered here is valid for the complete reel When Start frame is se lected you can enter in this field the frame number that should be set as the starting point of your reel The actual starting point time code has to be set in Start TC Available when Start frame is selected En ter in this field the starting point of your reel i e the timecode that should be equated with the frame number specified in Offset
456. tered are as follows Setting Range Remark Hue O 360 Settings in degrees of a color wheel 0 360 shade of red 90 shade of green 180 shade of cyan 270 shade of magenta blue lilac Saturation 0 100 Percentage value where O indicates no satu ration and 100 full saturation Luminance 0 100 Percentage value where O indicates no lumi nance black and 100 full luminance A The same restrictions as with the corner points of the selection i shapes apply to the settings in the entry fields The softness area settings may lie outside of the vector area settings but not within Color Mask Controls With the controls of the color mask area you can open the preview win dow as well as switch between the various views of it Additionally you can lock invert or reset your current settings or adjust an overall soft ness for them Pipette Lock Invert Reset Figure 7 42 Color mask controls In detail they provide the following control elements PIPETTE The PIPETTE button will show you the image currently selected by the timeline cursor in a preview window Af ter pressing this button the preview window is displayed on the screen and the button a P is switched on auto matically Further information about the preview win dow and its different views can be found in section The Preview Window on page 7 47 Lock The button Lock prohibits any alterations in the area of the co
457. terno ree errr err es 9 18 9AA IMpPOrt BiN eisirean aa a E 9 18 942 EXPO Bie sirrini ae eo NEA 9 19 94 3 Clear BiNrossriri aoa eaen eae a oy 9 19 AU MGM BIN eee eae sence ea A a e a E es 9 19 9 4 5 Generate PrOX ES xcstinsersscsisscratsveieersesassaseardersatatsettiets 9 21 DAG Delete all Proxies reeni a aeai 9 21 9 4 7 Activate all proxies sa cicccdiacterntictandcavinsenpenerieerstercdteates 9 22 9 4 8 Deactivate all proxies vs casas ca deteteieies edettacsaiteasieiataioniiiecs 9 22 9 5 The Options Menu axccateccercateecss txatecuacncatcensseeshaashetveqenatiade 9 23 9 5 1 Driver CONNECt Sec cecteealaza eset ea et hes eects araa 9 23 9 5 2 Configuration project xtk ct ceencentedas ace eieesdeceurtencseectts 9 23 9 5 3 Configuration defaults cxceresaccceces sass a ecceandcentedetveice 9 24 95 4 Load configuration defaults scc ccs2 cccce sasiaseetscceeieeeetiaus 9 25 9 5 5 Save configuration defaults 9 25 9 5 6 Load global settings eccezieh Sash sccontes la eeecvecmeaseeteniee 9 25 9 5 7 Save global settings ccce 9 26 9 5 8 WEB service enable eccere 9 26 9 6 The Help Men scrsiciiiisiiiieirs ninnisin 9 27 961 ADOUT Sarre ee ee CCE Ee Er er EE eee rere 9 27 962 Manuals scsccacei aceite 3 sidect ieesisied cus sieaeiaatecuddeden tics 9 27 vii CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs A viii Appendix o oo eeeeececececceseteceeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeseeceeseecaeacacecenstatatsneeesees A 1 A 1 Glossary of Ter
458. th LI Height LI Lock x CI Filter Adaptive Filter real time Y Aperture Rotation Keyframing Figure 7 10 Zoom and pan operator This section describes in detail the settings that this operator provides 7 7 1 Items for Zooming With the sliders for width and height you can adjust the zooming Sim ply pull the sliders to the left to zoom out of the clip or to the right to zoom in Width Height Lock Figure 7 11 The items for zooming 7 16 PVs Timeline Element Properties Additionally you can enter either the zoom factor or the pixel size that the original frames should be set to in the respective entry fields to the right of the sliders manually Slider Slider Mo neni Result Factor Range Width left zoom out lt 1 Height right zoom in gt 1 With the check box Lock activated the original aspect ratio the rela tion of width x and height y of the video format can be preserved If enabled the images will neither get stretched nor compressed and the remaining value will adjust itself automatically enced with the combo box Filter Its settings are explained in G The way a zooming of the video clip is performed can be influ section Advanced Settings on page 7 18 x 7 7 2 Items for Panning To achieve a panning for the currently selected clip two sliders are at your disposal x TL o o 0 0 4 Figure 7 12 The items for pannin
459. the clip s representations in the Edit Tool The source material is sent directly to the external application where it can be processed Once the changes are saved the material can be imme diately accessed with the DVS software However due to the destruc tive export your original source material on the storage will be lost 6 5 6 Vertical Editing of Video Clips in the Timeline With the Edit Tool and the timeline area configured to several video tracks you can perform a vertical editing in the timeline To perform a vertical editing the timeline area has to be config i ured to contain more than one video track This can be done with the video track size options of the Timeline output set tings window see section Video and Audio Track Proper ties on page 6 7 The approach to work with several video tracks vertically in the timeline is different from the usual one of a horizontal editing in a timeline Then the various tracks of the timeline form a stack By placing different or differently edited timeline elements in other video tracks at the same position in the timeline you can change the contents for a play out at that position easily 6 63 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 64 With vertical editing you still work with the video track s as usual i e horizontally But for instance in case you want to realize a temporary cutaway or to evaluate the visual outcome of different shots at a par tic
460. the clip s thumbnail or in the video overlay of the control area if the timeline cursor is positioned on such a clip After confirming the message of multiple search results you can work directly in the timeline and identify the clips with multiple search results for example by their substitute image Then you can use the features of the conforming tool provided in the timeline to resolve them see section Working with EDLs from the Timeline on page 8 23 Alternatively you can switch to the conforming mode of the control area and resolve the multiple hits from there see section Resolving Multiple Found on page 8 67 Clips Not Found If a clip could not be found for an event in the EDL you will be notified after the conforming about the clips that could not be conformed 8 21 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Clips not found gt LA Part03_Night_ Make sure about tl The material on the storac the systems where to search for files Figure 8 10 Notification about not found clips A failing of the conforming may happen because of a number of rea sons and how to avoid the most common ones is detailed in section Important Notes on page 8 3 You have to make sure that these are observed properly However if the failing of the autoconforming cannot be resolved you can adjust the conforming for instance by trying another linking meth od or by editing the events of the EDL In case you
461. the context menu was invoked After this you have to assign a name to the newly created folder e Enter the name of the folder via the keyboard and confirm it with the Enter key Then the new folder will be present in the folder area of the bin and you can use it to sort your audio and or video material into it see section Working with Clips in the Bin on page 4 16 Folders can also be created automatically with a drag and drop i procedure from a file manager see section Adding Clips to the Bin with a File Manager on page 4 7 Sorting Folders As soon as folders are available in the folder area of the bin you can sort them in descending or ascending order If your project contains a lot of folders in the bin this will make it easier for you to find an indi vidual folder To sort the folders do the following e Simply click on the title bar with the mouse Folders Audio Film C Film A L Film B Film A Film C i Audio Figure 4 11 Sorting the folders This switches between a descending and ascending order of the folders in the folder area The type of order will be indicated by the triangle at the right hand side of the title bar Renaming Folders To rename folders and thus to give them a different name after they were created in the folder area of the bin perform the following CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs e Call up the context menu on a formerly created folder in the folder
462. the list of the combo box Filter Meaning Classic real This filter uses an algorithm without filtering time and is ideal when working with light scaling factors only because it results in very sharp pictures If this filter is selected all alter ations will be performed in real time but sharpness cannot be controlled manually Bilinear real Applies a bilinear filtering to the zoomed im time age and may be appropriate for greater scal ing factors It is real time capable but sharpness cannot be controlled manually Timeline Element Properties Filter Meaning Adaptive Filter real time Default setting for the Zoom Pan opera tor It provides an optimized filtering for ev ery scaling factor which will result in high end quality pictures This filter is real time capable Adaptive Filter real time Doubles the precision and quality of the Adaptive Filter by using hardware resourc es that are normally used to calculate transi tions in real time When this filter is selected for zoomed clips transitions between these clips may require a prerendering see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 This can be avoided by either removing a scaling or setting the clips to the default Adaptive Filter AdaptiveExtra Filter real time Downconvert real time Same as the Adaptive Filter with the sharpness and detail
463. the timeline e g i via the modify buttons only the settings of the currently se lected operator are copied In case you want to apply the set tings of another operator to clips in the timeline you have to select it in the effects list and perform the same procedure again 7 6 3 Using Preset Effects in the Properties Area To apply the same effect settings of one clip to another the adjusted ef fect s settings in the timeline element properties can be created as an independent effect easily Afterwards they can be applied to other clips on the timeline without any problem Timeline Element Properties To create such a preset effect as well as apply it to a selected clip in the timeline you may use the context menu of an effect in the effects list Further information about preset effects and for example oth i er ways to create and apply them as well as how to use them for several projects can be found in section Effects on page 4 25 Effects x Zoom Pan x Flip Elan Delete Load Preset Save Preset Figure 7 9 Context menu of the effects list The context menu of an effects operator in the effects list provides the following menu options Delete This menu option deletes the respective effect where the context menu was invoked from the ef fects list After this its effect is removed from the clip in the timeline Alternatively you can select the effects operator and press the Del key on
464. the timeline in the control area of the Edit Tool Both can be used to move within your project Nevertheless other functions and items to move inside the timeline are provided by the Edit Tool as well All ways to move in the timeline are explained in the following Moving via the Timeline Scale With the timeline scale you can move within your project and position the timeline cursor timeline scale orci 00 6 0 9 00 9 elie 0 0 0 AAO 23 00 12 16 SLiyWwoop Figure 6 27 The timeline scale To move within your project click on a point in the scale and the time line cursor will be positioned there Additionally by selecting the cursor and moving it to the left or right you can scrub the visible part of the timeline This part of the timeline together with the video and audio tracks can be scaled from a full view of the timeline to a partial view that consists of a few frames only Via the sliders below the audio tracks in the time line area you can change the view of the timeline and thus move easily within your project PVs The Timeline Figure 6 28 Timeline sliders With the left slider you can zoom in or out of the timeline keyboard shortcuts Up Arrow and Down Arrow If the slider is set to the left most point you are able to see the whole contents of the timeline When it is set more to the right you will zoom into the timeline When you have zoomed into the timeline you can change th
465. ther Thats a Type Rate f YUYV range Head RGB range Full Timeline TC Offse 00 00 00 00 C Drop frame Off Startphase Resolution Frame rate Dominance pP p p p p P p 5 6 Pulldown 5 n z P p p i i i p atio SMPTE 274 Original aspe SMPT 4 Figure 6 68 Configuring video To the right of the check box Video output you can find the Hardware finalize support check box With it you activate or deactivate the sup port of the DVS PCI video board during finalizing When activated and if possible the video files will be rendered in hardware in a render speed faster than real time depends on the applied operators and video for mats involved All real time effects are supported When deactivated the finalizing will be made in software With the File format combo box select the file format for your clip to be generated For a list of the supported file formats see section Sup ported File Formats on page A 10 To the right of the File format combo box you can find the button OPTIONS which provides depend ing on the selected format further configurations for the files to be generated Depending on the selected file format additional codec or file types may be available to determine bit depth and or byte order settings If pro vided by the format select from the File type combo box the desired additional codec or file type A list of the file types can be found in the CLIPSTER I O Too
466. ties mouse Cursor gt None Spline Default Figure 7 48 Items to set a shape With the combo box Shape you enable a shape As soon as it is set from None to Static the preview window will be displayed on the screen It shows the frame at the current timeline cursor position Source Image la o X i shape e Figure 7 49 Preview window When placing the mouse on the image the cursor forms a cross Then to set a shape click at least three times in the image at different loca tions The size and form of the shape will be determined by these knots placed in the image The combo box Mode configures the curving of the shape lines When Spline is selected the lines will be curved with Polygon selected they will be straight between the knots set with the mouse A knot placed in the image can be selected with the mouse and then moved The knot that is currently selected is marked in red Additional ly it can be deleted by pressing the right mouse button To facilitate a setting of shapes the view of the preview window can be switched with the View combo box Outline Displays the source image together with shapes if already defined The parts of the image that are not selected by shapes ap pear dimmed as in figure 7 49 on page 7 53 7 53 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Alpha Shows the alpha channel same as in
467. timecode or frames notation If you want to move to a certain position on the timeline you can enter the position in the appropriate format here After that press Enter and the cursor will then move to the entered position For more infor mation about the timecode frame number fields and their format see section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 5 5 The Source Edit Mode mm If you drag either a video or audio clip from the bin to the control area of the Edit Tool the software changes to the source edit mode control area Figure 5 17 Drag and drop of clip to control area The clip in the bin is neither removed nor deleted when it is i dragged to the control area It will remain there for future use so that you can add the clip or other parts of it to the timeline again You can also switch to the source edit mode manually by pressing the respective button of the controls see section Controls on page 5 15 In the source edit mode there are two video overlays visi ble in the control area of the Edit Tool PVs The Control Area video overlay Figure 5 18 The source edit mode The left part of the control area shows the clip coming from the bin in the following called bin clip Its contents will be displayed in the over lay to the left The right part of the control area displays your current video overlay as it would
468. timeline When you have changed the view of the timeline you will see a screen like the following 3 9 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Figure 3 6 Project in timeline The buttons right in front of the timeline tracks video as well i as audio determine whether a track is muted barred from an output button M or locked barred from editing button L With the button SETTINGS at the top left side of the timeline area you can determine the output format video raster of the project Here you can also configure the size of the video and or audio tracks There is also a setting available that per forms an autoscaling of the material in the timeline if the reso lution differs from the configured output raster As a next step we want to delete one of the clips from the timeline and change the sequence of the remaining clips 3 2 4 Moving Clips in the Timeline Because for this tutorial we want to have only two clips in the video track clip B and clip A in this particular order we have to delete the second part of clip A and then change the sequence of the remaining two clips For this perform the steps as described below e Select the second part of clip A the last clip present in the timeline with a click of the mouse and delete it with the keyboard key Del The representation of the clip in the timeline will be deleted and you will see two remaining clips in the video track of the timeline
469. timeline where the dele tion should occur you have to use the timeline s in and outpoint Af terwards all timeline elements between the in and outpoint of the timeline can be deleted e Set the inpoint of the timeline at the position where the range should begin see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 29 e Set the outpoint of the timeline at the position where the range should end see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Time line on page 6 29 Now you are able to delete the timeline elements 6 39 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs e Call up the context menu of the timeline scale and select the menu option Delete from in to out The menu option Delete from in to out will be available as soon as an in and outpoint of the timeline are set Prerender ve all markers Set makers automatically Match frame Delete from in to out Scene Detection from in to out Figure 6 37 Deleting timeline elements from a timeline range This will delete all timeline elements between the in and outpoint of the timeline If appropriate the elements will be cut at the position of the in outpoint Whether a gap occurs in this part of the timeline or the rest of the timeline is moved to the left to stay in direct connection with all previous timeline elements depends on the insert overwrite mode of the timeline area see also section Insert Overwrite Mode of the Timeline
470. ting purposes as described in section Preparing Clips for Editing Pur poses on page 4 20 and section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 PVs The Timeline e Then select the clip in the contents area of the bin and drag and drop it with the mouse into a video or audio track Video clips can only be dragged to the video track s of the Edit Tool and audio clips only to the audio tracks Perform audio tracks Figure 6 2 Drag and drop of video clip to timeline Once the mouse button is released a representation of the clip is added to the timeline When using clips from the bin they are neither removed nor i deleted there They will remain in the bin for future use so that you can add the clip or other parts of it to the timeline again The clip will be placed at the position of the mouse pointer where the mouse button was released When adding a video clip and releasing it somewhere in the i video track a gap may appear in the timeline It can be closed automatically with a double click of the mouse on the timeline scale see also section Moving Clips within the Timeline on page 6 35 While the starting point of the clip its position and inpoint within the timeline is set during the drag and drop procedure by the position of the mouse pointer its outpoint is defined by the length of the clip You can change these attributes easily after the clip was added to the ti
471. tion of the measured performance of the system During play out or record operations the performance will be displayed via bars in the 4 38 chart T The DVS software can operate in two different I O modes It can process several image files simultaneously multi threaded I O mode or one file at a time single threaded I O mode Although the multi threaded I O mode is the recommended mode for the DVS software because it is more flexible and fast er it can be set to a single threaded I O mode via a setting available in the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configura tions user guide for more information The performance monitor can be switched between two measurings for the performance of the system Overall file I O workload With this setting the performance monitor measures the overall workload of the system that occurred during a timed interval Individual file I O duration This measuring is especially useful when operating in a single threaded I O mode Then the performance monitor displays the access times of single files The Tool Area You can switch between the two measurings with a setting available in the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide They and their effect on the drawn charts will be explained in the fol lowing Missing frames on the storage are not registered by the perfor mance monitor as drops The Chart in Overall File 1 O Workload If the
472. tions will be changed 9 5 7 Save global settings The project configurations as well as appearances of the DVS software can be saved as snapshot The global settings will store the statuses of the Edit Tool I O Tool and Configuration Tool With this you can cre ate for example a setting for a tape operator showing the VTR emu lation and providing all the important settings for video format color space bit depth and storage paths already predefined After configuring everything you would like to have and see select the menu option Save global settings It will open the standard dialog window to save a file where you have to specify the path and file name for the current settings to be saved File extension cos Global settings file Once the global settings are saved you can load them into the DVS software again whenever you want see section Load global set tings on page 9 25 which will change for example the project configurations and the appearance of the DVS software 9 5 8 WEB service enable 9 26 The menu option WEB service enable activates or deactivates the web service SOAP interface of the DVS software The SOAP interface allows you to develop an application of your own that can be used to control the DVS software for example from a remote computer con nected to the DVS system via network PVs The Menus 9 6 The Help Menu You can get additional information about the DVS software v
473. tors sorted under this folder e Select from the folder colorcorrection the operator for the primary color correction 1st Color Correction and drag and drop it to the Effects list of the timeline element properties CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Effects Lok x Figure 3 14 Drag and drop of effect This will apply the selected effect to the clip whose properties are dis played in the area of the timeline element properties Once an effect is selected from the effects list its controls will be available in the settings pane to the right e With the controls of the primary color correction available adjust for example the contrast brightness or gamma of the clip The changes are immediately applied to the clip in the timeline With this step our example project is now complete and you can for example perform additional works on the timeline or play it out in the selected output format button SETTINGS If you need an operator to be applied only to a limited range i of frames of a clip you have to edit the clip with hard cuts be forehand because the effects operators are valid for a whole timeline clip always Some effects are not real time capable Prior to a play out their application to a clip in the timeline has to be rendered see sec tion Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 An effect can be deleted from the effects list of a clip the same way you delete a c
474. tpoint of clip B in the timeline e Select the end of clip B first clip in timeline and move it to the left to trim its outpoint tail 3 12 Figure 3 9 Changing of outpoint As long as the insert mode of the Edit Tool is active clip A will automat ically adjust its position on the timeline respectively While trimming the outpoint you will notice a blue line above the se lected clip e head tail indicator Figure 3 10 Display of original length of clip This line shows the original length of the clip You can use it to deter mine easily how much tail is available to for example create a transi tion e Once sufficient tail is available release the outpoint handler and drop it PVs Getting Started With this you have manipulated the outpoint of the clip The same way you can of course change inpoints as well You cannot change the in and outpoint of a clip beyond the limits of its original material on the storage indicated by the head tail indicator Clips in the timeline can also be trimmed by cutting them with the button EDIT and afterwards deleting the not required part of the clip The cut will be applied to the position of the timeline cursor If a track is locked no cutting will be per formed Next we want to add a transition to the cut between clip B and clip A on the timeline 3 2 6 Adding a Transition to the Timeline Once at least two clips are present in the video track of t
475. transition see section Prerendering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 6 4 8 Prerendering of Timeline Elements 6 42 When adding timeline elements such as clips or operators to the time line they are immediately tested for their real time capability which de pends on various factors such as frame size play out frequency location of the clip on the storage etc Those elements that exceed the real time capability of the DVS system will be subject to a prerendering Fact is the greater the resolution of the material in the timeline and or the video raster set for an output the more likely the chance that a pre rendering is required Then the system will not be able to handle the re spective clip or operator in real time A prerendering may be indicated for all types of timeline ele i ments i e clips as well as operators e g transitions If any ex ceed the real time capability of the DVS system they will be marked for a prerendering Further information about the real time capability of clips can be found in section Real time Ca pability of Clips on page 4 13 A prerendering of timeline elements means that the Edit Tool calculates the elements before a play out takes place and stores the calculated ex The Timeline tra files rendered images in a temporary location on the storage These are then used for a play out instead of the original material in the timeline It is best to handle a
476. ts into different video tracks e g via its I O Tool or the conforming tool see CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide and chapter The Conforming Tool on page 8 1 Thus with the help of the vertical editing feature you can compare different versions of conformed projects easily in the timeline 6 5 7 Scene Detection Video clips that were recorded from tape machines or telecines are of ten available in a single image sequence only With the Edit Tool you can make a scene detection that automatically analyzes the video clip s for cuts Afterwards the detected cuts scenes are marked visibly in the timeline where they can be edited further and if required actually cut This section explains how to use the scene detection of the Edit Tool 6 65 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Starting a Scene Detection To start a scene detection perform the following A scene detection can be performed in a single video track i only i e all others must be locked and muted see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 33 e If not already available add the video clip that should be analyzed for scenes to the timeline see section Adding Clips to the Time line on page 6 2 e If desired use the in and outpoint of the timeline to limit the scene detection to a part of the clip timeline only see section Setting an In and Outpoint for the Timeline on page 6 29 e Additionally just for the analyze proces
477. tton the position of the in outpoint that the clip should provide when added to the timeline of the Edit Tool Then press Enter to take on the selected position The in or outpoint handler will be set accordingly Further informa tion about timecode frame number entry fields can be found in section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 The inpoint button sets or deletes the inpoint of the bin clip depending on the state of the DE LETE button The inpoint will be set at the posi tion of the scrub bar cursor The outpoint button sets or deletes the outpoint of the bin clip depending on the state of the DE LETE button The outpoint will be set at the po sition of the scrub bar cursor 10 21 The position field displays the current position of the scrub bar cursor on the scrub bar of the bin clip its timeline To move the cursor you may enter a position and press Enter Further infor mation about timecode frame number entry fields can be found in section About Timecode Frame Number Fields on page 2 18 With the scrub bar cursor you can move and view the contents of the bin clip Simply select it and move it along the scrub bar Additionally you can control it via the controls e g the play button or the position field Furthermore with a mouse click anywhere below or above the scrub bar you can position the scrub bar cursor there instantly 5 23 CLIPSTER Edit T
478. ty Part0 _ Figure 8 21 The tab Original EDL With the help of the tab Original EDL you can for example compare the contents of the EDL file with its imported version in the Edit Tool Additionally clipboard of you can mark text with the mouse and then copy it to the the operating system by simply calling the context menu in the text field and selecting the menu option Copy or using the key board shortcut Ctrl C TO REEL NME Tapez TO CLIP NAME Hollywood FROM SelectAll Ctrit A FROM CLIP NAME Hollywood Cc opy Ctrl C E Wo z2 TO REEL NaME Tapel Figure 8 22 Marking and processing of text The menu option Select All of the context menu keyboard shortcut Ctrl A marks the complete text of the EDL 8 40 PVs The Conforming Tool 8 6 Conforming Mode The Conforming Controls The conforming controls offer you various sophisticated functions to process EDLs Execute Auteconform Create in TL Export as orm Link data Duplicate o Transfer data Addp 0 Print offline Capture data Update linking Figure 8 23 The conforming controls Via the conforming controls you can for example import EDLs change the viewing settings of the work area or modify imported EDLs They will be described in this section 8 6 1 The Edit Controls In the following you can find descriptions of the controls that allow you to edit EDLs more generally Close Export as Dup
479. uide PVs 4 30 Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform Available Operators a oom Pan Pan Scene 01 Rename Load all Figure 4 17 The context menu of the effects pane Renaming Preset Effects To rename a preset effect and thus to give it a different name once it was created in the effects pane perform the following e Call up the context menu on the respective preset effect and select the menu option Rename Alternatively you may click on a preset effect a second time with the mouse After this you can change the name of the effect e Enter the new name of the preset effect via the keyboard and con firm it with the Enter key Then the selected effect will be given the new name By renaming preset effects you can also assign function keys as i keyboard shortcuts to them For further information about the appropriate naming conventions see section Creating Preset Effects via the Keyboard on page 4 27 Deleting Preset Effects Preset effects can be deleted either individually or all in one step To delete an individual preset effect perform the following e Call up the context menu on the preset effect that you want to delete and select the menu option Delete This will delete the respective preset effect where the context menu was invoked The Tool Area To delete all preset effects from the effects pane in one step perform the following e Call up the context menu on an entry in the
480. ular position in the timeline simply place the respective timeline ele ments in another track in the timeline The higher the track number the more priority is given to the respective track during a play out Then with the help of enabling and disabling the respective tracks button M see section Muting and Locking Tracks on page 6 33 you can easily determine the best possible solution for your work Example 1 In the example below the timeline is configured to several video tracks All tracks are enabled not muted i e all tracks will be played out Track3 M Track2 M Track1 M When a play out is initiated the result will be that clip 3 overlays the ones below it i e the ones with a lower priority PVs The Timeline Example 2 In the second example the uppermost track is now disabled muted When a play out is initiated this will lead to an output where clip 3 is not given out at all while the clips 2 and 4 overlay the clip 1 present in the first video track the one with the lowest priority The display of the video tracks can be reversed via the Config i uration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information However this does not affect the play out priority i e the priority of the video track with the highest number over the others when enabled The DVS software is able to autoconform offline composed projec
481. up in the Timeline When an EDL with unconformed events is built up in the timeline an autoconforming can be performed immediately afterwards e For this just click the OK button in the message window that will be displayed after an EDL is built up in the timeline see section Build ing up a Timeline on page 8 10 Continuing with autoconforming x Do you want to continue with autoconforming Q Autoconforming is possible only when video files are already online on the storage Please make sure that the EDL s ix are correct and dofes not require any further editing OK Cancel Figure 8 6 Continue with autoconforming After this the window to configure the autoconforming will be dis played on the screen Then you can continue the conforming as de scribed in section Configuring the Autoconforming on page 8 16 8 15 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Configuring the Autoconforming After starting the autoconforming process the window to configure the conforming will be displayed on the screen 6 Autoconform SourceTC in heade Y G SourceTC in header G __ Reel name Clip name Get from file name Disk Online ce searching mode Standard Further options X Renderspeed effects Apply to Selection Autoconform Cancel Figure 8 7 Configuring the autoconforming It provides the following settings items Video source TC Determines how to perform a search for the video cli
482. ur liking see Spycer user guide for more information 2 7 1 About Source Timecode Timecode information stored in file headers the so called source time code can be used in the whole DVS software For example you can use source timecodes in the timeline of the Edit Tool and regardless of their position in the timeline the respective clips will always show and use their source timecode Then prior to a play out you can decide whether the internal timeline timecode should be given out as a time code signal or the source timecodes provided by the files Regarding source timecode there are some peculiarities how the DVS software deals with source timecodes Some of them are detailed in the following Normally image files capable of storing timecode information provide space for one timecode only in their header generic source timecode DVS systems however are able to receive e g during a record several timecodes incorporated in signals at various connectors During a write procedure i e when recording clips via the I O Tool dpx files they will write the received timecode information into the file headers The ones additionally received will be stored at a location for user defined data in the header and usually cannot be interpreted by applications other than the ones developed by DVS When processing such clips af terwards for instance in the timeline of the Edit Tool or when conform Basics ing you can
483. ur project file after a certain period of time for backup purposes see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more details To enable the autosave function you have to save the project file first and thus assign a name to it from the ones usually saved via the DVS software Further in formation about this can be found in the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide i The VTR task mode of the I O Tool uses project files different gt x 9 2 2 Open 9 4 The Open menu option opens the standard dialog window of the operating system for the selection of a file In this dialog window select the project file that you want to open in the Edit Tool File extensions cp Project file cp autosave Automatically saved intermedi y ate situation backup cp Backup file of old project file During loading the bin and thus the timeline will be checked for incon sistencies i e it is tested whether the first and the last frame of each clip present in the bin is actually available on the storage Missing frames will be substituted during a play out with the li Edit Tool by a standard image see section Consistencies of Clips on page 6 59 Then it is recommended to perform a more accurate testing of the bin with the menu option Check Bin on the Bin menu see section Check Bin on page 9 19 If the first and or last frame of a clip is missing you will be in formed about this the same way as described in
484. uration Tool asetin and outpoint of the timeline will be sent to the external application However this applies to a single clip only If the in and outpoint are set outside of the clip where the menu option Export to Application was called only the image sequence of the clip where the menu option was called will be sent i When a sequence processing is enabled each frame between el x If a non destructive export is selected for the external applications the source material of the clip will be copied to the same path and location where the original material is stored with an incrementing number add ed to the directory name of the clip lt name of clip s directo ry gt lt incrementing number gt After this the copied source material will be opened in the external application where you can pro cess it In the meantime the clip s representation in the timeline of the Edit Tool will be changed to the location of the copied material i e a new bin clip will be added to the bin of the Edit Tool and the represen tation of the clip in the video track of the timeline will be changed to this new bin clip and location As soon as you have processed the ma terial with the other application and saved it you can use it immediately in the software without having overwritten the original source its bin clip is still present in the bin When a destructive export is selected for the external applications no changes will be applied to
485. usually with a right click of the mouse The Tool Area x Vertical split Horizontal split K Figure 4 5 Context menu of title bar e Select the horizontal or vertical appearance of the bin from the con text menu The context menu to change the layout of the bin can also be called on the area where the view buttons are located The layout of the bin will be set accordingly Additionally you may change the size of the tool area to get a better view on the bin or to make items visible that cannot be seen in the visible part of the tool area see section Changing the Size of the Tool Area on page 4 2 Changing the View of Clips Via the view buttons at the bottom of the bin you can set whether the clips in the contents area shall be seen as thumbnails with text or with their text information only Use the button TEXT to view the clips in the contents area with their text information only Name a resolutio Color depth Color American_Beauty_Parn American_Beauty_Pan 19 berlin_ a Figure 4 6 Contents area with text information 4 5 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs a The kind of text information displayed in the contents area of the bin can be set freely with the Configuration Tool see CLIPSTER Configurations user guide for more information In this view you can easily sort the clips in ascending or de scending order by clicking on the column heading that the clip
486. vated the reel names will not be re stricted to eight characters as required by some EDL standards Settings Group Additional info for export The settings group Additional info for export is available for the ex port format EDL only and allows you to specify further information that should be saved as comments in the data list The Menus Export as Export format Select elements to be save x Clip Name vi CLIP Tim Reel name port x Reel Name T Additional info for export File Name FROM FILE Path amp name ah _ Reel replacment list __ Ovenwrite existing comment Cancel Figure 9 8 Additional info for export settings Activate the item that should be saved as comments in the EDL with its respective check box Each clip will then detail in the exported EDL the additional information in the indicated notation The Reel replacement list check box adds a list as comments below the generated EDL that maps the abbreviated reel names used in the EDL to their original names If no reel names are available the list will detail the path and file to the source material on the storage When exporting from the conforming tool you can overwrite existing comments in the EDL see section The Tab EDL Clips on page 8 32 by activating the check box Overwrite existing comment Settings Group Path amp name With the settings group Path amp name you have to specify a storage lo
487. ve export or by previously copying the material beforehand Afterwards it will be provided again in the DVS software for further usage More information about this can be found in section Processing the Source Material of a Timeline Element on page 6 62 The Timeline Select all With this menu option all clips in the timeline area can be selected in one step Further information about how to select clips in the timeline can be found in section Selecting Clips on page 6 37 Cut Copy Paste Using these menu options timeline elements can be cut or copied to the clipboard of the operating system and afterwards pasted again at the loca tion of your choice Further information about this can be found in section Cutting Copying or Pasting Clips on page 4 18 Relink clip Once a clip is available in the timeline it can be relinked i e referenced to other source material manually from the timeline directly For further in formation about this see section Relinking Clips on page 6 55 Bin Clip properties With this menu option you can open from a clip in the timeline the properties of its source clip in the bin see section Changing the Properties of Clips on page 4 21 Show Alpha Channel only This menu option displays the alpha channel key of a video clip in the video overlay as well as at the outputs of the DVS system For further informa tion see section
488. ve folder in the folder area They are then present in this folder and you can view them again in the contents area when the folder is selected from the folder area If you drag and drop the clips while the Ctrl key is pressed the clips will be copied instead of moved Preparing Clips for Editing Purposes To begin an editing process you have to use the clips of the bin and drag and drop them either to the control area or directly to the timeline of the Edit Tool If a clip is selected in the contents area of the bin when in the thumbnail view you can use the scrub bar below the thumbnail to preview the material and roughly select an inpoint for the respective clip The feature to select an inpoint can be enabled or disabled via i the Configuration Tool When disabled every time you add a clip to the timeline of the Edit Tool the full clip will be added to the timeline regardless of the set scrub bar cursor see CLIP STER Configurations user guide for more information e Move the scrub bar cursor to the left or right to preview your mate rial and or to select an inpoint e preview e scrub bar Figure 4 14 Preview and setting of inpoint of the bin material While adding a clip to the bin you can already set the position i of the scrub bar cursor and thus define a possible inpoint for the clip During the adding see section Adding Clips to the Bin on page 4 6 select the particular frame
489. ve val ues their graphs usually are distributed around a center line It can be found in the middle of the YUV parade because in digital video an off set of 128 for 8 bit data is added to U and V to get rid of the negative value In case the output image is black and white only U and V would be zero 128 resulting in a flat line in the middle of their graphs The more the color saturation of an output image increases the more the two graphs would be dispersed Values of U greater than 50 in the graph indicate positive values and blue hues while values of less than 50 indicate yellow hues and negative values The same applies to V with the exception that values greater 50 would indicate red hues and values less than 50 cyan hues Regarding the luma signal Y a value of zero indicates black while a value of 100 represents white Neverthe less especially when working with YUV a reserved headroom for all components should be observed Waveform The waveform video scope is similar to the RGB parade It displays graphically the distribution of the color components red green and 5 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs blue RGB of an output image For this the image is evaluated line by line and for each the color distribution is displayed Figure 5 10 The waveform The horizontal scale of the scope represents the image s horizontal di rection while the vertical axis shows the RGB levels The color compo nents are dra
490. verlay The video overlay provides action safety and title safety areas that can be turned off or adjusted to your personal needs You can set the color as well as the sizes of these areas PVs The Control Area safety areas t Figure 5 2 The video overlay This can be done with the Configuration Tool Please refer to the CLIP STER Configurations user guide for further information Furthermore you can adjust the size of the video overlay with the edg es of the control area at its very bottom and to the left Simply enlarge or reduce the area by dragging the edges see section Changing the Size of the Tool Area on page 4 2 5 2 2 The Video Scopes To monitor color corrections and to make sure that the images comply with broadcast standards the video overlay of the Edit Tool provides video scopes to help you during such tasks With them you can view the material image for image if necessary and assess the different color values if needed prior to processing as well as afterwards The scopes can be activated via the context menu of the video overlay Figure 5 3 The context menu of the video overlay 5 3 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs The DVS software offers various scopes to choose from Among them you can find waveform vectorscope and parade monitors Once one of the available video scopes is selected the control area will change its appearance and two items will be displayed t
491. verted data The properties of the clips in the bin will detail this accordingly Afterwards it may not be possible to play out the contents of the timeline in real time Alternatively you can use the menu option Deactivate proxy i on the context menu of a clip in the bin to deactivate an indi vidual proxy Further information about proxies in general and their handling can be found in section Working in Real Time on page 2 11 and section Using Proxies on page 4 22 PVs The Menus 9 5 The Options Menu The Options menu provides menu options to set up and configure the DVS system and its software In detail it contains the menu options shown below X Driver connect Ctrl F 12 Configuration project Configuration defaults Load configuration defaults Save configuration defaults Load global settings Save global settings X WEB service enable Figure 9 15 The Options menu They will be described in the following sections 9 5 1 Driver connect Because the DVS system is based on an open platform other programs than the DVS software may want to access the video board of the sys tem To make this possible even with the DVS software running the menu option Driver connect was implemented When the driver of the video board is connected to the software the check box in front of this menu option is activated If the driver is dis connected and free to be used by othe
492. verwrite Mode of the Timeline 6 31 6 3 4 Muting and Locking Tracks 6 33 6 4 Working with the Timeline in General 6 35 6 4 1 Moving Clips within the Timeline occ2 5 5 ccsececrsennns 6 35 GAD Selecting Ces cc act eceninciiiee ee es 6 37 64 3 Cutting Copying or Pasting ClDS viscsises dics ccezetsecssseeeeeces 6 38 6 4 4 Adding Clips of a Certain Length to the Timeline 6 38 6 4 5 Deleting Timeline Elements in a Specified Range 6 39 6 4 6 Performing a Cut 2s saiecas ca cec ecentendi sec 32 sony ccejetienideces ects 6 40 6 4 7 Setting Transitions e 6 41 iii CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 4 8 Prerendering of Timeline Elements ceeeeeeeeeees 6 42 6 4 9 Changing In and Outpoints of Timeline Elements 6 44 6 4 10 Advanced Timing cssccsesecenccetecdvaescandssacereeaieniseeeediees 6 47 6 4 11 Marking Positions in the Timeline eeeeeeeeee 6 49 6 4 12 Attaching Audio Clips to Video Clips ee 6 51 6 4 13 Time Stretching or Time Compression of Clips 6 53 64 14 Relinking CUPS uciot tcaeicctec nasiona eee iiiaae 6 55 6 5 Working with Video Clips n 6 56 6 5 1 The Clip s Information cere 6 56 65 2 The Context Menu of Video Clips secisicsssdssssssseessssiveoans 6 57 6 5 3 Consistencies of Clips sivssntensncrreqerontinmnarnteeeciciad 6 59 6 5 4 Matching an Individual Video Frame sssccscccccec 6 60 6 5 5
493. video overlay where you can see the video material Below the video overlay a scrub bar of the timeline is avail able In contrast to the timeline in the timeline area where you can zoom in and out the scrub bar always shows the complete timeline of the project Below the scrub bar the controls are located to play out and move within your current project Here you can also find but tons to switch between the different modes of the con trol area the edit mode the source edit mode the trim mode and the conforming mode The control area will be described in chapter The Control Area on page 5 1 In the timeline area you can find the video and audio tracks Most of the editing tasks are performed here for example by setting cutting points and defining op erators The timeline area can be configured freely and thus be adapted to your individual needs This area and how to work with projects in the timeline are explained in chapter The Timeline on page 6 1 2 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs task bar The user interface provides at its bottom a task bar where you can switch between the different software modules of the DVS software The task bar is available in most modules and you can easily start and switch between them It will be described in more detail in sec tion The Task Bar on page 2 9 2 8 2 3 The Task Bar The user interface provides at its bottom a task bar where you can switch bet
494. wards the duplicated EDL will be available in the bin as well as on the tab EDLs see section The Tab EDLs on page 8 30 Print This button prints out the information of the currently activated tab of the work area see section Conforming Mode The Work Area on page 8 28 The elements that should be printed out can be adjusted with the controls to configure the view of the conforming mode such as the button VIEW SETTINGS see section View settings on page 8 43 or the combo box Show see section Show on page 8 44 8 6 2 The View Controls 8 42 The following describes the controls that allow you to determine the view on the EDLs iew project_30 v View settings Text v Timecode v Figure 8 25 The view controls lt EDL gt TL as EDL v From the drop down list of this combo box you can select the EDL that should be marked and or displayed in the work area The drop down The Conforming Tool list shows all EDLs currently available in the project see also section The Tab EDLs on page 8 30 View settings View settings Via the button VIEW SETTINGS you can adjust the appearances of the tables on the tabs of the work area to your needs It allows you to hide or display columns of the tables Additionally you can configure the size of the thumbnails of the work area A click on this button opens the following window View settings EDLs ps EDL
495. ween the different software modules of the DVS software The task bar is available in most modules and with it you can easily switch to another module After starting the DVS software the Edit Tool is started automatically E When you click on one of the inactive buttons in the task bar the respective software module will be loaded most of them in the upper part of the user interface The task bar provides the follow ing buttons Ee he Epit button activates the Edit Tool of the DVS software This software module allows to edit video material with effects like color correction zooming and panning 3D LUTs or cropping It is automati cally active after starting the software and described in this user guide VO The I O button starts the I O Tool of the DVS soft ware You can use it to capture video and audio ma terial with the DVS system from telecines VTRs or cameras You can find further information about the I O Tool in the CLIPSTER I O Tool user guide With the button SPYCER you can activate the local content management software by DVS where you can browse and or search for data on local and net work storages Its management tools allow you for example to defragment data as well as to define or alter metadata Additionally you can preview clips and add them to the bin of the DVS software by a simple drag and drop procedure Spycer is de scribed in the Spycer user guide The CONFIG button opens the Configur
496. well as its end are recognized by i the Edit Tool as cutting points Thus you can move frame ac curately to gaps easily via the control buttons that jump to cut ting points see section Controls on page 5 15 6 4 2 Selecting Clips Clips can be selected or deselected in the timeline easily For this per form one of the following procedures or their combination Although the table below describes how to select clips only i most procedures can be used to deselect clips as well Some of the following procedures are restricted to their type of track i e restricted to either video or audio tracks Individual clips Individual clips can be selected with a click of the mouse on the respective clip Several clips Several clips can be selected disjointedly when clicking them while holding down the Ctrl key at the same time 6 37 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Range of clips A range of adjoining clips can be selected by clicking one clip the starting clip and after wards holding down the Shift key while click ing the clip that marks the end of the range You can also select a range of clips by drawing a rectangle with the mouse over the clips that you want to select The starting point of the rectangle has to be on an empty part of the timeline track Figure 6 36 Drawing a selection rectangle All clips All clips in the timeline area can be selected in one step by u
497. will add a marker to the timeline of the Edit Tool at the current po sition of the timeline cursor How to Set Markers Automatically Markers can also be positioned automatically For this perform the fol lowing e Select from the context menu of the timeline scale the menu option Set markers automatically This will open the following window Automatic Markers Marker Type Timeline Maker Set Makerfrom In Out hd x Number of Markers 5 F Time interval 00 00 Option Delete existing Timeline haker Figure 6 49 Dialog to add markers to the timeline automatically e Configure the settings to automatically position markers according to your requirements e Afterwards generate the markers by clicking the OK button This will create the markers of the selected type in the timeline of the Edit Tool 6 50 The Timeline How to Remove Markers from the Timeline To remove a single marker and delete it from the timeline perform the following e Jump with the timeline cursor to the respective timeline marker that you want to remove or place the timeline cursor manually on its position e Then call up the context menu and select the menu option Remove marker This will remove the timeline marker from the timeline You also have the possibility at hand to remove all timeline markers in one step from the timeline For this select the menu option Remove all markers from the context menu
498. will be When fin ished the marked extension in the upper combo box can be replaced with be edited text by clicking the MODIFY button by double clicking them in the up _ per combo box and selecting anoth er one from the combo box Extension will be ii The other variables can be modified e Use the Numbering options to configure a file numbering for the image files to be created File number will be Select from this combo box what should be used to create the file numbers You can se lect between a consecutive numbering of frames the internal timecode of the Edit Tool or the timeline s output timecode When using one of the timecode settings the respective timecode will be recalculated in frames This value is then used for the numbering 6 89 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 6 90 Start index time When Frame number or Internal TC is code selected in the combo box File number will be you can enter in this field the starting point for the numbering i e with it you can offset the frame number in the file names of the image files It can be entered either in frames or timecode notation depending on the selected File number will be setting Minimum number With these radio buttons you can determine of digits the minimum amount of digits that the numbering should provide Either you let the DVS software decide how many digits the file numbering should provide auto or
499. will be deleted as well 4 33 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 4 5 The Marker Table 4 34 In the timeline of the Edit Tool you can place markers at certain posi tions e g as a reminder to cut the clip at this position at a later stage or other reasons These markers can be placed either manually in the timeline of the Edit Tool or automatically Additional information about markers and their placing can be found in section Marking Positions in the Timeline on page 6 49 as well as in section The Drop Table on page 4 42 Once markers are positioned in the timeline the tab Markers of the tool area provides further information about them After its selection and when markers are available in the timeline the area will look similar to the following Bin Effects Jobs Markers Perform Nr Action In Action Out dur Name Marker Type Comment Thumbnail 31 09 31 09 0000 Timeline Marker 01 02 19 Timeline Marker 0001 01 02 19 01 17 07 14 18 Timeline Marker OLLYWOOD 01 17 07 01 17 22 00 15 Timeline Marker dropped 01 17 22 04 33 29 16 07 Timeline Marker dropped 29 02 05 09 Timeline Marker Figure 4 19 List of timeline markers in the tool area The tab Markers provides in a table a list of all timeline markers that are currently available in the timeline of the Edit Tool The individual en tries show the positions of the markers in the timeline and provide fur ther de
500. with audio and or vid eo material first There are several ways to do this The best and most informative way is to use Spycer see section Adding Clips to the Bin Using Spycer on page 4 10 but they can also be added by using a file manager which is more appropriate when using the Edit Tool for the first time The DVS software works with standard computer files Video i and audio data should be stored on the designated storage only e g the system s main storage or a DVS SAN Other storage locations may be too slow for real time operations Furthermore it is strongly recommended to use the main stor age for video and audio as well as project related data only Save other data on the system disks e Open a Windows file manager for example the Windows Explorer with the keyboard combination Windows a E t e Inthe file manager select a video file either a file within a directory or the directory itself on the storage where the video data is stored For a list of the supported file formats see section Support J ed File Formats on page A 10 e Drag and drop the selected video file directory to the contents area of the bin with the help of the mouse PVs Getting Started CO VAR xyz project_O5 scene_1 Wee ay File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Address v Nw_xyz project_05 scene_1 PE Folders Name a Sze Type a E Hollywood 00000 yuv 4 050KB YUV File S Hollywood 0000
501. with them Files of an unknown type i e files where the DVS software is not able to determine whether they are audio or video files will get this icon They can not be used in the DVS software The Tool Area Real time Capability of Clips With an optimized system and a main storage that incorporates fully functioning hard disks the DVS system can handle two data streams of film material up to 2K in RGB 12 bit in real time If you want to process material of a higher resolution or bit depth the real time capability of the system cannot be ensured The real time capability of the DVS system depends on various factors such as frame size play out frequency location of the clip on the stor age etc When adding a clip to the bin it will be checked whether its location and or file format are real time capable Additional checks will be performed when adding clips to the i timeline If any exceed the real time capability of the DVS sys tem they will be subject to a prerendering see section Prer endering of Timeline Elements on page 6 42 Clips that may cause trouble because of their location and or file format invoke a warning message when added to the bin Then the clip will be visibly marked in the contents area of the bin In the thumbnail view a warning icon will be superimposed on the thumbnail and the respective text information that is the cause for this warning will be colored in yel low
502. wn in their respective colors The more scan lines of an image provide the same color at the same horizontal location the more saturated the color will be in the graph In case different colors are lo cated at the same position with the same intensity they would be add ed in the graph until the respective position shows white 5 2 3 Head up Display Burn In 5 8 CLIPSTER offers you the possibility to display static e g comments or logos and or variable information e g timecode keycode or clip and project properties in the video overlay as well as at the SDI and or aux iliary SD outputs of the DVS system These information will be shown superimposed on the images and can be positioned and formatted free ly The head up display burn in feature can be accessed via the context menu of the video overlay The Control Area Figure 5 11 The context menu of the video overlay For the head up displays burn in it offers the following menu options Head up display These settings activate or deactivate the dis Burn in plays superimposed information for the video overlay and or outputs Add new display Adds a new display to the video overlay out puts e g an image or static or variable texts Display settings Allows you to add delete and configure the displays Lock display s When activated the displays will be locked in the video overlay and cannot be changed with the mouse anymore
503. x 8 bit RGBA Windows bitmap format Only uncompressed bitmaps are supported no RLE compression Cineon tein 3 x 10 bit RGB 10 bit RGB format Subset of the ANSI SMPTE DPX file format Flexible file format by Kodak allowing for variable image headers PVs Appendix Form Defaul File storage ee orma Jas 8 Description Name Extension format DPX 2 dpx 3 x 8 bit RGB and 8 bit RGB file format with or without key 4 x 8 bit RGBA SMPTE Standard File Format for digital mov ing picture exchange 8 bit YUV 4 2 2 and 8 bit YUV file format with or without key YUVA 4 2 2 4 SMPTE Standard File Format for digital mov ing picture exchange 3 x 10 bit RGB and 10 bit RGB file format with or without key 4 x 10 bit RGBA SMPTE Standard File Format for digital mov ing picture exchange 10 bit YUV 4 2 2 and 10 bit YUV file format with or without key YUVA 4 2 2 4 SMPTE Standard File Format for digital mov ing picture exchange 3 x 12 bit RGB 12 bit RGB file format SMPTE Standard File Format for digital moving picture exchange 3 x 16 bit RGB 16 bit RGB file format SMPTE Standard File Format for digital moving picture exchange JPEG2000 jp2 3 x 10 bit RGB 10 bit RGB file format Flexible data and still jpc image compression standard operating either compressed or uncompressed 3 x 12 bit RGB 12 bit RGB file format Flexible data and still image compression stan
504. y it first see section Accessing the Timeline Element Properties on page 7 2 By default a transition is set to the wipe Crossfade This can be changed via the properties of a transition easily Transition type Dur 01 00 Figure 7 3 Transition properties In the properties of the transition you can select another wipe for the transition than the default one from the Transition type list box The following lists the transitions that are currently implemented The num bers indicate the SMPTE number which are provided in the Transition type list box as well The graphics show the effects of the respective wipe and if not reversed the transition occurs towards the increasing white area 7 7 CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs Crossfade Dissolve 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 e a m Aaa OORNAG AE ojej Tots FT Le EA F lt lt p lt 213 y 1 Ma 221 222 224 225 226 231 232 233 234 235 236 Ba B WEZ a 241 242 243 244 251 252 253 254 409 Figure 7 4 SMPTE wipes of the DVS software PVs Timeline Element Properties After selecting one of the available wipes you have further possibilities at hand to adjust the transition Item Description Softness Use the Softness slider and the percentage value to its right to adjust the softness feathering of the wipe Then the edges of the emerging image appear softer so that they blend into th
505. you set it manually with the entry field to the right A preview of the file name can be seen below the items to set a num bering For example when as a file name prefix scene is entered and as the file extension _ lt Date gt _ lt Video format gt _ lt Color space gt _ is specified with a 5 digit numbering you may receive an output like the following scene_20090101_1080p24_RGB_00000 dpx scene_20090101_1080p24_RGB_00001 dpx scene_20090101_1080p24_RGB_00002 dpx scene_20090101_1080p24_RGB_00003 dpx e Once the file names are set as desired click the OK button This will close the window to configure the name options and you will be returned to the finalize dialog With this the configured file naming will be detailed in the finalize dia log accordingly entry field File name result When the File name extensions were activated via their check box in the name options the field File name result will be unavailable The set name options will be applied to the generated files as soon as the rendering is initialized Timeline Element Properties Timeline element properties are provided for video clips as well as tran sitions They can be used to determine the appearance of the respective element in the timeline further While with the properties of a transition you can for example set the type of wipe used for the transition with the ones for a video clip you can add effects operators to the clip The effects oper
506. you can enable it for the Edit Tool For this the desired profile name has to be selected from the list box and your selection has to be confirmed with the OK button The button CANCEL it will close the window for the 3D LUT manage ment without confirming any of the alterations Nevertheless the selected 3D LUT profile and file will be in effect for the timeline only if the check box Video 3D LUT is activated which is available in the Options area of the Timeline output settings win dow Video 3B LUT x SD TOTS Figure 6 19 Activation of the 3D LUT profile Then the selected profile and its 3D LUT file will be applied to the ma terial in the timeline of the Edit Tool 6 2 9 Cropping the Timeline Via the SETTINGS button you can crop the contents EE of the timeline for example if you need black bars in the video output letter or pillarboxing The button is located at the top left side of the timeline area and after pressing it the Timeline out put settings window is displayed on the screen At the bottom of this window you can find further optional settings in the Options area To the right you can find the settings to crop the vid eo output The other items available in the Options area are explained in i their respective sections see section Changing the Layout of the Timeline Area on page 6 6 section Further Audio Con figurations on page 6 17 and section Loading and Applying a 3D LUT File
507. your keyboard Load Preset The Load Preset menu option enables you to load the settings of a preset effect to the respective ef fects operator After the selection of this menu op tion a dialog window opens where you have to select the wanted preset effect from a list Once this is confirmed with the OK button the settings of the preset effect will be applied to the selected effects operator Save Preset This menu option creates a preset effect of the ef fect where the context menu was invoked After its activation a dialog window opens where you have to enter a name for the preset effect Once this is confirmed with the OK button the preset effect will be created as a subeffect under the respective effect in the tool area s effects pane Then it can be used easily to apply the same effect setting over and over again for different clips in the timeline for example with the Load Preset menu option see above CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide PVs 7 7 The Operator Zoom Pan The operator Zoom Pan allows to zoom pan and rotate as well as to sharpen or blur the contents of the video clip in the timeline It is by default available and active for all clips in the timeline and thus the first operator visible in the timeline element properties area after it has been accessed For this effect keyframing is available see section Keyfram ing on page 7 21 Effects Zoom amp Pan Rotation x Zoom Pan Wid

CLIPSTER Edit Tool User Guide (Version 3.2)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents